Std10 Science EM WWW - Tntextbooks.in

www.tntextbooks.
in
GOVERNMENT OF TAMILNADU
STANDARD TEN
SCIENCE
A Publication under Free Textbook Programme of Government of Tamil Nadu
Department of School Education
Untouchability is Inhuman and a Crime
Front page.indd 1 10-01-2020 11:38:53

www.tntextbooks.in
Government of Tamil Nadu
First Edition - 2019

Revised Edition - 2020
(Published under New syllabus)
NOT FOR SALE
Content Creation
The wise
possess all
State Council of Educational

Research and Training
© SCERT 2019
Printing & Publishing
Tamil NaduTextbook and

Educational Services Corporation
www.textbooksonline.tn.nic.in
II
Front page.indd 2 10-01-2020 11:38:53

www.tntextbooks.in
This book is developed in a holistic approach which inculcates

comprehending and analytical skills. It will be helpfull for the
students to understand higher secondary
science in a better way and to prepare
PREFACE for competitive exams in future. This
textbook is designed in a learner centric
way to trigger the thought process of
students through activities and to make
them excel in learning science.
This book has 23 units.

Each unit has simple activities HOW
that can be demonstrated by TO USE
the teacher and also few group THE BOOK?
activities are given for students
to do under the guidance of the teacher.
Infographics and info-bits are added to enrich the
learner’s scientific perception.
The “Do you know?” and “More to know” placed in the units will be
an eye opener.
Glossary has been introduced to learn scientific terms.
ICT corner and QR code are introduced in each unit for the digital
native generation.
How to get connected to QR Code?

• D
ownload the QR code scanner from the google play
store/apple app store into your smartphone
• Open the QR code scanner application
• O
nce the scanner button in the application is clicked, camera opens
and then bring it closer to the QR code in the textbook.
• O
nce the camera detects the QR code, a URL appears in the screen.
Click the URL and go to the content page.
III
Front page.indd 3 10-01-2020 11:38:53

www.tntextbooks.in
Career Guidance
Engineering Courses B.E. / B.Tech Medical Course Paramedical Diploma / UG

4 years 5 years 2/3 years
Aeronautical Engineering MBBS – Allopathy Nursing

Aerospace Engineering BSMS – Siddha Pharmacy
Architecture Engineering BAMS - Ayurveda Anaesthesia Technician
Automobile Engineering BUMS – Unani Cardiac Technician
Automation & Robotics Engineering BHMS – Homeopathy Dental Mechanic
Avionics Engineering BNYS – Naturopathy & Health Inspector
Yoga Medical imaging & tech
Bio Medical Engineering
BDS – Dental Medical Lab Tech
Bio Technology Engineering
BVSc – Veterinary Medical X-ray Tech
Civil Engineering
Chemical Engineering Nuclear Medicine Tech
Ceramic Engineering Occupational therapist
Computer Science Engineering Operation Theatre Tech
Construction Management & Ophthalmic Assistant
Technology Engineering Physiotherapy
Electronics and Communication Radiographic Assistant
Engineering
Radiotherapy Tech
Electrical and Electronics Engineering
Rehabilitation Tech
Environmental Science Engineering
Respiratory Therapy Tech
Information Science Engineering
Agriculture Courses| Blood Transfusion Tech
Industrial Engineering
(4 years)
Industrial Production Engineering
Instrumentation Technology
Marine Engineering B.Sc. Agriculture Science
Medical Electronics Engineering B.Sc. Horticulture
Mechanical Engineering B.Sc. Forestry Humanities
Mining Engineering B.Tech Agricultural 3 years
Manufacturing Science Engineering Engineering
Naval Architecture Advertising
Polymer Technology BA-General Criminology
Silk Technology Engineering Economics
Carpet Technology Engineering Fine Arts
Textile Engineering Foreign Languages
Home Science
Interior Design
Journalism
Library Sciences
Physical Education
Political Science
Psychology
Social Work
Sociology
Travel & Tourism
IV
Front page.indd 4 10-01-2020 11:38:53

www.tntextbooks.in
Road ahead after 12th ...
PLAN
B.Sc., Courses Commerce Courses Law Courses

3 years 3 years 3.5 years
B.Sc. Physics CA – Chartered Accountant LLB

B.Sc. Chemistry CMA Cost Management Accountant BA+LLB
B.Sc. Botany CS Company Secretary (Foundation) B.Com + LLB
B.Sc. Zoology B.com – Regular BBM+LLB
B.Sc. Mathematics B.com – Taxation & Tax Procedure BBA+LLB
B.Sc. Computer Science B.com – Travel & Tourism
B.Sc. PCM B.com – Bank Management
B.Sc. CBZ B.com – Professional
B.Sc. Dietician & Nutritionist BBA/BBM – Regular
B.Sc. Sericulture BFM – Bachelors in Financial Markets
B.Sc. Oceanography BMS – Bachelors in Management Studies
B.Sc. Meteorology BAF – Bachelors in Accounting & Finance
B.Sc. Anthropology Certified Stock Broker & Investment Analysis
B.Sc. Forensic Sciences Certified Financial Analyst
B.Sc. Food Technology Certified Financial Planner
B.Sc. Dairy Technology Certified Investment Banker
C.A
B.Sc. Hotel Management
B.Sc. Fashion Design
B.Sc. Mass Communication
B.Sc. Electronic Media CPT
B.Sc. Multimedia
B.Sc. 3D Animation
ATC IPCC
B.Sc. Home Science
ITT
(100 Hours)
Management Courses
(3 years)
Articleship
(Work under in CA)
Business Management
Bank Management
Event Management Clear Final Exam
Hospital Management Become a C.A.
Hotel Management
Human Resources
Management
Logistics & Management
JOB / Post Graduation
Front page.indd 5 10-01-2020 11:38:53

www.tntextbooks.in
Table of Contents
Unit Title Page No. Month
1 Laws of Motion 1 June
2 Optics 16 July
3 Thermal Physics 32 August
4 Electricity 42 September
5 Acoustics 59 October
6 Nuclear Physics 74 November
7 Atoms and Molecules 91 June
8 Periodic Classification of Elements 106 July
9 Solutions 124 August
10 Types of Chemical Reactions 137 October
11 Carbon and its Compounds 155 November
12 Plant Anatomy and Plant Physiology 173 June
E - book Assessment DIGI links

VI
Front page.indd 6 10-01-2020 11:38:53

www.tntextbooks.in
Unit Title Page No. Month
13 Structural Organisation of Animals 187 June

Transportation in Plants and Circulation in
14 200 July
Animals
15 Nervous System 218 July
16 Plant and Animal Hormones 229 August
17 Reproduction in Plants and Animals 243 August
18 Genetics 261 September
19 Origin and Evolution of Life 274 October
20 Breeding and Biotechnology 286 October
21 Health and Diseases 300 November
22 Environmental Management 315 November
23 Visual Communication 329 December
Practicals 334
Glossary 350
VII
Front page.indd 7 10-01-2020 11:38:53

www.tntextbooks.in
STANDARD TEN
SCIENCE
VIII
Front page.indd 8 10-01-2020 11:38:53

www.tntextbooks.in
1 LAWS OF MOTION
Learning Objectives
At the end of this lesson students will be able to:
� Understand the concepts of force and motion.
� Explain inertia and its types.
� State the three laws of Newton.
� Apply Newtonian concept of force and motion.
� Define force, momentum and impulse.
� Distinguish between mass and weight
� Analyze weightlessness and the principle of conservation of momentum.
� Explain the law of gravitation and its applications.
� Understand the variations in 'g' due to height and depth.
� Solve numerical problems related to force and motion
up or slows down or changes its direction.

INTRODUCTION
what speeds up or slows down the body? What
Human beings are so curious about things changes the direction of motion?
around them. Things around us are related to One answer for all the above questions
one another. Some bodies are at rest and some is ‘Force’. In a common man’s understanding
are in motion. Rest and motion are interrelated of motion, a body needs a ‘push’ or ‘pull’ to
terms. move, or bring to rest or change its velocity.
In the previous classes you have learnt Hence, this ‘push’ or ‘pull’ is called as ‘force’.
about various types of motion such as linear Let us define force in a more scientific
motion, circular motion, oscillatory motion, manner using the three laws proposed by
and so on. So far, you have discussed the motion Sir Isaac Newton. These laws help you to
of bodies in terms of their displacement, understand the motion of a body and also to
velocity, and acceleration. In this unit, let us predict the future course of its motion, if you
investigate the cause of motion. know the forces acting on it. Before Newton
When a body is at rest, starts moving, a formulated his three laws of motion, a different
question that arises in our mind is ‘what causes perception about the force and motion of
the body to move?’ Similarly, when a moving bodies prevailed. Let us first look at these ideas
object comes to rest, you would like to know and then eventually learn about Newton’s laws
what brings it to rest? If a moving object speeds in this unit.
1
10th_Science_Unit-1.indd 1 11-01-2020 11:52:09

www.tntextbooks.in
Mechanics is the branch of physics that deals with

1.2 INERTIA
the effect of force on bodies. It is divided into two
branches, namely, statics and dynamics. While you are travelling in a bus or in a car,
Statics: It deals with the bodies, which are at when a sudden brake is applied, the upper part of
rest under the action of forces. your body leans in the forward direction. Similarly,
when the vehicle suddenly is move forward from
Dynamics: It is the study of moving bodies
rest, you lean backward. This is due to, any body
under the action of forces. Dynamics is further
would like to continue to be in its state of rest or
divided as follows.
the state of motion. This is known as ‘inertia’.
Kinematics: It deals with the motion of bodies
The inherent property of a body to resist
without considering the cause of motion.
any change in its state of rest or the state of
Kinetics: It deals with the motion of bodies uniform motion, unless it is influenced upon
considering the cause of motion. by an external unbalanced force, is known as
‘inertia’.
1.1 FORCE AND MOTION
According to Aristotle a Greek Philosopher Activity 1

and Scientist, the natural state of earthly Take a glass tumbler and place a small
bodies is ‘rest’. He stated that a moving cardboard on it as shown in the figure. Now,
body naturally comes to rest without any keep a coin at the centre of the cardboard.
external influence of the force. Such motions Then, flick the cardboard quickly. What do
are termed as ‘natural motion’ (Force you observe?
independent). He also proposed that a force The cardboard falls off the ground and
(a push or a pull) is needed to make the bodies to the coin falls into the glass tumbler.
move from their natural state (rest) and behave
Inertia of rest
contrary to their own natural state called as
‘violent motion’ (Force dependent). Further, he
said, when two differnt mass bodies are dropped
from a height, the heavier body falls faster than
the lighter one.
Galileo proposed the following concepts
about force, motion and inertia of bodies:
(i) The natural state of all earthly bodies In activity described above, the inertia of
is either the state of rest or the state of the coin keeps it in the state of rest when the
uniform motion. cardboard moves. Then, when the cardboard
(ii) A body in motion will continue to be in has moved, the coin falls into the tumbler due
the same state of motion as long as no to gravity. This happen due to ‘inertia of rest’.
external force is applied.
(iii) When a force is applied on bodies, they 1.2.1 Types of Inertia
resist any change in their state. This a) Inertia of rest: The
property of bodies is called ‘inertia’. resistance of a body to
(iv) When dropped from a height in vacuum, change its state of rest
bodies of different size, shape and mass is called inertia of rest.
fall at the same rate and reach the ground b) Inertia of motion: The
at the same time. resistance of a body to
10th Standard Science 2

www.tntextbooks.in
change its state of motion is called inertia

1.4 NEWTON’S LAWS OF
of motion.
MOTION
c) Inertia of direction: The resistance of a
body to change its direction of motion is 1.4.1 Newton’s First Law
called inertia of direction.
This law states that every body continues
1.2.2 Examples of Inertia to be in its state of rest or the state of uniform
motion along a straight line unless it is acted
� An athlete runs some distance before upon by some external force. It gives the
jumping. Because, this will help him jump definition of force as well as inertia.
longer and higher. (Inertia of motion)
� When you make a sharp turn while driving 1.4.2 Force
a car, you tend to lean sideways, (Inertia of Force is an external effort in the form of
direction). push or pull, which:
� When you vigorously shake the branches 1. produces or tries to produce the motion of
of a tree, some of the leaves and fruits are a static body.
detached and they fall down, (Inertia of rest).
2. stops or tries to stop a moving body.
3. changes or tries to change the direction of
motion of a moving body.
Force has both magnitude and direction.
So, it is a vector quantity.
1.4.3 Types of forces

Based on the direction in which the forces
Figure 1.1 Inertia of motion act, they can be classified into two types as:
(a) Like parallel forces and (b) Unlike parallel
1.3 LINEAR MOMENTUM forces.
(a) Like parallel forces: Two or more forces of
The impact of a force is more if the equal or unequal magnitude acting along
velocity and the mass of the body is more. To the same direction, parallel to each other
quantify the impact of a force exactly, a new are called like parallel forces.
physical quantity known as linear momentum (b) Unlike parallel forces: If two or more equal
is defined. The linear momentum measures the forces or unequal forces act along opposite
impact of a force on a body. directions parallel to each other, then they
The product of mass and velocity of a are called unlike parallel forces. Action of
moving body gives the magnitude of linear forces are given in Table 1.1.
momentum. It acts in the direction of the
velocity of the object. Linear momentum is a 1.4.4 Resultant Force
vector quantity.
When several forces act simultaneously on
Linear Momentum = mass × velocity the same body, then the combined effect of the
p = mv . . . . . . . . . . (1.1) multiple forces can be represented by a single
It helps to measure the magnitude of force, which is termed as ‘resultant force’. It is
a force. Unit of momentum in SI system is equal to the vector sum (adding the magnitude
kg m s–1 and in C.G.S system its unit is g cm s-1. of the forces with their direction) of all the forces.
3 Laws of motion

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 1.1 Action of forces
Action of forces Diagram Resultant force (Fnet)

Parallel forces are acting in the same F1 Fnet = F1 + F2
direction F2
Fnet = F1 – F2 (if F1 > F2)
Parallel unequal forces are acting in F1 F2 Fnet = F2 – F1 (if F2 > F1)
opposite directions Fnet is directed along
the greater force.
Parallel equal forces are acting in opposite F1 F2 Fnet = F1 – F2
directions in the same line of action (F1 = F2) Fnet = 0 since (F1 = F2)
(a) Unlike parallel forces – (b) Unbalanced forces - (c) Like parallel forces
Tug of war Action of a lever
Figure 1.2 Combined effect of forces
If the resultant force of all the forces The door can be easily opened or closed
acting on a body is equal to zero, then the body when you apply the force at a point far away
will be in equilibrium. Such forces are called from the fixed edge. In this case, the effect
balanced forces. If the resultant force is not of the force you apply is to turn the door
equal to zero, then it causes the motion of the about the fixed edge. This turning effect of
body due to unbalanced forces the applied force is more when the distance
Examples: Drawing water from a well, force between the fixed edge and the point of
applied with a crow bar, forces on a weight application of force is more.
balance, etc.
Axis of rotation z
A system can be brought to equilibrium Hinges
+z
by applying another force, which is equal to the

O
resultant force in magnitude, but opposite in d
direction. Such force is called as ‘Equilibrant’.

F
1.4.5 Rotating Effect of Force
Have you observed the position of the
Figure 1.3 Rotating effect of a force
handle in a door? It is always placed at the
edge of door and not at some other place. The axis of the fixed edge about which
Why? Have you tried to push a door by the door is rotated is called as the ‘axis of
placing your hand closer to the hinges or the rotation’. Fix one end of a rod to the floor/wall,
fixed edge? What do you observe? and apply a force at the other end tangentially.

www.tntextbooks.in
The rod will be turned about the fixed point negative if it is rotate in the clockwise direction.
is called as ‘point of rotation’. They are shown in Figures 1.4 (a and b)
F F
1.4.6 Moment of the Force
The rotating or turning effect of a force s s
about a fixed point or fixed axis is called
moment of the force about that point or
torque (τ). It is measured by the product F F
of the force (F) and the perpendicular Figure 1.4 (a) Figure 1.4 (b)
distance (d) between the fixed point or Clockwise moment Anticlockwise moment
the fixed axis and the line of action of the
force. τ = F × d. . . . . . . . . . (1.2)
1.4.7 Application of Torque
Torque is a vector quantity. It is acting
along the direction, perpendicular to the 1. Gears:
plane containing the line of action of force A gear is a circular
and the distance. Its SI unit is Nm. wheel with teeth around its
rim. It helps to change the
Couple: Two equal and unlike parallel forces
speed of rotation of a wheel
applied simultaneously at two distinct points
by changing the torque and
constitute a couple. The line of action of the
helps to transmit power.
two forces does not coincide. It does not
produce any translatory motion since the 2. Seasaw
resultant is zero. But, a couple results in causes Most of you have played on the seasaw.
the rotation of the body. Rotating effect of a Since there is a difference in the weight of the
couple is known as moment of a couple. persons sitting on it, the heavier person lifts
Examples: Turning a tap, winding or the lighter person. When the heavier person
unwinding a screw, spinning of a top, etc. comes closer to the pivot point (fulcrum)
Moment of a couple is measured by the distance of the line of action of the force
the product of any one of the forces and the decreases. It causes less amount of torque to
perpendicular distance between the line of act on it. This enables the lighter person to lift
action of two forces. The turning effect of a the heavier person.
couple is measured by the magnitude of its
3. Steering Wheel
moment.
A small steering wheel enables you to
Moment of a couple = Force × perpendicular manoeuore a car easily by transferring a
distance between the torque to the wheels with less effort.
line of action of forces
M = F × S . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1.3) 1.4.8 Principle of Moments
The unit of moment of a couple is newton When a number of like or unlike parallel
metre (N m) in SI system and dyne cm in forces act on a rigid body and the body is in
CGS system. equilibrium, then the algebraic sum of the
By convention, the direction of moment of moments in the clockwise direction is equal
a force or couple is taken as positive if the body to the algebraic sum of the moments in the
is rotated in the anti-clockwise direction and anticlockwise direction. In other words, at
5 Laws of motion

www.tntextbooks.in
equilibrium, the algebraic sum of the moments Force, F ∝ rate of change of momentum
of all the individual forces about any point is F ∝ change in momentum / time
equal to zero.
mv – mu
F∝
t
d1 d2
km(v – u)
F=
t
P
Here, k is the proportionality constant.
anticlockwise clockwise F2
F1 moment moment k = 1 in all systems of units. Hence,
m(v – u) (1.5)
Figure 1.5 Principle of moments F=
t
In the illustration given in figure 1.5, the Since, acceleration = change in velocity/
force F1 produces an anticlockwise rotation at time, a=(v-u)/t. Hence, we have
a distance d1 from the point of pivot P (called
fulcrum) and the force F2 produces a clockwise F = m × a (1.6)
rotation at a distance d2 from the point of pivot Force = mass × acceleration
P. The principle of moments can be written as
follows: No external force is required to maintain
the motion of a body moving with uniform
Moment in Moment in
= velocity. When the net force acting on a
clockwise direction anticlockwise direction
body is not equal to zero, then definitely the
velocity of the body will change. Thus, change
F1 × d1 = F2 × d2 . . . . . . . . . (1.4)
in momentum takes place in the direction of
the force. The change may take place either in
1.5
N EWTON’S SECOND LAW magnitude or in direction or in both.
OF MOTION Force is required to produce the
acceleration of a body. In a uniform circular
According to this law, “the force acting motion, even though the speed (magnitude of
on a body is directly proportional to the rate velocity) remains constant, the direction of the
of change of linear momentum of the body velocity changes at every point on the circular
and the change in momentum takes place in path. So, the acceleration is produced along
the direction of the force”. the radius called as centripetal acceleration.
This law helps us to measure the amount The force, which produces this acceleration
of force. So, it is also called as ‘law of force’. is called as centripetal force, about which you
Let, ‘m’ be the mass of a moving body, moving have learnt in class IX.
along a straight line with an initial speed ‘u’ Units of force: SI unit of force is newton (N)
After a time interval of ‘t’, the velocity of the and in C.G.S system its unit is dyne.
body changes to ‘v’ due to the impact of an
Definition of 1 newton (N): The amount of
unbalanced external force F.
force required for a body of mass 1 kg produces
Initial momentum of the body Pi = mu –2
an acceleration of 1 m s , 1 N = 1 kgms
–2
Final momentum of the body Pf = mv Definition of 1 dyne: The amount of force

Change in momentum Δp = Pf –Pi required for a body of mass 1 gram produces
= mv – mu –2 –2
an acceleration of 1 cm s , 1 dyne = 1 gcms ;
5
By Newton’s second law of motion, also 1 N = 10 dyne.

www.tntextbooks.in
Unit force:
The amount of force required to produce
–2
an acceleration of 1 ms in a body of mass 1 kg
is called ‘unit force’.
Gravitational unit of force:
In the SI system of units, gravitational
unit of force is kilogram force, represented by
kg f. In the CGS system its unit is gram force, Figure 1.6 Example of impulsive force
represented by g f.
-2
1 kgf = 1 kg × 9.8 ms = 9.8 N; 1.7 N EWTON’S THIRD LAW
-2
1 gf = 1 g × 980 cms = 980 dyne OF MOTION
Newton’s third law states that ‘for every

1.6 Impulse
action, there is an equal and opposite reaction.
A large force acting for a very short They always act on two different bodies’.
interval of time is called as ‘Impulsive force’. If a body A applies a force FA on a body
When a force F acts on a body for a period of B, then the body B reacts with force FB on the
time t, then the product of force and time is body A, which is equal to FA in magnitude, but
known as ‘impulse’ represented by ‘J’ opposite in direction. FB = –FA
Impulse, J = F × t (1.7) Examples:
By Newton’s second law
� When birds fly they push the air
F = Δp / t (Δ refers to change)
downwards with their wings (Action)
Δp = F × t (1.8)
and the air pushes the bird upwards
From 1.7 and 1.8
(Reaction).
J = Δp
� When a person swims he pushes the water
Impulse is also equal to the magnitude of using the hands backwards (Action), and
change in momentum. Its unit is kgms–1 or Ns. the water pushes the swimmer in the
Change in momentum can be achieved in forward direction (Reaction).
two ways. They are: � When you fire a bullet, the gun recoils
i. a large force acting for a short period of backward and the bullet is moving
time and forward (Action) and the gun equalises
ii. a smaller force acting for a longer period this forward action by moving backward
of time. (Reaction).
Examples: 1.8 PRINCIPLE OF

� Automobiles are fitted with springs and CONSERVATION OF LINEAR
shock absorbers to reduce jerks while MOMENTUM
moving on uneven roads.
� In cricket, a fielder pulls back his hands There is no change in
while catching the ball. He experiences the linear momentum of a
a smaller force for a longer interval of system of bodies as long as
time to catch the ball, resulting in a lesser no net external force acts on
impulse on his hands. them.
7 Laws of motion

www.tntextbooks.in
Let us prove the law of conservation filled with a fuel (either liquid or solid) in the
of linear momentum with the following propellant tank. When the rocket is fired, this
illustration: fuel is burnt and a hot gas is ejected with a high
speed from the nozzle of the rocket, producing
u1 u2 FA FB v1 v2 a huge momentum. To balance this momentum,
an equal and opposite reaction force is produced
m1 m2 m1 m2 m1 m2
A B A B A B
in the combustion chamber, which makes the
rocket project forward.
Figure 1.7 Conservation of
While in motion, the mass of the rocket
linear momentum gradually decreases, until the fuel is completely
Proof: burnt out. Since, there is no net external force
Let two bodies A and B having masses acting on it, the linear momentum of the
m1 and m2 move with initial velocity u1 and u2 system is conserved. The mass of the rocket
in a straight line. Let the velocity of the first decreases with altitude, which results in the
body be higher than that of the second body. gradual increase in velocity of the rocket.
i.e., u1>u2. During an interval of time t second, At one stage, it reaches a velocity, which is
they tend to have a collision. After the impact, sufficient to just escape from the gravitational
both of them move along the same straight line pull of the Earth. This velocity is called escape
with a velocity v1 and v2 respectively. velocity. (This topic will be discussed in detail
Force on body B due to A, in higher classes).
FA= m2 (v2–u2)/t
1.10 GRAVITATION
Force on body A due to B,
FB = m1 (v1–u1)/t 1.10.1 N
ewton’s universal law of
By Newton’s III law of motion, gravitation
Action force = Reaction force This law states that every particle of
FB = –FA matter in this universe attracts every other
m1 (v1-u1)/t = –m2 (v2-u2)/t particle with a force. This force is directly
proportional to the product of their masses
m1v1 + m2v2 = m1u1 + m2u2 �� (1.9) and inversely proportional to the square of
the distance between the centers of these
The above equation confirms in the masses. The direction of the force acts along
absence of an external force, the algebraic the line joining the masses.
sum of the momentum after collision is Force between the masses is always
numerically equal to sum of the momentum attractive and it does not depend on the
before collision. medium where they are placed.
Hence the law of conservation linear
momentum is proved.
m1 F1 F2 m2
1.9 ROCKET PROPULSION
Propulsion of rockets is based on the law r

of conservation of linear momentum as well Figure 1.8 Gravitational force between
as Newton’s III law of motion. Rockets are two masses

www.tntextbooks.in
Let, m1 and m2 be the masses of two bodies assumed to be concentrated at its centre. The
A and B placed r metre apart in space radius of the Earth is R = 6378 km (= 6400 km
Force F ∝ m1 × m2 approximately). By Newton’s law of gravitation,
F ∝ 1/ r2 the force acting on the body is given by
On combining the above two expressions GMm

F= (1.11)
m1 × m2 R
2
F∝ 2
r
G m1 m2
F= 2
�� (1.10) F m
r
R
Object
Where G is the universal gravitational
M
constant. Its value in SI unit is
–11 2 –2
6.674 × 10 Nm kg .
Earth
1.10.2 A
cceleration due to Figure 1.9 Relation between g and G
gravity (g) Here, the radius of the body considered
When you throw any object upwards, its is negligible when compared with the Earth’s
velocity ceases at a particular height and then radius. Now, the same force can be obtained
it falls down due to the gravitational force of from Newton’s second law of motion.
the Earth. According to this law, the force acting on
The velocity of the object keeps changing the body is given by the product of its mass
as it falls down. This change in velocity must and acceleration (called as weight). Here,
be due to the force acting on the object. The acceleration of the body is under the action
acceleration of the body is due to the Earth’s of gravity hence a = g
gravitational force. So, it is called as ‘acceleration
F = ma = mg
due to the gravitational force of the Earth’ or
‘acceleration due to gravity of the Earth’. It is F = weight = mg �� (1.12)
–2
represented as ‘g’. Its unit is ms Comparing equations (1.7) and (1.8), we get
Mean value of the acceleration due to GMm
mg = 2
�� (1.13)
–2
gravity is taken as 9.8 m s on the surface of R
the Earth. This means that the velocity of a
Acceleration due to gravity
body during the downward free fall motion GM
–1
varies by 9.8 ms for every 1 second. However, g= 2
�� (1.14)
R
the value of ‘g’ is not the same at all points on
the surface of the earth.
1.10.4 Mass of the Earth (M)
1.10.3 Relation between g and G
Rearranging the equation (1.14), the mass
When a body is at rests on the surface of of the Earth is obtained as follows:
the Earth, it is acted upon by the gravitational 2
Mass of the Earth M = g R /G
force of the Earth. Let us compute the
Substituting the known values of g, R and G,
magnitude of this force in two ways. Let, M
be the mass of the Earth and m be the mass you can calculate the mass of the Earth as
24
of the body. The entire mass of the Earth is M = 5.972 × 10 kg
9 Laws of motion

www.tntextbooks.in
1.10.5 V
ariation of acceleration This is about 0.1654 times the acceleration
due to gravity (g): due to gravity of the Earth. If a person
whose mass is 60 kg stands on the surface of
Since, g depends on the geometric radius
2 Earth, his weight would be 588 N (W = mg
of the Earth, (g ∝ 1/R ), its value changes
= 60 × 9.8). If the same person goes to the
from one place to another on the surface of
surface of the Moon, he would weigh only
the Earth. Since, the geometric radius of the
97.5 N (W = 60 × 1.625). But, his mass
Earth is maximum in the equatorial region and
remains the same (60 kg) on both the Earth
minimum in the polar region, the value of g is
and the Moon.
maximum in the polar region and minimum at
the equatorial region.
When you move to a higher altitude from 1.12 APPARENT WEIGHT
the surface of the Earth, the value of g reduces.
The weight that you
In the same way, when you move deep below
feel to possess during up
the surface of the Earth, the value of g reduces.
and down motion, is not mg
(This topic will be discussed in detail in the
same as your actual weight.
higher classes). Value of g is zero at the centre
Apparent weight is the
of the Earth.
weight of the body acquired R
due to the action of gravity

1.11 MASS AND WEIGHT and other external forces W
Figure 1.10
acting on the body.
Mass: Mass is the basic property of a body. A person in a
Let us see this from the moving lift
Mass of a body is defined as the quantity of
following illustration:
matter contained in the body. Its SI unit is
kilogram (kg). Let us consider a person of mass m, who
is travelling in lift. The actual weight of the
Weight: Weight of a body is defined as the person is W = mg, which is acting vertically
gravitational force exerted on a body due to downwards. The reaction force exerted by the
the gravity. lift’s surface ‘R’, taken as apparent weight is
Weight = Gravitational Force acting vertically upwards.
=
mass (m)× acceleration due to Let us see different possibilities of
gravity(g). the apparent weight 'R' of the person that
g = acceleration due to gravity for Earth arise, depending on the motion of the lift;
–2
(at sea level) = 9.8 ms . upwards or downwards which are given in
Table 1.2
Weight is a vector quantity. Direction
of weight is always towards the centre of
the Earth. SI unit of weight is newton (N). 1.12.1 Weightlessness
Weight of a body varies from one place to Have you gone to an
another place on the Earth since it depends amusement park and taken
on the acceleration due to gravity of the a ride in a roller coaster? or
Earth (g) weight of a body is more at the poles in a giant wheel? During
than at the equatorial region. the fast downward and
The value of acceleration due to gravity upward movement, how
on the surface of the moon is 1.625 ms –2. did you feel?

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 1.2 Apparent weight of a person in a moving lift
Case 1: Lift Case 2: Lift Case 3: Lift is at rest. Case 4: Lift is falling down
is moving is moving freely
upward with an downward with
acceleration 'a' an acceleration 'a'
R – W = Fnet = ma W – R = Fnet = ma Here, the acceleration is zero Here, the acceleration is

R = W + ma R = W - ma a=0 equal to g
R = mg + ma R = mg - ma R=W a=g
R = m(g+a) R = m(g-a) R= mg R = m(g – g)
R>W R<W R=W R=0
Apparent weight Apparent weight Apparent weight is equal Apparent weight is equal
is greater than the is lesser than the to the actual weight. to zero.
actual weight. actual weight.
loss and weight gain when you are moving up

and down in such rides.
1.12.2 W
eightlessness of
the astronauts
Some of us believe that the astronauts in
the orbiting spacestation do not experience
any gravitational force of the Earth. So they
float. But this is absolutely wrong.
Astronauts are not floating but falling
Figure 1.11 Weightlessness in a roller coaster
freely around the earth due to their huge
Its amazing!!. You actually feel as if you are oribital velocity. Since spacestation and
falling freely without having any weight. This is astronauts have equal acceleration, they are
due to the phenomenon of ‘weightlessness’. You under free fall condition. (R = 0 refer case
seem to have lost your weight when you move 4 in Table 1.2). Hence, both the astronauts
down with a certain acceleration. Sometimes, and the spacestation are in the state of
you experience the same feeling while travelling weightlessness.
in a lift.
When the person in a lift moves down with
an acceleration (a) equal to the acceleration due
to gravity (g), i.e., when a = g, this motion is
called as ‘free fall’. Here, the apparent weight
(R = m (g – g) = 0) of the person is zero.
This condition or state refers to the state of
weightlessness. (Refer case 4 from Table 1.2).
The same effect takes place while falling
freely in a roller coaster or on a swing or in a
vertical giant wheel. You feel an apparent weight Figure 1.12 Weightlessness of astronauts
11 Laws of motion

www.tntextbooks.in
1.12.3 A
pplication of Newton’s � Whenever a body or a person falls freely
law of gravitation under the action of Earth’s gravitational
1) Dimensions of the heavenly bodies can be force alone, it appears to have zero
measured using the gravitation law. Mass of weight. This state is referred to as
the Earth, radius of the Earth, acceleration ‘weightlessness’.
due to gravity, etc. can be calculated with a
higher accuracy. SOLVED PROBLEMS
2) Helps in discovering new stars and planets. Problem-1: Calculate the velocity of a moving
3)
One of the irregularities in the motion body of mass 5 kg whose linear momentum is
of stars is called ‘Wobble’ lead to the 2.5 kg m s–1.
disturbance in the motion of a planet nearby.
In this condition the mass of the star can be Solution: Linear momentum = mass × velocity
calculated using the law of gravitation. Velocity = linear momentum / mass.
4) Helps to explain germination of roots is due V = 2.5 / 5 = 0.5 ms–1
to the property of geotropism which is the
property of a root responding to the gravity. Problem 2: A door is pushed, at a point whose
distance from the hinges is 90 cm, with a force
5) Helps to predict the path of the astronomical
of 40 N. Calculate the moment of the force
bodies.
about the hinges.
Points to Remember Solution:
� Mechanics is divided into statics and Formula: The moment of a force M = F × d

dynamics. Given: F = 40 N and d = 90 cm = 0.9 m.
� Ability of a body to maintain its state of
Hence, moment of the force = 40 × 0.9 = 36 N m.
rest or motion is called Inertia.
� Moment of the couple is measured by Problem 3 : At what height from the centre of
the product of any one of the forces and the Earth the acceleration due to gravity will be
the perpendicular distance between two th
1/4 of its value as at the Earth.
forces.
� SI unit of force is newton (N). C.G.S unit Solution:
is dyne. Data: Height from the centre of the Earth,
Rʹ = R + h
� When a force F acts on a body for a period
The acceleration due to gravity at that height,
of time t, then the product of force and
gʹ = g/4
time is known as ‘impulse’.
� The unit of weight is newton or kg f Formula: g = GM /R2, gʹ = GM /Rʹ2
� The weight of a body is more at the poles g Rʹ 2 R+h 2 h2
= = = 1+
than at the equatorial region. gʹ R R R
� Mass of a body is defined as the quantity of h2
4= 1+ ,
matter contained in the object. Its SI unit R
is kilogram (kg). h
2=1+ or h = R. Rʹ = 2R
� Apparent weight is the weight of the body R
acquired due to the action of gravity and From the centre of the Earth, the object is placed
other external forces on the body. at twice the radius of the earth.

www.tntextbooks.in
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the correct answer 9) If the Earth shrinks to 50% of its real radius
its mass remaining the same, the weight of a
1) Inertia of a body depends on
body on the Earth will
a) weight of the object a) decrease by 50% b) increase by 50%
b) acceleration due to gravity of the planet c) decrease by 25% d) increase by 300%
c) mass of the object 10) To project the rockets which of the follow-
d) Both a & b ing principle(s) is /(are) required?
2) Impulse is equals to a) Newton’s third law of motion
a) rate of change of momentum b) Newton’s law of gravitation
b) rate of force and time c) law of conservation of linear momentum
d) both a and c
c) change of momentum
d) rate of change of mass II. Fill in the blanks
3) Newton’s III law is applicable 1. To produce a displacement ___________
is required
a) for a body is at rest
2. Passengers lean forward when sudden
b) for a body in motion brake is applied in a moving vehicle. This
c) both a & b can be explained by ___________
d) only for bodies with equal masses 3. By convention, the clockwise moments
4)
Plotting a graph for momentum on the are taken as ___________ and the
Y-axis and time on X-axis. slope of momen- anticlockwise moments are taken
as__________
tum-time graph gives
4. ___________ is used to change the speed
a) Impulsive force b) Acceleration
of car.
c) Force d) Rate of force 5. A man of mass 100 kg has a weight of
5) In which of the following sport the turning ___________ at the surface of the Earth
of effect of force used
III. State whether the following statements
a) swimming b) tennis
are true or false. Correct the statement
c) cycling d) hockey if it is false
6) The unit of ‘g’ is m s-2. It can be also expressed as 1. The linear momentum of a system of
a) cms -1
b) Nkg -1
particles is always conserved.
c) Nm kg
2 -1
d) cm2s-2 2. Apparent weight of a person is always equal
7) One kilogram force equals to to his actual weight
3. Weight of a body is greater at the equator
a) 9.8 dyne b) 9.8 × 104 N
and less at the polar region.
c) 98 × 104 dyne d) 980 dyne 4. Turning a nut with a spanner having a
8) The mass of a body is measured on planet short handle is so easy than one with a long
Earth as M kg. When it is taken to a planet handle.
of radius half that of the Earth then its value 5. There is no gravity in the orbiting space
will be____kg station around the Earth. So the astronauts
a) 4 M b) 2M c) M/4 d) M feel weightlessness.
13 Laws of motion

www.tntextbooks.in
IV. Match the following 6. State the principle of moments.

7. State Newton’s second law.
Column I Column II
8. Why a spanner with a long handle is
a. Newton’s I law - propulsion of a
preferred to tighten screws in heavy
rocket
vehicles?
b. Newton’s II law - Stable equilibrium of
a body 9. While catching a cricket ball the fielder
c. Newton’s III law - Law of force lowers his hands backwards. Why?
d. Law of conservation - Flying nature of bird 10. How does an astronaut float in a space
of Linear momentum shuttle?
VII. Solve the given problems

V. Assertion & Reasoning
1. Two bodies have a mass ratio of 3:4 The
Mark the correct choice as
force applied on the bigger mass produces
(a) If both the assertion and the reason
an acceleration of 12 ms-2.What could be
are true and the reason is the correct
the acceleration of the other body, if the
explanation of assertion.
same force acts on it.
(b) If both the assertion and the reason are
2. A ball of mass 1 kg moving with a speed
true, but the reason is not the correct ex-
of 10 ms-1 rebounds after a perfect elastic
planation of the assertion.
collision with the floor. Calculate the
(c) Assertion is true, but the reason is false.
change in linear momentum of the ball.
(d) Assertion is false, but the reason is true.
3. A mechanic unscrew a nut by applying a
1. Assertion: The sum of the clockwise force of 140 N with a spanner of length
moments is equal to the sum of the 40 cm. What should be the length of the
anticlockwise moments. spanner if a force of 40 N is applied to
Reason: The principle of conservation of unscrew the same nut?
momentum is valid if the external force on 4. The ratio of masses of two planets is 2:3
the system is zero. and the ratio of their radii is 4:7 Find the
2. Assertion: The value of ‘g’ decreases as ratio of their accelerations due to gravity.
height and depth increases from the surface
of the Earth. VIII. Answer in detail.
Reason: ‘g’ depends on the mass of the 1. What are the types of inertia? Give an
object and the Earth. example for each type.
2. State Newton’s laws of motion?
VI. Answer briefly. 3. Deduce the equation of a force using
1. Define inertia. Give its classification. Newton’s second law of motion.
2. Classify the types of force based on their 4. State and prove the law of conservation of
application. linear momentum.
3. If a 5 N and a 15 N forces are acting opposite 5. Describe rocket propulsion.
to one another. Find the resultant force and 6. State the universal law of gravitation and
the direction of action of the resultant force derive its mathematical expression
4. Differentiate mass and weight. 7. Give the applications of universal law
5. Define moment of a couple. gravitation.

www.tntextbooks.in
IX. HOT Questions REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Two blocks of masses 8 kg and 2 kg � Concept of physics-HC verma
respectively lie on a smooth horizontal surface
in contact with one other. They are pushed by � Interactive physics(Newton’s law)MTG
a horizontally applied force of 15 N. Calculate learning.
the force exerted on the 2 kg mass.
2. A heavy truck and bike are moving with I NT ER NET R ES O U RCES
the same kinetic energy. If the mass of
the truck is four times that of the bike, https://www.grc.nasa.gov
then calculate the ratio of their momenta. https://www.physicsclassroom.com
(Ratio of momenta = 2:1
h t t p s : / / w w w. b r i t a n n i c a . c o m / s c i e n c e /
3. “Wearing helmet and fastening the seat belt
Newtons-law-of-gravitation
is highly recommended for safe journey”
Justify your answer using Newton’s laws of
motion.
Kinematics
Concept Map
Statics Dynamics First law of motion Inertia and its types
Second law of motion Momentum and force Mass and weight

Aristotle Issac newton
Third law of motion Apparent weight Weightlessness

Gallieo
Gravitation Universal law Variation of g

of gravitation
ICT CORNER Newton’s second law

Steps
• Open the browser and type “olabs.edu.in” in the address bar. Click physics tab and then click “Newton’s
second ” under class 9 section. Go to “simulator” tab to do the experiment.
• Select the desired Cart mass (M1) and vertical mass (M2) using respective slider. Also select the desired
distance (s) by moving the slider. Click on the “Start” button to start the experiment.
• Observe the time and note it down. Calculate acceleration (a) of the cart using the formula a = 2s/t2.
Find the fore due to rate of change of momentum using (M1+M2) a.
• Calculate force F = M2 g.
• You will observe (M1+M2)a = M2 g . Hence Newton’s Second Law is verified. Repeat
the experiment with different masses. Also do this in different environment like
Earth, Moon, Uranus and Jupiter. Click reset to restart the experiment.
Link: http://amrita.olabs.edu.in/?sub=1&brch=1&sim=44&cnt=4
15 Laws of motion

www.tntextbooks.in
OPTICS
2
Learning Objectives
At the end of this lesson, students will be able to:
state the laws of refraction.
list the properties of light.
explain the scattering of light and its various kinds.
understand the images formed by concave and convex lens.
analyze the ray diagram of concave and convex lens.
understand the working of human eye and optical instruments
solve numerical problems
chapter, we shall discuss about the scattering

INTRODUCTION
of light, images formed by convex and concave
Light is a form of energy which travels in lenses, human eye and optical instruments
the form of waves. The path of light is called such as telescopes and microscopes.
ray of light and group of these rays are called
as beam of light. Any object which gives out 2.1 PROPERTIES OF LIGHT
light are termed as source of light. Some of the
sources emit their own light and they are called Let us recall the properties of light and the
as luminous objects. All the stars, including important aspects on refraction of light.
the Sun, are examples for luminous objects.
1. Light is a form of energy.
We all know that we are able to see objects with
2. Light always travels along a straight line.
the help of our eyes. But, we cannot see any
object in a dark room. Can you explain why? 3. Light does not need any medium for its
If your answer is ‘we need light to see objects’, propagation. It can even travel through
the next question is ‘if you make the light from vacuum.
a torch to fall on your eyes, will you be able to 4. The speed of light in vacuum or air is,
see the objects?’ Definitely, ‘NO’. We can see c = 3 × 108 ms–1.
the objects only when the light is made to fall 5. Since, light is in the form of waves, it is
on the objects and the light reflected from the characterized by a wavelength (λ) and
objects is viewed by our eyes. You would have a frequency (ν), which are related by the
studied about the reflection and refraction of following equation: c = ν λ (c - velocity of
light elaborately in your previous classes. In this light).

www.tntextbooks.in
6. Different coloured light has different When light travels from a rarer medium
wavelength and frequency. into a denser medium, the refracted ray
7. Among the visible light, violet light has the is bent towards the normal drawn to the
lowest wavelength and red light has the interface.
highest wavelength.
8. When light is incident on the interface
2.3 R EFRACTION OF A
between two media, it is partly reflected
COMPOSITE LIGHT-
and partly refracted.
DISPERSION OF LIGHT
2.2 REFRACTION OF LIGHT

We know that Sun is the fundamental
When a ray of light travels from one and natural source of light. If a source of light
transparent medium into another obliquely, produces a light of single colour, it is known as
the path of the light undergoes deviation. This a monochromatic source. On the other hand,
deviation of ray of light is called refraction. a composite source of light produces a white
Refraction takes place due to the difference light which contains light of different colours.
in the velocity of light in different media. The Sun light is a composite light which consists
velocity of light is more in a rarer medium and of light of various colours or wavelengths.
less in a denser medium. Refraction of light Another example for a composite source is a
obeys two laws of refraction. mercury vapour lamp. What do you observe
when a white light is refracted through a glass
2.2.1 First law of refraction: prism?
The incident ray, the refracted ray of light
and the normal to the refracting surface all lie When a beam of white light or composite
in the same plane. light is refracted through any transparent
media such as glass or water, it is split into
2.2.2 Second law of refraction: its component colours. This phenomenon is
The ratio of the sine of the angle of called as ‘dispersion of light’.
incidence and sine of the angle of refraction The band of colours is termed as spectrum.
is equal to the ratio of refractive indices of the This spectrum consists of following colours:
two media. This law is also known as Snell’s law. Violet, Indigo, Blue, Green, Yellow, Orange,
sin i and Red. These colours are represented by
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . (2.1)
sin r the acronym “VIBGYOR”. Why do we get
Refractive index gives us an idea of how fast the spectrum when white light is refracted
or how slow light travels in a medium. The by a transparent medium? This is because,
ratio of speed of light in vacuum (c) to the different coloured lights are bent through
speed of light in a medium (v) is defined as different angles. That is the angle of refraction
refractive index ‘µ’ of that medium. is different for different colours.
c Angle of refraction is the smallest for
µ=
v red and the highest for violet. From Snell’s
The speed of light in a medium is low if the law, we know that the angle of refraction is
refractive index of the medium is high and determined in terms of the refractive index
vice versa. of the medium. Hence, the refractive index of
When light travels from a denser medium the medium is different for different coloured
into a rarer medium, the refracted ray is lights. This indicates that the refractive index
bent away from the normal drawn to the of a medium is dependent on the wavelength
interface. of the light.
17 Optics

www.tntextbooks.in
Rayleigh scattering
2.4 SCATTERING OF LIGHT
The scattering of sunlight by the atoms
When sunlight enters the Earth’s
or molecules of the gases in the earth’s
atmosphere, the atoms and molecules of
atmosphere is known as Rayleigh scattering.
different gases present in the atmosphere
refract the light in all possible directions.
This is called as ‘Scattering of light’. In this Rayleigh’s scattering law
phenomenon, the beam of light is redirected in Rayleigh’s scattering law states that, “The
all directions when it interacts with a particle
amount of scattering of light is inversely
of medium. The interacting particle of the
proportional to the fourth power of its
medium is called as ‘scatterer’.
wavelength”.
1
Amount of scattering ‘S’ ∝ 4
λ
According to this law, the shorter
wavelength colours are scattered much more
than the longer wavelength colours.
When sunlight passes through the
atmosphere, the blue colour (shorter
wavelength) is scattered to a greater extent

Figure 2.1 Scattering of light than the red colour (longer wavelength). This
scattering causes the sky to appear in blue
2.4.1 Types of scattering colour.
When a beam of light, interacts with At sunrise and sunset, the light rays from
a constituent particle of the medium, it the Sun have to travel a larger distance in the
undergoes many kinds of scattering. Based atmosphere than at noon. Hence, most of the
on initial and final energy of the light beam, blue lights are scattered away and only the
scattering can be classified as, red light which gets least scattered reaches
1) Elastic scattering 2) Inelastic scattering us. Therefore, the colour of the Sun is red at
sunrise and sunset.
1) Elastic scattering
If the energy of the incident beam of light Mie scattering
and the scattered beam of light are same, then Mie scattering takes place when the
it is called as ‘elastic scattering’. diameter of the scatterer is similar to or larger
than the wavelength of the incident light. It
2) Inelastic scattering
is also an elastic scattering. The amount of
If the energy of the incident beam of scattering is independent of wave length.
light and the scattered beam of light are not Mie scattering is caused by pollen, dust,
same, then it is called as ‘inelastic scattering’. smoke, water droplets, and other particles in
The nature and size of the scatterer results in the lower portion of the atmosphere.
different types of scattering. They are
Mie scattering is responsible for the
• Rayleigh scattering white appearance of the clouds. When white
• Mie scattering light falls on the water drop, all the colours
• Tyndall scattering are equally scattered which together form the
• Raman scattering white light.

www.tntextbooks.in
Tyndall Scattering Lens is basically classified into two types.

When a beam of sunlight, enters into a They are: (i) Convex Lens (ii) Concave Lens
dusty room through a window, then its path (i) Convex or bi-convex lens: It is a lens
becomes visible to us. This is because, the tiny bounded by two spherical surfaces such
dust particles present in the air of the room that it is thicker at the centre than at the
scatter the beam of light. This is an example of edges. A beam of light passing through it,
Tyndall Scattering is converged to a point. So, a convex lens is
The scattering of light rays by the
also called as converging lens.
colloidal particles in the colloidal solution is
called Tyndall Scattering or Tyndall Effect. (ii) Concave or bi-concave Lens: It is a lens
bounded by two spherical surfaces such
Do you Know that it is thinner at the centre than at the
edges. A parallel beam of light passing
Colloid is a microscopically small substance
that is equally dispersed throughout another through it, is diverged or spread out. So, a
material. Example: Milk, Ice cream, muddy concave lens is also called as diverging lens.
water, smoke
2.5.1 Other types of Lenses
Raman scattering
Plano-convex lens: If one of the faces of a
When a parallel beam of monochromatic bi-convex lens is plane, it is known as a plano-
(single coloured ) light passes through a gas or
convex lens.
liquid or transparent solid, a part of light rays
are scattered. Plano-concave lens: If one of the faces
The scattered light contains some additional of a bi-concave lens is plane, it is known as a
frequencies (or wavelengths) other than that plano-concave lens.
of incident frequency (or wavelength). This is All these lenses are shown in Figure 2.2
known as Raman scattering or Raman Effect. given below:
Raman Scattering is defined as “The
interaction of light ray with the particles of pure
liquids or transparent solids, which leads to a
change in wavelength or frequency.”
The spectral lines having frequency
equal to the incident ray frequency is called
‘Rayleigh line’ and the spectral lines which are
having frequencies other than the incident ray
frequency are called ‘Raman lines’. The lines
having frequencies lower than the incident
frequency is called stokes lines and the lines
having frequencies higher than the incident
frequency are called Antistokes lines.
You will study more about Raman Effect
in higher classes.
2.5 LENSES
A lens is an optically transparent medium

bounded by two spherical refracting surfaces
or one plane and one spherical surface. Figure 2.2 Types of lenses
19 Optics

www.tntextbooks.in
2.6 I MAGES FORMED DUE TO 2.7 R EFRACTION THROUGH A

REFRACTION THROUGH CONVEX LENS
A CONVEX AND CONCAVE Let us discuss the
LENS formation of images by
When an object is placed in front of a a convex lens when the
lens, the light rays from the object fall on the object is placed at various
lens. The position, size and nature of the image positions.
formed can be understood only if we know Object at infinity
certain basic rules.
When an object is placed at infinity, a real
Rule-1: When a ray of light strikes the
image is formed at the principal focus. The size
convex or concave lens obliquely at its optical
of the image is much smaller than that of the
centre, it continues to follow its path without
object (Figure 2.6).
any deviation (Figure 2.3).
M
O
2F1 F1 F2 2F2
Figure 2.3 Rays passing through the

optical centre N
Rule-2: When rays parallel to the principal axis Figure 2.6 Object at infinity
strikes a convex or concave lens, the refracted
Object placed beyond C (>2F)
rays are converged to (convex lens) or appear
to diverge from (concave lens) the principal When an object is placed behind the
focus (Figure 2.4). center of curvature(beyond C), a real and
inverted image is formed between the center of
curvature and the principal focus. The size of
the image is the smaller than that of the object
(Figure 2.7).
M
A
Figure 2.4 Rays passing parallel to the optic
axis B´
B 2F F1 O F2 2F2
Rule-3: When a ray passing through (convex 1
A´
lens) or directed towards (concave lens) the
N
principal focus strikes a convex or concave f
lens, the refracted ray will be parallel to the
principal axis (Figure 2.5). Figure 2.7 Object placed beyond C (>2F)
Object placed at C
When an object is placed at the center of
curvature, a real and inverted image is formed
at the other center of curvature. The size of
Figure 2.5 Rays passing through or directed the image is the same as that of the object
towards the principal focus (Figure 2.8).

www.tntextbooks.in
M bject placed between the

O
A principal focus F and optical
centre O
B 2F2 When an object is placed in between
2F1 F1 O F2 B´ principal focus and optical centre, a virtual
image is formed. The size of the image is larger
A´ than that of the object (Figure 2.11).
N
Figure.2.8 Object placed at C A
Q
A
Object placed between F and C

B F1 B
When an object is placed in between 2F1
O F2 2F2
f
the center of curvature and principal focus, a
real and inverted image is formed behind the
center of curvature. The size of the image is Figure 2.11 Object placed between the
bigger than that of the object (Figure 2.9). principal focus F and optical centre O
M 2.8 A PPLICATIONS OF
A
CONVEX LENSES
F2 2F2 B´
1. Convex lenses are used as camera lenses
2F1 B F1 O
2. They are used as magnifying lenses
3. They are used in making microscope,
N telescope and slide projectors
A´ 4. They are used to correct the defect of vision
called hypermetropia
Figure 2.9 Object placed between F and C
2.9 R EFRACTION THROUGH A
bject placed at the principal
O CONCAVE LENS
focus F
Let us discuss the formation of images by
When an object is placed at the focus, a concave lens when the object is placed at two
a real image is formed at infinity. The size
possible positions.
of the image is much larger than that of the
object (Figure 2.10). Object at Infinity
M When an object is placed at infinity, a

A virtual image is formed at the focus. The size of
the image is much smaller than that of the object
B O F2 2F2 (Figure 2.12).
2F1 F1
N 2F1 F1 O
Figure 2.10 Object placed at the principal

focus F Figure 2.12 Concave lens-Object at infinity
21 Optics

www.tntextbooks.in
Object anywhere on the principal

2.11 LENS FORMULA
axis at a finite distance
When an object is placed at a finite distance Like spherical mirrors, we have lens
from the lens, a virtual image is formed between formula for spherical lenses. The lens
optical center and focus of the concave lens. formula gives the relationship among
The size of the image is smaller than that of the distance of the object (u), distance of the
object (Figure 2.13). image (v) and the focal length (f ) of the
lens. It is expressed as
M 1 1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A = − 2.2
f v u
A1
It is applicable to both convex and
2F1 B F1 B1 O
concave lenses. We need to give an at most
care while solving numerical problems
N related to lenses in taking proper signs of
different quantities.
Figure 2.13 Concave lens-Object at a finite
distance 2.12 SIGN CONVENTION
But, as the distance between the object Cartesian sign conventions are used for
and the lens is decreased, the distance measuring the various distances in the ray
between the image and the lens also keeps diagrams of spherical lenses. According to
decreasing. Further, the size of the image cartesian sign convention,
formed increases as the distance between the 1. The object is always placed on the left side
object and the lens is decreased. This is shown of the lens.
in (figure 2.14). 2. All the distances are measured from the
optical centre of the lens.
3. The distances measured in the same
1 2 3 4 5
5
direction as that of incident light are taken
34
12
as positive.
2F1 F1 F2 2F2
4. The distances measured against the direction
of incident light are taken as negative.
5. The distances measured upward and
Figure 2.14 Concave lens-Variation in perpendicular to the principal axis is taken
position and size of image with object distance as positive.
6. The distances measured downward and
perpendicular to the principal axis is taken
2.10 APPLICATIONS OF as negative.
CONCAVE LENSES
1. Concave lenses are used as eye lens of 2.13

M AGNIFICATION OF A
‘Galilean Telescope’ LENS
2. They are used in wide angle spy hole in Like spherical mirrors, we have
doors. magnification for spherical lenses. Spherical
3. They are used to correct the defect of vision lenses produce magnification and it is defined
called ‘myopia’ as the ratio of the height of the image to the

www.tntextbooks.in
height of an object. Magnification is denoted where µ is the refractive index of the

by the letter ‘m’. If height of the object is h and material of the lens; R1 and R2 are the radii of
height of the image is h´, the magnification curvature of the two faces of the lens; f is the
produced by lens is, focal length of the lens.
height of the image h'
m= = …… (2.3)
height of the object h 2.15 POWER OF A LENS
Also it is related to the distance of the object When a ray of light falls on a lens, the
(u) and the distance of the image (v) as follows: ability to converge or diverge these light rays
depends on the focal length of the lens. This
Distance of the image v
m= = …… (2.4) ability of a lens to converge (convex lens) or
Distance of the object u
diverge (concave lens) is called as its power.
If the magnification is greater than 1, then Hence, the power of a lens can be defined as the
we get an enlarged image. On the other hand, degree of convergence or divergence of light
if the magnification is less than 1, then we get a rays. Power of a lens is numerically defined as
diminished image. the reciprocal of its focal length.
1
P = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2.6)
f
2.14
L ENS MAKER’S
The SI unit of power of a lens is dioptre. It
FORMULA
is represented by the symbol D. If focal length
All lenses are made up of transparent is expressed in ‘m’, then the power of lens is
materials. Any optically transparent material expressed in ‘D’. Thus 1D is the power of a lens,
will have a refractive index. The lens formula whose focal length is 1metre. 1D = 1m-1.
relates the focal length of a lens with the distance
By convention, the power of a convex lens
of object and image. For a maker of any lens,
is taken as positive whereas the power of a
knowledge of radii of curvature of the lens is
required. This clearly indicates the need for an concave lens is taken, as negative.
equation relating the radii of curvature of the
lens, the refractive index of the given material of More to Know
the lens and the required focal length of the lens.
The lens maker’s formula is one such equation. The lens formula and lens maker’s formula
It is given as are applicable to only thin lenses. In the case
of thick lenses, these formulae with little
1 1 1 . . . . . . . . . modifications are used.
= (µ − 1) − (2.5)
f R1 R2
Table 2.1 Differences between a Convex Lens and a Concave Lens
S. No Convex Lens Concave Lens

1 A convex lens is thicker in the middle than A concave lens is thinner in the middle than
at edges. at edges.
2 It is a converging lens. It is a diverging lens.
3 It produces mostly real images. It produces virtual images.
4 It is used to treat hypermeteropia. It is used to treat myopia.
23 Optics

www.tntextbooks.in
Working of the eye

2.16 HUMAN EYE
The transparent layer cornea bends the
The human eyes are most valuable and
light rays through pupil located at the centre
sensitive organs responsible for vision. They are
part of the Iris. The adjusted light passes
the gateway to the wonderful world.
through the eye lens. Eye lens is convex in
Structure of the eye nature. So, the light rays from the objects
are converged and a real and inverted image
The eye ball is approximately spherical
in shape with a diameter of about 2.3 cm. It is formed on retina. Then, retina passes the
consists of a tough membrane called sclera, received real and inverted image to the brain
which protects the internal parts of the eye. through optical nerves. Finally, the brain
senses it as erect image.
Important parts of human eye are
Cornea: This is the thin and transparent layer Power of Accommodation
on the front surface of the eyeball as shown in The ability of the eye lens to focus nearby
figure 2.15. It is the main refracting surface.
as well as the distant objects is called power of
When light enters through the cornea, it
accommodation of the eye. This is achieved by
refracts or bends the light on to the lens.
changing the focal length of the eye lens with
Iris: It is the coloured part of the eye. It may be the help of ciliary muscles.
blue, brown or green in colour. Every person
Eye lens is made of a flexible, jelly-like
has a unique colour, pattern and texture. Iris
material. By relaxing and contracting the ciliary
controls amount of light entering into the
muscle, the curvature and hence the focal
pupil like camera aperture.
length of the eye lens can be altered. When we
Pupil: It is the centre part of the Iris. It is the
see distant objects, the ciliary muscle relaxes
pathway for the light to retina.
and makes the eye lens thinner. This increases
Retina: This is the back surface of the eye. It is the focal length of the eye lens. Hence, the
the most sensitive part of human eye, on which distant object can be clearly seen. On the other
real and inverted image of objects is formed. hand, when we look at a closer object, the
Eye Lens – It is the important part of human focal length of the eye lens is decreased by the
eye. It is convex in nature. contraction of ciliary muscle. Thus, the image
Ciliary muscles – Eye lens is fixed between of the closer object is clearly formed on the
the ciliary muscles. It helps to change the focal retina.
length of the eye lens according to the position
Persistence of vision
of the object.
If the time interval between two
consecutive light pulses is less than 1 second,
Ciliary body Sclera
16
Retina human eye cannot distinguish them separately.
Lens
It is called persistence of vision.
Cornea
Optic disc
The far point and near point of
Iris
the human eye
Pupil The minimum distance required to see the
objects distinctly without strain is called least
Optic nerve distance of distinct vision. It is called as near
Figure 2.15 Human eye point of eye. It is 25 cm for normal human eye.

www.tntextbooks.in
The maximum distance up to which the to a distance y, then, the focal length of the
eye can see objects clearly is called as far point required concave lens is,
of the eye. It is infinity for normal eye. xy . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
f= (2.7)
x−y
2.17 DEFECTS IN EYE Hypermeteropia

A normal human eye can clearly see all Hypermeteropia, also known as long
the objects placed between 25cm and infinity. sightedness, occurs due to the shortening of
But, for some people, the eye loses its power eye ball. With this defect, distant objects can
of accommodation. This could happen due to be seen clearly but nearby objects cannot be
many reasons including ageing. Hence, their seen clearly. The focal length of eye lens is
vision becomes defective. Let us discuss some increased or the distance between eye lens
and retina decreases. Hence, the near point
of the common defects of human eye.
will not be at 25cm for such eyes and the
near point has moved farther. Due to this, the
Myopia image of nearby objects are formed behind
Myopia, also known as short sightedness, the retina (Figure 2.17-a). This defect can be
occurs due to the lengthening of eye ball. With corrected using a convex lens (Figure 2.17-b).
The focal length of the convex lens to be used
this defect, nearby objects can be seen clearly
but distant objects cannot be seen clearly. The is computed as follows:
focal length of eye lens is reduced or the distance
between eye lens and retina increases. Hence,
the far point will not be infinity for such eyes
and the far point has come closer. Due to this,
the image of distant objects are formed before
the retina (Figure 2.16-a). This defect can be
corrected using a concave lens (Figure 2.16-b).
The focal length of the concave lens to be used Figure 2.17 (a) Vision with hypermeteropia
is computed as follows: (b) Corrected vision using a convex lens
Let a person with hypermeteropia eye can

see object beyond a distance d. Suppose that he
wants to see all objects closer than this distance
up to a distance D. Then, the focal length of the
required convex lens is
(a) Myopia (b) Myopia corrected eye
dD ��
f= (2.8)
Figure 2.16 (a) Vision with myopia d−D
b) Corrected vision using a concave lens
Presbyopia
Let a person with myopia eye can see up Due to ageing, ciliary muscles become
to a distance x. Suppose that he wants to see weak and the eye-lens become rigid (inflexible)
all objects farther than this distance, i.e., up to andso the eye loses its power of accommodation.
infinity. Then the focal length of the required Because of this, an aged person cannot see
concave lens is f = –x. If the person can see the nearby objects clearly. So, it is also called as
up to a distance x and if he wishes to see up ‘old age hypermetropia’.
25 Optics

www.tntextbooks.in
Some persons may have both the defects the lens. As per this position the convex lens
of vision - myopia as well as hypermetropia. produces an erect, virtual and enlarged image
This can be corrected by ‘bifocal lenses’. In (A'B'). The image formed is in the same side of
which, upper part consists of concave lens (to the object and the distance equal to the least
correct myopia) used for distant vision and the distance of distinct vision (D) (For normal
lower part consists of convex lens (to correct human eye D = 25 cm).
hypermetropia) used for reading purposes.
Uses of Simple microscope
Astigmatism
Simple microscopes are used
In this defect, eye cannot see parallel and a) by watch repairers and jewellers.
horizontal lines clearly. It may be inherited or
b) to read small letters clearly.
acquired. It is due to the imperfect structure of
eye lens because of the development of cataract c) to observe parts of flower, insects etc.
on the lens, ulceration of cornea, injury to the d) to observe finger prints in the field of
refracting surfaces, etc. Astigmatism can be forensic science.
corrected by using cylindrical lenses.
Compound microscope
Compound microscope is also used to
2.18 MICROSCOPE
see the tiny objects. It has better magnification
This is an optical instrument, which helps power than simple microscope.
us to see tiny (very small) objects. It is classified Magnification power of microscopes
as can be increased by decreasing the focal
1. Simple microscope length of the lens used. Due to constructional
2. Compound microscope limitations, the focal length of the lens cannot
be decreased beyond certain limit. This
Simple Microscope problem can be solved by using two separate
biconvex lenses.
Simple microscope has a convex lens of
short focal length. It is held near the eye to get Construction
enlarged image of small objects.
A compound microscope consists of two
Let an object (AB) is placed at a point
convex lenses. The lens with the shorter focal
within the principal focus (u < f) of the convex
length is placed near the object, and is called
lens and the observer’s eye is placed just behind
as ‘objective lens’ or ‘objective piece’. The lens
with larger focal length and larger aperture
B placed near the observer’s eye is called as ‘eye
B
lens’ or ‘eye piece’. Both the lenses are fixed in
a narrow tube with adjustable provision.
A F A
O
Working
The object (AB) is placed at a distance
Figure 2.18 Image formation in simple slightly greater than the focal length of
microscope objective lens (u > fo). A real, inverted and
magnified image (A'B') is formed at the other

www.tntextbooks.in
1611 which was fundamentally similar to the

astronomical telescope.
Types of Telescope
According to optical property, it is
classified into two groups:
i) refracting telescope ii) reflecting telescope
In refracting telescope lenses are used.
Galilean telescope, Keplerian telescope,
Figure 2.19 Image formation in compound Achromatic refractors, are some refracting
microscope telescopes.
side of the objective lens. This image behaves In reflecting telescope parabolic mirrors
as the object for the eye lens. The position of are used Gregorian, Newtonian, Cassegrain
the eye lens is adjusted in such a way, that the telescope are some Reflecting telescopes
image (A'B') falls within the principal focus of According to the things which are
the eye piece. This eye piece forms a virtual, observed, Astronomical Telescope and
enlarged and erect image (A" B") on the same Terrestrial Telescopes are the two major types
side of the object of telescope.
Compound microscope has 50 to 200 Astronomical Telescope
times more magnification power than simple
An astronomical telescope is used to view
microscope
heavenly bodies like stars, planets galaxies and
Travelling Microscope satellites.
A travelling microscope is one of the best
Terrestrial Telescopes
instrument for measuring very small length
with high degree of accuracy at the order of The image in an astronomical telescope
0.01mm. It works based on the principle of is inverted. So, it is not suitable for viewing
objects on the surface of the Earth. Therefore,
vernier. Its least count is 0.01 mm.
a terrestrial telescope is used. It provides an
erect image. The major difference between
2.19 TELESCOPE astronomical and terrestrial telescope is
erecting the final image with respect to the
Have you seen the recent lunar eclipse?
object.
With our naked eye we can’t visualize the
phenomena distinctly. Then, how can we see
Advantages of Telescopes
the distant object in clearer manner? It is
possible with telescope. • Elaborate view of the Galaxies, Planets, stars
Telescope is an optical instrument to see and other heavenly bodies is possible.
the distant objects. The first telescope was • Camera can be attached for taking
invented by Johann Lippershey in 1608. Galileo photograph for the celestial objects.
made a telescope to observe distant stars. He • Telescope can be viewed even with the low
got the idea, from a spectacle maker who one intensity of light.
day observed that the distant weather cock
appeared magnified through his lens system Disadvantages
fitted in his shop. Galileo observed the satellites
• Frequent maintenances needed.
of Jupiter and the rings of Saturn through
his telescope. Kepler invented Telescope in • It is not easily portable one.
27 Optics

www.tntextbooks.in
Points to Remember Problem-2

A beam of light passing through a diverging
Light is a form of energy which travels lens of focal length 0.3m appear to be focused
along a straight line at a distance 0.2m behind the lens. Find the
The deviation in the path of light ray is position of the object.
called refraction. Solution:
The ratio of speed of light in vacuum to
f = −0.3 m, v = −0.2 m
the speed of light in a medium is defined
as refractive index ‘µ’ of that medium. 1 1 1
= −
Lens formula f v u
1 1 1
1 1 1 = −
= – u v f
f ν u
1 1 1 −10
h' ν = − =
Magnification (m) = = u −0.2 −0.3 6
h u
−6
1 u= = −0.6 m
Power of lens. P = 10
f
The ability of the eye lens to focus nearby Problem-3
as well as the distant objects is called A person with myopia can see objects placed at
power of accommodation of the eye. a distance of 4m. If he wants to see objects at a
A microscope is an optical instrument distance of 20m, what should be the focal length
which helps us to see the objects which are and power of the concave lens he must wear?
very small in dimension.
Solution:
Telescope is an optical instrument used to
Given that x = 4m and y = 20m.
see the distant objects clearly.
Focal length of the correction lens is
xy
SOLVED PROBLEMS f= (Refer eqn.2.7)
x−y
Problem 1 4 × 20 80
f= = = −5 m
Light rays travel from vacuum into a 4 − 20 −16
glass whose refractive index is 1.5. If the angle Power of the correction lens
of incidence is 30°, calculate the angle of 1 1
= = − = −0.2 D
refraction inside the glass. f 5
Problem-4
Solution:
For a person with hypermeteropia, the
accorting to Snell’s law,
near point has moved to 1.5m. Calculate the
sin i 2 focal length of the correction lens in order to
sin r make his eyes normal.
µ1 sin i = µ2 sin r
Solution:
Here µ1 = 1.0, µ2 = 1.5, i = 30°
Given that, d = 1.5m; D = 25cm = 0.25m (For
(1.0) sin 30° = 1.5 sin r a normal eye).
1×— 1 = 1.5 sin r
2 From equation (2.8), the focal length of the
sin r = — 1 = 1 = (0.333)
2×1.5 — 3 correction lens is
r = sin (0.333)
–1
d × D 1.5 × 0.25 0.375
f= = = = 0.3 m
r = 19.45° d − D 1.5 − 0.25 1.25

www.tntextbooks.in
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the correct answer 9. Which of the following lens would you prefer
to use while reading small letters found in a
1. The refractive index of four substances A, B,
dictionary?
C and D are 1.31, 1.43, 1.33, 2.4 respectively.
The speed of light is maximum in a) A convex lens of focal length 5 cm
b) A concave lens of focal length 5 cm
a) A b) B c) C d) D
c) A convex lens of focal length 10 cm
2. Where should an object be placed so that
d) A concave lens of focal length 10 cm
a real and inverted image of same size is
obtained by a convex lens 10. If VB, VG, VR be the velocity of blue, green
and red light respectively in a glass prism,
a) f b) 2f
then which of the following statement gives
c) infinity d) between f and 2f
the correct relation?
3. A small bulb is placed at the principal focus
a) VB = VG = VR b) VB > VG >VR
of a convex lens. When the bulb is switched
c) VB < VG < VR d) VB < VG > VR
on, the lens will produce
a) a convergent beam of light II. Fill in the blanks:
b) a divergent beam of light
1. The path of the light is called as
c) a parallel beam of light
d) a coloured beam of light 2.
The refractive index of a transparent
medium is always greater than
4. Magnification of a convex lens is
a) Positive b) negative 3. If the energy of incident beam and the
c) either positive or negative d) zero scattered beam are same, then the scattering
of light is called as scattering.
5. A convex lens forms a real, diminished point
sized image at focus. Then the position of the 4. According to Rayleigh’s scattering law, the
object is at amount of scattering of light is inversely
proportional to the fourth power of its
a) focus b) infinity
c) at 2f d) between f and 2f
5. Amount of light entering into the eye is
6. Power of a lens is –4D, then its focal length is
controlled by
a) 4m b) –40m
c) –0.25 m d) –2.5 m
III. True or False. If false correct it.
7. In a myopic eye, the image of the object is 1. V
elocity of light is greater in denser medium
formed than in rarer medium
a) behind the retina b) on the retina 2. Th
e power of lens depends on the focal
c) in front of the retina d) on the blind spot length of the lens
8. The eye defect ‘presbyopia’ can be corrected 3. Increase in the converging power of eye
by lens cause ‘hypermetropia’
a) convex lens b) concave lens 4. The convex lens always gives small virtual
c) convex mirror d) Bi focal lenses image.
29 Optics

www.tntextbooks.in
IV. Match the following: 9. Why does the sky appear in blue colour?
Column - I Column - II 10. Why are traffic signals red in colour?
1 Retina a Path way of light VII. Give the answer in detail
2 Pupil b Far point comes 1. List any five properties of light
closer
2. Explain the rules for obtaining images
3 Ciliary muscles c near point moves
away formed by a convex lens with the help of ray
diagram.
4 Myopia d Screen of the eye
5 Hypermetropia f Power of accom- 3. Differentiate the eye defects: Myopia and
modation Hypermetropia
4. Explain the construction and working of a
V. Assertion and reasoning type ‘Compound Microscope’.
a) If both assertion and reason are true and VIII. Numerical Problems:
reason is the correct explanation of assertion. 1. An object is placed at a distance 20cm from
b) If both assertion and reason are true but a convex lens of focal length 10cm. Find the
reason is not the correct explanation of image distance and nature of the image.
assertion. 2. An object of height 3cm is placed at 10cm
c) Assertion is true but reason is false. from a concave lens of focal length 15cm.
d) Assertion is false but reason is true. Find the size of the image.
1. Assertion: If the refractive index of the IX. Higher order thinking (HOT) questions:
medium is high (denser medium) the velocity
of the light in that medium will be small 1. While doing an experiment for the
determination of focal length of a convex
Reason: Refractive index of the medium is
lens, Raja Suddenly dropped the lens. It got
inversely proportional to the velocity of the
broken into two halves along the axis. If he
light
continues his experiment with the same lens,
2. Assertion: Myopia is due to the increase in (a) can he get the image? (b) Is there any
the converging power of eye lens. change in the focal length?
Reason: Myopia can be corrected with the 2. The eyes of the nocturnal birds like owl are
help of concave lens. having a large cornea and a large pupil. How
VI. Answer Briefly does it help them?
1. What is refractive index?

REFERENCE BOOKS
2. State Snell’s law.
3. Draw a ray diagram to show the image 1. Fundamentals of optics by D.R. Khanna and
formed by a convex lens when the object is H.R. Gulati, R. Chand & Co.
placed between F and 2F. 2. Principles of Physics – Halliday, Resnick &
4. Define dispersion of light Walker, Wiley Publications, New Delhi.
5. State Rayleigh’s law of scattering
6. Differentiate convex lens and concave lens. I NT ER NET R ES O U RCES
7. What is power of accommodation of eye?
1. www.physicsabout.com
8. What are the causes of ‘Myopia’? 2. www.khanacademy.org

www.tntextbooks.in
Concept Map
Light
Refraction Dispersion Scattering of light Optical Instruments
Law of
refraction
Human eye Microscope Telescope
Structure Defects
Simple Compound
Rayleigh Mie Tyndall Raman
Scattering Scattering Scattering Scattering
Terrestrial Astronomical
Myopia Hypermeteropia Presbyopia
ICT CORNER Formation of different

types of images by a
convex lens
In this activity you will be able to understand the images formed by convex lenses.
Steps
• Open the browser and type ‘phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/legacy/geometric-optics’ in the address
bar.
• Take the pencil and raise it so that the eraser is sitting on the principal axis. Click on the “principal
rays” button.
• Place the object at different positions (infinity, beyond 2F, at 2F, between F and 2F, at F, between F and
optic centre) from a convex lens and observe different types of images. Explain the result.
• Will the rays ever form an image? Click on “virtual image” to check your answer.
Step1 Step2 Step3 Step4
Cells alive
URL: https://phet.colorado.edu/en/simulation/legacy/geometric-optics
*Pictures are indicative only
31 Optics

www.tntextbooks.in
Warm
THERMAL PHYSICS
3
Cool
Learning Objectives
At the end of this lesson, students will be able to

Understand the concept of heat and temperature
Know the absolute scale of temperature
Understand the thermal energy and the thermal equilibrium
Classification of expansion of substances
Know the fundamental laws of gases
Distinguish between real gas and ideal gas
Derive the ideal gas equation
Solve the numerical problems
which determines whether a body is in

INTRODUCTION
equilibrium or not with the surroundings.
Sun is the primary source of thermal (or average kinetic enegy of the molecules).
energy for all living organisms. Thermal Further, temperature is the property, which
energy is the cause and temperature is the determines the direction of flow of heat. It is
effect. All living organisms need a particular a scalar quantity. The SI unit of temperature
temperature for their survival. In the kitchen, is kelvin (K). There are other commonly
a container with a steel bottom is placed on used units of temperature such as degree
the induction stove. Do you know why? All celsius (°C) and degree fahrenheit (°F).
of us have a common man’s understanding of
thermal energy and temperature. But, in this
3.1.1 Absolute scale (kelvin scale)
chapter, you shall learn about thermal energy
of temperature
and temperature in a scientific manner. We
shall also discuss about how thermal energy The temperature measured in relation to
is transferred and the effects of thermal absolute zero using the kelvin scale is known
energy. as absolute scale temperature. It is also known
as the thermodynamic temperature. Each unit
of the thermodynamic scale of temperature is
3.1 T EMPERATURE
defined as the fraction of 1/273.16th part of the
Temperature is defined as the degree thermodynamic temperature of the triple point
of hotness of a body. The temperature is of water. A temperature difference of 1°C is equal
higher for a hotter body than for a colder to that of 1K. Zero Kelvin is the absolute scale
body. It is also be defined as the property of temperature of the body.
32

www.tntextbooks.in
The relation between the different types milk to the environment. In the second case,
of scale of temperature: the energy is transferred from the environment
Celsius and Kelvin: K = C + 273, to the water bottle. This energy is termed as
5 “thermal energy”.
Fahrenheit and Kelvin: [K] = (F + 460) ×
9 When a hot object is in contact with
0 K = –273°C.
another cold object, a form of energy flows from
3.1.2 Thermal equilibrium the hot object to the cold object, which is known
as thermal energy. Thus, thermal energy is a
Two or more physical systems or bodies are
form of energy which is transferred between
said to be in thermal equilibrium if there is no
any two bodies due to the difference in their
net flow of thermal energy between the systems.
temperatures. Thermal energy is also known as
Heat energy always flows from one body to
'heat energy' or simply 'heat'.
the other due to a temperature difference
between them. Thus, you can define thermal Heat energy is the agent, which produces
equilibrium in another way. If two bodies are the sensation of warmth and makes bodies hot.
said to be in thermal equilibrium, then, they The process in which heat energy flows from a
will be at the same temperature. What will body at a higher temperature to another object
happen if two bodies at different temperatures at lower temperature is known as heating. This
are brought in contact with one other? There process of transmission of heat may be done
will be a transfer of heat energy from the in any of the ways like conduction, convection
hot body to the cold body until a thermal or radiation. Heat is a scalar quantity. The SI
equilibrium is established between them. This unit of heat energy absorbed or evolved is
is depicted in Figure 3.1. joule (J) .
During the process of transferring heat
energy, the body at lower temperature is heated
while the body at higher temperature is cooled.
Thus, sometimes, this process of transfer of
heat energy is termed as 'cooling'. But, in
Figure 3.1 Establishing thermal equilibrium most of the cases the term 'heating' is used
instead of 'cooling'. When the thermal energy
When a cold body is placed in contact with
is transferred from one body to another, this
a hot body, some thermal energy is transferred
results in the rise or lowering of the temperature
from the hot body to the cold body. As a result,
of either of the bodies.
there is some rise in the temperature of the cold
body and decrease in the temperature of the 3.2.1 Characteristic features
hot body. This process will continue until these of heat energy transfer
two bodies attain the same temperature.
1. Heat always flows from a system at
3.2 THERMAL ENERGY higher temperature to a system at lower
temperature.
If you leave a cup of hot milk on a table for 2. The mass of a system is not altered when it is
some time, what happens? The hotness of the heated or cooled.
milk decreases after some time. Similarly, if you
3. For any exchange of heat, the heat gained by
keep a bottle of cold water on a table, the water
the cold system is equal to heat lost by the
becomes warmer after some time. What do you
hot system.
infer from these observations? In the case of hot
milk, there is a flow of energy from the cup of Heat gained = Heat lost
33 Thermal Physics

www.tntextbooks.in
3.2.2 Other units of Heat energy a) Expansion in solids

Though the SI unit of heat energy is joule, When a solid is heated, the atoms gain
there are some other commonly used units. energy and vibrate more vigorously. This results
in the expansion of the solid. For a given change
Calorie: One calorie is defined as the amount of in temperature, the extent of expansion is smaller
heat energy required to rise the temperature of 1 in solids than in liquids and gases. This is due to
gram of water through 1°C. the rigid nature of solids.
Kilocalorie: One kilocalorie is defined as the The different types of expansion of solid are
amount of heat energy required to rise the listed and explained below:
temperature of 1 kilogram of water through 1°C. 1. Linear expansion
2. Superficial expansion
3.3 EFFECT OF HEAT ENERGY 3. Cubical expansion
1. Linear expansion:
When a certain amount of heat energy
When a body is heated or cooled, the
is given to a substance, it will undergo one or
length of the body changes due to change in
more of the following changes:
its temperature. Then the expansion is said to
• Temperature of the substance rises. be linear or longitudinal expansion.
• Th
e substance may change its state from The ratio of increase in length of the body
solid to liquid or from liquid to gas. per degree rise in temperature to its unit length
• The substance will expand when heated. is called as the coefficient of linear expansion.
The SI unit of Coefficient of Linear expansion is
The rise in temperature is in proportion
K-1. The value of coefficient of linear expansion
to the amount of heat energy supplied. It
is different for different materials.
also depends on the nature and mass of the
substance. About the rise in temperature
and the change of state, you have studied in
previous classes. In the following section, we
shall discuss about the expansion of substances
due to heat.
3.3.1 Expansion of Substances
When heat energy is supplied to a body, Figure 3.2 Linear expansion
there can be an increase in the dimension of
The equation relating the change in length
the object. This change in
and the change in temperature of a body is
the dimension due to rise
given below:
in temperature is called ∆L
thermal expansion of the = αL ∆T
Lo
object. The expansion of ∆
L
-
Change in length (Final length-
liquids (e.g. mercury) can be
Original length)
seen when a thermometer
is placed in warm water. All forms of matter Lo - Original length
(solid, liquid and gas) undergo expansion on ∆T
-
Change in temperature (Final
heating. temperature - Initial temperature)
αL - Coefficient of linear expansion.

www.tntextbooks.in
2. Superficial expansion:

If there is an increase in the area of a solid
object due to heating, then the expansion is
called superficial or areal expansion.
Superficial expansion is determined in
terms of coefficient of superficial expansion.
Figure 3.4 Cubical expansion
The ratio of increase in area of the body per
degree rise in temperature to its unit area is The equation relating to the change in volume
called as coefficient of superficial expansion. and the change in temperature is given below:
Coefficient of superficial expansion is different ∆V
for different materials. The SI unit of Coefficient = αV ∆T
Vo
of superficial expansion is K-1 ∆V -
Change in volume(Final volume -
The equation relating to the changein area Intial volume)
and the change in temperature is given below: Vo - Original volume
∆T Change in temperature (Final
-
temperature - Initial temperature)
αV - Coefficient of cubical expansion.
Aº Different materials possess different
coefficient of cubical expansion. Table 3.1 gives
the coefficient of cubical expansion for some
A common materials.
(b)
Figure 3.3 Superficial expansion
Table 3.1 Coefficient of cubical expansion
∆A of some materials
= αA ∆T
Ao Name of the Coefficient of cubic
S.No.
∆A - Change in area (Final area - Initial material expansion (K–1)
–5
area) 1 Aluminium 7 × 10
–5
A o - Original area 2 Brass 6 × 10
–5
∆T
-
Change in temperature (Final 3 Glass 2.5 × 10
–5
temperature - Initial temperature) 4 Water 20.7 × 10
–5
α A - Coefficient of superficial expansion. 5 Mercury 18.2 × 10
3. Cubical expansion: b) Expansion in liquids and gases

If there is an increase in the volume of a When heated, the atoms in a liquid or gas
solid body due to heating, then the expansion gain energy and are forced further apart. The
is called cubical or volumetric expansion. extent of expansion varies from substance to
As in the cases of linear and areal expansion, substance. For a given rise in temperature, a
cubical expansion is also expressed in terms of liquid will have more expansion than a solid
coefficient of cubical expansion. The ratio of and a gaseous substance has the highest
increase in volume of the body per degree rise expansion when compared with the other two.
in temperature to its unit volume is called as The coefficient of cubical expansion of liquid is
coefficient of cubical expansion. This is also independent of temperature whereas its value
–1
measured in K . for gases depends on the temperature of gases.
35 Thermal Physics

www.tntextbooks.in
When a liquid is heated, it is done by keeping energy and it expands. As a result, the volume
the liquid in some container and supplying heat of the liquid appears to have reduced. Mark this
energy to the liquid through the container. The reduced level of liquid as L2.
thermal energy supplied will be partly used On further heating, the thermal energy
in expanding the container and partly used in supplied to the liquid through the container results
expanding the liquid. Thus, what we observe in the expansion of the liquid. Hence, the level of
may not be the actual or real expansion of the liquid rises to L3. Now, the difference between the
liquid. Hence, for liquids, we can define real levels L1 and L3 is called as apparent expansion,
expansion and apparent expansion. and the difference between the levels L2 and L3
1) Real expansion is called real expansion. The real expansion is
always more than that of apparent expansion.
If a liquid is heated directly without using
any container, then the expansion that you observe
is termed as real expansion of the liquid.
Coefficient of real expansion is defined
as the ratio of the true rise in the volume of
the liquid per degree rise in temperature to its
unit volume. The SI unit of coefficient of real
–1
expansion is K .
2) Apparent expansion
Heating a liquid without using a container
is not possible. Thus, in practice, you can heat
any liquid by pouring it in a container. A part
of thermal energy is used in expanding the
container and a part is used in expanding the Figure 3.5 Real and apparent expansion
liquid. Thus, what you observe is not the actual of liquid
or real expansion of the liquid. The expansion
Real expansion = L3 – L2
of a liquid apparently observed without
Apparent expansion = L3 – L1
considering the expansion of the container is
called the apparent expansion of the liquid. 3.4 F UNDAMENTAL LAWS
Coefficient of apparent expansion is OF GASES
defined as the ratio of the apparent rise in
The three fundamental laws which
the volume of the liquid per degree rise in
connect the relation between pressure, volume
temperature to its unit volume. The SI unit of
–1 and temperature are as follows:
coefficient of apparent expansion is K .
1) Boyle’s Law
3.3.2
Experiment to measure real
2) Charles's law
and apparent expansion
3) Avogadro's law
of liquid
3.4.1 Boyle’s law:
To start with, the liquid whose real and
apparent expansion is to be determined is When the temperature of a
poured in a container up to a level. Mark this gas is kept constant, the volume of a fixed mass
level as L1. Now, heat the container and the of gas is inversely proportional to its pressure.
liquid using a burner as shown in the Figure 3.5. This is shown in Figure 3.6.
Initially, the container receives the thermal P α 1/V

www.tntextbooks.in
3.5 GASES
Gases are classified as real gases and

ideal gases.
3.5.1 Real Gases
If the molecules or atoms of a gases

interact with each other with a definite amount
of intermolecular or inter atomic force of
Figure 3.6 Variation of volume with pressure
attraction, then the gases are said to be real
gases. At very high temperature or low pressure,
In other words, for an invariable mass
a real gases behaves as an ideal gases because
of a perfect gas, at constant temperature,
in this condition there is no interatomic or
the product of its pressure and volume is a
intermolecular force of attraction.
constant.
(i.e) PV = constant 3.5.2 Ideal Gases
If the atoms or molecules of a gas do not
3.4.2 Charles's law interact with each other, then the gas is said to
(The law of volume) be an ideal gas or a perfect gas.
Charles’s law was formulated by a French Actually, in practice, no gas is ideal.
scientist Jacques Charles. According to this The molecules of any gas will have a certain
law, When the pressure of gas is kept constant, amount of interaction among them. But, these
the volume of a gas is directly proportional to interactions are weaker when the pressure
is low or the temperature is high because
the temperature of the gas.
the interatomic or intermolecular forces of
V α T attraction are weak in ideal gas. Hence, a real
gas at low pressure or high temperature can be
or V = constant termed as a perfect gas.
T
Ideal gases obey Boyle’s law, Charles’s law
3.4.3 Avogadro's law and Avogadro’s law. All these laws state the
relationship between various properties of a gas
Avogadro's law states such as pressure (P), volume (V), temperature
that at constant pressure and (T) and number of atoms (n). In a given state of
temperature, the volume of a the gas, all these parameters will have a definite
gas is directly proportional set of values. When there is a change in the state
to number of atoms or of the gas, any one or more of these parameters
molecules present in it. change its value. The above said laws relate these
changes.
Vαn
i.e.
(or) V = constant 3.5.3 Ideal Gas Equation
n
Avogadro’s number (NA) is the total The ideal gas equation is an equation,
number of atoms per mole of the substance. It which relates all the properties of an ideal gas.
23
is equal to 6.023 × 10 /mol. An ideal gas obeys Boyle’s law and Charles’ law
and Avogadro’s law. According to Boyle’s law,
PV = constant (3.1)
37 Thermal Physics

www.tntextbooks.in
According to Charles’s law, All the substances will undergo one or

V/T = constant (3.2) more of the following changes when
heated:
According to Avogadro’s law,
i) Temperature of the substance rises.
V/n = constant (3.3) ii) The substance may change state from
After combining equations (3.1), (3.2) solid to liquid or gas.
and (3.3), you can get the following equation. iii)
The substance will expand
when heated.
PV/nT = constant (3.4)
All forms of matter (solid, liquid and gas)
The above relation is called the combined undergo expansion on heating.
law of gases. If you consider a gas, which For a given rise in temperature, a liquid
contains µ moles of the gas, the number of will have more expansion than a solid
atoms contained will be equal to µ times the and a gaseous substance has the highest
Avogadro number, NA. expansion than the other two.
i.e. n = µNA. (3.5) If a liquid is heated directly without using
any container, then the expansion that
Using equation (3.5), equation (3.4) can
you observe is termed as real expansion
be written as
of the liquid.
PV/ µNAT = constant

The expansion of a liquid apparently
The value of the constant in the above observed without considering the
equation is taken to be kB, which is called as expansion of the container is called the
Boltzmann constant (1.38 × 10–23 JK–1). Hence, apparent expansion of liquid.
we have the following equation: For a given heat energy, the real expansion
PV/ µNAT = kB is always more than that of apparent
expansion.
PV = µNA kB T
I f the atoms or molecules of a gas do
Here, µNAkB = R, which is termed as not interact with each other, then
universal gas constant whose value is the gas is said to be an ideal gas or a
8.31 J mol−1 K−1. perfect gas.
PV = RT (3.6) Ideal gas equation, also called as equation
Ideal gas equation is also called as equation of state is PV = RT. Here, R is known as
of state because it gives the relation between universal gas constant whose value is
−1 −1
the state variables and it is used to describe the 8.31 J mol K
state of any gas.
Solved Problems
Points to Remember Example 1
The SI unit of heat energy absorbed or A container whose capacity is 70 ml is

evolved is joule (J) filled with a liquid up to 50 ml. Then, the
Heat always flows from a system at higher liquid in the container is heated. Initially, the
temperature to a system at lower temperature. level of the liquid falls from 50 ml to 48.5 ml.
Temperature is defined as the degree Then we heat more, the level of the liquid
of hotness of a body. The SI unit of rises to 51.2 ml. Find the apparent and real
temperature is kelvin (K). expansion.

www.tntextbooks.in
Data: changing from 20cc (V1 cc) to V2 cc. Find the

Level of the liquid L1 = 50 ml final volume V2.
Level of the liquid L2 = 48.5 ml Data:
Level of the liquid L3 = 51.2 ml Initial pressure (P1)= P
Apparent expansion = L3 − L1 Final Pressure (P2) = 4P
= 51.2 ml – 50 ml = 1.2ml Initial volume (V1) = 20cc = 20cm3
Real expansion = L3 − L2 Final volume (V2) = ?
= 51.2 ml – 48.5ml = 2.7ml Using Boyle's Law, PV = constant
So, Real expansion > apparent expansion P1V1 = P2V2
P
Example 2 V2 = 1 × V1
P2
Keeping the temperature as constant,
P × 20cm3
a gas is compressed four times of its initial =
4P
pressure. The volume of gas in the container
V2 = 5 cm3
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the correct answer 5. In the Given diagram, the possible direction
1. The value of universal gas constant of heat energy transformation is
1 1 1 1
a) 3.81 Jmol– K– b) 8.03 Jmol– K–
1 1 1 1
c) 1.38 Jmol– K– d) 8.31 Jmol– K–
2.
If a substance is heated or cooled, the
change in mass of that substance is
a) positive b) negative II. Fill in the blanks:
c) zero d) none of the above 1. The value of Avogadro number ________
3. If a substance is heated or cooled, the 2. The temperature and heat are _________
linear expansion occurs along the axis quantities
of 3. One calorie is the amount of heat energy
a) X or –X b) Y or –Y required to raise the temperature of
_______ of water through______.
c) both (a) and (b) d) (a) or (b)
4. According to Boyle’s law, the shape of the
4. Temperature is the average ___________ graph between pressure and reciprocal of
of the molecules of a substance volume is ________________
a) difference in K.E and P.E
b) sum of P.E and K.E III. State whether the following statements
are true or false, if false explain why?
c) difference in T.E and P.E
1.
For a given heat in liquid, the apparent
d) difference in K.E and T.E
expansion is more than that of real expansion.
39 Thermal Physics

www.tntextbooks.in
2. Thermal energy always flows from a system 3. What is co-efficient of cubical expansion?
at higher temperature to a system at lower 4. State Boyle’s law
temperature.
5. State-the law of volume
3.
According to Charles’s law, at constant
pressure, the temperature is inversely 6. D
istinguish between ideal gas and real
proportional to volume. gas.
7. What is co-efficient of real expansion?
IV. Match the items in column-I to the
items in column-II 8. What is co-efficient of apparant expansion?
Column-I Column-II VII. Numerical problems

1. Linear expansion - (a) change in volume 1. F
ind the final temperature of a copper rod.
2. Superficial expansion - (b) hot body to cold Whose area of cross section changes from
2 2
body 10 m to 11 m due to heating. The copper
3. Cubical expansion - (c) 1.381 X 10-23 JK-1 rod is initially kept at 90 K. (Coefficient of
superficial expansion is 0.0021 /K)
4. Heat transformation - (d) change in length
2. C
alculate the coefficient of cubical
5. Boltzmann constant - (e) change in area expansion of a zinc bar. Whose volume is
3 3
increased 0.25 m from 0.3 m due to the
V. Assertion and reason type questions
change in its temperature of 50 K.
a. Both the assertion and the reason are true
and the reason is the correct explanation VIII. Answer in detail
of the assertion. 1. Derive the ideal gas equation.
Both the assertion and the reason are
b. xplain the experiment of measuring the
2. E
true but the reason is not the correct real and apparent expansion of a liquid
explanation of the assertion. with a neat diagram.
c. Assertion is true but the reason is false.
IX. HOT question
d. Assertion is false but the reason is true.
1. Assertion: There is no effects on other end If you keep ice at 0° C and water at 0° C in
when one end of the rod is only heated. either of your hands, in which hand you will
Reason: Heat always flows from a region of feel more chillness? Why?
lower temperature to higher temperature of
the rod. REFERENCE BOOKS
2. Assertion: Gas is highly compressible than
solid and liquid Thermodynamics and an introduction to
Reason: Interatomic or intermolecular thermo statistics by Herbert Hallen
distance in the gas is comparably high. Fundamentals of Engineering
Thermodynamics by Michael Moran.
VI. Answer in briefly
1. Define one calorie. I NT ER NET R ES O U RCE
2. D
istinguish between linear, arial and
http://aplusphysics.com/courses/honors/
superficial expansion.
thermo/thermal_physics.html

www.tntextbooks.in
ICT CORNER Boyle’s law

In this activity you will be able to verify pressure is proportional to reciprocal of volume
(Boyle’s law).
Steps
• Open the browser and type “physics-chemistry-interactive-flash-animation.com/matter_change_
state_measurement_mass_volume/pressure_volume_boyle_mariotte_law_ideal_gas_closed_system_
MCQ.htm” in the address bar. Click enter to start the experiment.
• Change the volume by adjusting the piston of the syringe ( between 20 ml to 80 ml) and observe how
the pressure changes.
• Tabulate observed values. You will observe when volume decreases pressure inside the syringe gets
increased and vice versa. Thus boyle’s law ( PV = constant) verified.
Cells alive
URL: http://www.physics-chemistry-interactive-flash-animation.com/matter_
change_state_measurement_mass_volume/pressure_volume_boyle_mariotte_law_
ideal_gas_closed_system_MCQ.htm
41 Thermal Physics

www.tntextbooks.in
ELECTRICITY
4
Learning Objectives
At the end of this lesson, students will be able to:

Make an electric circuit.
Differentiate between electric potential and potential difference.
Infer what electrical resistivity and conductivity mean.
Know the effective resistance of a system of resistors connected in series and parallel.
Understand the heating effect of the electric current.
Define electric power and electric energy and explain domestic electric circuits.
Know the modern appliances such as LED bulb and LED television.
the flow of water through a channel or flow of

INTRODUCTION
air from a region of high pressure to a region
You have already learnt about electricity in of low pressure.
your lower classes, haven’t you? Well, electricity In a similar manner,
deals with the flow of electric charges through the electric current passes
a conductor. As a common term it refers to a from the positive terminal
form of energy. The usage of electric current (higher electric potential)
in our day to day life is very important and of a battery to the negative
indispensable. You are already aware of the
terminal (lower electric
fact that it is used in houses, educational Figure 4.1
potential) through a wire
institutions, hospitals, industries, etc. Therefore, Electron flow
as shown in the Figure 4.1.
its generation and transmission becomes a very
crucial aspect of our life. In this lesson you will
learn various terms used in understanding the 4.1.1 Definition of electric
concept of electricity. Eventually, you will realise current
the importance of the applications of electricity
Electric current is often termed as
in day to day situations.
‘current’ and it is represented by the symbol ‘I’.
It is defined as the rate of flow of charges in a
4.1 ELECTRIC CURRENT conductor. This means that the electric current
represents the amount of charges flowing in
The motion of electric charges (electrons) any cross section of a conductor (say a metal
through a conductor (e.g., copper wire) will wire) in unit time. If a net charge ‘Q’ passes
constitute an electric current. This is similar to through any cross section of a conductor in

www.tntextbooks.in
time ‘t’, then the current flowing through the

4.2 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT
conductor is
I = (4.1) An electric circuit is a closed conducting

loop (or) path, which has a network of electrical
components through which electrons are able
4.1.2 SI unit of electric current
to flow. This path is made using electrical wires
The SI unit of electric current is ampere so as to connect an electric appliance to a source
(A). The current flowing through a conductor of electric charges (battery). A schematic
is said to be one ampere, when a charge of one diagram of an electric circuit comprising of a
coulomb flows across any cross-section of a battery, an electric bulb, and a switch is given
conductor, in one second. Hence, in Figure 4.2.
1 ampere = .
Solved Problem-1
A charge of 12 coulomb flows through a
bulb in 5 second. What is the current through
the bulb?
Solution:
Charge Q = 12 C, Time t = 5 s. Therefore, Figure 4.2 A simple electric circuit
current I = = = 2.4 A
Table 4.1 Symbols of some components of a circuit
COMPONENT USE OF THE COMPONENT SYMBOL USED
Resistor Used to fix the magnitude of the current

through a circuit
Variable resistor Used to select the magnitude of the current
or Rheostat through a circuit.
Ammeter Used to measure the current.
Voltmeter Used to measure the potential difference.
Galvanometer Used to detect the current and its direction.
A diode It is used in electronic devices.
Light Emitting
It is used in seven segment display.
Diode (LED)
Used to provide protection to the electrical

Ground
components. It also serves as a reference point
connection
to measure the electric potential.
43 Electricity

www.tntextbooks.in
In this circuit, if the switch is ‘on’, the bulb 4.3.2 Electric Potential Difference
glows. If it is switched off, the bulb does not The electric potential difference between
glow. Therefore, the circuit must be closed two points is defined as the amount of work
in order that the current passes through it. done in moving a unit positive charge from
The potential difference required for the flow one point to another point against the electric
of charges is provided by the battery. The force.
electrons flow from the negative terminal to
Q
the positive terminal of the battery. A B
By convention, the direction of current Figure 4.3 Electric potential
is taken as the direction of flow of positive
charge (or) opposite to the direction of flow Suppose, you have moved a charge Q
of electrons. Thus, electric current passes in from a point A to another point B. Let ‘W’
the circuit from the positive terminal to the be the work done to move the charge from A
negative terminal. to B. Then, the potential difference between
4.2.1 Electrical components the points A and B is given by the following
expression:
The electric circuit given in Figure
4.2 consists of different components, such
Potential = (4.2)
as a battery, a switch and a bulb. All these
components can be represented by using Difference (V)
certain symbols. It is easier to represent the
Potential difference is also equal to the
components of a circuit using their respective
symbols. difference in the electric potential of these
The symbols that are used to represent two points. If VA and VB represent the electric
some commonly used components are given potential at the points A and B respectively,
in Table 4.1. The uses of these components are then, the potential difference between the
also summarized in the table. points A and B is given by:
V = VA – VB (if VA is more than VB)
4.3 ELECTRIC POTENTIAL AND V = VB – VA (if VB is more than VA)
POTENTIAL DIFFERENCE
You are now familiar with the water 4.3.3 Volt
current and air current. You also know that The SI unit of electric potential or potential
there must be a difference in temperature
difference is volt (V).
between two points in a solid for the heat to
The potential difference between two
flow in it. Similarly, a difference in electric
potential is needed for the flow of electric points is one volt, if one joule of work is done
charges in a conductor. In the conductor, the in moving one coulomb of charge from one
charges will flow from a point in it, which is at point to another against the electric force.
a higher electric potential to a point, which is
at a lower electric potential. 1volt =
4.3.1 Electric Potential

The electric potential at a point is defined Solved Problem-2
as the amount of work done in moving a unit The work done in moving a charge of 10 C
positive charge from infinity to that point across two points in a circuit is 100 J. What is
against the electric force. the potential difference between the points?

www.tntextbooks.in
Solution:
Charge, Q = 10 C Work Done, W = 100 J
Potential Difference V = = .
Therefore, V = 10 volt
4.4 OHM’S LAW
A German physicist, Georg Simon Ohm

established the relation between the potential
Figure 4.5 Relation between potential
difference and current, which is known as
difference and current
Ohm’s Law. This relationship can be understood
from the following activity.
4.5 RESISTANCE OF A
MATERIAL
In Figure 4.4, a Nichrome wire was

connected between X and Y. If you replace
the Nichrome wire with a copper wire and
conduct the same experiment, you will
notice a different current for the same value
of the potential difference across the wire.
Figure 4.4 Electric circuit to understand If you again replace the copper wire with an
Ohm’s law aluminium wire, you will get another value for
the current passing through it. From equation
According to Ohm’s law, at a constant (4.3), you have learnt that V/I must be equal
temperature, the steady current ‘I’ flowing to the resistance of the conductor used. The
through a conductor is directly proportional variations in the current for the same values of
to the potential difference ‘V’ between the two potential difference indicate that the resistance
ends of the conductor. of different materials is different. Now, the
primary question is, “what is resistance?”
I V. Hence, = constant.
Resistance of a material is its property
to oppose the flow of charges and hence the
The value of this proportionality constant is
passage of current through it. It is different for
found to be different materials.
Therefore, I = V From Ohm’s Law, = R.

The resistance of a conductor can be
V = I R(4.3) defined as the ratio between the potential
Here, R is a constant for a given material difference across the ends of the conductor
(say Nichrome) at a given temperature and is and the current flowing through it.
known as the resistance of the material. Since,
4.5.1 Unit of Resistance
the potential difference V is proportional to the
current I, the graph between V and I is a straight The SI unit of resistance is ohm and it is
line for a conductor, as shown in the Figure 4.5. represented by the symbol Ω.
45 Electricity

www.tntextbooks.in
Resistance of a conductor is said to be Hence, the electrical resistivity of a

one ohm if a current of one ampere flows material is defined as the resistance of a
through it when a potential difference of one conductor of unit length and unit area of cross
volt is maintained across its ends. section. Its unit is ohm metre.
Electrical resistivity of a conductor is a
1 ohm =
measure of the resisting power of a specified
material to the passage of an electric current. It
Solved Problem-3 is a constant for a given material.
Calculate the resistance of a conductor
through which a current of 2 A passes, when Nichrome is a conductor with
the potential difference between its ends is highest resistivity equal to
30 V. –6
1.5 × 10 Ω m. Hence, it is used
Solution: in making heating elements.
Current through the conductor I = 2 A,
Potential Difference V = 30 V 4.6.2 Conductance and
Conductivity
From Ohm’s Law: R = .
Conductance of a material is the property
Therefore, R = = 15 Ω of a material to aid the flow of charges and
hence, the passage of current in it. The
conductance of a material is mathematically
4.6 ELECTRICAL RESISTIVITY defined as the reciprocal of its resistance (R).
& ELECTRICAL Hence, the conductance ‘G’ of a conductor is
CONDUCTIVITY given by
G= (4.5)
4.6.1 Electrical Resistivity
Its unit is ohm–1. It is also represented as
You can verify by doing an experiment ‘mho’.
that the resistance of any conductor ‘R’ is
The reciprocal of electrical resistivity of
directly proportional to the length of the
a material is called its electrical conductivity.
conductor ‘L’ and is inversely proportional to
its area of cross section ‘A’.
= (4.6)
R L, R , –1 –1
Its unit is ohm metre . It is also
–1
represented as mho metre . The conductivity
Hence , R
is a constant for a given material. Electrical
conductivity of a conductor is a measure
Therefore, R = ρ (4.4)
of its ability to pass the current through
Where, ρ (rho) is a constant, called as it. Some materials are good conductors of
electrical resistivity or specific resistance of the electric current. Example: copper, aluminium,
material of the conductor. etc. While some other materials are non-
From equation (4.4), ρ = conductors of electric current (insulators).
Example: glass, wood, rubber, etc.
If L = 1 m, A = 1 m2 then, from the above Conductivity is more for conductors than
equation ρ = R for insulators. But, the resistivity is less for

www.tntextbooks.in
conductors than for insulators. The resistivity is known as ‘system of resistors’ or ‘grouping of
of some commonly used materials is given in resistors’. Resistors can be connected in various
Table 4.2. combinations. The two basic methods of joining
resistors together are:
Table 4.2 Resistivity of some materials
a) Resistors connected in series, and b)
NATURE OF Resistors connected in parallel.
THE RESISTIVITY
In the following sections, you shall
MATERIAL MATERIAL (Ω m)
compute the effective resistance when many
Copper 1.62 × 10–8
resistors having different resistance values are
Conductor
Nickel 6.84 × 10–8 connected in series and in parallel.
Chromium 12.9 × 10–8
Glass 1010 to 1014
4.7.1 Resistors in series
Insulator A series circuit connects the components
Rubber 1013 to 1016
one after the other to form a ‘single loop’. A
series circuit has only one loop through which
Solved Problem-4 current can pass. If the circuit is interrupted
The resistance of a wire of length 10 m at any point in the loop, no current can pass
is 2 ohm. If the area of cross section of the through the circuit and hence no electric
wire is 2 × 10–7 m2, determine its (i) resistivity appliances connected in the circuit will
(ii) conductance and (iii) conductivity work. Series circuits are commonly used in
Solution: devices such as flashlights. Thus, if resistors
are connected end to end, so that the same
Given: Length, L = 10 m, Resistance, R = 2
–7 2 current passes through each of them, then
ohm and Area, A = 2 × 10 m
they are said to be connected in series.
Resistivity, = =
= 4 × 10–8 Ω m
Conductance, G = = = 0.5 mho
Figure 4.6 Series connection of resistors

Conductivity, = =
Let, three resistances R1, R2 and R3 be
8 –1
= 0.25 × 10 mho m connected in series (Figure 4.6). Let the current
flowing through them be I. According to Ohm’s
4.7 SYSTEM OF RESISTORS Law, the potential differences V1, V2 and V3
across R1, R2 and R3 respectively, are given by:
So far, you have learnt how the resistance V1 = I R1(4.7)
of a conductor affects the current through V2 = I R2 ( 4.8)
a circuit. You have also studied the case of
V3 = I R3 (4.9)
the simple electric circuit containing a single
resistor. Now in practice, you may encounter a The sum of the potential differences across
complicated circuit, which uses a combination the ends of each resistor is given by:
of many resistors. This combination of resistors V = V1 + V2 + V3
47 Electricity

www.tntextbooks.in
Using equations (4.7), (4.8) and (4.9), we get

V = I R1 + I R2 + I R3(4.10)
The effective resistor is a single resistor,
which can replace the resistors effectively,
so as to allow the same current through the
electric circuit. Let, the effective resistance of
the series-combination of the resistors, be RS.
Then, Figure 4.7 Parallel connections of resistors
V = I RS(4.11)
Consider that three resistors R1, R2 and
Combining equations (4.10) and (4.11), R3 are connected across two common points
you get, A and B. The potential difference across each
I RS = I R1 + I R2 + I R3 resistance is the same and equal to the potential
RS = R1 + R2 + R3(4.12) difference between A and B. This is measured
Thus, you can understand that when a using the voltmeter. The current I arriving at A
number of resistors are connected in series, divides into three branches I1, I2 and I3 passing
their equivalent resistance or effective through R1, R2 and R3 respectively.
resistance is equal to the sum of the According to the Ohm’s law, you have,
individual resistances. When ‘n’ resistors of I1 = (4.13)
equal resistance R are connected in series,
the equivalent resistance is ‘n R’.
I2 = (4.14)
i.e., RS = n R
The equivalent resistance in a series I3 = (4.15)
combination is greater than the highest of the
individual resistances. The total current through the circuit is
Solved Problem-5 given by
Three resistors of resistances 5 ohm, 3 ohm I = I1 + I2 + I3
and 2 ohm are connected in series with 10 V Using equations (4.13), (4.14) and (4.15),
battery. Calculate their effective resistance and you get
the current flowing through the circuit.
I= + + (4.16)
Solution:
R1 = 5 Ω, R2 = 3 Ω, R3 = 2 Ω, V = 10 V Let the effective resistance of the parallel
Rs = R1 + R2 + R3, Rs = 5 + 3 + 2 = 10, hence combination of resistors be RP. Then,
Rs = 10 Ω
The current, I = = =1A I= (4.17)
4.7.2 Resistances in Parallel Combining equations (4.16) and (4.17),

you have
A parallel circuit has two or more loops
through which current can pass. If the = + +
circuit is disconnected in one of the loops,
the current can still pass through the other
loop(s). The wiring in a house consists of = + + (4.18)
parallel circuits.

www.tntextbooks.in
Thus, when a number of resistors Using equation (4.18), you get

are connected in parallel, the sum of the
reciprocals of the individual resistances is = +
equal to the reciprocal of the effective or
equivalent resistance. When ‘n’ resistors of = +
equal resistances R are connected in parallel,
the equivalent resistance is . Finally, using equation (4.12), the net effective
resistance is given by Rtotal = RP1 + RP2
i.e., = + + ... + = . 4.7.4 Parallel Connection of
Series Resistors
Hence, Rp = If you consider a connection of a set of
series resistors connected in a parallel circuit,
The equivalent resistance in a parallel you get a parallel-series circuit. Let R1 and R2 be
combination is less than the lowest of the connected in series to give an effective resistance
individual resistances. of RS1. Similarly, let R3 and R4 be connected in
series to give an effective resistance of RS2. Then,
4.7.3 S
eries Connection of
both of these serial segments are connected in
Parallel Resistors
parallel (Figure 4.9).
If you consider the connection of a set of
parallel resistors that are connected in series,
you get a series – parallel circuit. Let R1 and
R2 be connected in parallel to give an effective
resistance of RP1. Similarly, let R3 and R4 be
connected in parallel to give an effective
resistance of RP2. Then, both of these parallel
segments are connected in series (Figure 4.8).
Figure 4.9 Parallel-series combination

of resistors
Using equation (4.12), you get

RS1 = R1 + R2, RS2 = R3 + R4
Finally, using equation (4.18), the net effective
resistance is given by
= +
4.7.5 Difference between series

Figure 4.8 Series-parallel combination of and parallel connections
resistors The difference between series and parallel
circuits may be summed as follows in Table 4.3
49 Electricity

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 4.3 Difference between series and parallel circuit
S. No. CRITERIA SERIES PARALLEL

1 Equivalent resistance More than the highest resistance. Less than the lowest resistance.
2 Amount of current Current is less as effective Current is more as effective re-

resistance is more. sistance is less.
3 Switching ON/OFF If one appliance is disconnected, If one appliance is disconnected,

others also do not work. others will work independently.
4.8 HEATING EFFECT You know that the relation between the charge
OF CURRENT and current is Q = I t. Using this, you get
H = V I t (4.19)
Have you ever touched the motor casing
of a fan, which has been used for a few hours From Ohm’s Law, V = I R. Hence, you have
2
continuously? What do you observe? The H=I Rt (4.20)
motor casing is warm. This is due to the heating This is known as Joule’s law of heating.
effect of current. The same can be observed by
Joule’s law of heating states that the heat
touching a bulb, which was used for a long
duration. Generally, a source of electrical produced in any resistor is:
energy can develop a potential difference across • directly proportional to the square of the
a resistor, which is connected to that source. current passing through the resistor.
This potential difference constitutes a current • directly proportional to the resistance of
through the resistor. For continuous drawing the resistor.
of current, the source has to continuously
• directly proportional to the time for
spend its energy. A part of the energy from
which the current is passing through the
the source can be converted into useful work
and the rest will be converted into heat energy. resistor.
Thus, the passage of electric current through
a wire, results in the production of heat. This 4.8.2 Applications of Heating Effect
phenomenon is called heating effect of current. 1. Electric Heating Device:
This heating effect of current is used in devices
The heating effect of electric current is used
like electric heater, electric iron, etc.
in many home appliances such as electric iron,
electric toaster, electric oven, electric heater,
4.8.1 Joule’s Law of Heating
geyser, etc. In these appliances Nichrome,
Let ‘I’ be the current flowing through a which is an alloy of Nickel and Chromium is
resistor of resistance ‘R’, and ‘V’ be the potential used as the heating element. Why? Because:
difference across the resistor. The charge
flowing through the circuit for a time interval (i) it has high resistivity, (ii) it has a high
‘t’ is ‘Q’. melting point, (iii) it is not easily oxidized.
2. Fuse Wire:
The work done in moving the charge Q
across the ends of the resistor with a potential The fuse wire is connected in series, in an
difference of V is VQ. This energy spent by the electric circuit. When a large current passes
source gets dissipated in the resistor as heat. through the circuit, the fuse wire melts due to
Thus, the heat produced in the resistor is: Joule’s heating effect and hence the circuit gets
disconnected. Therefore, the circuit and the
H = W = VQ

www.tntextbooks.in
electric appliances are saved from any damage. 4.9.1 Unit of Electric Power
The fuse wire is made up of a material whose The SI unit of electric power is watt. When
melting point is relatively low. a current of 1 ampere passes across the ends of
a conductor, which is at a potential difference
3. Filament in bulbs:
of 1 volt, then the electric power is
In electric bulbs, a small wire is used,
known as filament. The filament is made up of P = 1 volt × 1 ampere = 1 watt
a material whose melting point is very high. Thus, one watt is the power consumed
When current passes through this wire, heat is when an electric device is operated at a potential
produced in the filament. When the filament is difference of one volt and it carries a current of
heated, it glows and gives out light. Tungsten one ampere. A larger unit of power, which is
is the commonly used material to make the more commonly used is kilowatt.
filament in bulbs.
HORSE POWER:
Solved Problem-6 The horse power (hp) is a unit
An electric heater of resistance 5 Ω is in the foot-pound-second (fps)
connected to an electric source. If a current or English system, sometimes used to express
of 6 A flows through the heater, then find the the electric power. It is equal to 746 watt.
amount of heat produced in 5 minutes.
Solution: 4.9.2 Consumption of electrical
Given resistance R = 5 Ω, Current I = 6 A, energy
Time t = 5 minutes = 5 × 60 s = 300 s Electricity is consumed both in houses
Amount of heat produced, H = I2Rt, and industries. Consumption of electricity is
H = 62 × 5 × 300. Hence, H = 54000 J based on two factors: (i) Amount of electric
power and (ii) Duration of usage. Electrical
energy consumed is taken as the product of
4.9 ELECTRIC POWER electric power and time of usage. For example,
if 100 watt of electric power is consumed
In general, power is defined as the rate
for two hours, then the power consumed is
of doing work or rate of spending energy.
100 × 2 = 200 watt hour. Consumption of
Similarly, the electric power is defined as the
electrical energy is measured and expressed
rate of consumption of electrical energy. It
in watt hour, though its SI unit is watt second.
represents the rate at which the electrical energy
In practice, a larger unit of electrical energy is
is converted into some other form of energy.
needed. This larger unit is kilowatt hour (kWh).
Suppose a current ‘I’ flows through a One kilowatt hour is otherwise known as one
conductor of resistance ‘R’ for a time ‘t’, then the unit of electrical energy. One kilowatt hour
potential difference across the two ends of the means that an electric power of 1000 watt has
conductor is ‘V’. The work done ‘W’ to move been utilized for an hour. Hence,
the charge across the ends of the conductor is 1 kWh = 1000 watt hour = 1000 × (60 × 60)
given by the equation (4.19) as follows:
watt second = 3.6 × 106 J
W = V I t, Power P = =
4.10 DOMESTIC ELECTRIC
P = V I (4.21) CIRCUITS
Thus, the electric power is the product of The electricity produced in power stations
the electric current and the potential difference is distributed to all the domestic and industrial
due to which the current passes in a circuit. consumers through overhead and underground
51 Electricity

www.tntextbooks.in
cables. The diagram, which shows the general The electricity is brought to houses by
scheme of a domestic electric circuit, is given two insulated wires. Out of these two wires,
in Figure 4.10. one wire has a red insulation and is called
In our homes, electricity is distributed the ‘live wire’. The other wire has a black
through the domestic electric circuits wired insulation and is called the ‘neutral wire’.
by the electricians. The first stage of the The electricity supplied to your house is
domestic circuit is to bring the power supply to actually an alternating current having an
the main-box from a distribution panel, such electric potential of 220 V. Both, the live wire
as a transformer. The important components and the neutral wire enter into a box where
of the main-box are: (i) a fuse box and (ii) the main fuse is connected with the live
a meter. The meter is used to record the wire. After the electricity meter, these wires
consumption of electrical energy. The fuse enter into the main switch, which is used to
box contains either a fuse wire or a miniature discontinue the electricity supply whenever
circuit breaker (MCB). The function of the required. After the main switch, these wires
fuse wire or a MCB is to protect the house are connected to live wires of two separate
hold electrical appliances from overloading circuits. Out of these two circuits, one circuit
due to excess current. is of a 5 A rating, which is used to run the
electric appliances with a lower power rating,
such as tube lights, bulbs and fans. The other
circuit is of a 15 A rating, which is used to
run electric appliances with a high power
rating, such as air-conditioners, refrigerators,
electric iron and heaters. It should be noted
that all the circuits in a house are connected
in parallel, so that the disconnection of one
circuit does not affect the other circuit. One
more advantage of the parallel connection of
Figure 4.10 Domestic electric circuit circuits is that each electric appliance gets an
You have learnt about a fuse wire in section equal voltage.
4.8.2. An MCB is a switching device, which can
be activated automatically as well as manually. In India, domestic circuits
It has a spring attached to the switch, which is are supplied with an alternating
attracted by an electromagnet when an excess current of potential 220/230V
current passes through the circuit. Hence, and frequency 50 Hz. In countries like USA
the circuit is broken and the protection of the and UK, domestic circuits are supplied with
appliance is ensured. Figure 4.11 represents a an alternating current of potential 110/120 V
fuse and an MCB. and frequency 60 Hz.
4.10.1 Overloading and Short

circuiting
The fuse wire or MCB will disconnect the
circuit in the event of an overloading and short
circuiting. Over loading happens when a large
Figure 4.11 A fuse and an MCB
number of appliances are connected in series to

www.tntextbooks.in
the same source of electric power. This leads to street lights, decorative lights, etc., are some
a flow of excess current in the electric circuit. examples for the use of LEDs.
When the amount of current passing through
4.11.1 Seven Segment Display
a wire exceeds the maximum permissible
limit, the wires get heated to such an extent
that a fire may be caused. This is known as
overloading. When a live wire comes in contact
with a neutral wire, it causes a ‘short circuit’.
This happens when the insulation of the wires
get damaged due to temperature changes or
some external force. Due to a short circuit, the
effective resistance in the circuit becomes very
small, which leads to the flow of a large current
through the wires. This results in heating of
wires to such an extent that a fire may be caused
Figure 4.12 Seven segment display
in the building.
A ‘Seven Segment Display’ is the display
4.10.2 Earthing device used to give an output in the form of
In domestic circuits, a third wire called the numbers or text. It is used in digital meters,
earth wire having a green insulation is usually digital clocks, micro wave ovens, etc. It consists
of 7 segments of LEDs in the form of the digit
connected to the body of the metallic electric
8. These seven LEDs are named as a, b, c, d, e, f
appliance. The other end of the earth wire is
and g (Figure 4.12). An extra 8th LED is used to
connected to a metal tube or a metal electrode,
display a dot.
which is buried into the Earth. This wire
provides a low resistance path to the electric 4.11.2 Merits of a LED bulb
current. The earth wire sends the current
1. As there is no filament, there is no loss
from the body of the appliance to the Earth, of energy in the form of heat. It is cooler
whenever a live wire accidentally touches the than the incandescent bulb.
body of the metallic electric appliance. Thus, 2. In comparison with the fluorescent light,
the earth wire serves as a protective conductor, the LED bulbs have significantly low
which saves us from electric shocks. power requirement.
3. It is not harmful to the environment.
4. A wide range of colours is possible here.
4.11 LED BULB 5. It is cost-efficient and energy efficient.
6. Mercury and other toxic materials are not
An LED bulb is a semiconductor device required.
that emits visible light when an electric One way of overcoming the energy crisis
current passes through it. The colour of is to use more LED bulbs.
the emitted light will depend on the type of
materials used. With the help of the chemical
4.12 LED TELEVISION
compounds like Gallium Arsenide and
Gallium Phosphide, the manufacturer can LED Television is one of the most
produce LED bulbs that radiates red, green, important applications of Light Emitting
yellow and orange colours. Displays in digital Diodes. An LED TV is actually an LCD TV
watches and calculators, traffic signals, (Liquid Crystal Display) with LED display.
53 Electricity

www.tntextbooks.in
An LED display uses LEDs for backlight and This phenomenon is called heating effect
an array of LEDs act as pixels. LEDs emitting of current.
white light are used in monochrome (black One horse power is equal to 746 watts.
and white) TV; Red, Green and Blue (RGB) The function of a fuse wire or a MCB
LEDs are used in colour television. The first is to protect the house hold electrical
LED television screen was developed by James appliances from excess current due to
P. Mitchell in 1977. It was a monochromatic
overloading or a short circuit.
display. But, after about three decades, in
2009, SONY introduced the first commercial Solved Problems
LED Television.
1. Two bulbs are having the ratings as 60 W,
4.12.1 Advantages of LED 220 V and 40 W, 220 V respectively. Which
television one has a greater resistance?
• It has brighter picture quality.
Solution: 2
• It is thinner in size. V
Electric power P =
• It uses less power and consumes very less R
energy. For the same value of V, R is inversely
proportional to P.
• Its life span is more.
• It is more reliable. Therefore, lesser the power, greater the
resistance
Points to Remember Hence, the bulb with 40 W, 220 V rating
T he magnitude of current is defined has a greater resistance.
as the rate of flow of charges in a
conductor. 2. Calculate the current and the resistance of
The SI unit of electric current is ampere (A). a 100 W, 200 V electric bulb in an electric

The SI unit of electric potential and circuit.
potential difference is volt (V). Solution:
An electric circuit is a network of electrical
Power P = 100 W and Voltage V = 200 V
components, which forms a continuous
and closed path for an electric current to Power P = V I
pass through it. So, Current, I = = 100 = 0.5 A
200
The parameters of conductors like

its length, area of cross-section and Resistance, R = = = 400 Ω
material, affect the resistance of the
conductor.
3. In the circuit diagram given below, three
SI unit of electrical resistivity is ohm
resistors R1, R2 and R3 of 5 Ω, 10 Ω and
metre. The resistivity is a constant for a
20 Ω respectively are connected as shown.
given material.
Calculate:
The reciprocal of electrical resistivity
of a material is called its electrical
conductivity.
1
σ=
ρ
The passage of electric current through
a wire results in the production of heat.

www.tntextbooks.in
A) Current through each resistor

=
B) Total current in the circuit
C) Total resistance in the circuit Hence, = = 2.857 Ω
Solution: 4. Three resistors of 1 Ω, 2 Ω and 4 Ω are

connected in parallel in a circuit. If a 1 Ω
A)
Since the resistors are connected in
resistor draws a current of 1 A, find the
parallel, the potential difference across
current through the other two resistors.
each resistor is same (i.e. V=10V)
Therefore, the current through R1 is,
Solution:
I1 = = =2A R1 = 1 Ω, R2 = 2 Ω, R3 = 4 Ω Current I1 = 1 A
Current through R2 = I2 = = =1A The potential difference across the 1 Ω resistor

= I1 R1 = 1 × 1 = 1 V
Current through R3 = I3 = = = 0.5 A Since, the resistors are connected in parallel

in the circuit, the same potential difference will
B) Total current in the circuit, I = I1 + I2 + I3 exist across the other resistors also.
= 2 + 1 + 0.5 = 3.5 A
So, the current in the 2 Ω resistor, = = 0.5 A
C) Total resistance in the circuit = + +
Similarly, the current in the 4 Ω resistor,

= + +
= = = 0.25 A
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the best answer 3. In a simple circuit, why does the bulb glow
when you close the switch?
1. Which of the following is correct?
a) The switch produces electricity.
a) Rate of change of charge is electrical power.
b) Closing the switch completes the circuit.
b) Rate of change of charge is current.
c) Closing the switch breaks the circuit.
c) Rate of change of energy is current.
d) The bulb is getting charged.
d) Rate of change of current is charge.
4. Kilowatt hour is the unit of
2. SI unit of resistance is
a) resistivity b) conductivity
a) mho b) joule
c) electrical energy d) electrical power
c) ohm d) ohm meter
55 Electricity

www.tntextbooks.in
II. Fill in the blanks b) if both the assertion and the reason are
1.
When a circuit is open, _____________ true, but the reason is not the correct
cannot pass through it. explanation of the assertion.
2. The ratio of the potential difference to the c) if the assertion is true, but the reason is
current is known as ________. false.
3. The wiring in a house consists of _________ d) if the assertion is false, but the reason is
circuits. true.
4. The power of an electric device is a product Assertion: E

1. lectric appliances with a
of _________ and __________. metallic body have three wire
connections.
5. LED stands for ___________________.
Reason: Three pin connections reduce
heating of the connecting wires
III. State whether the following statements
are true or false: If false correct the Assertion: I n a simple battery circuit the
2.
statement. point of highest potential is
the positive terminal of the
1. Ohm’s law states the relationship between battery.
power and voltage.
Reason: The current flows towards the
2. MCB is used to protect house hold electrical point of the highest potential
appliances.
Assertion: L
3. ED bulbs are far better than
The SI unit for electric current is the
3. incandescent bulbs.
coulomb.
Reason: LED bulbs consume less power
4. One unit of electrical energy consumed is than incandescent bulbs.
equal to 1000 kilowatt hour.
5. The effective resistance of three resistors VI. Very short answer questions.
connected in series is lesser than the lowest 1. Define the unit of current.
of the individual resistances.
2.
What happens to the resistance, as the
conductor is made thicker?
IV. Match the items in column-I to the items 3. Why is tungsten metal used in bulbs, but
in column-II: not in fuse wires?
Column - I Column - II 4. Name any two devices, which are working
(i) electric current (a) volt on the heating effect of the electric current.
(ii) potential difference (b) ohm meter
(iii) specific resistance (c) watt
VII. Short answer questions
(iv) electrical power (d) joule
1.
Define electric potential and potential
(v) electrical energy (e) ampere
difference.
V. Assertion and reason type questions: 2.

What is the role of the earth wire in
domestic circuits?
3. State Ohm’s law.
a) if both the assertion and the reason are true
and the reason is the correct explanation of 4.
Distinguish between the resistivity and
the assertion. conductivity of a conductor.

www.tntextbooks.in
5.
What connection is used in domestic 4 A piece of wire having a resistance R is cut
appliances and why? into five equal parts.
a) How will the resistance of each part
VIII. Long answer questions. of the wire change compared with the
1. With the help of a circuit diagram derive original resistance?
the formula for the resultant resistance of b) If the five parts of the wire are placed in
three resistances connected: a) in series parallel, how will the resistance of the
and b) in parallel combination change?
2. a) What is meant by electric current? c)
What will be ratio of the effective
b) Name and define its unit. resistance in series connection to that
c) Which instrument is used to measure of the parallel connection?
the electric current? How should it be
connected in a circuit? X. HOTS:
3. a) State Joule’s law of heating. 1. Two resistors when connected in parallel give
b) An alloy of nickel and chromium is the resultant resistance of 2 ohm; but when
used as the heating element. Why? connected in series the effective resistance
c) How does a fuse wire protect electrical becomes 9 ohm. Calculate the value of each
appliances? resistance.
4.
Explain about domestic electric circuits. 2.
How many electrons are passing per
(circuit diagram not required) second in a circuit in which there is a
current of 5 A?
5. a) What are the advantages of LED TV
over the normal TV? 3. A piece of wire of resistance 10 ohm is drawn
b) List the merits of LED bulb. out so that its length is increased to three
times its original length. Calculate the new
resistance.
IX. Numerical problems:
1.
An electric iron consumes energy at
the rate of 420 W when heating is at the
REFERENCE BOOKS
maximum rate and 180 W when heating is
at the minimum rate. The applied voltage is 1. Electrodynamics by Griffiths
220 V. What is the current in each case?
2.
Fundamentals of Electric Circuits by
2. A 100 watt electric bulb is used for 5 hours Charles Alexander
daily and four 60 watt bulbs are used for
5 hours daily. Calculate the energy consumed
(in kWh) in the month of January. I NT ER NET R ES O U RCES
3. A torch bulb is rated at 3 V and 600 mA. https://www.elprocus.com/basic-electrical-

Calculate it’s circuits-and-their-working-for-electrical-
a) power engineers/
b) resistance https://www.physicsclassroom.com/calcpad/
c) energy consumed if it is used for 4 hour. circuits
57 Electricity

www.tntextbooks.in
ICT CORNER Ohm’s Law

In this activity you will be able to (i) verify Ohm’s law (ii) understand the relation between
current, voltage and resistance.
Steps • Open the browser and type “olabs.edu.in” in the address bar. Click physics tab and then click
“Ohm’s law and resistance” under class 10 section. Go to “simulator” tab to do the experiment.
• Construct the electric circuit as per the connection diagram by clicking “show circuit diagram”
tab. You can connect wires between electric component by dragging the mouse between the
component.
• Switch on the key and note down the voltage (V) and curren (I). Find the value of resistance
using the formula R = V . Repeat the experiment for different values of voltage and current.
I
Check whether the resistance remains constant.
• Find the value of Resistance/(length (in Cm)). Enter the value of resistance and resistance per
unit length in the result. Verify the answer.
Note:
1. One time sign up is needed to do simulation. Then login using that username
and password.
2. Read theory, procedure and animation to get the theory by clicking the
corresponding tab.
Link
URL:http://amrita.olabs.edu.in/?sub=1&brch=4&sim=99&cnt=4

www.tntextbooks.in
ACOUSTICS
5
Learning Objectives
By the end of this section, the students will be able to:

� Understand how sound is produced and transmitted.
� Relate the speed of sound, its frequency, and its wavelength.
� Know the speed of sound in various media.
� Explain the factors affecting the speed of sound in a gaseous medium.
� Demonstrate the phenomenon of reflection of sound.
� Determine the speed of sound using the method of echo.
� Understand Doppler Effect.
� Solve numerical problems related to the above topics.
INTRODUCTION 5.1 SOUND WAVES
Sound plays a major role in our lives. When you think about sound, the questions
We communicate with each other mainly that arise in your minds are: How is sound
through sound. In our daily life, we hear produced? How does sound reach our ears from
a variety of sounds produced by different various sources? What is sound? Is it a force or
sources like humans, animals, vehicle energy? Let us answer all these questions.
horns, etc. Hence, it becomes inevitable to By touching a ringing bell or a musical
understand how sound is produced, how it instrument while it is producing music, you can
is propagated and how you hear the sound conclude that sound is produced by vibrations.
from various sources. It is sometimes The vibrating bodies produce energy in the
misinterpreted that acoustics only deals with form of waves, which are nothing but sound
musical instruments and design of auditoria waves (Figure 5.1).
and concert halls. But, acoustics is a branch
of physics that deals with production,
transmission, reception, control, and effects
of sound. You have studied about propagation
and properties of sound waves in IX standard.
In this lesson we will study about reflection
of sound waves, Echo and Doppler effect. Figure 5.1 Production of sound waves
59

www.tntextbooks.in
Suppose you and your friend are on the 5.1.2 Categories of sound waves
Moon. Will you be able to hear any sound based on their frequencies
produced by your friend? As the Moon does
(i) Audible waves – These are sound
not have air, you will not be able to hear any
waves with a frequency ranging between
sound produced by your friend. Hence, you
20 Hz and 20,000 Hz. These are generated by
understand that the sound produced due
vibrating bodies such as vocal cords, stretched
to the vibration of different bodies needs a
strings etc.
material medium like air, water, steel, etc, for
(ii) Infrasonic waves – These are sound
its propagation. Hence, sound can propagate
waves with a frequency below 20 Hz that cannot
through a gaseous medium or a liquid medium
be heard by the human ear. e.g., waves produced
or a solid medium.
during earth quake, ocean waves, sound produced
by whales, etc.
ACTIVITY 1
(iii) Ultrasonic waves – These are sound
Take a squeaky toy or old mobile phone waves with a frequency greater than 20 kHz,
and put it inside a plastic bag. Seal the bag Human ear cannot detect these waves, but
with the help of a candle or with a thread. certain creatures like mosquito, dogs, bats,
Fill a bucket with water and place the bag in dolphins can detect these waves. e.g., waves
the water bucket and squeeze the toy or ring produced by bats.
the mobile. You will hear a low sound. Now
place your ear against the side of the bucket 5.1.3 Difference between the
and squeeze the toy or ring the mobile sound and light waves
phone again. You will hear a louder sound.
S.No. SOUND LIGHT
1 Medium is Medium is not
5.1.1 Longitudinal Waves
required for the required for the
Sound waves are longitudinal waves propagation. propagation.
that can travel through any medium (solids,
liquids, gases) with a speed that depends 2 Sound waves are Light waves are
on the properties of the medium. As sound longitudinal. transverse.
travels through a medium, the particles of 3 Wavelength Wavelength
the medium vibrate along the direction of ranges from ranges from
propagation of the wave. This displacement 1.65 cm to 4 × 10–7 m to
involves the longitudinal displacements of 1.65 m. 7 × 10–7 m.
the individual molecules from their mean
4 Sound waves Light waves
positions. This results in a series of high and
low pressure regions called compressions and travel in air with travel in air
rarefactions as shown in figure 5.2. a speed of about with a speed of
340 ms–1 at NTP. 3 × 108 ms–1.
5.1.4 Velocity of sound waves

When you talk about the velocity
associated with any wave, there are two
velocities, namely particle velocity and wave
Figure 5.2 Sound propagates as velocity. SI unit of velocity is ms-1
longitudinal waves

www.tntextbooks.in
Particle velocity: Effect of density: The velocity of sound in a

The velocity with which the particles of the gas is inversely proportional to the square root
medium vibrate in order to transfer the energy of the density of the gas. Hence, the velocity
in the form of a wave is called particle velocity. decreases as the density of the gas increases.
1
Wave velocity: v √d
The velocity with which the wave travels Effect of temperature: The velocity of sound in
through the medium is called wave velocity. In a gas is directly proportional to the square root
of its temperature. The velocity of sound in a
other words, the distance travelled by a sound
gas increases with the increase in temperature. v
wave in unit time is called the velocity of a sound
∝ √T. Velocity at temperature T is given by the
wave.
following equation:
Distance
∴ Velocity =
Time taken vT = (vo + 0.61 T) ms–1
If the distance travelled by one wave is Here, vo is the velocity of sound in the
taken as one wavelength (λ) and, the time taken gas at 0° C. For air, vo = 331 ms–1. Hence, the
for this propagation is one time period (T), then, velocity of sound changes by 0.61 ms–1 when the
the expression for velocity can be written as temperature changes by one degree celsius.
λ
∴ V = (5.1) Effect of relative humidity: When humidity
T
Therefore, velocity can be defined as the increases, the speed of sound increases. That is
distance travelled per second by a sound wave. why you can hear sound from long distances
clearly during rainy seasons.
Since, Frequency (n) =1/T, equation (5.1) can
be written as Speed of sound waves in different media are
V = nλ (5.2) given in table 5.1.
Velocity of a sound wave is maximum in Table 5.1 Speed of sound in different media
solids because they are more elastic in nature
Nature Speed of
than liquids and gases. Since, gases are least S. Name of the
of the sound
elastic in nature, the velocity of sound is the No. Medium
medium (in ms–1)
least in a gaseous medium.
1 Copper 5010
So, vS > vL > vG
2 Solid Iron 5950
5.1.5 Factors affecting velocity 3 Aluminium 6420
of sound
4 Kerosene 1324
In the case of solids, the elastic properties
5 Liquid Water 1493
and the density of the solids affect the velocity
of sound waves. Elastic property of solids is 6 Sea water 1533
characterized by their elastic moduli. The speed of 7 Air (at 0o C) 331
sound is directly proportional to the square root Gas
of the elastic modulus and inversely proportional 8 Air (at 20o C) 343
to the square root of the density. Thus the velocity
of sound in solids decreases as the density
increases whereas the velocity of sound increases Example Problem 5.1
when the elasticity of the material increases. In 1. A
t what temperature will the velocity of
the case of gases, the following factors affect the sound in air be double the velocity of
velocity of sound waves. sound in air at 0o C?
61 Acoustics

www.tntextbooks.in
Solution: 5.2.1 Laws of reflection

Let T o C be the required temperature. Let v1
and v2 be the velocity of sound at temperatures Like light waves, sound
T1K and T2K respectively. T1 = 273K (0o C) and waves also obey some
T2 = (To C + 273)K fundamental laws of reflection.
The following two laws of
=√ T = √ 273273
v2 T2 +T
v1 1
=2 reflection are applicable to
sound waves as well.
Here, it is given that, v2 / v1 = 2.  The incident wave, the normal to the
273 + T reflecting surface and the reflected wave
So, =4
273 at the point of incidence lie in the same
T = (273 × 4) – 273 = 819o C plane.
 The angle of incidence ∠i is equal to the
angle of reflection ∠r.
5.2 REFLECTION OF SOUND These laws can be observed from Figure 5.4.
When you speak in an empty room, you hear

a soft repetition of your voice. This is nothing
but the reflection of the sound waves that you
produce. Let us discuss about the reflection of
sound in detail through the following activity.
When sound waves travel in a given
medium and strike the surface of another
medium, they can be bounced back into the
first medium. This phenomenon is known
as reflection. In simple the reflection and
refraction of sound is actually similar to the
reflection of light. Thus, the bouncing of sound Figure 5.4 Laws of reflection
waves from the interface between two media
is termed as the reflection of sound. The waves In the above Figure 5.4, the sound waves
that strike the interface are termed as the that travel towards the reflecting surface are
incident wave and the waves that bounce back called the incident waves. The sound waves
are termed as the reflected waves, as shown in bouncing back from the reflecting surface
Figure 5.3 are called reflected waves. For all practical
purposes, the point of incidence and the point
of reflection is the same point on the reflecting
surface.
A perpendicular line drawn at the point
of incidence is called the normal. The angle
which the incident sound wave makes with
the normal is called the angle of incidence,
‘i’. The angle which the reflected wave
makes with the normal is called the angle of
Figure 5.3 Reflection of sound reflection, ‘r’.

www.tntextbooks.in
separation is pushed backwards (Figure 5.6).

Acoustical wonder of
As the particles of the rarer medium are free to
Golconda fort (Hyderabad,
move, a rarefaction is produced at the interface.
Telangana)
Thus, a compression is reflected as a rarefaction
The Clapping portico in Golconda
and a rarefaction travels from right to left.
Fort is a series of arches on one side,
each smaller than the preceding one. So,
a sound wave generated under the dome
would get compressed and then bounce
back amplified sufficiently to reach a
considerable distance.
5.2.2 Reflection at the boundary 5.6 Reflection of sound at a rarer medium

of a denser medium
More to know:
A longitudinal wave
travels in a medium in the What is meant by rarer and denser medium?
form of compressions and The medium in which the velocity of sound
rarefactions. Suppose a increases compared to other medium is
compression travelling in air called rarer medium. (Water is rarer
from left to right reaches a compared to air for sound).
rigid wall. The compression exerts a force F on The medium in which the velocity of sound
the rigid wall. In turn, the wall exerts an equal and decreases compared to other medium is
opposite reaction R = – F on the air molecules. called denser medium. (Air is denser
This results in a compression near the rigid wall. compared to water for sound)
Thus, a compression travelling towards the rigid
wall is reflected back as a compression. That is the
5.2.4 R
eflection of sound in
direction of compression is reversed (Figure 5.5).
plane and curved surfaces
When sound waves are reflected from a
plane surface, the reflected waves travel in a
direction, according to the law of reflection.
The intensity of the reflected wave is neither
decreased nor increased. But, when the sound
waves are reflected from the curved surfaces,
Figure 5.5 Reflection of sound at a denser the intensity of the reflected waves is changed.
medium When reflected from a convex surface, the
reflected waves are diverged out and the
5.2.3 Reflection at the boundary
intensity is decreased. When sound is reflected
of a rarer medium
from a concave surface, the reflected waves
Consider a wave are converged and focused at a point. So the
travelling in a solid medium intensity of reflected waves is concentrated at
striking on the interface a point. Parabolic surfaces are used when it is
between the solid and the required to focus the sound at a particular point.
air. The compression exerts a Hence, many halls are designed with parabolic
force F on the surface of the reflecting surfaces. In elliptical surfaces, sound
rarer medium. As a rarer medium has smaller from one focus will always be reflected to the
resistance for any deformation, the surface of other focus, no matter where it strikes the wall.
63 Acoustics

www.tntextbooks.in
This principle is used in designing whispering least 0.1 s. Thus, the minimum time gap
halls. In a whispering hall, the speech of a between the original sound and an echo
person standing in one focus can be heard must be 0.1 s.
clearly by a listener standing at the other focus.
2. The above criterion can be satisfied only
when the distance between the source of
Whispering Gallery sound and the reflecting surface would
One of the famous whispering satisfy the following equation:
galleries is in St. Paul’s cathedral
church in London. It is built with elliptically distance travelled by sound
Velocity =
shaped walls. When a person is talking at one time taken
focus, his voice can be heard distinctly at the 2d
v =
other focus. It is due to the multiple reflections t
vt
of sound waves from the curved walls. d=
2
v × 0.1 v
Since, t = 0.1 second, then d = =
2 20
Thus the minimum distance required to

hear an echo is 1/20th part of the magnitude
of the velocity of sound in air. If you
consider the velocity of sound as 344 ms –1,
the minimum distance required to hear an
echo is 17.2 m.
5.3 ECHOES 5.3.2 Applications of echo
An echo is the sound reproduced due  Some animals communicate with each
to the reflection of the original sound from other over long distances and also locate
various rigid surfaces such as walls, ceilings, objects by sending the sound signals and
surfaces of mountains, etc. receiving the echo as reflected from the
targets.
If you shout or clap near a mountain or
near a reflecting surface, like a building you  The principle of echo is used in obstetric
can hear the same sound again. The sound, ultrasonography, which is used to create
which you hear is called an echo. It is due real-time visual images of the developing
to the reflection of sound. One does not embryo or fetus in the mother’s uterus.
experience any echo sound in a small room.
This is a safe testing tool, as it does not use
This does not mean that sound is not reflected
in a small room. This is because smaller rooms any harmful radiations.
do not satisfy the basic conditions for hearing  Echo is used to determine the velocity of
an echo. sound waves in any medium.
5.3.1 C
onditions necessary for
hearing echo 5.3.3 M
easuring velocity of
sound by echo method
1.
The persistence of hearing for human
ears is 0.1 second. This means that you Apparatus required:
can hear two sound waves clearly, if the A source of sound pulses, a measuring
time interval between the two sounds is at tape, a sound receiver, and a stop watch.

www.tntextbooks.in
Procedure: 5.4.2 Ear trumpet

1.
Measure the distance ‘d’ between the Ear trumpet is a hearing aid, which is
source of sound pulse and the reflecting useful by people who have difficulty in hearing.
surface using the measuring tape.
In this device, one end is wide and the other
2. The receiver is also placed adjacent to the end is narrow. The sound from the sources fall
source. A sound pulse is emitted by the into the wide end and are reflected by its walls
source. into the narrow part of the device. This helps in
concentrating the sound and the sound enters
3. The stopwatch is used to note the time the ear drum with more intensity. This enables
interval between the instant at which a person to hear the sound better.
the sound pulse is sent and the instant at
which the echo is received by the receiver.
Note the time interval as ‘t’. 5.4.3 Mega phone
A megaphone is a horn-shaped device
4. Repeat the experiment for three or four
used to address a small gathering of people. Its
times. The average time taken for the given
one end is wide and the other end is narrow.
number of pulses is calculated.
When a person speaks at the narrow end, the
sound of his speech is concentrated by the
Calculation of speed of sound: multiple reflections from the walls of the tube.
The sound pulse emitted by the source Thus, his voice can be heard loudly over a long
travels a total distance of 2d while travelling distance.
from the source to the wall and then back to
the receiver. The time taken for this has been
observed to be ‘t’. Hence, the speed of sound 5.5 DOPPLER EFFECT
wave is given by:
The whistle of a fast moving train
appears to increase in pitch as it approaches a
distance travelled 2d
Speed of sound = = stationary listener and it appears to decrease
time taken t as the train moves away from the listener.
This apparent change in frequency was first
observed and explained by Christian Doppler
(1803-1853), an Austrian Mathematician and
5.4 APPLICATIONS
Physicist. He observed that the frequency of
REFLECTION OF SOUND
the sound as received by a listener is different
from the original frequency produced by the
5.4.1 Sound board source whenever there is a relative motion
between the source and the listener. This
These are basically curved surfaces is known as Doppler effect This relative
(concave), which are used in auditoria and motion could be due to various possibilities
halls to improve the quality of sound. This as follows:
board is placed such that the speaker is at the
focus of the concave surface. The sound of the (i)
The listener moves towards or away from a
speaker is reflected towards the audience thus stationary source
improving the quality of sound heard by the (ii)
The source moves towards or away from a
audience. stationary listener
65 Acoustics

www.tntextbooks.in
(iii)
Both source and listener move towards or frequency will be more than the actual source
away from one other frequency.
(iv)
The medium moves when both source and
listener are at rest
DEFINITION
Figure 5.7 Source and listener moving
When ever there is a relative motion towards each other
between a source and a listener, the
frequency of the sound heard by the listener
Let n and n' be the frequency of the
is different from the original frequency of
sound produced by the source and the sound
sound emitted by the source. This is known observed by the listener respectively. Then,
as “Doppler effect”. the expression for the apparent frequency n' is
v + vL
For simplicity of calculation, it is assumed n' = n
v − vs
that the medium is at rest. That is the velocity
of the medium is zero.
Here, v is the velocity of sound waves
Let S and L be the source and the listener in the given medium. Let us consider
moving with velocities vS and vL respectively. different possibilities of motions of the
Consider the case of source and listener source and the listener. In all such cases,
moving towards each other (Figure 5.7). As the the expression for the apparent frequency
distance between them decreases, the apparent is given in table 5.2.
Table 5.2 Expression for apparent frequency due to Doppler effect
Case Position of source and Expression for

Note
No. listener apparent frequency
Both source and
a)
Distance between source and
listener move listener decreases. v + vL
1 n' = n
They move towards
b)
Apparent frequency is more than v − vs
each other actual frequency.
Both source and
a)
listener move listener increases.
v − vL
2 They move away from
b)
Apparent frequency is less than n' = n
each other actual frequency. v + vs
c)
vS and vL become opposite to that in case-1.
Both source and

a)
Apparent frequency depends on
listener move the velocities of the source and the
v − vL
3 They move one behind
listener. n' = n
v − vs
the other b) vS becomes opposite to that in
Source follows the listener
case-2.

www.tntextbooks.in
Both source and

a)
Apparent frequency depends on
listener move the velocities of the source and the v + vL
4 They move one behind
listener. n' = n
v + vs
the other b)
vS and vL become opposite to that in
Listener follows the source
case-3.
Source at rest
a)
Listener moves
listener decreases. v + vL
5 towards the source b)
Apparent frequency is more than n' = n
v
actual frequency.
c)
vS = 0 in case-1.
Source at rest
a)
Listener moves away
listener increases. v − vL
6 from the source b)
v
actual frequency.
c)
vS = 0 in case-2.
Listener at rest
a)
Source moves towards
listener decreases. v
7 the listener b)
Apparent frequency is more than n' = n
v − vs
actual frequency.
c)
vL = 0 in case-1.
Listener at rest
a)
Source moves away
listener increases. v
8 from the listener b)
v + vs
actual frequency.
c)
vL = 0 in case-2.
Suppose the medium (say wind) is v

moving with a velocity W in the direction of n' = n
the propagation of sound. For this case, the v − vs
velocity of sound, ‘v’ should be replaced with
(v + W). If the medium moves in a direction
v 10
opposite to the propagation of sound, then ‘v’ = n = n
1 9
should be replaced with (v – W). v− v
10
Solved problems
10
1. A source producing a sound of frequency = × 90 = 100 Hz
90 Hz is approaching a stationary listener 9
with a speed equal to (1/10) of the speed of
sound. What will be the frequency heard
2. A source producing a sound of frequency
by the listener?
500 Hz is moving towards a listener with a
Solution: When the source is moving velocity of 30 ms–1. The speed of the sound is
towards the stationary listener, the expression 330 ms–1. What will be the frequency heard
for apparent frequency is by listener?
67 Acoustics

www.tntextbooks.in
Solution: When the source is moving towards 4. A source and listener are both moving
the stationary listener, the expression for towards each other with a speed v/10
apparent frequency is where v is the speed of sound. If the
v frequency of the note emitted by the
n' = n source is f, what will be the frequency
v − vs heard by the listener?
330
n' = ×500 Solution: When source and listener are both
330 − 30 moving towards each other, the apparent
= 550 Hz frequency is
3. A
source of sound is moving with a velocity
of 50 ms–1 towards a stationary listener. v + vl
The listener measures the frequency of
n' = .n
v − vs
the source as 1000 Hz. what will be the
apparent frequency of the source when
it is moving away from the listener after v
crossing him? (velocity of sound in the
v+ 10
n' = v
.n
medium is 330 m s–1) v− 10
Solution: When the source is moving towards
the stationary listener, the expression for 11
apparent frequency is n' = .f
9
v = 1.22 f
n' = n
v − vs
5. At what speed should a source of sound
330
1000 = n move away from a stationary observer
330 − 50 so that observer finds the apparent
frequency equal to half of the original
1000 × 280 frequency?
n =
330
Solution: When the source is moving away from
n = 848.48 Hz.
the stationary listener, the expression for the
The actual frequency of the sound is apparent frequency is
848.48 Hz. When the source is moving away
from the stationary listener, the expression for
apparent frequency is v
n' = .n
v v + vs
n' = n
v + vs
n v
330 = .n
= × 848.48 2 v + vs
330 + 50
Vs = V
= 736.84 Hz

www.tntextbooks.in
5.5.1 C
onditions for no Doppler of the RADAR station. From the frequency
effect change, the speed and location of the aeroplanes
and aircrafts are tracked.
Under the following circumstances, there
will be no Doppler effect and the apparent (d) SONAR
frequency as heard by the listener will be the
same as the source frequency. In SONAR, by measuring the change in
the frequency between the sent signal and
(i)
When source (S) and listener (L) both are received signal, the speed of marine animals
at rest. and submarines can be determined.
(ii)
When S and L move in such a way
that distance between them remains
constant. Points to Remember
(iii) When source S and L are moving in

Wave velocity is the velocity with which
mutually perpendicular directions. the wave travels through the medium.
(iv) If the source is situated at the center
Velocity of a sound wave is maximum in
of the circle along which the listener is solids because they are more elastic in
moving. nature than liquids and gases. Since gases
are least elastic in nature.
5.5.2 Applications of Doppler
effect
Infrasonic waves are sound wave with
a frequency below 20 Hz. A human ear
(a) To measure the speed of an automobile cannot hear these waves.
An electromagnetic wave is emitted by
a source attached to a police car. The wave
Ultrasonic waves are sound waves with
is reflected by a moving vehicle, which acts frequency greater than 20 kHz, A human
as a moving source. There is a shift in the ear cannot detect these waves.
frequency of the reflected wave. From the

Reflection of sound waves obey the laws of
frequency shift, the speed of the car can be
reflection.
determined. This helps to track the over
speeding vehicles.
when a compression hits the boundary
of a rarer medium, it is reflected as a
(b) Tracking a satellite rarefaction.
The frequency of radio waves emitted by
a satellite decreases as the satellite passes away
An echo is the sound reproduced due to
from the Earth. By measuring the change in the reflection of the original sound wave.
the frequency of the radio waves, the location

The minimum distance between the
of the satellites is studied.
source and the reflecting surface should
be 17.2 m to hear an echo clearly.
(c)
R ADAR (RAdio Detection And
Ranging)
“ The apparent frequency” is the frequency
In RADAR, radio waves are sent, and the of the sound as heard by the listener.
reflected waves are detected by the receiver
69 Acoustics

www.tntextbooks.in
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the correct answer 7. Velocity of sound in the atmosphere of a

planet is 500 ms–1. The minimum distance
1. When a sound wave travels through air,
between the sources of sound and the
the air particles
obstacle to hear the echo, should be
a) vibrate along the direction of the wave
a) 17 m b) 20 m c) 25 m d) 50 m
motion
b) vibrate but not in any fixed direction II. Fill up the blanks
c) vibrate perpendicular to the direction
1. Rapid back and forth motion of a particle
of the wave motion
about its mean position is called _____
d) do not vibrate
2. If the energy in a longitudinal wave travels
2. Velocity of sound in a gaseous medium is from south to north, the particles of the
330 ms–1. If the pressure is increased by 4 times medium would be vibrating in _____
without causing a change in the temperature,
3. A whistle giving out a sound of frequency
the velocity of sound in the gas is
450 Hz, approaches a stationary observer at
a) 330 ms–1 b) 660 ms1 a speed of 33 ms–1. The frequency heard by
c) 156 ms–1 d) 990 ms–1 the observer is (speed of sound = 330 ms–1)
3. The frequency, which is audible to the ______.
human ear is 4. A source of sound is travelling with a
a) 50 kHz b) 20 kHz velocity 40 km/h towards an observer and
emits a sound of frequency 2000 Hz. If the
c) 15000 kHz d) 10000 kHz
velocity of sound is 1220 km/h, then the
4. The velocity of sound in air at a particular apparent frequency heard by the observer
temperature is 330 ms–1. What will be its is ___________.
value when temperature is doubled and
the pressure is halved? III. True or false:- (If false give the reason)
a) 330 ms–1 b) 165 ms–1 1. Sound can travel through solids, gases,
liquids and even vacuum.
c) 330 × √2 ms–1 d) 320 / √ 2 ms–1
2. Waves created by Earth Quake are Infrasonic.
5. If a sound wave travels with a frequency of 3.
The velocity of sound is independent of
1.25 × 104 Hz at 344 ms–1, the wavelength temperature.
will be
4. The Velocity of sound is high in gases than
a) 27.52 m b) 275.2 m liquids.
c) 0.02752 m d) 2.752 m
IV. Match the following
6. The sound waves are reflected from an
1. Infrasonic - (a) Compressions
obstacle into the same medium from
which they were incident. Which of the 2. Echo - (b) 22 kHz
following changes? 3. Ultrasonic - (c) 10 Hz
a) speed b) frequency 4. High pressure
c) wavelength d) none of these region - (d) Ultrasonography

www.tntextbooks.in
V. Assertion and Reason Questions 4. Explain why, the ceilings of concert halls
are curved.
5. Mention two cases in which there is no
a. If both the assertion and the reason are true
Doppler effect in sound?
and the reason is the correct explanation of
the assertion.
VIII. Problem Corner
b.
If both the assertion and the reason are
1. A sound wave has a frequency of 200 Hz
true but the reason is not the correct
and a speed of 400 ms–1 in a medium. Find
explanation of the assertion.
the wavelength of the sound wave.
c.
Assertion is true, but the reason is false.
2. The thunder of cloud is heard 9.8 seconds
d.
Assertion is false, but the reason is true.
later than the flash of lightning. If the
1) Assertion: The change in air pressure affects speed of sound in air is 330 ms–1, what will
the speed of sound. be the height of the cloud?
Reason: The speed of sound in a gas is 3. A person who is sitting at a distance of
proportional to the square of the pressure 400 m from a source of sound is listening
2) Assertion: Sound travels faster in solids to a sound of 600 Hz. Find the time period
than in gases. between successive compressions from
Reason: Solid posses a greater density than the source?
that of gases.
4. A
n ultrasonic wave is sent from a ship
towards the bottom of the sea. It is
VI. Answer very briefly found that the time interval between the
1. What is a longitudinal wave? transmission and reception of the wave is
1.6 seconds. What is the depth of the sea,
2. What is the audible range of frequency?
if the velocity of sound in the seawater is
3. What is the minimum distance needed for 1400 ms–1?
an echo?
5. A man is standing between two vertical
4. What will be the frequency sound having walls 680 m apart. He claps his hands and
0.20 m as its wavelength, when it travels
hears two distinct echoes after 0.9 seconds
with a speed of 331 ms–1?
and 1.1 second respectively. What is the
5.
Name three animals, which can hear speed of sound in the air?
ultrasonic vibrations.
Two observers are stationed in two boats
6.
4.5 km apart. A sound signal sent by one,
VII. Answer briefly
under water, reaches the other after 3
1. Why does sound travel faster on a rainy seconds. What is the speed of sound in the
day than on a dry day? water?
2. Why does an empty vessel produce more
A strong sound signal is sent from a
7.
sound than a filled one?
ship towards the bottom of the sea. It is
3. Air temperature in the Rajasthan desert can received back after 1s.What is the depth of
reach 46°C. What is the velocity of sound in sea given that the speed of sound in water
air at that temperature? (V0 = 331 ms–1) 1450 ms–1?
71 Acoustics

www.tntextbooks.in
IX. Answer in Detail X. HOT Questions

1. What are the factors that affect the speed 1. Suppose that a sound wave and a light
of sound in gases? wave have the same frequency, then which
one has a longer wavelength?
What is mean by reflection of sound?
2.
Explain: a) Sound b) Light
a) reflection at the boundary of a rarer c) both a and b d) data not sufficient

medium 2. When sound is reflected from a distant
object, an echo is produced. Let the
b) reflection at the boundary of a denser
distance between the reflecting surface
medium
and the source of sound remain the same.
c) Reflection at curved surfaces Do you hear an echo sound on a hotter
day? Justify your answer.
3. a) What do you understand by the term
‘ultrasonic vibration’?
b) State three uses of ultrasonic vibrations. REFERENCE BOOKS
c) Name three animals which can hear
1. Fundamental Physics by K.L. Gomber
ultrasonic vibrations.
and K.L. Gogia
4. What is an echo? 2. Fundamentals of sound and vibration by
State two conditions necessary for
a) Franky Fahy and David Thombson
hearing an echo. 3. The theory of sound by Rayleigh and
b) What are the medical applications of John William Strutt
echo?
How can you calculate the speed of
c)
I NT ER NET R ES O U RCE
sound using echo?
1.
http://people.bath.ac.uk/ensmjc/Notes/
acoustics.pdf

www.tntextbooks.in
CONCEPT
Concept MapMAP
<20 Hz
Quality
Different Infrasonics >20000Hz
conditions Loudness
Application Pitch 20-20kHz Ultrasonics
Laws of Doppler
Measuring Properties Audible
Reflection effect
velocity
Reflection of Longitudinal
sound wave
ACOUSTICS Sound waves
wave
Echo
At Denser
At Rarer medium
Applications Medium
Velocity Characterstics Frequency
Sound Board Ear Trumpet SONAR

Time
Wavelength Amplitude
period
Megaphone
ICT CORNER Doppler effect
In this activity you will be able to learn how the observed frequencies of a sound changes
with the velocities of the source and the observer (Doppler effect).
Steps
• Open the browser and type “vlab.amrita.edu” in the address bar. Click ‘Physical Sciences’ and then
click ‘Harmonic Motion and Waves Virtual Lab’. Click ‘Doppler Effect’ and Go to “simulator” tab to do
the experiment. sign up one time with your e-mail
• Select medium of travel, detector direction and source direction by clicking the drop down menu.
• Change relative motion between source and observer by adjusting the velocity of the source and
observer using the slider.
• Discuss how apparent frequency is changes with respect to actual frequency by changing position of
source and listener. Also try for different source frequencies.
Link
http://vlab.amrita.edu/?sub=1&brch=201&sim=368&cnt=4
73 Acoustics

www.tntextbooks.in
6 NUCLEAR PHYSICS
Learning Objectives
After learning this unit, students will be able to
Define radio activity.
Distingush between natural and artificial radio activity.
Relate the properties of alpha, beta and gamma rays.
State Soddy and Fajan’s displacement law of nuclear disintegration.
Understand the concept of nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
Identify fissionable materials.
Analyze controlled and uncontrolled chain reactions.
Explain the principle of atom bomb and hydrogen bomb.
List the uses of radio activity.
Understand the components of a nuclear reactor.
Identify the precautionary measures while handling a radioactive material.
Goldstein discovered positive rays, which

INTRODUCTION
were named as protons by Rutherford.
Humans are very much interested in In 1932, James Chadwick discovered
knowing about atoms. Things around us the chargeless particles called neutrons.
are made up of atoms. A Greek Philosopher Presently, a large number of elementary
'Democritus' in 400 BC(BCE) believed that particles like photon, meson, positron and
matter is made up of tiny indestructible nutrino have been discovered. In 1911,
units called atoms. Later, in 1803, John the British scientist, Ernest Rutherford
Dalton considered that elements consist explained that the mass of an atom is
of atoms, which are identical in nature. concentrated in its central part called
J J Thomson discovered cathode rays, Nucleus. You have already learnt about
known as electrons, experimentally and the atomic structure in the earlier classes.
74

www.tntextbooks.in
with the emission of radiations like alpha, beta,

6.1 RADIOACTIVITY
and gamma rays is called 'radioactivity' and the
elements, which undergo this phenomenon are
6.1.1 Discovery of radioactivity
called 'radioactive elements'.
In 1896, French physicist Henri Becquerel
finished his research for the week and stored a 6.1.3 Natural Radioactivity
certain amount of uranium compound away The elements such as uranium and radium
in a drawer for the week end. By chance, an undergo radioactivity and emit the radiations
unexposed photographic plate was also stored on their own without any human intervention.
in the same drawer. After a week he returned This phenomenon of spontaneous emission of
and noticed that the film had been exposed to radiation from certain elements on their own
some radiation. He discovered that he could is called 'natural radioactivity'.
reproduce the effect whenever he placed The elements whose atomic number
uranium near a photographic film. Apparently, is more than 82 undergo spontaneous
uranium radiated something that could affect radioactivity. Eg: uranium, radium, etc. There
a photographic plate. This phenomenon are only two elements, which have been
was called as Radioactivity. Uranium was identified as radioactive substances with atomic
identified to be a radioactive element. number less than 82. They are technetium (Tc)
Two years later, the Polish physicist with atomic number 43 and promethium (Pm)
Marie Curie and her husband Pierre Curie with atomic number 61.
detected radioactivity in 'Pitchblende', a tiny
black substance. They were not surprised There have been 29 radioactive
at the radioactivity of pitchblende, which substances discovered so far.
is known as an ore of uranium. Later, they Most of them are rare earth
discovered that the radiation was more metals and transition metals.
intense from pure uranium. Also, it was found
that the pitchblende had less concentration 6.1.4 Artificial Radioactivity (or)
of uranium. They concluded that some Induced Radioactivity
other substance was present in pitchblende.
The phenomenon by which even light
After separating this new substance, they elements are made radioactive, by artificial
discovered that it had unknown chemical or induced methods, is called 'artificial
properties and it also emitted radiations radioactivity' or 'man-made radioactivity'.
spontaneously like uranium. They named this This kind of radioactivity was discovered
new substance as 'Radium'.The radioactive by Irene Curie and F.Joliot in 1934. Artificial
elements emit harmful radioactive radiations radioactivity is induced in certain lighter
like alpha rays or beta rays or gamma rays. elements like boron, aluminium etc., by
bombarding them with radiations such as
6.1.2 Definition of radioactivity 'alpha particles' emitted during the natural
radioactivity of uranium. This also results
The nucleus of some elements is unstable. in the emission of invisible radiations
Such nuclei undergo nuclear decay and get and elementary particles. During such a
converted into more stable nuclei. During this disintegration, the nucleus which undergoes
nuclear reaction, these nuclei emit certain disintegration is called 'parent nucleus' and that
harmful radiations and elementary particles. The which is produced after the disintegration is
phenomenon of nuclear decay of certain elements called a 'daughter nucleus'. The particle, which
75 Nuclear physics

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 6.1 Comparison between Natural and Artificial Radioactivity
S.No. Natural radioactivity Artificial radioactivity
Emission of radiation due to

Emission of radiation due to self-
1 disintegration of a nucleus through
disintegration of a nucleus.
induced process.
Alpha, beta and gamma radiations are Mostly elementary particles such as
2
emitted. neutron, positron, etc. are emitted.
3 It is a spontaneous process. It is an induced process.
Exhibited by elements with atomic number Exhibited by elements with atomic

4
more than 83. number less than 83.
5 This cannot be controlled. This can be controlled.
is used to induce the artificial disintegration is 6.1.5 Units of Radioactivity

termed as projectile and the particle which is
Curie: It is the traditional
produced after the disintegration is termed as
unit of radioactivity. It is
ejected particle. When the projectile hits the
parent nucleus, it is converted into an unstable defined as the quantity of
nucleus, which in turn decays spontaneously a radioactive substance
emitting the daughter nucleus along with an which undergoes 3.7 ×
ejected particle. 1010 disintegrations in one
second. This is actually close to the activity of
Activity 6.1 1 g of radium 226.
1 curie = 3.7 × 1010 disintegrations per second.
Using the periodic table, list out the radioac-
tive elements. Also identify the name of the Rutherford (Rd): It is another unit of
groups in which they are present. radioactivity. It is defined as the quantity
of a radioactive substance, which produces
If you denote the parent and daughter 10 6 disintegrations in one second.
nuclei as X and Y respectively, then the nuclear
1 Rd = 106 disintegrations per second.
disintegration is represented as follows: X
(P,E) Y. Here, P and E represent the projectile Becquerel (Bq) : It is The SI unit of
particle and ejected particle respectively. radioactivity is becquerel. It is defined as the
quantity of one disintegration per second.
Example:
Roentgen (R): It is The radiation exposure
Be9 + 2 He 4 6C13*
4
of γ and x-rays is measured by another unit
called roentgen. One roentgen is defined
C13* 6C12 + 0n1
6
as the quantity of radioactive substance
In the above nuclear reaction, 6C13* is unstable which produces a charge of 2.58 × 10 -4
and is radioactive. This reaction can be coulomb in 1 kg of air under standard
represented as 4Be9 (α, n) 6C12 conditions of pressure, temperature and
4
Be9 + 2He4 6C12 + 0n1 humidity.

www.tntextbooks.in
6.2.2 Radioactive displacement
6.2 A
LPHA, BETA AND
law
GAMMA RAYS
In 1913, Soddy and Fajan framed the
When a radioactive nucleus undergoes
displacement laws governing the daughter
radioactivity, it emits harmful radiations. These
nucleus produced during an alpha and beta
radiations are usually comprised of any of the
decay. They are stated below:
three types of particles. They are alpha(α),
beta (β) and gamma(γ) rays. (i) When a radioactive element emits an
alpha particle, a daughter nucleus is formed
Uranium, named after the whose mass number is less by 4 units and
planet Uranus, was discovered the atomic number is less by 2 units, than
by Martin Klaproth, a German the mass number and atomic number of the
chemist in a mineral called pitchblende. parent nucleus.
6.2.1 Properties of Alpha, Beta (ii) When a radioactive element emits a
and Gamma rays beta particle, a daughter nucleus is formed
These three particles possess certain whose mass number is the same and the
similarities and dissimilarities in their atomic number is more by 1 unit, than the
properties as listed below in Table 6.2. atomic number of the parent nucleus.
Table 6.2 Properties of alpha, beta and gamma rays
Properties α rays β rays γ rays
Helium nucleus (2He4) They are electrons They are

What are
consisting of two protons (–1e0), basic elementary electromagnetic waves
they?
and two neutrons. particle in all atoms. consisting of photons.
Negatively charged
Positively charged particles. Neutral particles.
particles.
Charge Charge of each alpha particle Charge of each gamma
Charge of each beta
= +2e particle = zero
particle = –e
100 time greater than β rays
Ionising Very less ionization
and 10,000 times greater Comparatively low
power power
than γ rays
They have a very high
Penetrating power is penetrating power
Low penetrating power
Penetrating greater than that of α greater than that of β
(even stopped by a thick
power rays. They can penetrate rays. They can penetrate
paper)
through a thin metal foil. through thick metal
blocks.
Deflected by both the
Effect of fields; but the direction
Deflected by both the fields.
electric and of deflection is opposite They are not deflected
(in accordance with
magnetic to that for alpha rays. (in by both the fields.
Fleming’s left hand rule)
field accordance with Fleming’s
left hand rule)
Their speed ranges from Their speed can go up to
They travel with the
Speed 1/10 to 1/20 times the speed 9/10 times the speed of
speed of light.
of light. light.
77 Nuclear physics

www.tntextbooks.in
6.2.3 Alpha decay

6.3 NUCLEAR FISSION
A nuclear reaction in which an unstable
parent nucleus emits an alpha particle and forms
a stable daughter nucleus, is called 'alpha decay'. 6.3.1 Definition
E.g.: Decay of uranium (U238) to thorium In 1939, German
(Th234) with the emission of an alpha particle. Scientist Otto Hahn and
F.Strassman discovered that
92
U 238 90 Th234 +2 He 4 ( α - decay )
when a uranium nucleus is
In α - decay, the parent nucleus emits an α
bombarded with a neutron, it breaks up into two
particle and so it is clear that for the daughter
smaller nuclei of comparable mass along with
nucleus, the mass number decreases by four
the emission of a few neutrons and energy. This
and the atomic number decreases by two as
process of breaking (splitting) up of a heavier
illustrated in Figure 6.1
nucleus into two smaller nuclei with the release
of a large amount of energy and a few neutrons
is called 'nuclear fission'.
E.g.: Nuclear fission of a uranium
nucleus (U235)
U235 + 0n1 56Ba141 + 36Kr92 + 30n1 + Q (energy)
92
The average energy released in each fission
-11
process is about 3.2 × 10 J. Nuclear fission is
pictorially represented in Figure 6.2.
Figure 6.1 Alpha decay
6.2.4 Beta decay

A nuclear reaction, in which an unstable
parent nucleus emits a beta particle and forms
a stable daughter nucleus, is called 'beta decay'.
E.g.: Beta decay of phosphorous.
P32 16S32 + -1e0 (β - decay)
15 Figure 6.2 Nuclear fission
In β - decay there is no change in the mass
number of the daughter nucleus but the atomic 6.3.2 Fissionable materials
number increases by one.
A fissionable material is a radioactive
Note: In a nuclear reaction, the element
element, which undergoes fission in a
formed as the product nucleus is identified by
sustained manner when it absorbs a neutron.
the atomic number of the resulting nucleus
It is also termed as 'fissile material'.
and not by its mass number.
E.g.: U235, plutonium (Pu239 and Pu241)
6.2.5 Gamma decay All isotopes of uranium do not undergo
In a γ - decay, only the energy level of nuclear fission when they absorb a neutron.
the nucleus changes. The atomic number For example, natural uranium consists of
238 235
and mass number of the radioactive nucleus 99.28 % of 92U and 0.72 % of 92U . Of
remain the same. these two, U 238 does not undergo fission

www.tntextbooks.in
whereas U235 undergoes fission. Hence, U235 material. This results in the release of a huge
is a fissionable material and U238 is non- amount of energy within a fraction of a second.
fissionable. This kind of chain reaction is used in the atom
There are some radioactive elements, bomb to produce an explosion. Figure 6.3
which can be converted into fissionable represents an uncontrolled chain reaction.
material. They are called as fertile materials.
E.g.: Uranium-238, Thorium-232,
Plutonium-240.
n1
Kr90 0
6.3.3 Chain Reaction

36
A uranium nucleus (U-235) when 0

n1
U235 1
bombarded with a neutron undergoes 92
56
Ba144 0n
fission producing three neutrons. These

three neutrons in turn can cause fission in
three other uranium nuclei present in the
sample, thus producing nine neutrons. These
nine neutrons in turn may produce twenty Figure 6.3 Uncontrolled chain reaction
seven neutrons and so on. This is known as
6.3.4 Critical Mass
'chain reaction'. A chain reaction is a self-
propagating process in which the number of During a nuclear fission process, about 2 to
neutrons goes on multiplying rapidly almost 3 neutrons are released. But, all these neutrons
may not be available to produce further fission.
in a geometrical progression.
Some of them may escape from the system,
Two kinds of chain reactions are possible. which is termed as 'leakage of neutrons' and
They are: (i) controlled chain reaction and some may be absorbed by the non-fissionable
(ii)uncontrolled chain reaction. materials present in the system. These two factors
lead to the loss of neutrons. To sustain the chain
(a) Controlled chain reaction reaction, the rate of production of neutrons due
In the controlled chain reaction the to nuclear fission must be more than the rate of
its loss. This can be achieved only when the size
number of neutrons released is maintained
(i.e., mass) of the fissionable material is equal to a
to be one. This is achieved by absorbing
certain optimum value. This is known as 'critical
the extra neutrons with a neutron absorber
mass'.
leaving only one neutron to produce further
The minimum mass of a fissile material
fission. Thus, the reaction is sustained in a
necessary to sustain the chain reaction is called
controlled manner. The energy released due
'critical mass (mc)'. It depends on the nature,
to a controlled chain reaction can be utilized
density and the size of the fissile material.
for constructive purposes. Controlled chain
reaction is used in a nuclear reactor to If the mass of the fissile material is less than
produce energy in a sustained and controlled the critical mass, it is termed as 'subcritical'. If
manner. the mass of the fissile material is more than the
critical mass, it is termed as 'supercritical'.
(b) Uncontrolled chain reaction
In the uncontrolled chain reaction the Activity 6.2
number of neutrons multiplies indefinitely and
Using beads make a chain reaction model
causes fission in a large amount of the fissile
79 Nuclear physics

www.tntextbooks.in
6.3.5 Atom bomb

Electron Volt (eV) is the unit used
The atom bomb is based on the principle of in nuclear physics to measure
uncontrolled chain reaction. In an uncontrolled the energy of small particles. It
chain reaction, the number of neutrons and the is nothing but the energy of one
number of fission reactions multiply almost in electron when it is accelerated using an electric
potential of one volt.
a geometrical progression. This releases a huge
amount of energy in a very small time interval 1eV = 1.602 × 10-19 joule.
and leads to an explosion. 1 million electron volt = 1 MeV = 106 eV
(mega electron volt)
Structure: The energy released in a nuclear fission
An atom bomb consists of a piece of fissile process is about 200 MeV.
material whose mass is subcritical. This piece
has a cylindrical void. It has a cylindrical
6.4 NUCLEAR FUSION
fissile material which can fit into this void and
its mass is also subcritical. When the bomb You have learnt that
has to be exploded, this cylinder is injected energy can be produced
into the void using a conventional explosive. when a heavy nucleus is
Now, the two pieces of fissile material join to split up into two smaller
form the supercritical mass, which leads to an nuclei. Similarly, energy
explosion. The structure of an atom bomb is can be produced when two
shown in Figure 6.4 lighter nuclei combine to form a heavier
nucleus. This phenomenon is known as
Chemical Substance explosion nuclear fusion.
by remote control method U235
U235
Less than the
critical mass 6.4.1 Definition
Moving cylinder
U 235
The process in which two lighter nuclei
combine to form a heavier nucleus is termed
Figure 6.4 Atom bomb as 'nuclear fusion'.
E.g.: 1H2 + 1H2 2
He4 + Q (Energy)
During this explosion tremendous
amount of energy in the form of heat, light Here, 1H2 represents an isotope of
hydrogen known as 'deuterium'. The average
and radiation is released. A region of very
energy released in each fusion reaction is
high temperature and pressure is formed in a about 3.84 × 10-12 J. Figure 6.5 represents this.
fraction of a second along with the emission
of hazardous radiation like γ rays, which
adversely affect the living creatures. This
type of atom bombs were exploded in 1945
at Hiroshima and Nagasaki in Japan during
the World War II.
Figure 6.5 Nuclear fusion

www.tntextbooks.in
The mass of the daughter nucleus formed

Nuclear fusion is the
during a nuclear reaction (fission and fusion)
combination of two lighter
is lesser than the sum of the masses of the
nuclei. The charge of both
two parent nuclei. This difference in mass is nuclei is positive. According to electrostatic
called mass defect. This mass is converted theory, when they come closer they tend to
into energy, according to the mass-energy repel each other. This repulsive force will
equivalence. This concept of mass-energy be overcome by the kinetic energy of the
equivalence was proposed by Einstein in nuclei at higher temperature of the order of
1905. It stated that mass can be converted into 107 to 109 K.
energy and vice versa. The relation between
mass and energy proposed by Einstein is
6.4.3 Stellar Energy
E = mc 2 where c is the velocity of light in
vacuum and is equal to 3 × 108 ms–1. The stars like our Sun emit a large
amount of energy in the form of light and
heat. This energy is termed as the stellar
The nuclear bomb that was
energy. Where does this high energy come
dropped in Hiroshima during
from? All stars contain a large amount of
World War II was called as
'Little boy'. It was a gun-type bomb which hydrogen. The surface temperature of the
used a uranium core. The bomb, which was stars is very high which is sufficient to
subsequently dropped over Nagasaki was induce fusion of the hydrogen nuclei.
called as 'Fat man'. It was an explosion type Fusion reaction that takes place in the
bomb, which used a plutonium core. cores of the Sun and other stars results in an
enormous amount of energy, which is called
as 'stellar energy. Thus, nuclear fusion or
6.4.2 Conditions necessary for
thermonuclear reaction is the source of
nuclear fusion
light and heat energy in the Sun and other
Earth’s atmosphere contains a small trace stars.
of hydrogen. If nuclear fusion is a spontaneous
process at normal temperature and pressure,
6.4.4 Hydrogen Bomb
then a number of fusion processes would
happen in the atmosphere which may lead to Hydrogen bomb is based on the
explosions. But, we do not encounter any such principle of nuclear fusion. A hydrogen
explosions. Can you explain why? bomb is always designed to have an
inbuilt atom bomb which creates the high
The answer is that nuclear fusion can
temperature and pressure required for
take place only under certain conditions.
fusion when it explodes. Then, fusion takes
Nuclear fusion is possible only at an place in the hydrogen core and leads to the
extremly high temperature of the order of release of a very large amount of energy
10 7 to 10 9 K and a high pressure to push the in an uncontrolled manner. The energy
hydrogen nuclei closer to fuse with each released in a hydrogen bomb (or fusion
other. Hence, it is named as 'Thermonuclear bomb) is much higher than that released in
reaction'. an atom bomb (or fission bomb).
81 Nuclear physics

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 6.3 Features of Nuclear fission and nuclear fusion
S.No. NUCLEAR FISSION NUCLEAR FUSION
The process of breaking up (splitting) of

Nuclear fusion is the combination of two
1 a heavy nucleus into two smaller nuclei is
lighter nuclei to form a heavier nucleus.
called 'nuclear fission'.
Extremely high temperature and pressure
2 Can be performed at room temperature.
is needed.
Alpha, beta and gamma radiations are Alpha rays, positrons, and neutrinos are
3
emitted. emitted.
Fission leads to emission of gamma
radiation. This triggers the mutation in the
4 Only light and heat energy is emitted.
human gene and causes genetic transform
diseases.
prevent the wastage of agricultural products.

Sun fuses about 620 million Certain perishable cereals exposed to
metric tons of hydrogen each radiations remain fresh beyond their normal
second and radiates about life, enhancing the storage time. Very small
26
3.8 × 10 joule of energy per second. doses of radiation prevent sprouting and
When this energy is radiated towards the spoilage of onions, potatoes and gram.
Earth, it decreases in its intensity. When it
reaches the Earth its value is about 1.4 kilo
joule per unit area in unit time. 6.5.2 Medicine
Medical applications of radio isotopes
can be divided into two parts:
6.5 USES OF RADIOACTIVITY
i) Diagnosis ii) Therapy
Radio isotopes are used as tracers to
Many radio isotopes
diagnose the nature of circulatory disorders
can be obtained from
of blood, defects of bone metabolism, to
radioactivity. These radio
locate tumors, etc. Some of the radio isotopes
isotopes have found wide
which are used as tracers are: hydrogen,
variety of applications in
carbon, nitrogen, sulphur, etc.
the fields of medicine,
agriculture, industry and archeological R adio sodium (Na24) is used for the
•
research. effective functioning of heart.
• Radio – Iodine (I131) is used to cure goiter.
6.5.1 Agriculture • R adio-iron is (Fe59) is used to diagnose
The radio isotope of phosphorous (P-32) anaemia and also to provide treatment for
helps to increase the productivity of crops. the same.
The radiations from the radio isotopes can • R adio phosphorous (P32) is used in the
be used to kill the insects and parasites and treatment of skin diseases.

www.tntextbooks.in
Radio cobalt (Co 60) and radio-gold

• The second source of radiation
(Au 198) are used in the treatment of skin exposure is man-made. These are due to
cancer. nuclear reactors and during the testing of
• Radiations are used to sterilize the surgical the nuclear devices in the atmosphere or in
devices as they can kill the germs and the ground.
microbes. Improper and careless handling of
radioactive materials release harmful
6.5.3 Industries radiations in our environment. These
radiations are very harmful to the human
In industries, radioactive isotopes are
body. A person who is exposed to radiations
used as tracers to detect any manufacturing
very closely or for a longer duration, is at
defects such as cracks and leaks. Packaging
a greater health risk and can be affected
faults can also be identified through radio
genetically.
activity. Gauges, which have radioactive
sources are used in many industries to check
the level of gases, liquids and solids. How old is our mother Earth?
Any guess?? It is nearly 4.54 ×
• An isotope of californium (Cf 252) 109 years (around 45 Crore 40
is used in the airlines to detect the lakh years). Wow!!
explosives in the luggage.
• An isotope of Americium (Am241) is
6.6.1 Permitted range
used in many industries as a smoke
detector. The International Commission
on Radiological Protection (ICRP) has
recommended certain maximum permissible
6.5.4. Archeological research
exposure limits to radiation that is believed
Using the technique of radio carbon to be safe without producing any appreciable
dating, the age of the Earth, fossils, injury to a person. Safe limit of overall exposure
old paintings and monuments can be to radiation is given as 20 milli sievert per year.
determined. In radio carbon dating, In terms of roentgen, the safe limit of receiving
the existing amount of radio carbon is the radiation is about 100 mR per week. If the
determined and this gives an estimate about exposure is 100 R, it may cause fatal diseases
the age of these things. like leukemia (death of red blood corpuscle in
the blood) or cancer. When the body is exposed
to about 600 R, it leads to death.
6.6 SAFETY MEASURES
*Dosimeter is a device used to
In day to day life, you do receive detect the levels of exposure to an
some natural radiation from the Sun. The ionizing radiation. It is frequently
radioactive elements present in the soil used in the environments where exposure to
and rocks, the house hold appliances like radiation may occur such as nuclear power plants
television, microwave ovens, cell phones and and medical imaging facilities. Pocket dosimeter
the X-rays used in hospitals. These radiations is used to provide the wearer with an immediate
do not produce any severe effects as they are reading of his/her exposure to X-rays and γ rays.
very low in intensity.
83 Nuclear physics

www.tntextbooks.in
6.6.2 Preventive measures i. Fuel: A fissile material is used as the

fuel. The commonly used fuel material is
uranium.
ii. Moderator: A moderator is used to slow
down the high energy neutrons to provide
slow neutrons. Graphite and heavy water
are the commonly used moderators.
iii. Control rod: Control rods are used to
control the number of neutrons in order
to have sustained chain reaction. Mostly
Figure. 6.6 Lead coated aprons model.
boron or cadmium rods are used as
• Radioactive materials should be kept in a control rods. They absorb the neutrons.
thick walled lead container. iv. Coolant: A coolant is used to remove
• Lead coated aprons and lead gloves should
the heat produced in the reactor core, to
be used while working with hazardous
produce steam. This steam is used to run
radioactive materials.
a turbine in order to produce electricity.
• You should avoid eating while handling
radioactive materials. Water, air and helium are some of the
• The radioactive materials should be coolants.
handled only by tongs or by a remote v. Protection wall: A thick concrete lead
control device. wall is built around the nuclear reactor in
• Dosimeters should be worn by the users order to prevent the harmful radiations
to check the level of radiation. from escaping into the environment.
Control rod
6.7 NUCLEAR REACTOR
A Nuclear reactor is a device in which

the nuclear fission reaction takes place in
a self-sustained and controlled manner to
produce electricity. The first nuclear reactor
was built in 1942 at Chicago, USA.
Figure 6.7 Schematic diagram of a nuclear reactor
6.7.1 Types of nuclear reactors
6.7.3 Uses of a nuclear reactor
Breeder reactor, fast breeder reactor,
pressurized water reactor, pressurized heavy • Nuclear reactors are widely used in power
water reactor, boiling water reactor, water- generation.
cooled reactor, gas-cooled reactor, fusion • They are also used to produce radio isotopes,
reactor and thermal reactor are some types of which are used in a variety of applications.
nuclear reactors, which are used in different • Some reactors help us to do research in
places world-wide. the field of nuclear physics.
• Breeder reactors are used to convert non-
6.7.2 Components of a nuclear
fissionable materials into fissionable materials.
reactors
The essential components of a nuclear 6.7.4 Nuclear power plants in India
reactor are (i) fuel, (ii) moderator, (iii) control Indian Atomic Energy Commission
rod, (iv) coolant and (v) protection wall. (AEC) was established in August 1948 by the

www.tntextbooks.in
Department of Indian Scientific Research 1 Bq = one disintegration per second

committee at Bombay (now Mumbai) in one curie = 3.7 × 1010 Bq
Maharashtra. It is the nodal agency for all the 1
research done in the field of atomic energy. 1 Bq = 10 curie
3.7 × 10
Dr. Homi Jahangir Bhaba was the first chairman 1
of Indian Atomic Energy Commission. Now, ∴ 3.7 × 103 G Bq = 3.7 × 103 × 10 9 ×
3.7 × 1010
it is known as Bhaba Atomic Research Centre = 100 curie
(BARC). Solved problem 6.3
Nuclear power is the fifth largest source
of power in India. Tarapur Atomic Power U 235 experiences one α - decay and
92
Station is India’s first nuclear power station. one β - decay. Find number of neutrons in
Now, there are a total of seven power stations, the final daughter nucleus that is formed.
one each in Maharashtra, Rajasthan, Gujarat, Solution:
Uttar Pradesh and two in Tamilnadu. In
Tamilnadu, we have nuclear power stations in Let X and Y be the resulting nucleus after
Kalpakkam and Kudankulam. Apsara was the the emission of the alpha and beta particles
first nuclear reactor built in India and Asia. respectively.
Now, there are 22 nuclear reactors which are U235 α decay 90X231 + 2 He4
92
operating in India. Some other operating
reactors are 90
X231 β decay 91Y231 + -1 e 0
• Cirus Number of neutrons = Mass number – Atomic number
• Dhuruva = 231 – 91 = 140
• Purnima
Solved problem 6.4
Solved problem 6.1
Calculate the amount of energy released
Identify A, B, C, and D from the when a radioactive substance undergoes fusion
following nuclear reactions. and results in a mass defect of 2 kg.
(i) 13Al27 + A --------> 15
P30 + B
Solution:
24 24
(ii) 12Mg + B --------> 11
Na + C Mass defect in the reaction (m) = 2 kg
(iii) 92U238 + B --------> Np239 + D Velocity of light (c) = 3 × 108 m s-1
93
By Einstein’s equation,
Solution: Energy released E = mc2
(i) 13Al27 + 2He4 --------> 15
P30 + 0n1 So E = 2 × (3 × 108)2
= 1.8 × 1017 J
(ii) 12Mg24 + 0n1 --------> 11
Na24 + 1H1
(iii) 92U238 + 0n1 --------> 93Np239 + –1e0 Points to Remember

A is alpha particle, B is neutron, C is proton,
and D is electron. This phenomenon of spontaneous emission
of radiation from certain elements on its
Solved problem 6.2 own is called 'natural radioactivity'.
A radon specimen emits radiation of Curie is defined as the quantity of a radioactive
3.7 × 103 GBq per second. Convert this substance, which undergoes 3.7 × 1010
disintegration in terms of curie. (one curie = disintegrations in one second. This is actually
3.7 × 1010 disintegration per second) close to the activity of 1 g of radium-226.
85 Nuclear physics

www.tntextbooks.in
Rutherford (Rd) is defined as the quantity forms a stable daughter nucleus is called
of a radioactive substance which produces as 'beta decay'.
10 6 disintegrations in The process of breaking (splitting) up of
one second. a heavier nucleus into two smaller nuclei
1 Rd = 106 disintegrations with the release of a large amount of
per second. energy is called 'nuclear fission'.
The SI unit of The energy released in a nuclear fission
radio ac t iv it y is process is about 200 MeV.
becquerel. It is defined as the quantity of There are some radioactive elements
one disintegration per second. which can be converted into a
Helium nucleus (2He4) consisting of two fissionable material. They are called as
protons and two neutrons is known as 'fertile materials'. e.g. Uranium-238,
alpha particle. Thorium-232, Plutonium-240.
Beta particles are electrons ( -1e0), which Controlled chain reaction is used in a
are the basic elementary particles present nuclear reactor to produce energy in a
in all atoms. sustained and controlled manner.
Gamma rays are electromagnetic waves The process in which two lighter nuclei
consisting of photons. combine to form a heavier nucleus is
A nuclear reaction in which an unstable termed as 'nuclear fusion'.
parent nucleus emits an alpha particle Nuclear fusion or thermonuclear reaction
and forms a stable daughter nucleus is is the source of light and heat energy in
called as 'alpha decay'. the Sun and other stars.
A nuclear reaction in which an unstable The safe limit of receiving the radiation is
parent nucleus emits a beta particle and about 100 mR per week.
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the correct answer a. Bequerel b. Irene Curie

1. Man-made radioactivity is also known as c. Roentgen d. Neils Bohr
_____________ 4. In which of the following, no change in mass
a. Induced radioactivity number of the daughter nuclei takes place
b. Spontaneous radioactivity i) α decay ii) β decay
c. Artificial radioactivity iii) γ decay iv) neutron decay
d. a & c a. (i) is correct
2. Unit of radioactivity is _____________ b. (ii) and (iii) are correct
a. roentgen b. curie c. (i) & ( iv) are correct
c. becquerel d. all the above d. (ii) & (iv) are correct
3. Artificial radioactivity was discovered by 5. ____________ isotope is used for the
____________ treatment of cancer.

www.tntextbooks.in
a. Radio Iodine b. Radio Cobalt iv. No chain reaction takes place in an atom bomb
c. Radio Carbon d. Radio Nickel a. (i) only correct b. (i) & (ii) are correct
6. Gamma radiations are dangerous because c. (iv) only correct d. (iii) & (iv) are correct
a. it affects eyes & bones II. Fill in the blanks

b. it affects tissues 1. One roentgen is equal to ____________
c. it produces genetic disorder disintegrations per second
d. it produces enormous amount of heat 2. Positron is an____________.
7. _____________ aprons are used to protect 3. Anemia can be cured by ____________
us from gamma radiations isotope
a. Lead oxide b. Iron 4. Abbreviation of ICRP______
c. Lead d. Aluminium 5. _________is used to measure exposure rate
of radiation in humans.
8. Which of the following statements is/are
correct? 6. ________ has the greatest penetration
power.
i. α particles are photons
7. ZYA → YA + X ; Then, X is __________
ii. Penetrating power of γ radiation is very low Z+1
iii. Ionization power is maximum for α rays

8. ZXA → ZYA This reaction is possible in
______________ decay.
iv. Penetrating power of γ radiation is very high
9. The average energy released in each fusion
a. (i) & (ii) are correct reaction is about ________ J.
b. (ii) & (iii) are correct
10. Nuclear fusion is possible only at an
c. (iv) only correct extremely high temperature of the order of
d. (iii) & (iv) are correct ____ K.
9. Proton - Proton chain reaction is an example of 11. The radio isotope of ________ helps to
__________________ increase the productivity of crops.
a. Nuclear fission b. α - decay 12. If the radiation exposure is 100 R, it may
c. Nuclear fusion d. β - decay cause ______________.
10. In the nuclear reaction 6X12 α decay Z

YA, III State whether the following statements
the value of A & Z. are true or false: If false, correct the
a. 8, 6 b. 8, 4 statement
c. 4, 8 d. cannot be determined 1. Plutonium -239 is a fissionable material.
with the given data
2. Elements having atomic number greater
11. Kamini reactor is located at __________ than 83 can undergo nuclear fusion.
a. Kalpakkam b. Koodankulam 3. Nuclear fusion is more dangerous than
c. Mumbai d. Rajasthan nuclear fission.
4. Natural uranium U-238 is the core fuel used
12. Which of the following is/are correct?
in a nuclear reactor.
i. hain reaction takes place in a nuclear
C 5. If a moderator is not present, then a nuclear
reactor and an atomic bomb.
reactor will behave as an atom bomb.
ii. The chain reaction in a nuclear reactor is 6. During one nuclear fission on an average, 2
controlled
to 3 neutrons are produced.
iii. The chain reaction in a nuclear reactor is not 7. Einstein’s theory of mass energy equivalence
controlled
is used in nuclear fission and fusion.
87 Nuclear physics

www.tntextbooks.in
IV. Match the following VI. Use the analogy to fill in the blank
Match: I 1. Spontaneous process : Natural Radioactivity,
a. BARC Kalpakkam Induced process : ________
b. India’s first atomic power Apsara 2. Nuclear Fusion : Extreme temperature,
station Nuclear Fission : ___________
c. IGCAR Mumbai 3. Increasing crops : Radio phosphorous,
d. First nuclear reactor in India Tarapur Effective functioning of heart : _____
4. Deflected by electric field : α ray, Null
Match: II
Deflection : __________
a. Fuel lead
b. Moderator heavy water
c. Control rods cadmium rods VII. Numerical problems:
d. Shield uranium
1. 88 Ra226 experiences three α - decay. Find the
Match: III number of neutrons in the daughter element.
a. Soddy Fajan Natural radioactivity 2. A cobalt specimen emits induced radiation
b. Irene Curie Displacement law of 75.6 millicurie per second. Convert this
c. Henry Bequerel Mass energy equivalence disintegration in to becquerel (one curie =
d. Albert Einstein Artificial Radioactivity 3.7 × 1010 Bq)
Match: IV
a. Uncontrolled fission Hydrogen Bomb VIII. Assertion and reason type questions:
reaction Mark the correct choice as
b. Fertile material Nuclear Reactor (a) If both the assertion and the reason
c. Controlled fission Breeder reactor are true and the reason is the correct
reaction explanation of the assertion.
d. Fusion reaction Atom bomb
(b) If both the assertion and the reason are
Match: V true, but the reason is not the correct
explanation of the assertion.
a. Co - 60 Age of fossil
(c) Assertion is true, but the reason is false.
b. I - 131 Function of Heart
c. Na - 24 Leukemia (d) Assertion is false, but the reason is true.
d. C - 14 Thyroid disease
1. Assertion: A neutron impinging on U235,
V. Arrange the following in the correct splits it to produce Barium and Krypton.
sequence: Reason: U - 235 is a fissile material.
1. Arrange in descending order, on the basis 2. Assertion: In a β - decay, the neutron

of their penetration power number decreases by one.
Alpha rays, beta rays, gamma rays, cosmic Reason: In β - decay atomic number
rays increases by one.
2. Arrange the following in the chronological 3. Assertion: Extreme temperature is
order of discovery necessary to execute nuclear fusion.
Nuclear reactor, radioactivity, artificial Reason: In a nuclear fusion, the nuclei of the
radioactivity, discovery of radium. reactants combine releasing high energy.

www.tntextbooks.in
4. Assertion: Control rods are known as 'neu- 8. What is stellar energy?

tron seeking rods' 9. Give any two uses of radio isotopes in the
Reason: Control rods are used to perform field of agriculture?
sustained nuclear fission reaction
XI. Answer the following questions in detail.
IX. Answer in one or two word (VSA) 1. Explain the process of controlled and
uncontrolled chain reactions.
1. Who discovered natural radioactivity?
2. Compare the properties of alpha, beta and
2. Which radioactive material is present in the
gamma radiations.
ore of pitchblende?
3. What is a nuclear reactor? Explain its
3. Write any two elements which are used for
essential parts with their functions.
inducing radioactivity?
4. Write the name of the electromagnetic XII. HOT Questions:
radiation which is emitted during a natural
radioactivity. 1. Mass number of a radioactive element is
232 and its atomic number is 90. When
5. If A is a radioactive element which emits
this element undergoes certain nuclear
an α - particle and produces 104Rf 259. Write
reactions, it transforms into an isotope of
the atomic number and mass number of the
lead with a mass number 208 and an atomic
element A.
number 82. Determine the number of alpha
6. What is the average energy released from a and beta decay that can occur.
single fission process?
2. 'X – rays should not be taken often'. Give the
7. Which hazardous radiation is the cause for reason.
the genetic disease?
3. Cell phone towers should be placed far away
8. What is the amount of radiation that may from the residential area – why?
cause death of a person when exposed to it?
9. When and where was the first nuclear
reactor built? REFERENCE BOOKS
10. Give the SI unit of radioactivity.
11. Which material protects us from radiation? 1. Physics concepts and connections – by Art
Hobson Edition: Pearson education
X. Answer the following questions in few
2. Modern Physics – by Dr. R Murugesan & Er.
sentences.
Kiruthiga Sivaprasath – S. Chand publications
1. Write any three features of natural and
artificial radioactivity.
I NT ER NET R ES O U RCES
2. Define critical mass.
3. Define one roentgen. 1.
https://physics.columbia.edu/research/nu-
4. State Soddy and Fajan’s displacement law. clear-physics
5. Give the function of control rods in a 2.
http://www.newworldencyclopedia.org/
nuclear reactor. entry/Nuclear_physics
6. In Japan, some of the new born children are
having congenital diseases. Why?
7. Mr. Ramu is working as an X - ray technician
in a hospital. But, he does not wear the lead
aprons. What suggestion will you give to
Mr. Ramu?
89 Nuclear physics

www.tntextbooks.in
ICT CORNER Modern Atomic Theory

To enable the students to build structure
of different elements with electrons,
protons and neutrons. They also know
how new elements are formed as a result of
Nuclear decays.
Steps
• Access and download the application ‘atom.phys’ in your mobile by using the provided URL or
QR code.
• Click ‘Modeling’ to build the structure of an element by making changes in electron, proton and
neutron.
• Click ‘Nuclear decays’ to know how new elements are formed because of the decay/ destruction of
atoms.
• Finally click ‘Tests’ to check your knowledge by answering the questions.
Cells alive
URL: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.CowboyBebop.
AtomPhys&hl=en or Scan the QR Code.

www.tntextbooks.in
ATOMS AND MOLECULES

7
Learning Objectives
At the end of the lesson the students will be able to:

� acquire the ability to learn about the atoms and molecules.
� comprehend atomic mass and molecular mass.
� have information about gram atomic mass and gram molecular mass.
� perceive the intended meaning of Avogadro’s hypothesis of gases.
� interpret the application of Avogadro’s hypothesis.
� determine the atomicity of a molecule.
� interpret the relation between vapour density and relative molecular mass.
� have the facts about the relationship between the volume of a gas and the number of
molecules present in it.
� grasp the idea of mole concept and solve many problems using it.
� calculate the percentage of composition of a compund.
removed and a new theory known as the

INTRODUCTION
modern atomic theory was put forward.
‘The main postulates of modern atomic
You have learnt, in your lower classes theory’ are as follows:
that matter is around us everywhere. Matter is
� An atom is no longer indivisible (after
made of atoms. Curiously the idea of atom was
the discovery of the electron, proton, and
first proposed by the Greek philosophers in the
neutron).
fifth century BC (BCE). But, their theory was
� Atoms of the same element may have
more philosophical than scientific.
different atomic mass. (discovery of
The first scientific theory of the atom isotopes 17Cl35, 17Cl37).
was proposed by John Dalton. Few of the � Atoms of different elements may have same
postulates of Dalton’s theory about an atomic masses (discovery of Isobars 18Ar40,
atom were found incorrect by the later on 40
20Ca ).
studies made by J.J. Thomson, Rutherford, � Atoms of one element can be transmuted
Neils Bohr and Schrodinger. In the light into atoms of other elements. In other
of the result of the researches most of the words, atom is no longer indestructible
limitations of the Dalton’s theory were (discovery of artificial transmutation).
91

www.tntextbooks.in
� Atoms may not always combine in a simple 7.1.1 Relative Atomic Mass

whole number ratio (E.g. Glucose C6H12O6 (RAM)
C:H:O = 6:12:6 or 1:2:1 and Sucrose
As an atom is very small, its absolute
C12H22O11 C:H:O = 12:22:11).
mass cannot be determined directly. The early
� Atom is the smallest particle that takes pioneers of chemistry used to measure the
part in a chemical reaction. atomic mass of an atom relative to an atom of
� The mass of an atom can be converted into another element. They measured the masses
energy (E = mc2). of equal number of atoms of two or more
elements at a time, to determine their relative
The modern atomic theory is the basis
masses. They established one element as a
for all the studies of chemical and physical
standard, gave it an arbitrary value of atomic
processes that involve atoms. You have studied
mass and using this value they measured
the most fundamental ideas about an atom in
your lower classes. Let us discuss some more the relative mass of other elements. The
concepts about atoms in this lesson. mass obtained by this way is called relative
atomic mass. In the beginning, the mass of
hydrogen atom was chosen as a standard and
7.1 ATOM AND ATOMIC MASS masses of other atoms were compared with it,
because of the existence of isotopic character
As you know, anything that has mass and
of hydrogen (1H1, 1H2, 1H3). Later hydrogen
occupies space is called matter. Atoms are the
atom was replaced by oxygen atom as the
building blocks of matter. Since matter has
standard. Now, the stable isotope of carbon
mass, it must be due to its atoms. According to
(C-12) with atomic mass 12 is used as the
the modern atomic theory, an atom contains
subatomic particles such as protons, neutrons standard for measuring the relative atomic
and electrons. Protons and neutrons have mass of an element.
considerable mass, but electrons don't have Relative atomic mass of an element
such a considerable mass. Thus, the mass of an is the ratio between the average mass of
atom is mainly contributed by its protons and its isotopes to 121th part of the mass of a
neutrons and hence the sum of the number of carbon-12 atom. It is denoted as Ar. It is
protons and neutrons of an atom is called its otherwise called “Standard Atomic Weight”.
mass number.
Relative Atomic Mass
Individual atoms are very small and it
is difficult to measure their masses. You can
measure the mass of macroscopic materials Average mass of the isotopes of the element
(Ar) = 1
in gram or kilogram. The mass of an atom is of the mass of one Carbon-12 atom
12th
measured in atomic mass unit (amu).
Atomic mass unit is one-twelfth of the Modern methods of determination of
mass of a carbon-12 atom; an isotope of carbon, atomic mass by Mass Spectrometry uses
which contains 6 protons and 6 neutrons. C-12 as standard. For most of the elements,
(Note: The symbol ‘amu’ is no longer the relative atomic mass is very closer to a
used in the modern system and instead, it whole number and it is rounded off to a whole
uses the symbol ‘U’ to denote unified atomic number, to make calculations easier. Table 7.1
mass. The mass of a proton or neutron is lists some of the elements of periodic table and
approximately 1 amu). their Ar values.

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 7.1 Relative atomic mass consider an element which exists as a mixture
of elements (C-12 Scale) of 50% of an isotope having a mass of 9 amu,
and 50% of another isotope having a mass
Element Symbol Ar
of 10 amu. Then, its average atomic mass is
Hydrogen H 1 calculated by the following equation:
Carbon C 12 Average atomic mass
Nitrogen N 14
= (Mass of 1st isotope × % abundance of
Oxygen O 16 1st isotope) + (Mass of 2nd isotope ×
Sodium Na 23 % abundance of 2nd isotope)
Magnesium Mg 24 Thus, for the given element the average
Sulphur S 32 atomic mass = (9 × 50 ) +(10 × 50 )
100 100
= 4.5 + 5 = 9.5 amu
Relative Atomic Mass is only a (Note: In the calculations involving
ratio, so it has no unit. If the percentages, you need to convert percentage
atomic mass of an element is abundance into fractional abundance.
expressed in grams, it is called For example, 50 percent is converted into
as Gram Atomic Mass 50/100 or 0.50 as shown in the a foresaid
Gram Atomic Mass of hydrogen = 1 g calculation.)
Gram Atomic Mass of carbon = 12 g The atomic masses of elements, given in

the periodic table, are average atomic masses.
Gram Atomic Mass of nitrogen = 14 g
Sometimes, the term atomic weight is used
Gram Atomic Mass of oxygen = 16 g to mean average atomic mass. It is observed,
from the periodic table that atomic masses of
most of the elements are not whole numbers.
7.1.2
Average Atomic Mass (AAM) For instance, the atomic mass of carbon given
in the periodic table is 12.01 amu, not 12.00
How can one measure
amu. The reason is that while calculating the
the atomic mass of an
atomic mass of carbon, both of its natural
element? It is somewhat
isotopes such as carbon-12. and carbon-13 are
more complicated because
considered. The natural abundance of C-12
most of the naturally
and C-13 are 98.90 % and 1.10 % respectively.
occuring elements exist as
The average of the atomic mass of carbon is
a mixture of isotopes, each of which has its
calculated as follows:
own mass. Thus, it is essential to consider this
isotopic mixture while calculating the atomic Average atomic mass of carbon
1.1 )
mass of an element. = (12 × 98.9 ) + (13 ×
100 100
The average atomic mass of an element
= (12 × 0.989) + (13 × 0.011)
is the weighted average of the masses of its
naturally occurring isotopes. = 11.868 + 0.143 = 12.011 amu
But, the abundance of isotopes of each So it is important to understand that if it
element may differ. So, the abundancy of all is mentioned that the atomic mass of carbon
these isotopes are taken into consideration is 12 amu, it refers to the average atomic mass
while calculating the atomic mass. Then, what of the carbon isotopes, not the mass of the
do we mean by a weighted average? Let us individual atoms of carbon.
93 Atoms and molecules

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 7.2 Atomic mass of some elements

7.2
M OLECULE AND
Atomic MOLECULAR MASS
Atomic
Name Symbol Mass
Number Except noble gases, atoms of most of the
(amu)
elements are found in the combined form with
1 Hydrogen H 1.008
itself or atoms of other elements. It is called as
2 Helium He 4.003 a molecule. A molecule is a combination of
3 Lithium Li 6.941 two or more atoms held together by strong
4 Beryllium Be 9.012 chemical forces of attraction, i.e. chemical
bonds.
5 Boron B 10.811
All compounds
Calculation of average atomic mass –
are molecules;
Solved Examples but,all molecules
Example 1: Oxygen is the most abundant l are not compounds
tua
element in both the Earth’s crust and the c ep s why?
n t
Co ugh
human body. It exists as a mixture of three h o
T
stable isotopes in nature as shown in Table 7.3:
7.2.1 Classification of molecules
Table 7.3 Isotopes of oxygen A molecule may contain atoms of the same
element or may contain atoms of two or more
Isotope Mass (amu) % abundance elements joined in a fixed ratio, in accordance
with the law of definite proportions. Thus, a
8O16 15.9949 99.757
molecule may be an element or a compound. If
8O17 16.9991 0.038 the molecule is made of similar kind of atoms,
then it is called homoatomic molecule.
8O18 17.9992 0.205
The molecule that consist of atoms of
different elements is called heteroatomic
The atomic mass of molecule. A compound is a heteroatomic
oxygen = (15.9949 × 0.99757) + (16.9991 × molecule. The number of atoms present in the
0.00038) + (17.9992 × 0.00205) molecule is called its ‘atomicity’.
= 15.999 amu. Table 7.4 Classification of molecules
Example 2: Boron naturally occurs as a mixture No. of atoms
of boron-10 (5 protons + 5 neutrons) and Atomicity Name
present
boron-11 (5 protons + 6 neutrons) isotopes. 1 1 Monoatomic
The percentage abundance of B-10 is 20 and
2 2 Diatomic
that of B-11 is 80. Then, the atomic mass of
boron is calculated as follows: 3 3 Triatomic
>3 >3 Polyatomic
Atomic mass of
20 80 ) Let us consider oxygen. Oxygen gas
boron = (10 × 100 ) + (11 × exists in two allotropic forms: Oxygen (O2)
100
and Ozone (O3). In oxygen molecule, there
= (10 × 0.20) + (11 × 0.80) are two oxygen atoms. So its atomicity is two.
= 2 + 8.8 Since both the atoms are similar, oxygen (O2)
= 10.8 amu is a homodiatomic molecule. Other elements

www.tntextbooks.in
Activity 7.1
Complete the following table by filling the appropriate values /terms
No. of No. of Mass Stable Isotopes Atomic Mass

Element
Protons Neutrons Number (abundance) (amu)
7 N-14 (99.6 %)
8 N-15 (0.4 %)
14 28 Si-28 (92.2 %)
Silicon 14 Si-29 (4.7 %)
16 Si-30 (3.1 %)
17 Cl-35 (75 %)
17 Cl-37 (25 %)
that exist as diatomic molecules are hydrogen

(H2), nitrogen (N2) and halogens: fluorine Activity 7.2
(F2), chlorine (Cl2), bromine (Br2) and
iodine (I2). Classify the following molecules based on
their atomicity and fill in the table:
Fluorine (F2), Carbon dioxide (CO2),
Phosphorous (P4), Sulphur (S8), Ammonia
(NH3), Hydrogen iodide (HI), Sulphuric Acid
(H2SO4), Methane (CH4), Glucose (C6H12O6),
Oxygen
Carbon monoxide (CO)
Ozone
(homodiatomic molecule) (homotriatomic molecule)
Di - Tri - Poly -
Figure 7.1 Homoatomic molecules Molecule
atomic atomic atomic
Ozone (O3) contains three oxygen atoms Homo
and hence it is called homotriatomic molecule.
If a molecule contains more than three atoms, Hetero
then it is called polyatomic molecule.
Conisder hydrogen chloride. It consists
of two atoms, but of different elements, i.e. 7.2.2 Relative Molecular Mass
hydrogen and chlorine. So, its atomicity is two. (RMM)
It is a heterodiatomic molecule. Similarly, the
As the molecules are made of atoms,
water molecule contains two hydrogen atoms
they also have their own mass. The mass of
and one oxygen atom. So its atomicity is three. It
the molecule of an element or compound is
is a heterotriatomic molecule.
measured in the C-12 scale and hence called
O relative molecular mass.
H Cl
H H The Relative Molecular Mass of a
Hydrogen Chloride molecule is the ratio between the mass of one
Water
(Heterodiatomic Molecule) (Heterotriatomic Molecule) molecule of the substance to 121th mass of an
Figure 7.2 Heteroatomic molecules atom of Carbon -12.

www.tntextbooks.in
7.3
D IFFERENCE BETWEEN
Relative Molecular Mass is
ATOMS AND MOLECULES
only a ratio. So, it has no unit.
If the molecular mass of a com- Even though atoms are the basic
pound is expressed in grams, components of molecules, they differ in many
it is called Gram Molecular aspects when compared to the molecules. Table
Mass. 7.5 consolidates the major difference between
Gram Molecular Mass of water = 18 g atoms and molecules.
Gram Molecular Mass of
carbon dioxide = 44 g Table 7.5 Difference between atoms and
Gram Molecular Mass of molecules
ammonia = 17 g
Atom Molecule
Gram Molecular Mass of HCl = 36.5 g
An atom is the A molecule is the
The relative molecular mass is obtained by smallest particle of smallest particle
adding together the relative atomic masses of all an element of an element or
the atoms present in a molecule. compound.
Calculation of relative molecular mass – Atom does not exist Molecule exists in a
Solved examples: in free state except free a state
Example 1: Relative molecular mass of in noble gas
sulphuric acid (H2SO4) is calculated as follows: Except some of noble Molecules are less
Sulphuric acid conatins 2 atoms of hydrogen, gas, other atoms are reactive
1 atom of sulphur and 4 atoms of oxygen. highly reactive
Therefore, Relative molecular mass of Atom does not have Atoms in a
sulphuric acid = (2 × mass of hydrogen) + a chemical bond molecule are held
(1 × mass of sulphur) + by chemical bonds
(4 × mass of oxygen)
= (2 × 1) + (1 × 32) + (4 × 16) 7.4 MOLE CONCEPT
= 98
So far we discussed about matters in terms
i.e., one molecule of H2SO4 is 98 times as of individual atoms and molecules. Atomic
heavy as 121th of the mass of a carbon –12. mass units provide a relative scale for the m
asses
of the elements. Since the atoms have such
Example 2: Relative molecular mass of small masses, no usable scale can be devised
water (H2O) is calculated as follows: A water to weigh them in the calibrated units of atomic
molecule is made of 2 atoms of hydrogen and mass units. In any real situation, we deal with
one atom of oxygen. macroscopic samples containing enormous

number of atoms. Therefore, it is convenient
So, the relative molecular mass of water
to have a special unit to describe a very large
= (2 × mass of hydrogen) + (1 × mass of number of atoms. The idea of a ‘unit’ to denote
oxygen) a particular number of objects is not new. For
= (2 × 1) + (1 × 16) example, the pair (2 items) and the dozen
= 18 (12 items), are all familiar units. Chemists
measure atoms and molecules in ‘moles’. So,
i.e., one molecule of H2O is 18 times as
you can now understand that ‘mole’ denotes a
heavy as 121th of the mass of a carbon –12. number of particles.

www.tntextbooks.in
In the SI system, the mole (mol) is the i.e., one mole of oxygen molecule contains
amount of a substance that contains as many 6.023 × 1023 molecules of oxygen and its gram
elementary entities (atoms, molecules, or other molecular mass is 32 g.
particles) as there are atoms in exactly 12 g
(or 0.012 kg) of the carbon-12 isotope. The Molar volume:
actual number of atoms in 12 g of carbon-12 One mole of any gas occupies 22.4 litre or
is determined experimentally. This is called 22400 ml at S.T.P. This volume is called as molar
Avogadro’s Number (NA), named after an Italian volume.
scientist Amedeo Avogadro who proposed
its significance. Its value is 6.023 × 1023. So Calculation of number of moles by
one mole of a substance contains 6.023 × 1023 Different modes
entities. Thus, 5 moles of oxygen molecules Number of moles
contain 5 × 6.023 ×1023 molecules. = Mass / Atomic Mass
Mole Concept: The study of the collection = Mass / Molecular mass
of particles by using mole as the counting unit, = Number of Atoms / 6.023 × 1023
in order to express the mass and volume of such = Number of Molecules / 6.023 × 1023
unit particles in a bulk of matter is known as
mole concept.
The number of moles of a substance can be
calculated by various means depending on the
data available, as follows:
� Number of moles of molecules.
� Number of moles of atoms.
� Number of moles of a gas (Standard molar

volume at STP = 22.4 litre).
� Number of moles of ions.
Note:
STP-Standard Temperature and
Figure 7.3 Mole concept
Pressure(273.15 K,1.00 atm)
Mole of atoms:
7.5 PERCENT COMPOSITION
One mole of an element contains
6.023 × 1023 atoms and it is equal to its gram So for, we were dealing with the number of
atomic mass. entities present in a given substance. But many
i.e., one mole of oxygen atom contains times, the information regarding the percentage
6.023 × 1023 atoms of oxygen and its gram atomic of a particular element present in a compound is
mass is 16 g. required.
The percentage composition of a compound
Mole of molecules: represents the mass of each element present in
One mole of matter contains 6.023 × 1023 100 g of the compound.
molecules and it is equal to its gram molecular Let us understand the percentage
mass. composition of oxygen and hydrogen by taking

www.tntextbooks.in
the example of H2O. It can be calculated using number of molecules of a gas, then Avogadro
the formula law is represented, mathematically, as follows:
Mass % of an element Vαn
mass of that element in the compound V = constant × n
= × 100 3
Thus, one litre (1 dm ) of hydrogen contains
molecular mass of the compound
the same number of molecules as in one litre
Now,
of oxygen, i.e. the volume of the gas is directly
molecular mass of H2O = 2(1) + 16
proportional to the number of molecules of the
= 18 g
gas.
2
Mass % of hydrogen = × 100
18
= 11.11 %
16
Mass % of oxygen = × 100
18
= 88.89 %
This percentage composition is useful to
determine the empirical formula and molecular Figure 7.4 Avogadro Hypothesis
formula.
Explanation
Example 1: Find the mass percentage
Let us consider the reaction between
composition of methane (CH4).
hydrogen and chlorine to form hydrogen

molecular mass of CH4 = 12 + 4 chloride gas
= 16 g
H2(g) + Cl2(g) → 2 HCl(g)
12 1 vol + 1 vol → 2 volumes
Mass % of carbon = × 100
16
According to Avogadro’s law 1 volume of
= 75 %
any gas is occupied by “n” number of molecules.
4 n molecules + n molecules → 2n molecules
Mass % of hydrogen = × 100
16 if n = 1 then
= 25 % 1molecule + 1 molecule → 2 molecules.
½ molecule + ½ molecule → 1 molecule
7.6 AVOGADRO HYPOTHESIS 1 molecule of hydrogen chloride gas is
made up of ½ molecule of hydrogen and ½
In 1811 Avogadro framed a hypothesis molecule of chlorine. Hence, the molecules can
based on the relationship between the number be subdivided. This law is in agreement with
of molecules present in equal volumes of gases Dalton’s atomic theory.
in different conditions.
Activity 7.3
The Avogadro’s law states that “equal
volumes of all gases under similar conditions Under same conditions of temperature
of temperature and pressure contain equal and pressure if you collect 3 litre of O2, 5 litre
number of molecules” of Cl2 and 6 litre of H2,
It follows that the volume of any given i. Which has the highest number of
gas must be proportional to the number of molecules?
molecules in it. If ‘V’ is the volume and ‘n’ is the ii. Which has the lowest number of molecules?

www.tntextbooks.in
7.7
APPLICATIONS OF Cancelling 'n' which is common, you get
AVOGADRO’S LAW V.D.
Mass of 1 molecule of a gas or vapour at S.T.P.
i. It explains Gay-Lussac’s law. =
Mass of 1 molecules of hydrogen
ii. It helps in the determination of atomicity of However, since hydrogen is diatomic
gases.
iii. Molecular formula of gases can be derived V.D.
using Avogadro’s law Mass of 1 molecule of a gas or vapour at S.T.P.
=
Mass of 2 atoms of hydrogen
iv. It determines the relation between molecular
mass and vapour density. When you compare the formula of vapour
v. It helps to determine gram molar volume of density with relative molecular mass, they can
all gases (i.e, 22.4 litre at S.T.P) be represented as
V.D.
7.8 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN Mass of 1 molecule of a gas or vapour at S.T.P.
=
VAPOUR DENSITY AND 2 × Mass of 1 atom of hydrogen
RELATIVE MOLECULAR (Eqn 7.1)
MASS
Relative molecular mass (hydrogen scale) =
i. Relative molecular mass: Mass of 1 molecule of a gas or vapour at STP
(Hydrogen scale) Mass of 1 atom of hydrogen
The Relative Molecular Mass of a gas or (Eqn 7.2)
vapour is the ratio between the mass of one You can therefore substitute the above
molecule of the gas or vapour to mass of one equation to an Eqn 7.1 and arrive at the
atom of Hydrogen. following formula
ii. Vapour Density: Relative molecular mass
V.D. =
Vapour density is the ratio of the mass 2
of a certain volume of a gas or vapour, to the
mass of an equal volume of hydrogen, measured Now on cross multiplication, you have
under the same conditions of temperature and 2 × vapour density = Relative molecular mass
pressure. of a gas
Vapour Density (V.D.)
(Or)
Mass of a given volume of gas or vapour at S.T.P.
= Relative molecular mass = 2 × Vapour density
Mass of the same volume of hydrogen
According to Avogadro's law, equal 7.9 SOLVED PROBLEMS

volumes of all gases contain equal number of
molecules. I. Calculation of molecular mass
Thus, let the number of molecules in one Calculate the gram molecular mass of the

volume = n, then following.
1) H2O 2) CO2 3) Ca3 (PO4)2
V.D. at S.T.P
Mass of ‘n’ molecules of a gas or vapour at Solution:
= S.T.P. 1) H2O
Mass of ‘n’ molecules of hydrogen Atomic masses of H = 1, O = 16

www.tntextbooks.in
ram molecular mass of H2O

G 1)
0.3 mole of aluminium (Atomic mass of
= (1 × 2) + (16 × 1) Al = 27)
= 2 + 16 Mass of Al
Gram molecular mass of H2O = 18 g Number of moles =
Atomic mass of Al
2) CO2 Mass = No. of moles × atomic mass
Atomic masses of C = 12, O = 16 So, mass of Al = 0.3 × 27
Gram molecular mass of CO2
= 8.1 g
= (12 × 1) + (16 × 2)
= 12 + 32 2) 2.24 litre of SO2 gas at S.T.P
Gram molecular mass of CO2 = 44 g Molecular mass of SO2 = 32 + (16 × 2)
3) Ca3 (PO4)2 = 32 + 32 = 64
Atomic masses of Ca = 40, P = 30, O = 16.
Given volume of
Gram molecular mass of Ca3 (PO4)2 SO2 at S.T.P
= (40 × 3) + [30 + (16 × 4)] × 2 Number of moles of SO2 =
Molar volume SO2
= 120 + (94 × 2) at S.T.P
= 120 + 188
Gram molecular mass of Ca3(PO4)2 = 308 g 2.24
Number of moles of SO2 =
II. Calculation based on number of moles 22.4
from mass and volume = 0.1 mole
1) Calculate the number of moles in 46 g of Mass
Number of moles =
sodium? Molecular mass
Mass of the element Mass = No. of moles × molecular mass
Number of moles = Atomic mass of the ele-
Mass = 0.1 × 64
ment
Mass of SO2 = 6.4 g
= 46 / 23
= 2 moles of sodium 23
3) 1.51 × 10 molecules of water
2) 5.6 litre of oxygen at S.T.P Molecular mass of H2O = 18
Given volume of O2 at Number of molecules of
Number moles = S.T.P Number of moles = water
Molar volume at S.T.P Avogadro’s number
5.6 = 1.51 × 1023 / 6.023 × 1023
Number of moles of oxygen =
22.4 =1/4
= 0.25 mole of oxygen = 0.25 mole
3) Calculate the number of moles of a sample Mass
Number of moles =
that contains 12.046 × 1023 atoms of iron ? Molecular mass
Number of atoms of iron 0.25 = mass / 18
Number of moles =
Avogadro’s number Mass = 0.25 × 18
= 12.046 × 1023 / 6.023 × 1023 Mass = 4.5 g
= 2 moles of iron 4) 5 × 1023 molecules of glucose ?
III. Calculation of mass from mole Molecular mass of glucose = 180
Calculate the mass of the following

www.tntextbooks.in
Molecular mass × Number of atoms of oxygen = Number of

Mass of glucose = number of particles moles of oxygen × Avogadro’s number
Avogadro’s number = 10 × 6.023 × 1023
= (180 × 5 × 1023) / 6.023 × 1023 = 6.023 × 1024 atoms of Oxygen

= 149.43 g • 1 mole of CO2 contains 1 mole of carbon
IV. Calculation based on number of atoms/ • 5 moles of CO2 contains 5 moles of carbon

molecules.
1) Calculate the number of molecules in 11.2 No.of moles of carbon
No. of atoms of carbon =
litre of CO2 at S.T.P × Avogadro’s number
Volume at S.T.P 23
Number of moles of CO2 = = 5 × 6.023 × 10
Molar volume
= 11.2 / 22.4 = 3.011 × 1024 atoms of Carbon
= 0.5 mole V. Calculation based on molar volume
Number of molecules of CO2 = number of Calculate the volume occupied by:
moles of CO2 × Avogadro’s number
1) 2.5 mole of CO2 at S.T.P
= 0.5 × 6.023 × 1023
= 3.011 × 1023 molecules of CO2 Number of moles of CO2 =
Given volume at S.T.P
Molar volume at S.T.P
2) Calculate the number of atoms present in
1 gram of gold (Atomic mass of Au = 198) Volume of CO2 at S.T.P
2.5 mole of CO2 =
Mass of Au × Avogadro’s 22.4
Number of atoms
number Volume of CO2 at S.T.P = 22.4 × 2.5
of Au =
Atomic mass of Au = 56 litres.
23
1 2) 12.046 × 10 of ammonia gas molecules
Number of atoms of Au = × 6.023 × 1023
198 Number of molecules
Number of moles =
Number of atoms of Au = 3.042 × 1021 g Avogadro’s number
= 12.046 × 1023 / 6.023 × 1023
3) Calculate the number of molecules in 54 gm
of H2O? = 2 moles
Volume occupied by NH3
(Avogadro number
× Given mass) = number of moles × molar volume
Number of molecules =
Gram molecular = 2 × 22.4
mass = 44.8 litres at S.T.P
Number of molecules 3) 14 g nitrogen gas
23
of water = 6.023 × 10 × 54 / 18 Number of moles = 14 / 28
23
= 18.069 × 10 molecules = 0.5 mole
4) Calculate the number of atoms of oxygen and Volume occupied by N2 at S.T.P
carbon in 5 moles of CO2.
= no. of moles × molar volume
• 1 mole of CO2 contains 2 moles of oxygen
= 0.5 × 22.4
• 5 moles of CO2 contain 10 moles of oxygen = 11.2 litres.

www.tntextbooks.in
VI. Calculation based on % composition � Relative atomic mass of an element is the

Calculate % of S in H2SO4 ratio between the mass of one atom of the
molecular mass of H2SO4 element to 1/12th of the mass of the atom of
carbon -12.
= (1 × 2) + (32 × 1) + (16 × 4)
= 2 + 32 + 64 � Average atomic mass of an element is
= 98 g calculated by adding the masses of its
isotopes, each multiplied by their natural
Mass of sulphur abundance on the Earth.
% of S in H2SO4 = Molecular mass of × 100
H2SO4 � Relative molecular mass of a molecule is the
ratio between the mass of one molecule of
32 the substance to 1/12th of the mass of the
% of S in H2SO4 = × 100
98 atom of carbon – 12.
= 32.65 %
� The Avogadro’s law states that “equal
Points to Remember volumes of all gases under similar
conditions of temperature and pressure
� Two or more forms of an element having
contain equal number of molecules”.
the same atomic number, but different mass
number are called Isotopes (17Cl35, 17Cl37). � The vapour density is defined as “the ratio
� Atoms of different elements having the between the masses of equal volumes of a
same mass number, but different atomic gas (or a vapour) and hydrogen under the
numbers are called Isobars (18Ar40, 20Ca40). same condition”.
� Atoms of different elements having the � Atomicity of a monoatomic element =
same number of neutrons, but different Molecular mass / Atomic Mass.
atomic number and different mass number
13 14
are called Isotones ( 6C , 7N ). � Molecular mass = 2 × Vapour density.
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the best answer. 3. The volume occupied by 4.4 g of CO2 at
1. Which of the following has the smallest mass? S.T.P
a. 6.023 × 1023 atoms of He a. 22.4 litre b. 2.24 litre
b. 1 atom of He c. 0.24 litre d. 0.1 litre
c. 2 g of He
4. Mass of 1 mole of Nitrogen atom is
d. 1 mole atoms of He
a. 28 amu b. 14 amu
2. Which of the following is a triatomic c. 28 g d. 14 g
molecule?
5. Which of the following represents 1 amu?
a. Glucose b. Helium
a. Mass of a C – 12 atom
c. Carbon dioxide d. Hydrogen
b. Mass of a hydrogen atom
c. 1/12th of the mass of a C – 12 atom
d. Mass of O – 16 atom

www.tntextbooks.in
6. Which of the following statement is 6.

The average atomic mass of hydrogen is
incorrect? ___________ amu.
a. 12 gram of C – 12 contains Avogadro’s 7. If a molecule is made of similar kind of
number of atoms. atoms, then it is called ____________ atomic
b. One mole of oxygen gas contains molecule.
Avogadro’s number of molecules. 8. The number of atoms present in a molecule
c. One mole of hydrogen gas contains is called its ____________
Avogadro’s number of atoms.
d. One mole of electrons stands for 9. One mole of any gas occupies ________ ml
23
6.023 × 10 electrons. at S.T.P
10 Atomicity of phosphorous is ___________
7. The volume occupied by 1 mole of a diatomic
gas at S.T.P is III. Match the following
a. 11.2 litre b. 5.6 litre 1. 8 g of O2 - 4 moles
c. 22.4 litre d. 44.8 litre
2. 4 g of H2 - 0.25 moles
40
8. In the nucleus of Ca , there are
20 3. 52 g of He - 2 moles
a. 20 protons and 40 neutrons
4. 112 g of N2 - 0.5 moles
b. 20 protons and 20 neutrons
5. 35.5 g of Cl2 - 13 moles
c. 20 protons and 40 electrons
d. 40 protons and 20 electrons
IV. True or False: (If false give the correct
statement)
9. The gram molecular mass of oxygen
molecule is 1. Two elements sometimes can form more
than one compound.
a. 16 g b. 18 g
c. 32 g d. 17 g 2. Noble gases are Diatomic
3. The gram atomic mass of an element has
10. 1 mole of any substance contains ____ no unit
molecules. 4. 1 mole of Gold and Silver contain same
a. 6.023 × 1023 b. 6.023 × 10-23 number of atoms
23
c. 3.0115 × 10 d. 12.046 × 1023 5. Molar mass of CO2 is 42g.
V. Assertion and Reason:
II. Fill in the blanks
Answer the following questions using the
1. Atoms of different elements having _______
data given below:
mass number, but ________ atomic
i) A and R are correct, R explains the A.
numbers are called isobars.
ii) A is correct, R is wrong.
Atoms of different elements having same
2.
number of ___________ are called isotones. iii) A is wrong, R is correct.
3. Atoms of one element can be transmuted iv) A and R are correct, R doesn’t explains A.
into atoms of other element by ________ 1. Assertion: The Relative Atomic mass of
4.
The sum of the numbers of protons and aluminium is 27
neutrons of an atom is called its __________ Reason: An atom of aluminium is 27 times
5. Relative atomic mass is otherwise known as heavier than 1/12th of the mass of the
__________ C – 12 atom.

www.tntextbooks.in
2. Assertion: The Relative Molecular Mass of ii.

Calculate the gram molecular mass
Chlorine is 35.5 a.m.u. of calcium carbonate involved in this
Reason: The natural abundance of Chlorine reaction
isotopes are not equal. iii. How many moles of CO2 are there in
this equation?
VI. Short answer questions
1. Define: Relative atomic mass. IX. Solve the following problems
2. Write the different types of isotopes of 1. How many grams are there in the following?
oxygen and its percentage abundance.
i. 2 moles of hydrogen molecule, H2
3. Define: Atomicity
4. Give any two examples for heterodiatomic ii. 3 moles of chlorine molecule, Cl2
molecules. iii. 5 moles of sulphur molecule, S8
5. What is Molar volume of a gas? iv. 4 moles of phosphorous molecule, P4
6. Find the percentage of nitrogen in ammonia.
2. Calculate the % of each element in calcium
VII. Long answer questions carbonate. (Atomic mass: C-12, O-16,
Ca -40)
1. Calculate the number of water molecule
present in one drop of water which weighs 3. Calculate the % of oxygen in Al2(SO4)3.
0.18 g. (Atomic mass: Al-27, O-16, S -32)
2. N2 + 3 H2 → 2 NH3 4. Calculate the % relative abundance of B -10

and B -11, if its average atomic mass is
( The atomic mass of nitrogen is 14, and that 10.804 amu.
of hydrogen is 1)
1 mole of nitrogen (_______g) +
REFERENCE BOOKS
3 moles of hydrogen ( _________ g) →
2 moles of ammonia ( _________ g) 1) Petrucci, Ralph H et.al. General Chemistry:
Principles & Modern Applications (9th
3. Calculate the number of moles in Edition). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson
i) 27g of Al
23
ii) 1.51 × 10 molecules of Prentice Hall, 2007. Print.
NH4Cl 2) Raymond Chang. (2010). Chemistry. New
4. Give the salient features of “Modern atomic York, NY: The Tata McGraw Hill Companies.
theory”. Inc.
5. Derive the relationship between Relative 3) Julia Burdge. (2011). Chemistry. New York,
molecular mass and Vapour density. NY: The Tata McGraw Hill Companies.Inc.
VIII. HOT question
1. Calcium carbonate is decomposed on heat- I NT ER NET R ES O U RCES
ing in the following reaction
https://www2.estrellamountain.edu/faculty/
CaCO3 → CaO + CO2
farabee/biobk/BioBookCHEM1.html
i. How many moles of Calcium carbonate h ttps://www.toppr.com/guides/chemistry/
are involved in this reaction? atoms-and-molecules/

www.tntextbooks.in
CONCEPT MAP
Atoms and Molecules
Modern Avogadro’s
Atomic Hypothesis
Theory
Atom Molecule
Atomic Mass Molecular

Mass
Isotopes
Isobars Relative
Isotones Relative
Molecular
Atomic Mass
Mass
Gay-Lussac’s law
Atomicity of molecule
Average Mole Determine molecular formula
Atomic Mass Concept Relation between M.M and V.D

www.tntextbooks.in
Weak Pull H Cl Strong Pull
+ PERIODIC
– CLASSIFICATION
8 H
Elctron
OF ELEMENTS
on Transferred
T f d
Cl
Learning Objectives
After a thorough perusal of this unit, the students will be able to:
recognize the basis of the modern periodic law and its development.
list the features of groups and periods of the modern periodic table.
explain the trend in periodic properties along the periods and groups.
distinguish between ores and minerals .
list out the types of separation of impurities from the ores.
recall the various places of occurrences of minerals in the state of Tamil Nadu.
put forth the properties of metals.
identify the stages involved in metallurgical processes.
think scientifically on alloys and their types.
develop an idea on amalgam.
understand the reason for corrosion and the methods of its prevention.
periods in such a way that each group contained

INTRODUCTION
a certain number of elements (like an array of
The eighteenth and nineteenth centuries fruits and vegetables showing orderliness)
witnessed a rapid development in chemistry with similar properties and periods showing a
in all spheres of scientific activities. By 1860, regular gradation. So, scientists made several
scientists had already discovered 60 elements attempts to arrange elements in a logical way.
and determined their atomic masses. They You have studied about all these early attempts
noticed that some elements had similar of arrangement of elements in standard IX. In
properties and hence arranged them into continuation of the knowledge gained in the
groups. During this period, several new topic periodic classification of elements in
elements were discovered. These elements standard IX with earlier concepts and their
were found to have different properties. It was subsequent deliberations, you get set to go
realized that instead of studying the properties ahead with the higher order of thinking to
of all these elements individually, it would be enhance your knowledge on the properties of
more convenient to divide them into groups and elements.
106

www.tntextbooks.in
Figure 8.1 shows the modern periodic table of

8.1 MODERN PERIODIC LAW
118 elements discovered so far.
Mendeleev’s periodic table had some As you have studied the features of the
discrepancies, which were difficult to overcome. modern periodic table in standard IX, here
For example, the atomic mass of argon (39.95 let us confine to the study of the features of
amu) is greater than that of potassium (39.10 periods and groups.
amu), but argon comes before potassium in
the periodic table. If elements were arranged
8.2.1 Features of Periods
solely according to increasing atomic mass,
argon would appear in the position occupied The horizontal rows are called periods.
by potassium in our modern periodic table (see There are seven periods in the periodic
in Figure 8.1). No chemist would place argon, a table.
gas with no tendency to react, in the same group First period (Atomic number 1 and 2):
as lithium and sodium,which are two highly This is the shortest period. It contains
reactive metals. This kind of discrepancies only two elements (Hydrogen and
suggested that some fundamental property Helium).
other than atomic mass must be the basis of
Second period (Atomic number 3 to 10):
periodicity. The fundamental property turned
This is a short period. It contains eight
out to be the number of protons in an atom’s
elements (Lithium to Neon).
nucleus, something that could not have been
known by Mendeleev and his contemporaries. Third period (Atomic number 11 to 18):
This is also a short period. It contains
Henry Moseley, a British scientist in 1912,
eight elements (Sodium to Argon).
discovered a new property of elements called
atomic number, which provided a better basis Fourth period (Atomic number 19 to 36):
for the periodic arrangement of the elements. This is a long period. It contains eighteen
It is a well-known fact that atomic number of elements (Potassium to Krypton). This
an element is equal to the number of protons includes 8 representative elements and 10
or the number of electrons present in the transition elements.
neutral atom of an element. The periodic law Fifth period (Atomic number 37 to 54):
was, therefore, modified to frame a modern This is also a long period. It contains
periodic law, which states that 18 elements (Rubidium to Xenon). This
“The physical and chemical properties includes 8 representative elements and 10
of the elements are the periodic functions of transition elements.
their atomic numbers”. Sixth period (Atomic number 55 to 86):
This is the longest period. It contains
32 elements (Caesium to Radon). This
8.2 MODERN PERIODIC TABLE includes 8 representative elements,
With reference to the modern periodic law, 10 transition elements and 14 inner
the elements were arranged in the increasing transition elements (Lanthanides).
order of their atomic numbers to form the Seventh period (Atomic number 87
modern periodic table. The modern periodic to 118): Like the sixth period, this
table is a tabular arrangement of elements in period also accommodates 32 elements.
periods and groups, highlighting the regular Recently 4 elements have been included
repetition of properties of the elements. by IUPAC.
107 Periodic Classificaiton of Elements

10th_Science_Unit-8.indd 108
10th Standard Science
108
www.tntextbooks.in
*(CAS) Chemical Abstract Service | *(IUPAC) International union of Pure and Applied Chemistry
Figure 8.1 Modern Periodic Table
11-01-2020 15:29:49
www.tntextbooks.in
8.2.2 Features of Groups

8.3 P ERIODIC TRENDS IN
The vertical columns in the periodic table PROPERTIES
starting from top to bottom are called
The electronic
groups. There are 18 groups in the periodic
conﬁgurations of elements
table.
help us to explain the
Based on the common characteristics periodic recurrence of
of elements in each group, they can be physical and chemical
grouped as various families.
properties. Anything which
repeats itself after a regular
Group Number Family
interval is called periodic and this behaviour
1 Alkali Metals is called periodicity. Some of the atomic
2 Alkaline earth metals properties of the elements are periodic.
3 to 12 Transition metals Properties such as atomic radius, ionic
13 Boron Family radius, ionisation energy, electronegativity,
electron affinity, show a regular periodicity
14 Carbon Family
and hence they are called periodic properties.
15 Nitrogen Family The main significance of the modern periodic
16 Oxygen Family (or) table is that it gives a clear understanding of the
Chalcogen family general properties and trends within a group or
17 Halogens a period to predict with considerable accuracy,
the properties of any element, even though that
18 Noble gases
element may be unfamiliar to us. Let us discuss
the periodic trend of some of the properties.
The Lanthanides and Actinides, which
form part of Group 3 are called inner
8.3.1 Atomic Radius
transition elements.
Except 'group 18', all the elements present Atomic radius of an atom is defined as
in each group have the same number of the distance between the centre of its nucleus
electrons in their valence shell and thus and the outermost shell containing the valence
have the same valency. For example, all electron. Direct measurement of the radius of
the elements of group 1 have one electron an isolated atom is not possible. Except for
in their valence shells (1s 1). So, the noble gases, usually the atomic radius is
valency of all the alkali metals is ‘1’. referred to as covalent radius or metallic
radius depending on
As the elements present in a group
the nature of the
have identical valence shell electronic
bonding between the
configurations, they possess similar
concerned atoms.
chemical properties.
Atomic radius in metal (a)
The physical properties of the elements atoms is known as
in a group such as melting point, boiling metallic radius. It is
point and density vary gradually. defined as half the (b)
The atoms of the 'group 18' elements have distance between the Figure 8.2
stable electronic configuration in their nuclei of adjacent (a) Metallic Radius
valence shells and hence they are unreactive. metal atoms (Figure 8.2 (b) Covalent Radius

www.tntextbooks.in
(a)). In non-metallic elements, their atomic Li Li+ F F–

radius is known as Covalent radius. It is
defined as half the distance between the
adjacent nuclei of two covalently bonded 156 90 69 119
atoms of the same element in a molecule Na Na+ Cl Cl–
(Figure 8.2 (b)). For example, let us consider
H2 molecule. The distance between the two
hydrogen nuclei of the molecule is 0.74 Å. So
186 116 91 167
its covalent radius is Atomic radius of Hydrogen
Radii in Picometers
0.74/2 = 0.37 Å.
Figure 8.5 Relative ionic radii of cation
When you look
H H and anion
at the variation of the
atomic radii in the Figure 8.3 the ion. You know that ions are formed when
periodic table, there Atomic radius an atom lose or gain electrons. When a neutral
are two distinct trends. atom loses an electron, it becomes a positively
Along the period, from left to right, the atomic charged ion called cation, whereas the gain of
radius of the elements decreases whereas along an electron by a neutral atom forms a negatively
the groups, from the top to bottom, the atomic charged ion called anion. The size of the ions
radius increases. The increase, down a group, is is important to determine their behaviours
due to the increase in the valence shell number in solutions and the structure of ionic solids.
down the group. As the shell number increases, The size of a cation is always smaller than its
the distance between the valence shell and corresponding neutral atom. But, the anion is
the nucleus increases. In contrast, when you larger than its neutral atom.
observe along the period, the shell number
Note: As the positive charge increases the size
remains the same but the number of protons
of the cation decreases
(i.e. atomic number) increases. More and more
As the negative charge increases the
positive charges impose a strong attraction
size of the anion increases
over the electrons and thus the electron cloud
shrinks towards the nucleus, which results in For instance, lithium and sodium lose the
the decrease in the atomic size. Figure 8.4 shows single electron from their outermost energy level
how the atomic radius decreases from lithium to form cations. The ions so formed are smaller
to boron. because the remaining electrons are at a inner
cells and attracted more strongly by the nucleus.
Fluorine and chlorine become negative ions by
gaining an electron. When electrons are added,
the charge on the nucleus is not great enough
to hold the increased number of electrons as
closely as it holds the electrons in the neutral
atom. So, as seen in atomic radius, ionic radii
also decrease along the period from left to
Figure 8.4 Variation of atomic radius
right and increase down the group.
8.3.2 Ionic Radii
8.3.3 Ionisation Energy
It is defined as the distance from the centre
of the nucleus of the ion upto the point where Ionisation energy is the minimum
it exerts its influence on the electron cloud of energy required to remove an electron from

www.tntextbooks.in
an isolated gaseous atom in its ground state to itself more strongly than hydrogen. Thus, when
form a cation. It is otherwise called ionisation the bond breaks, the bonding electrons are left
enthalpy. It is measured in kJ/mol. Higher with chlorine forming H+ and Cl– ions. It is
the ionisation energy, it is more difficult to represented, diagrammatically, as shown below:
remove the electron.
As the atomic size decreases from left Weak Pull H Cl Strong Pull
to right in a period, more energy is required
to remove the electrons. So, the ionisation
energy increases along the period. But, down
the group, the atomic size increases and hence
the valence electrons are loosely bound. They + –
require relatively less energy for the removal.
H Cl
Thus, ionisation energy decreases down the
group in the periodic table. Elctron Transferred
8.3.4 Electron Affinity

Figure 8.6 Relative electronegativity of
Electron affinity is the amount of energy H and Cl
released when an isolated gaseous atom
gains an electron to form its anion. It is also Electronegativity is based on various
measured in kJ/mol and represented by the experimental data such as bond energy,
following equation: ionization potential, electron affinity, etc.
A(g) + e– → A–(g) + Energy Pauling scale is the widely used scale to
Cl(g) + e– → Cl–(g) + energy determine the electronegativity, which in
Like ionisation energy, electron affinity turn predicts the nature of bonding (ionic or
also increases from left to right in a period and covalent) between the atoms in a molecule.
decreases from top to bottom in a group. Electronegativity of some of the elements
are given below
More to Know F = 4.0, Cl = 3.0, Br = 2.8, I = 2.5, H = 2.1, Na = 1
Noble gases show no tendency to accept If the difference in electronegativity

electrons because the outer s and p orbitals between two elements is 1.7, the bond
of noble gases are completely filled. No more has 50% ionic character and 50% covalent
electrons can be added to them and hence character.
their electron affinities are zero. If the difference is less than 1.7, the bond
is considered to be more covalent.
8.3.5 Electronegativity
If the difference is greater than 1.7, the
Electronegativity of an element is the bond is considered to be more ionic.
measure of the tendency of its atom to attract the Along the period, from left to right in the
shared pair of electrons towards itself in a covalent periodic table, the electronegativity increases
bond. Let us consider HCl molecule. Both the because of the increase in the nuclear charge
hydrogen and chlorine atoms share one electron which in turn attracts the electrons more strongly.
each to form the covalent bond between them. On moving down a group, the electronegativity
chlorine atom has a higher electronegativity of the elements decreases because of the
and hence it pulls the shared electrons towards increased number of valence shells.

www.tntextbooks.in
Periodic (iii) Refining of the metal: It is the process of

In Periods In Groups purification of the metal.
Property
Atomic radius Decreases Increases 8.4.1 Terminology in metallurgy
Ionic radius Decreases Increases Minerals: A mineral may be a single
compound or a complex mixture of various
Ionisation energy Increases Decreases
compounds of metals found in the Earth.
Electron affinity Increases Decreases
Ore: The mineral from which a metal can
Electronegativity Increases Decreases be readily and economically extracted on a
large scale is said to be an ore.
Test yourself
All ores are
Predict the nature of the bond in the minerals; But
following molecules. all minerals
l are not ores.
tua
(i) NaCl (ii) NaBr (iii) NaI c ep s
n t Why?
Co ough
Th
(iv) NaF (v) NaH
For example: Clay (Al2O3. 2 SiO2. 2 H2O)
and bauxite (Al2O3.2 H2O) are the two minerals
8.4 METALLURGY of aluminium, but aluminium can be profitably
Human life is associated with various extracted only from bauxite. Hence, bauxite is
metals. We use metals in our day to day an ore of aluminium and clay is its mineral.
activities. It is the utmost need to have some Mining: The process of extracting the ores
metals like sodium, potassium, calcium, iron, from the Earth's crust is called mining.
etc. in the human body. Deficiency of these Gangue or Matrix: The rocky impurity
metals affects the metabolic activities thereby associated with an ore is called gangue or matrix.
causing diseases. So, metals Flux: It is the substance added to the
play a vital role in our life. ore to reduce the fusion temperature and to
In this section, let us discuss remove the impurities. E.g. Calcium oxide
how metals are obtained (basic), Silica (acidic). If the gangue is acidic,
from various sources by the then basic flux is added and vice versa.
process of metallurgy. Slag: It is the fusible product formed
Metallurgy is a science of extracting when a flux reacts with a gangue during the
metals from their ores and modifying the extraction of metals.
metals into alloys for various uses, based on Flux + Gangue → Slag
their physical and chemical properties and Smelting: Smelting is the process of
their structural arrangement of atoms. A reducing the roasted metallic oxide from the
metallurgical process involve three main steps metal in its molten condition. In this process,
as follows: impurities are removed as slag by the addition
(i) Concentration or Separation of the ore: of flux.
It is the process of removal of impuries 8.4.2 Types of separation or
from the ore. concentration of an ore
(ii) Production of the metal: It is the There are four major types of separation
convertion of the ore into metal. of ores based on the nature of the ore. The

www.tntextbooks.in
different kinds of ores of metals are given in metal wheels, one of which is magnetic. The
Table 8.1 magnetic particles are attracted to the magnetic
Concentration of the crushed ore is done wheel and fall separately apart from the non-
mainly by the following methods: - magnetic particles.
(i) Hydraulic (Gravity Separation) (iii) Froth floatation

method Principle: This process depends on
Principle: The difference in the densities the preferential wettability of the ore with
or specific gravities of the ore and the gangue oil (pine oil) and the gangue particles by
is the main principle behind this method. water. Lighter ores, such as sulphide ores,
Oxide ores are purified by this method. e.g., are concentrated by this method. e.g., Zinc
Haematite Fe2O3 the ore of iron. blende (ZnS).
Note: When the ore is heavier than the Froth bubbles Compressed
impurity, this method can be used. carrying sulphide
ore particals
air
Method: The ore is poured over a sloping,

vibrating corrugated table with grooves and a jet
Sulphide ore
of water is allowed to flow over it. The denser ore particals
particles settle down in the grooves and lighter Water

containing
gangue particles are washed down by water. pine oil
(ii) Magnetic separation method Gangue
Froth floatation process for the concentration

Principle: The magnetic properties of of sulphide ores.
the ores form the basis of separation. When Figure 8.9 Froth floatation
either the ore or the gangue is magnetic, this
Note: When the impurity is heavier than
method is employed. e.g., Tinstone SnO2, the
the ore, this method can be used.
ore of tin.
Method: The crushed ore is taken in a
Finely ground ore
large tank containing pine oil and water and
agitated with a current of compressed air.The
ore is wetted by the oil and gets separated from
Magnetic roller
the gangue in the form of froth. Since the ore
is lighter, it comes on the surface with the froth
Magnetic and the impurities are left behind. e.g., Zinc
particles
Non-Magnetic blende (ZnS).
particles
(iv) Chemical method or Leaching
Figure 8.8 Magnetic separation
This method is employed when the ore is
Method: The crushed ore is placed over in a very pure form.
a conveyer belt which rotates around two
Table 8.1 Types of ores
Oxide Ores Carbonate Ores Halide Ores Sulphide Ores

Bauxite (Al O .2H O)
2 3 2
Marble (CaCO3) Cryolite(Na3AlF6) Galena (PbS)
Cuprite(Cu2O) Magnesite ((MgCO3) Fluorspar(CaF2) Iron pyrite (FeS2)
Haematite ( Fe2O3) Siderite(FeCO3) Rock salt (NaCl) Zinc blende (ZnS)

www.tntextbooks.in
More to Know
Extraction of metal from metal oxide can be categorized into three types.
More reactive metals Medium reactive metals Less reactive metals
Na,K,Ca,Mg,Al Zn,Fe,Pb,Cu Ag,Hg
Electrolytic reduction of Chemical reduction of metal Thermal decomposition of
metal oxide into metal oxide into metal using coke metal oxide into metal
The ore is treated with a suitable reagent boiling points and vaporize only at high
such that the ore is soluble in it but the temperatures (exceptions: gallium, mercury,
impurities are not. The impurities are removed sodium and potassium).
by filtration. The solution of the ore, ie., the 5. Density: Metals have a high density
filtrate is treated with a suitable reagent which (exceptions: sodium and potassium are less
precipitates the ore. E.g. Bauxite Al2O3.2H2O, dense than water).
(the ore of aluminium). 6. Ductility: Metals are usually ductile. In other
words, they can be drawn into thin wires
8.5 OCCURRENCE OF ORES IN without breaking.
TAMIL NADU 7. Malleability: Metals are usually malleable,
i.e, they can be beaten into thin sheets
Lime stone: Coimbatore, Cuddalore, Dindugul
without cracking (except zinc and
Gypsum: Tiruchi and Coimbatore Distiricts
mercury).
Titanium minerals: Kanyakumari, Tirunelveli
8. Conduction of heat and electricity: Metals
and Tuticorin.
are good conductors of heat and electricity;
Chromite: Coimbatore and Salem district.
silver and copper excel in this property
Magnetite:.
Dharmapuri, Erode, Salem,
(exception: tungsten)
Thiruvannamalai.
9. Solubility: Usually, metals do not dissolve in
Tungsten: Madurai and Dindugal.
liquid solvents.
(Reference: mineral resources of Tamil
Nadu-ENVIS Centre, Tamil Nadu)
8.6.2 Chemical Properties
• Valence electrons: Atoms of metals usually
8.6 PROPERTIES OF METALS
have 1,2 or 3 electrons in their outermost
shell.
8.6.1 Physical properties
• Formation of ions: Metals form Positive
1. Physical state: All metals are solids at room ions by the loss of electrons and hence they
temperature except mercury and gallium. are electro positive.
2. Lustre: Metals possess a high lustre (called • Discharge of ions: Metals are discharged at
metallic lustre). the cathode during the electrolysis of their
3. Hardness: Most of the metals are hard and compounds.
strong (exceptions: sodium and potassium • Atomicity: Molecules of metals in their
can be cut with a knife) vapour state are usually monoatomic.
4. Melting point and Boiling point: • Nature of oxides: Oxides of metals are
Usually, metals possess high melting and usually basic.

www.tntextbooks.in
8.7 METALLURGY OF Temperature: 900 - 950 °C

ALUMINIUM Voltage used: 5-6 V
Overall reaction: 2 Al2O3 → 4 Al +3 O2↑
Aluminium is the metal found most
abundantly in the Earth’s crust. Since it is a Electrolytic process of
reactive metal, it occurs in the combined state. manufacturing aluminum
The important ores of aluminium are as follows
+
Bus bar
Ores of Aluminium
Formula Steel shell Carbon anode
Bauxite Al O .2H O 2 3 2
Cryolite
Cryolite Na3AlF6
Corundum Al2O3
Molten aluminum
–
Bauxite is the chief ore of aluminium. The Carbon cathode lining
extraction of aluminium from bauxite involves
Figure 8.10 Hall's Process
two steps:
(i) Conversion of bauxite into alumina – Aluminium is deposited at the cathode and
Baeyer’s Process oxygen gas is liberated at the anode. Oxygen
The conversion of Bauxite into Alumina combines with graphite to form CO2.
involves the following steps:
Bauxite ore is finely ground and heated Physical Properties of Aluminium
under pressure with a solution of concentrated • It is a silvery white metal
caustic soda solution at 150° C to obtain sodium • It has low density (2.7) and it is light
meta aluminate. • It is malleable and ductile
Al2O3 + 2 NaOH → 2 NaAlO2 + H2O • It is a good conductor of heat and
On diluting sodium meta aluminate with electricity.
water, a precipitate of aluminium hydroxide is • Its melting point is 660 °C.
formed.
• It can be polished to produce a shiny attractive
NaAlO2 + 2 H2O → Al (OH)3 + NaOH appearance.
The precipitate is filtered, washed, dried and
ignited at 1000°C to get alumina. C hemical Properties of Aluminium
1000°c
2Al(OH)3 Al2O3 + 3H2O i. Reaction with air: It is not affected by
dry air. On heating at 800 °C, aluminium
(ii) Electrolytic reduction of alumina –
burns very brightly forming it’s oxide and
Hall’s Process
nitride.
Aluminium is produced by the electrolytic
reduction of fused alumina (Al2O3) in the 4 Al + 3 O2 → 2 Al2O3(Aluminium oxide)
electrolytic cell. 2 Al + N2 → 2 AlN (Aluminium nitride)
Cathode: Iron tank lined with graphite
ii. Reaction with water: Water does not react
Anode: A bunch of graphite rods suspended in with aluminium due to the layer of oxide
molten electrolyte. on it. When steam is passed over red hot
Electrolyte:
Pure alumina+ molten cryolite aluminium, hydrogen is produced.
+ fluorspar (fluorspar lowers the 2 Al + 3 H2O → Al2O3 + 3 H2↑
fusion temperature of electrolyte) (steam) (aluminium oxide)

www.tntextbooks.in
iii. Reaction with alkalis: It reacts with strong Ores of copper Formula
caustic alkalis forming aluminates. Copper pyrites CuFeS2
2 Al + 2 NaOH +2 H2O → 2 NaAlO2 + 3 H2↑ Cuprite or ruby copper Cu2O
(Sodium meta aluminate)
Copper glance Cu2S
iv. Reaction with acids: With dilute and con.
HCl it liberates H2 gas. The chief ore of copper is copper pyrite. It
2 Al + 6 HCl → 2 AlCl3 + 3 H2↑ yields nearly 76% of the world production of
(Aluminium chloride) copper. Extraction of copper from copper pyrites
Aluminium liberates hydrogen on involves the following steps
reaction with dilute sulphuric acid and i. Concentration of ore: The ore is crushed
liberates sulphur dioxide on reaction with hot and the concentrated by froth floatation
concentrated sulphuric acid process.
2 Al+ 3 H2SO4 → Al2(SO4)3 + 3 H2 ↑
(Dilute)
ii. Roasting: The concentrated ore is roasted in
excess of air. During the process of roasting,
2 Al + 6 H2SO4 → Al2(SO4)3 + 6 H2O + 3 SO2 ↑
(Con.)
the moisture and volatile impurities are
removed. Sulphur, phosphorus, arsenic and
More to Know
antimony are removed as oxides. Copper
Dilute or concentrated nitric acid does not pyrite is partly converted into sulphides of
attack aluminium, but it renders aluminium copper and iron.
passive due to the formation of an oxide film
2 CuFeS2 + O2 Cu2S + 2 FeS + SO2 ↑
on its surface.
iii. Smelting: The roasted ore is mixed with
v. As reducing agent: Aluminium is a powdered coke and sand and is heated in a
powerful reducing agent. When a mixture of blast furnace to obtain matte (Cu2S + FeS)
aluminium powder and iron oxide is ignited, and slag. The slag is removed as waste.
the latter is reduced to metal. This process is
iv. Bessemerisation: The molten matte is
known as aluminothermic process.
transferred to Bessemer converter in order to
Fe2O3 + 2 Al → 2 Fe + Al2O3 + Heat. obtain blister copper. Ferrous sulphide from
matte is oxidized to ferrous oxide, which is
Uses
removed as slag using silica.
Aluminium is used in
2 FeS + 3 O2 2 FeO + 2 SO2 ↑
• household utensils
• electrical cable industry FeO + SiO2 FeSiO3 (slag)
• making aeroplanes and other industrial (Iron silicate)
mechine parts 2 Cu2S + 3O2 2 Cu2O + 2 SO2 ↑

2 Cu2O + Cu2S 6 Cu + SO2↑
8.8 METALLURGY OF COPPER (Blister copper)
v. Refining: Blister copper contains 98%
Occurrence: of pure copper and 2% of impurities and
It was named as cuprum by the Romans is purified by electrolytic refining. This
because they got it from the Island of Cyprus. method is used to get metal of a high degree
Copper is found in the native state as well as of purity. For electrolytic refining of copper,
combined state. we use:

www.tntextbooks.in
Cathode: A thin plate of pure copper metal. iv) Action of Chlorine:

Anode: A block of impure copper metal. hlorine reacts with copper, resulting in the
C
Electrolyte:
Copper sulphate solution formation of copper(II) chloride.
acidified with sulphuric acid. Cu + Cl2 CuCl2
When electric current is passed through v) Action of Alkalis:
the electrolytic solution, pure copper gets Copper is not attacked by alkalis.
deposited at the cathode and the impurities
settle at the bottom of the anode in the form of Uses of Copper:
sludge called anode mud. i. It is extensively used in manufacturing
electric cables and other electric appliances.
Physical Properties of Copper ii. It is used for making utensils, containers,
calorimeters and coins,
Copper is a reddish brown metal, with
iii. It is used in electroplating.
high lustre, high density and high melting point
iv. It is alloyed with gold and silver for making
(1356°C).
coins and jewels
Chemical Properties of Copper
8.9 METALLURGY OF IRON
i. Action of Air and Moisture: Copper gets
covered with a green layer of basic copper Occurrence:
carbonate in the presence of CO2 and Iron is the second most abundant metal
moisture. available next to aluminium. It occurs in nature
2 Cu + O2 + CO2 + H2O → CuCO3.Cu(OH)2 as oxides, sulphides and carbonates. The ores of
ii. Action of Heat: On heating at different iron are as follows:
temperatures in the presence of oxygen,
copper forms two types of oxides CuO and Ores of iron Formula
Cu2O. Haematite Fe2O3
below 1370K
2 Cu + O2 2 CuO Magnetite Fe3O4
(copper II oxide- black)
Iron pyrite FeS2
above 1370K
4 Cu + O2 2 Cu2O
(copper I oxide – red) Iron is chiefly extracted from haematite ore
iii. Action of Acids: (Fe2O3)
a) With dilute HCl and dilute H2SO4: i. Concentration by Gravity Separation: The
ilute acids such as HCl and H2SO4 have
D powdered ore is washed with a steam of
no action on these metals in the absence of water. As a result, the lighter sand particles
air. Copper dissolves in these acids in the and other impurities are washed away and
presence of air. the heavier ore particles settle down.
2 Cu + 4 HCl + O2 (air) 2 CuCl2 + 2 H2O ii. Roasting and Calcination: The
b) With dil. HNO3: concentrated ore is strongly heated in a
limited supply of air in a reverberatory
opper reacts with dil. HNO3 with the
C
furnace. As a result, moisture is driven
liberation of Nitric Oxide gas.
out and sulphur, arsenic and phosphorus
3 Cu + 8 HNO3 → 3 Cu(NO3)2 + 2 NO ↑ + impurities are oxidized off.
4H2O

www.tntextbooks.in
iii. Smelting (in a Blast Furnace): The (c) The Upper Region (Reduction Zone)- The
charge consisting of roasted ore, coke and temperature prevails at 400°C . In this region
limestone in the ratio 8:4:1 is smelted in carbon monoxide reduces ferric oxide to
a blast furnace by introducing it through form a fairly pure spongy iron.
the hopper arrangement at the top. There Fe2O3 + 3CO 400°C
2Fe + 3CO2 ↑
are three important regions in the furnace.
e molten iron is collected at the bottom of
Th
bell & hopper the furnace after removing the slag.
The iron thus formed is called pig iron.
It is remelted and cast into different
moulds. This iron is called cast iron.
Iron ore,
Hot gases Physical properties:
coke
Pipe for
and lime i. It is a lustrous metal, greyish white in colour.
hot air
blast ii. It has high tensility, malleability and
ductility.
Slag outlet iii. It can be magnetized.
Chemical properties:
Iron outlet
i. Reaction with air or oxygen: Only on
Figure 8.11 Blast Furnace heating in air, iron forms magnetic oxide.
3 Fe + 2 O2 Fe3O4 (black)
(a) The Lower Region (Combustion Zone)-
ii. Reaction with moist air: When iron is
The temperature is at 1500°C. In this region,
exposed to moist air, it forms a layer of
coke burns with oxygen to form CO2 when
brown hydrated ferric oxide on its surface.
the charge comes in contact with a hot blast
This compound is known as rust and the
of air.
phenomenon of formation of rust is known
1500°C
C + O2 CO2 + Heat as rusting.
Δ
It is an exothermic reaction since heat is 4 Fe+ 3 O2 + x H2O 2 Fe2O3 . xH2O(rust)
liberated. iii. Reaction with steam: When steam is passed
(b) The Middle Region (Fusion Zone) – The over red hot iron, magnetic oxide is formed.
temperature prevails at 1000°C. In this 3 Fe + 4 H2O (steam) Fe3O4 + 4 H2 ↑
region, CO2 is reduced to CO.
iv. Reaction with chlorine: Iron combines with
1000°C chlorine to form ferric chloride.
CO2 + C 2 CO – Heat
Δ
imestone decomposes to calcium oxide
L 2Fe + 3Cl2 2FeCl3 (ferric chloride)
and CO2. v. Reaction with acids: With dilute HCl and
dilute H2SO4 it liberates H2 gas.
CaCO3 1000°C CaO + CO2 – Heat
Δ Fe + 2HCl FeCl2 + H2 ↑
ese two reactions are endothermic due to
Th Fe + H2SO4 FeSO4 + H2 ↑
absorption of heat. Calcium oxide combines With dilute HNO3 in cold condition it gives
with silica to form calcium silicate slag. ferrous nitrate and ammonium nitrate.
CaO + SiO2 CaSiO3 4 Fe + 10 HNO3 → 4 Fe(NO3)2 + NH4NO3
+ 3 H2O

www.tntextbooks.in
With con. H2SO4 it forms ferric sulphate 8.10.2 Method of making alloys
and liberates SO2.
(a) By fusing the metals together. E.g. Brass
2 Fe + 6 H2SO4 → Fe2(SO4)3 + 3 SO2 + 6 H2O is made by melting zinc and copper.
When iron is dipped in con. HNO3 it (b) By compressing finely divided metals.
becomes chemically passive or inert due to the E.g. Wood metal: an alloy of lead, tin, bismuth
formation of a layer of iron oxide (Fe3O4) on its and cadmium powder is a fusible alloy.
surface. Alloys as solid solutions:
Alloys can be considered as solid solutions
Types and uses of iron
in which the metal with high concentration is
Pig iron (Iron with 2.0% - 4.5% of carbon): solvent and other metals are solute.
It is used in making pipes, stoves, radiators,
railings, manhole covers and drain pipes. For example, brass is a solid solution of zinc
(solute) in copper (solvent).
Steel (Iron with 0.25% - 2.0% of carbon): It is
used in the construction of buildings, machinery, 8.10.3 Types of Alloys
transmission cables and T.V towers and in Based on the presence of Iron, alloys can be
making alloys. classified into:
Wrought iron (Iron with < 0.25% of carbon): • Ferrous alloys: Contain Iron as a major
It is used in making springs, anchors and component. A few examples of ferrous
electromagnets. alloys are Stainless Steel, Nickel Steel etc.
• Non-ferrous alloys: These alloys do
8.10 ALLOYS not contain Iron as a major component.
For example, Aluminium alloy, Copper
An alloy is a homogeneous mixture of two
alloy etc.
or more metals or of one or more metals with
certain non-metallic elements. Copper Alloys (Non- ferrous)
The properties of alloys are often different Alloys Uses
from those of its components. Pure gold is brittle
Brass (Cu, Zn) Electrical fittings, medal,
to be used. The addition of small percentage of
decorative items, hardware
copper enhances its strength and utility.
Bronze (Cu, Sn) Statues, coins, bells, gongs
8.10.1 Amalgam Aluminium Alloys (Non- ferrous)
An amalgam is an alloy of mercury with Alloys Uses
another metal. These alloys are formed through
Duralumin (Al, Mg, Aircrafts, tools,
metallic bonding with the electrostatic force Mn, Cu) pressure cookers
of attraction between the electrons and the
Magnalium (Al, Mg) Aircraft, scientific
positively charged metal ions. Silver tin amalgam instruments
is used for dental filling.
Iron Alloys(Ferrous)
Reasons for alloying:
i. To modify appearance and colour Alloys Uses
ii. To modify chemical activity. Stainless steel (Fe,C, Utensils, cutlery,
iii. To lower the melting point. Ni,Cr) automobile parts
iv. To increase hardness and tensile strength. Nickel steel Cables , aircraftparts,
v. To increase resistance to electricity. (Fe,C,Ni) propeller

www.tntextbooks.in
8.11.2 M
ethods of preventing
8.11 CORROSION
corrosion
It is the gradual destruction of metals by i. Alloying: The metals can be alloyed to
chemical or electrochemical reaction with prevent from the process of corrosion. E.g:
the environment. It is a natural process which Stainless Steel
converts a metal into its oxide, hydroxide
ii. Surface Coating: It involves application of a
or sulphide so that it loses its metallic
protective coating over the metal. It is of the
characteristics.
following types:
Rusting a) Galvanization: It is the process of
Air coating zinc on iron sheets by using
Rust Deposit ae
Water electric current.
Droplet
Fe
e2O3XH2O b) Electroplating: It is a method of coating
e2++ (aq)
Fe
F
one metal over another metal by passing
O2
electric current.
e– c) Anodizing: It is an electrochemical
Cathode
Ca
atho
ode Anode
process that converts the metal surface
O2 + 2H2O + 4e– -> 40H– Fe -> Fe2+ + 2e–
into a decorative, durable and corrosion
resistant. Aluminium is widely used for
O2 + 4H+ + 4e– -> 2H20 anodizing process.
Iron
d) Cathodic Protection: It is the method of
Figure 8.12 Rusting controlling corrosion of a metal surface
protected is coated with the metal which
Rust is chemically known as hydrated ferric is easily corrodible. The easily corrodible
oxide (it is formulated as Fe2O3.xH2O). Rusting metal is called Sacrificial metal to act as
results in the formation of scaling reddish anode ensuring cathodic protection.
brown hydrated ferric oxide on the surface of
iron and iron containing materials. 8.12 PAMBAN BRIDGE
8.11.1 Types of Corrosion It is a railway bridge which connects the

town of Rameshwaram on Pamban Island to
i. Dry Corrosion or Chemical Corrosion:
mainland India. Opened on 1914, it was India’s
The corrosive action in the absence of
first sea bridge in India until the opening of the
moisture is called dry corrosion. It is the
BandraWorli Sea Link in 2010. We can control
process of a chemical attack on a metal by
the corrosion and renovation of historical
a corrosive liquids or gases such as O2, N2,
pamban bridge by a periodical protective
SO2, H2S etc. It occurs at high temperature.
coating which will be the strong example for
Of all the gases mentioned above O2 is the
applied chemistry to uphold our history.
most reactive gas to impart the chemical
attack.
ii. Wet Corrosion or Electrochemical
Corrosion: The corrosive action in the
presence of moisture is called wet corrosion.
It occurs as a result of electrochemical
reaction of metal with water or aqueous
solution of salt or acids or bases. Figure 8.12 Pamban Bridge

www.tntextbooks.in
Points to Remember The charge used in the metallurgy of

iron consists of roasted ore, coke and
Modern periodic law states that, the limestone in the ratio, 8:4:1.
physical and chemical properties of the Copper vessel on exposure to air and
elements are the periodic functions of moisture forms a green layer on its surface
their atomic numbers. due to basic copper carbonate.
The table in which elements are arranged An alloy is a homogeneous mixture of
in rows and columns in regular gradation two or more metals.
is called periodic table. An amalgam is an alloy of mercury with
Smelting is the process of reducing the another metal. E.g. Ag-Sn amalgam is
roasted metallic oxide into metal in used for dental filling.
molten condition. The chemical name of rust is hydrated
Dilute or con. HNO 3 does not attack ferric oxide and its formula is Fe2O3.xH2O.
aluminium metal ,as it renders aluminium
passive due to oxide film formation on its
surface.
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the best answer. 5. Chemical formula of rust is ________.

1. The number of periods and groups in the a) FeO.xH2O b) FeO4.xH2O
periodic table are______. c) Fe2O3.xH2O d) FeO
a) 6,16 b) 7,17 6. In the alumino thermic process the role of
c) 8,18 d) 7,18 Al is _____.
2. The basis of modern periodic law is______. a) oxidizing agent
a) atomic number b) reducing agent
b) atomic mass c) hydrogenating agent
c) isotopic mass d) sulphurising agent
d) number of neutrons 7. The process of coating the surface of metal
3. _____ group contains the member of with a thin layer of zinc is called______.
halogen family. a) painting b) thinning
a) 17th b) 15th c) galvanization d) electroplating
c) 18th d) 16th
8. Which of the following have inert gases
4. _____ is a relative periodic property 2 electrons in the outermost shell.
a) atomic radii b) ionic radii a) He b) Ne
c) electron affinity d) electronegativity c) Ar d) Kr

www.tntextbooks.in
9. Neon shows zero electron affinity due to IV. True or False: (If false give the correct
_____. statement)
a) stable arrangement of neutrons 1. Moseley’s periodic table is based on atomic
b) stable configuration of electrons mass.
2. Ionic radius increases across the period from
c) reduced size
left to right.
d) increased density 3. All ores are minerals; but all minerals cannot
10. ______ is an important metal to form be called as ores;
4. Al wires are used as electric cables due to
amalgam.
their silvery white colour.
a) Ag b) Hg 5. An alloy is a heterogenous mixture of metals.
c) Mg d) Al
V. Assertion and Reason
II. Fill in the blanks Answer the following questions using the
data given below:
1.
If the electronegativity difference
between two bonded atoms in a molecule i) A and R are correct, R explains the A.
is greater than 1.7, the nature of bonding ii) A is correct, R is wrong.
is ______ iii) A is wrong, R is correct.
2. ________ is the longest period in the iv) A and R are correct, R doesn’t explains A.
periodical table. 1. Assertion : The nature of bond in HF
3. ________ forms the basis of modern molecule is ionic
periodic table. Reason : The electronegativity difference
4. If the distance between two Cl atoms in Cl2 between H and F is 1.9
molecule is 1.98Å, then the radius of Cl 2. Assertion : Magnesium is used to protect
atom is ________. steel from rusting
5. Among the given species A–,A+, and A, the Reason : Magnesium is more reactive than
smallest one in size is ________. iron
6. The scientist who propounded the modern 3. Assertion : An uncleaned copper vessel is
periodic law is ________. covered with greenish layer.
Reason : copper is not attacked by alkali
7. Across the period, ionic radii ________
(increases,decreases). VI. Short answer questions
8. ________ and ________ are called inner 1. A is a reddish brown metal, which combines
transition elements. with O2 at < 1370 K gives B, a black coloured
compound. At a temperature > 1370 K, A
9. The chief ore of Aluminium is ________. gives C which is red in colour. Find A,B and
10. The chemical name of rust is ________. C with reaction.
III. Match the following 2. A is a silvery white metal. A combines with

O2 to form B at 800oC, the alloy of A is used
1. Galvanisation - Noble gas elements in making the aircraft. Find A and B
2. Calcination - Coating with Zn 3. What is rust? Give the equation for
3. Redox reaction - Silver-tin amalgam formation of rust.
4. Dental filling - Alumino thermic 4. State two conditions necessary for rusting of
process iron.
5. Group 18 - Heating in the
elements absence of air

www.tntextbooks.in
VII. Long answer questions 2. Name the acid that renders aluminium
1. a) State the reason for addition of caustic passive. Why?
alkali to bauxite ore during purification 3. a) Identify the bond between H and F in HF
of bauxite. molecule.
b) Along with cryolite and alumina, another b) What property forms the basis of
substance is added to the electrolyte identification?
mixture. Name the substance and give c) How does the property vary in periods
one reason for the addition. and in groups?
2. The electronic configuration of metal A is

2,8,18,1.
REFERENCE BOOKS
The metal A when exposed to air and 1. Inorganic chemistry by PL Soni

moisture forms B a green layered compound. 2. Physical chemistry by Puri and Sharma
A with con. H2SO4 forms C and D along 3. Inorganic chemistry by Atkins
with water. D is a gaseous compound. Find 4. Oxford Inorganic chemistry
A,B,C and D.
3. Explain smelting process. I NT ER NET R ES O U RCES
VIII. HOT questions • https://www.webelements.com

• www.rsc.orgperiodic-table
1. Metal A belongs to period 3 and group 13.
A in red hot condition reacts with steam to • https://www.tcyonline.com
form B. A with strong alkali forms C. Find
A,B and C with reactions
CONCEPT MAP
Ore (Concentration of Ores)
Metals of high reactivity Metals of medium reactivity Metals of least reactivity
Electrolysis of molten ore Carbonate ore Sulphide ore Sulphide ore
Pure metal Calcination Roasting Roasting
Oxide of metal Reduction to metal
Reduction to metal Purification
Purification

www.tntextbooks.in
KMnO4
FeSO4
SOLUTIONS
9 CuSO4
Learning Objectives
After studying this lesson, students will able to

� define solution.
� recognize the types of solutions.
� analyse the factors influencing solubility.
� explain the various modes of expression of concentration of solution.
� calculate the solubility of solutes in solvents.
� correlate the hydrated salts and anhydrous salts.
� distinguish between deliquescent and hygroscopic substances.
INTRODUCTION mixture. This kind of homogenous mixtures

are termed as “solutions”.
You have learnt about mixtures in your
lower classes. Most of the substances that we
encounter in our daily life are mixtures of two
or more substances. The substances present in
a mixture may exist in one or more physical
state. For example, when we burn wood, the
smoke released is a mixture of solid carbon
(a) Salt + Water (b) Sand + Water
and gases like CO2, CO, etc.
In some cases of mixtures, their Figure 9.1 a) Homogeneous mixture
components can be separated easily whereas b)heterogeneous mixture
in some other cases they cannot be. Consider
9.1
S OLUTIONS IN
the two mixtures, one which contains salt and
DAY-TO-DAY LIFE
water, and the another which contains sand and
water. Water is the one of the components in One of the naturally existing solutions
both the mixtures. In the first case salt disolves is sea water. We cannot imagine life on earth
in water. In the second case the sand does not without sea water. It is a mixture of many
disolve in water. Sand in water can be separated dissolved salts. The another one is air. It is a
by filtration but salt cannot be separated as mixture of gases like nitrogen, oxygen, carbon
it dissolves in water to form a homogeneous dioxide and other gases.
124

www.tntextbooks.in
All the life forms on the earth are associated A solution must at least be consisting
with solutions. Plants take solutions of nutrients of two components (a solute and a solvent).
for their growth from the soil. Most of the liquids Such solutions which are made of one solute
found in human body including blood, lymph and one solvent (two components) are called
and urine are solutions. Day to day human binary solutions. e.g. On adding copper
activities like washing, cooking, cleaning and sulphate crystals to water, it dissolves in
few other activities involve the formation of water forming a solution of copper sulphate
solutions with water. Similarly, the drinks what as shown in Figure 9.3. It contains two
we take, like fruit juice, aerated drinks, tea, components i.e. one solute- copper sulphate
coffee etc. are also solutions. Therefore, the and one solvent-water. So it is a binary
ability of water to form solutions is responsible solution. Similarly, a solution may contain
for sustenance of life. more than two components. For example
if salt and sugar are added to water, both
dissolve in water forming a solution. Here
9.2
C OMPONENTS OF
two solutes are dissolved in one solvent.
SOLUTIONS
Such kind of solutions which contain three
We know that, a solution is a homogeneous components are called ternary solutions.
mixture of two or more substances. In a
solution, the component which is present in
lesser amount (by weight), is called solute and the
component, which is present in a larger amount
(by weight) is called solvent. The solute gets
distributed uniformly throughout the solvent
and thus forming the mixture homogeneous.
So, the solvent acts as a dissolving medium in Figure 9.3 Formation of Copper sulphate
a solution. The process of uniform distribution solution
of solute into solvent is called dissolution.
Figure 9.2 shows the schematic representation
of solution. 9.3 Types of Solutions
9.3.1 Based on the physical

state of the solute and the
solvent
Solute Solvent Solution

We know that substances normally exist
in three physical states (phases) i.e., solid,
Figure 9.2 Formation of solution
liquid and gas. In binary solutions, both the
solvent and solute may exist in any of these
physical states. But the solvent constitutes
All solutions
the major part of the solution. Its physical
are mixtures; but
state is the primary factor which determine
all mixtures are
the characteristics of the solution. Therefore,
tua
l not solutions.
e p there are different types of binary solutions as
nc why?
Co ughts listed in Table 9.1.
Tho
125 Solutions

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 9.1 Types of binary solutions
Solute Solvent Example

Solid solution
Solid Solid Copper dissolved in gold (Alloys)
Liquid Solid Mercury with sodium (amalgam)
Liquid solution
Solid Liquid Sodium chloride dissolved in water
Liquid Liquid Ethyl alcohol dissolved in water
Gas Liquid carbon-di-oxide dissolved in water (Soda water)
Gaseous solution
Liquid Gas Water vapour in air (cloud)
Gas Gas Mixture of Helium-Oxygen gases,
9.3.2 Based on the type of

solvent
Most of the substances are soluble in water.
That is why, water is called as ‘Universal solvent”.
However some substances do not dissolve in
water. Therefore, other solvents such as ethers, (a) (b)
benzene, alcohols etc., are used to prepare Figure 9.4 a) Sulphur is soluble in CS2
a solution. On the basis of type of solvent, b) Sulphur is insoluble in water
solutions are classified into two types. They are
9.3.3 Based on the amount of
aqueous solutions and non-aqueous solutions.
solute
a) Aqueous solution: The amount of the solute that can be
The solution in which water acts as a solvent dissolved in the given amount of solvent is
is called aqueous solution. E.g. Common salt in limited under any given conditions. Based
water, Sugar in water, Copper sulphate in water on the amount of solute, in the given amount
etc. of solvent, solutions are classified into the
following types:
b) Non – Aqueous solution: (i) Saturated solution
The solution in which any liquid, other (ii) Unsaturated solution
than water, acts as a solvent is called non-
(iii) Super saturated solution
aqueous solution. Solvent other than water is
referred to as non-aqueous solvent. Generally, (i) Saturated solution: A solution in
alcohols, benzene, ethers, carbon disulphide, which no more solute can be dissolved in
acetone, etc., are used as non-aqueous solvents. a definite amount of the solvent at a given
Examples for non-aqueous solutions: Sulphur temperature is called saturated solution.
dissolved in carbon disulphide, Iodine dissolved e.g. 36 g of sodium chloride in 100 g of
in carbon tetrachloride. water at 25°C forms saturated solution.

www.tntextbooks.in
Further addition of sodium chloride, leave it and the another is said to be ‘dilute solution’.
undissolved. They are schematically represented by Figure
(ii) Unsaturated solution: Unsaturated 9.5.
solution is one that contains less solute than
that of the saturated solution at a given Dilute Concentrated
temperature. e.g. 10 g or 20 g or 30 g of Sodium solution solution
chloride in 100 g of water at 25°C forms an Solvent
unsaturated solution.
(iii) Super saturated solution: Solute
Supersaturated solution is one that contains
more solute than the saturated solution at
a given temperature. e.g. 40 g of sodium
chloride in 100 g of water at 25°C forms
Figure 9.5 Dilute and Concentrated Solution
super saturated solution. This state can be
achieved by altering any other conditions Differentiating solutions as dilute and
liken temperature, pressure. Super saturated concentrated is a qualitative representation.
solutions are unstable, and the solute is It does not imply the quantity of the solute.
reappearing as crystals when the solution is This difference is observed by means of
disturbed. some physical characteristics such as colour,
density, etc.
You are given
two samples of
solutions of NaCl. Activity 1
l Can you identify
tua which one is Look at the following pictures. Label
c ep s
n t saturated? and
Co ough them as dilute and concentrated solution
Th How?
and justify your answer.
9.3.4 Concentrated and dilute

solutions
It is another kind of classification of
unsaturated solutions. It expresses the relative Tea Copper sulphate
concentration of two solutions with respect to
their solutes present in the given amount of the
solvent. For example, you are given two cups of
tea. When you taste them, you feel that one is 9.4 Solubility
sweeter than the other. What do you infer from Usually, there is a limit to the amount of
it? The tea which sweet more contains higher solute that can be dissolved in a given amount
amount of sugar than the other. How can you of solvent at a given temperature. When this
express your observation? You can say that the limit is reached, we have a saturated solution
tea is stronger. But a chemist would say that it is and any excess solute that is added, simply
‘concentrated’. settle down at the bottom of the solution. The
When we compare two solutions having extent of dissolution of a solute in a solvent can
same solute and solvent, the one which contains be better explained by its solubility. Solubility
higher amount of solute per the given amount is a measure of how much of a solute can be
of solvent is said to be ‘concentrated solution’ dissolved in a specified amount of a solvent.
127 Solutions

www.tntextbooks.in
Solubility is defined as the number of like.” This expression means that dissolving
grams of a solute that can be dissolved in occurs when similarities exist between the
100 g of a solvent to form its saturated solution at solvent and the solute. For example: Common
a given temperature and pressure. For example, salt is a polar compound and dissolves readily
36 g of sodium chloride need to be dissolved in polar solvent like water.
in 100 g of water to form its saturated solution Non-polar compounds are soluble in
at 25°C. Thus the solubility of NaCl in water is non-polar solvents. For example, Fat dissolved
36 g at 25°C. The solubility is mathematically in ether. But non-polar compounds, do not
expressed as dissolve in polar solvents; polar compounds do
not dissolve in non-polar solvents.
Mass of the solute
Solubility = × 100 (ii) Effect of Temperature
Mass of the solvent
Solubility of Solids in Liquid:
Table 9.2 Solubility’s of some common
Generally, solubility of a solid solute in
substances in water at 25°C
a liquid solvent increases with increase in
Name of Formula of Solubility temperature. For example, a greater amount of
the solute the solute g/100 g water sugar will dissolve in warm water than in cold
water.
Calcium carbonate CaCO3(s) 0.0013
In endothermic process, solubility
Sodium chloride NaCl (s) 36 increases with increase in temperature.
Ammonia NH3(g) 48 In exothermic process, solubility decreases
with increase in temperature.
Sodium hydroxide NaOH(s) 80
Solubility of Gases in liquid
Glucose C6H12O6(s) 91 Do you know why is it bubbling when
Sodium bromide NaBr(s) 95 water is boiled? Solubility of gases in liquid
decrease with increase in temperature.
Sodium iodide NaI(s) 184 Generally, water contains dissolved oxygen.
When water is heated, the solubility of oxygen
9.4.1 Factors affecting solubility in water decreases, so oxygen escapes in the
There are three main factors which govern form of bubbles.
the solubility of a solute. They are: Aquatic animals live more in cold regions
because, more amount of dissolved oxygen is
(i) Nature of the solute
present in the water of cold regions. This shows
and solvent
that the solubility of oxygen in water is more at
(ii) Temperature low temperatures.
(iii) Pressure
(iii) Effect of Pressure
(i) Nature of the solute
and solvent Effect of pressure is observed only in the
case of solubility of a gas in a liquid. When
The nature of the solute and solvent plays
the pressure is increased, the solubility of a
an important role in solubility. Although water
dissolves an enormous variety of substances, gas in liquid increases.
both ionic and covalent, it does not dissolve The common examples for solubility of
everything. The phrase that scientists often use gases in liquids are carbonated beverages, i.e.
when predicting solubility is “like dissolves soft drinks, household cleaners containing

www.tntextbooks.in
aqueous solution of ammonia, formalin- Mass of the solute

Mass = × 100
aqueous solution of formaldehyde, etc. Mass of the solute +
Percentage
Mass of the solvent
For example: 5% sugar solution (by mass)
means 5 g of sugar in 95 g of water. Hence it is
made 100g of solution.
Usually, mass percentage is expressed
as w/w (weight / weight); mass percentage is
Figure 9.6 Effect of pressure on solubility
independent of temperature.
9.5.2 Volume percentage

More to know
Volume percentage is defined as the
The effect of pressure on the solubility percentage by volume of solute (in ml) present
of a gas in liquid is given by Henry’s law. It in the given volume of the solution.
states that, the solubility of a gas in a liquid
Volume Volume of the solute
is directly proportional to the pressure = × 100
Percentage Volume of the solution
of the gas over the solution at a definite
temperature. Volume of the solute
Volume = × 100
Volume of the solute +
Percentage
volume of the solvent
9.5 Concentration of a Solution For example, 10% by volume of the solution
of ethanol in water, means 10 ml of ethanol in
So far, we discussed what is a solution?
100 ml of solution (or 90 ml of water)
what does it consist of and its types. Most of
the chemical reactions take place in solutions Usually volume percentage is expressed as
form. So it is essential to quantify the solute v/v (volume / volume). It is used when both
in solvent to study the reactions. To quantify the solute and solvent are liquids. Volume
the solute in a solution, we can use the term percentage decreases with increases in
“concentration”. temperature, because of expansion of liquid.
Concentration of a solution may be You can notice that in the commercial
defined as the amount of solute present in a products that we come across in our daily
given amount of solution or solvent. life such as a solution of syrups, mouth wash,
Quantitatively, concentration of a solution antiseptic solution, household disinfectants etc.,
may be expressed in different methods. But here, the concentration of the ingredients is expressed
we shall discuss percentage by mass (% mass) as v/v. Similarly, in ointments, antacid, soaps,
and percentage by volume (% volume). etc., the concentration of solutions are expressed
as w/w.
9.5.1 Mass percentage
Mass percentage of a solution is defined Ointment
as the percentage by mass of the solute present
in the solution. It is mostly used when solute is
solid and solvent is liquid.
Mass Mass of the solute

= × 100
Percentage Mass of the solution
Figure 9.7 Ointment (w/w percent)
129 Solutions

www.tntextbooks.in
9.6 Hydrated salts and Water 9.6.1 Copper sulphate

of Crystallization pentahydrate CuSO4.5H2O
(Blue vitriol)
When ionic substances are dissolved
in water to make their saturated aqueous The number of water molecules in blue
solution, their ions attract water molecules vitriol is five. So its water of crystallization
which then attached chemically in certain is 5. When blue coloured copper sulphate
ratio. This process is called hydration. These crystals are gently heated, it loses its five water
ionic substances crystallize out from their molecules and becomes colourless anhydrous
saturated aqueous solution with a definite copper sulphate.
number of molecules of water. The number Heating
of water molecules found in the crystalline CuSO4.5H2O ⇌ CuSO4 + 5H2O
Cooling
substance is called water of crystallization. (Copper sulphate (Anhydrous copper
(a)
pentahydrate) (b)sulphate)
Such salts are called hydrated salts.
Blue colour colourless
(a) (b)
Figure 9.8 a) Crystalline hydrated salt

(a) (b)
b) Amorphous anhydrous salt
On heating these hydrated crystalline Figure 9.9 a) Copper sulphate before heating
salts, they lose their water of crystallization b) Copper sulphate after heating
and become amorphous or lose their colour
(if they are coloured). Table 9.3 shows some If you add few drops of water or allow it to
common hydrated salts: cool, the colourless anhydrous salt again turns
back into blue coloured hydrated salt.
Table 9.3 Hydrated salts
Common IUPAC Name Molecular

Name Formula
Blue Copper (II) CuSO4.5H2O

Vitriol sulphate
pentahydrate
Epsom Magnesium MgSO4.7H2O

Salt sulphate
heptahydrate Figure 9.10 Anhydrous copper sulphate turns
to blue when water is added
Gypsum Calcium sulphate CaSO4.2H2O
dihydrate 9.6.2 Magnesium sulphate
Green Iron (II) sulphate FeSO4.7H2O heptahydrate MgSO4.7H2O
Vitriol heptahydrate (Epsom salt)
Its water of crystallization is 7. When
White Zinc sulphate ZnSO4.7H2O
magnesium sulphate heptahydrate crystals are
Vitriol heptahydrate

www.tntextbooks.in
gently heated, it loses seven water molecules, water and get completely dissolved. Such
and becomes anhydrous magnesium sulphate. substances are called deliquescent substances
and this property is called deliquescence.
Heating Deliquescent substances lose their
MgSO4.7H2O ⇌ MgSO4 + 7H2O
Cooling crystalline shape and ultimately dissolve in the
(Magnesium sulphate (Anhydrous Magnesium absorbed water forming a saturated solution.
heptahydrate) sulphate) Deliquescence is maximum when:
1) The temperature is low
If you add few drops of water or allow it to 2) The atmosphere is humid
cool, the colourless anhydrous salt again turns Examples: Caustic soda (NaOH),
back into hydrated salt. Caustic potash (KOH) and Ferric
chloride (FeCl3).
9.7 Hygroscopy
Certain substances, when exposed to

the atmospheric air at ordinary temperature,
absorb moisture without changing their physical
state. Such substances are called hygroscopic
substances and this property is called hygroscopy.
Hygroscopic substances are used as drying Figure 9.11 Deliquescence in
agents. Sodium hydroxide
Example: 1. Conc.Sulphuric acid (H2SO4). 9.9 Problems Based on

2. Phosphorus Pentoxide (P2O5). Solubility and Percentage
3. Quick lime (CaO). by Mass and Volume
4. Silica gel (SiO2).
I. Problems based on solubility
9.8 Deliquescence 1) 1.5 g of solute is dissolved in 15 g of water
Certain substances which are so to form a saturated solution at 298K.
hygroscopic, when exposed to the atmospheric Find out the solubility of the solute at the
air at ordinary temperatures, absorb enough temperature.
Table 9.3 Difference between hygroscopic substances and deliquescence.
Hygroscopic substances Deliquescence substances

When exposed to the atmosphere at ordinary When exposed to the atmospheric air at
temperature, they absorb moisture and do not ordinary temperature, they absorb moisture
dissolve. and dissolve.
Hygroscopic substances do not change its Deliquescent substances change its physical
physical state on exposure to air. state on exposure to air.
Hygroscopic substances may be amorphous Deliquescent substances are crystalline solids.
solids or liquids.
131 Solutions

www.tntextbooks.in
Mass of the solute = 1.5 g Similarly amount of sodium nitrate 96 × 50

=
Mass of the solvent = 15 g dissolving in 50g of water at 30°C is 100
Solubility Mass of the solute = 48g
= × 100
of the solute Mass of the solvent
Amount of sodium nitrate thrown when 50g of
1.5 water is cooled from 50°C to 30°C is
Solubility of the solute = × 100
15 57 – 48 = 9 g
= 10 g II. Problem based on mass percentage
2) Find the mass of potassium chloride 1) A solution was prepared by dissolving
would be needed to form a saturated
25 g of sugar in 100 g of water. Calculate
solution in 60 g of water at 303 K? Given
the mass percentage of solute.
that solubility of the KCl is 37/100 g at this
temperature. Mass of the solute = 25 g
Mass of potassium chloride in 100 g of water in Mass of the solvent = 100 g

saturated solution = 37 g Mass = Mass of the solute × 100
Percentage Mass of the solution
Mass of potassium chloride in = 37
× 60
60 g of water in saturated solution 100
= 22.2 g = × 100
Percentage Mass of the solute +
Mass of the solvent
3) What is the mass of sodium chloride
that would be needed to form a saturated 25
= × 100
solution in 50 g of water at 30°C. Solubility 25+100
of sodium chloride is 36 g at 30°C?
25
At 30°C, 36 g of sodium chloride is = × 100
125
dissolved in 100 g of water.
∴ Mass of sodium chloride that would be need = 20%
for 100 g of water = 36 g 2) 16 grams of NaOH is dissolved in 100
grams of water at 25°C to form a saturated
∴ Mass of sodium chloride 36 × 50
= solution. Find the mass percentage of
dissolved in 50 g of water 100
solute and solvent.
= 18 g
Mass of the solute (NaOH) = 16 g
4) The solubility of sodium nitrate at 50°C and Mass of the solvent H2O = 100 g
30°C is 114 g and 96 g respectively. Find
the amount of salt that will be thrown out (i) Mass percentage of the solute
when a saturated solution of sodium nitrate
Mass percentage = Mass of the solute × 100
containing 50 g of water is cooled from
of solute Mass of the solute +
50°C to 30°C? Mass of the solvent
Amount of sodium nitrate dissolved in
100 g of water at 50°C is 114 g 16 × 100
=
16 + 100
∴ Amount of sodium nitrate 114 × 50
=
dissolving in 50 g of water at 50°C is 100 1600
=
= 57 g 116

www.tntextbooks.in
Mass percentage of the solute = 13.79 % Volume of aqueous solution = 200 ml
(ii) Mass percentage of solvent = 100 Volume percentage = 20%

– (Mass percentage of the solute) Volume Volume of solute
= × 100
= 100 – 13.79 percentage Volume of solution
= 86.21%
Volume of ethanol
20 = × 100
3) Find the amount of urea which is to be 200
dissolved in water to get 500 g of 10% w/w 20 × 200
aqueous solution? Volume of ethanol = = 40 ml
100
= × 100 Points to Remember
percentage (w/w) Mass of the solution
A solution is a homogeneous mixture of
Mass of the urea two or more substances.
10 = × 100
500

An aqueous solution is a solution in
Mass of urea = 50g which the solvent is water.
(iii) Problem based on volume – volume A non-aqueous solution is a solution in

which the solvent is a liquid, other than
percentage.
water
1) A solution is made from 35 ml of Methanol
and 65 ml of water. Calculate the volume A solution in which no more solute can
be dissolved in a definite amount of the
percentage.
solvent at a given temperature is called
Volume of the ethanol = 35 ml saturated solution.
Volume of the water = 65 ml
An unsaturated solution is one that

Volume Volume of the solute contains less solute than the saturated
= × 100 solution at a given temperature.
percentage Volume of the solution

A supersaturated solution is one that
Volume of the solute contains more solute than the saturated
Volume
= Volume of the solute + × 100 solution at a given temperature.
percentage
Volume of the solvent
Polar compounds are soluble in polar
35 solvents.
Volume percentage = × 100
35+65
Non-polar compounds are soluble in
non-polar solvents.
35
Volume percentage = × 100 In endothermic process, solubility of

100
solid solute increases with increase in
= 35% temperature.
2) Calculate the volume of ethanol in 200 ml In exothermic process, solubility of
solution of 20% v/v aqueous solution of solid solute decreases with increase in
ethanol. temperature.
133 Solutions

www.tntextbooks.in
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the correct answer. 8. A 25% alcohol solution means

1. A solution is a __________ mixture. a. 25 ml alcohol in 100 ml of water
a. homogeneous b. heterogeneous b. 25 ml alcohol in 25 ml of water
c. homogeneous and heterogeneous c. 25 ml alcohol in 75 ml of water
d. non homogeneous d. 75 ml alcohol in 25 ml of water
2. The number of components in a binary
9. Deliquescence is due to __________
solution is __________
a. Strong affinity to water
a. 2 b. 3 b. Less affinity to water
c. 4 d. 5 c. Strong hatred to water
d. Inertness to water
3. Which of the following is the universal
solvent? 10. Which of the following is hygroscopic in
a. Acetone b. Benzene nature?
c. Water d. Alcohol a. ferric chloride
b. copper sulphate penta hydrate
4. A solution in which no more solute can be
c. silica gel
dissolved in a definite amount of solvent at a d. none of the above
given temperature is called _______
a. Saturated solution II. Fill in the blanks
b. Un saturated solution 1. The component present in lesser amount, in
c. Super saturated solution a solution is called _______
d. Dilute solution 2. Example for liquid in solid type solution is
5. Identify the non aqueous solution. _____
a. sodium chloride in water 3. Solubility is the amount of solute dissolved
b. glucose in water in _____ g of solvent.
c. copper sulphate in water 4. Polar compounds are soluble in _____
d. sulphur in carbon-di-sulphide solvents
5. Volume persentage decreases with increases
6. When pressure is increased at constant in temperature because _____
temperature the solubility of gases in liquid
___________. III. Match the following
a. No change b. increases
c. decreases d. no reaction 1. Blue vitriol – CaSO4 .2H2O
2. Gypsum – CaO
7. Solubility of NaCl in 100 ml water is 36 g.
3. Deliquescence – CuSO4.5H2O
If 25 g of salt is dissolved in 100 ml of
water how much more salt is required for 4. Hygroscopic – NaOH
saturation _____________.
a. 12g b. 11g c. 16g d. 20g

www.tntextbooks.in
IV. True or False: (If false give the correct What happens when MgSO4.7H2O is
3. a)
statement) heated? Write the appropriate equation
1. Solutions which contain three components b) Define solubility
are called binary solution. 4. In what way hygroscopic substances differ
2. In a solution the component which is from deliquescent substances.
present in lesser amount is called solvent. 5. A solution is prepared by dissolving 45 g of
3. Sodium chloride dissolved in water forms a sugar in 180 g of water. Calculate the mass
non-aqueous solution. percentage of solute.
4. The molecular formula of green vitriol is 6. 3.5 litres of ethanol is present in 15 litres
MgSO4.7H2O of aqueous solution of ethanol. Calculate
5. When Silica gel is kept open, it absorbs volume percent of ethanol solution.
moisture from the air, because it is
hygroscopic in nature VII. HOTS
1. Vinu dissolves 50 g of sugar in 250 ml of hot
V. Short answer water, Sarath dissolves 50 g of same sugar
1. Define the term: Solution in 250 ml of cold water. Who will get faster
2. What is mean by binary solution dissolution of sugar? and Why?
3. Give an example each i) gas in liquid 2. 'A' is a blue coloured crystaline salt. On
ii) solid in liquid iii) solid in solid heating it loses blue colour and to give 'B'.
iv) gas in gas When water is added, 'B' gives back to 'A'.
Identify A and B, write the equation.
4. What is aqueous and non-aqueous solution?
Give an example. 3. Will the cool drinks give more fizz at top of
the hills or at the foot? Explain
5. Define Volume percentage
6. The aquatic animals live more in cold region
Why? REFERENCE BOOKS
7. Define Hydrated salt.
1. Properties Liquids Solutions John Murrell
8. A hot saturated solution of copper sulphate
2nd Edition.
forms crystals as it cools. Why?
2. Fundamental Interrelationships Between
9. Classify the following substances into
Certain Soluble Salts and Soil Colloids
deliquescent, hygroscopic.
(Classic Reprint) Hardcover, by Leslie
Conc. Sulphuric acid, Copper sulphate Theodore Sharp
penta hydrate, Silica gel, Calcium chloride,
and Gypsum salt.
I NT ER NET R ES O URCES
VI. Long answer:
1. Write notes on i) saturated solution 1. h t t p s : / / w w w. c w c b o e . o r g / c m s / l i b /
ii) unsaturated solution NJ01001185/Centricity/Domain/203/
2. Write notes on various factors affecting Solutions%20Suspensions%20and%20
solubility. Colloids.pdf
135 Solutions

www.tntextbooks.in
Concept Map
Solvent
+
solute
Hydrated Factors
salt affecting
solubility solubility
Salt solution 0DVV

SHUFHQW
Deliquescence Water Concentration
obsorbing of solution
from Volume
atmospheric percent
Hygroscopy air Types of
solution
Based on type
Based on type Physical state
of solute
of solvent Based on type of
solute and solvent
1.Auqous 1.Dilute 1.Solid

solution 1.Saturated solution
solution
2.Non aqueous solution 2.Liquid
2.Concentrated
solution 2.Unsaturated solution
solution
solution 3.Gases
3.Super saturated solution
solution
ICT CORNER Solutions
BEAKER application enable the

students to use their mobile as virtual
chemistry laboratory and also to do
various experiments on their own.
Steps
• Access the application “BEAKER – Mix Chemicals” with help of the URL or QR code, Install it in the
mobile. You can see that the screen will act like a beaker after opening the application.
• If you click the round button, you can see many elements and compounds.
• If you click any elements and compounds, it will be added to the beaker in the home screen.
• By clicking Menu at the left side, You can see lid, match stick, burner and chemist. Use those whenever
necessary.
URL: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=air.thix.sciencesense.beaker
or Scan the QR Code.

www.tntextbooks.in
TYPES OF CHEMICAL REACTIONS

10
Learning Objectives
After completing this lesson learners will be able to

infer different types of chemical reaction.
acquire knowledge about combination reaction and skill to perform a combination
reaction using quick lime and water.
identify and differentiate between reversible and irreversible reactions.
explain the reversible reaction occurring at the equilibrium state.
list and explain characteristics of equilibrium state.
define rate of reaction.
discuss the dependence of rate of reactions on concentration, temperature and catalyst.
define pH.
correlate the concentration of hydrogen ions and pH with neutral, acidic and basic nature
of aqueous solutions.
recognize the importance of pH in everyday life.
explain the term ionic product of water.
INTRODUCTION How do plants grow and get their food?

How does a car move using fuel?
As you know from your earlier studies,
a chemical reaction involves breaking of old Why does iron rust on its exposure to
chemical bonds and formation of new chemical water or air?
bonds. This change may happen spontaneously or You get energy from the digestion of
it may be facilitated by external forces or energy. the food you eat. Plants grow by absorbing
Chemistry is all about chemical reactions. In your nutrients from the Earth and get their food by
day to day life, you could observe many chemical photosynthesis. The combustion of a fuel makes
reactions. A clear understanding of these reactions the car to move. Oxidation of iron causes rusting.
is essential in order to manipulate them for the So, all these processes are chemical changes
sake of human life and environment. So, chemistry i.e. the materials, which undergo changes are
mainly focuses on chemical reactions. Let us try converted into some other new materials. For
to find the answer for the following questions: example, by burning petrol, the hydrocarbons
You need energy to play, walk, run or to present in it are converted into carbon dioxide
perform various physical activities. Where and water. In this chapter, let us discuss the
do you get the energy from? nature and types of chemical reactions.
137

www.tntextbooks.in
What happens during a chemical equal in the given equation. On balancing the
reaction? number of atoms, the following equation can
be obtained:
In a chemical reaction, the atoms of
the reacting molecules or elements are CH4 + 2O2 → CO2 + 2H2O
rearranged to form new molecules.
Further, the chemical equation provides
Old chemical bonds between atoms are
information on the physical state of the
broken and new chemical bonds are
substances and the conditions under which the
formed.
reaction takes place.
Bond breaking absorbs energy whereas
bond formation releases energy CH4(g) + 2O2(g) → CO2(g) + 2H2O(g)
Methane Oxygen Carbon dioxide Water
How are chemical reactions
represented?
When methane reacts with oxygen, it A balanced chemical equation
forms carbon dioxide and water. How can you is the simplified representation of a
represent this reaction? It can be written as a chemical reaction which describes the
word equation as shown below: chemical composition, physical state of
Methane + Oxygen → Carbon dioxide + Water the reactants and the products, and the
reaction conditions.
But, this equation does not give the
chemical composition of the reactants and
products. So, to learn the characteristics of
a chemical reaction, it is represented by a MORE TO KNOW
chemical equation. In the chemical equation,
the chemicals of the reaction are represented The phases or the physical state of
by their chemical formulas.The compounds or the substances in a chemical reaction are
elements, which undergo reactions (reactants) denoted in short form within a bracket,
are shown to the left of an arrow and the as the subscript of the formula, of the
compounds formed (products) are shown to respective substances. For example, when
the right of the arrow. The arrow indicates the solid potassium reacts with liquid water,
direction of the reaction. Thus, the aforesaid it produces hydrogen gas and potassium
reaction can be written as follows: hydroxide solution. All these information
of the reaction is given in the chemical
CH4 + O2 → CO2 + H2O
equation as shown below:
But, this is also an incomplete chemical
equation. Because, the law of conservation of 2K(s) + 2H2O(I) → 2KOH(aq) + H2(g)
matter states that matter cannot be created
or destroyed. You cannot create new atoms
by a chemical reaction. In contrast, they are Symbol Phase or physical
state
rearranged in different ways by a chemical
s Solid
reaction to form a new compound. So, in a
l Liquid
chemical equation, the number of atoms of
g Gas
the reactants and that of the products must be
aq Aqueous Solution
equal. The number of hydrogen and oxygen
atoms in the reactants and the products are not

www.tntextbooks.in
Example 1: When solid sulphur reacts

10.1
T YPES OF CHEMICAL
with oxygen, it produces sulphur dioxide. Here
REACTIONS
both the reactants are non-metals.
Classification based on the nature +

of rearrangements of atoms
S(s) + O2(g) → SO (g)
So far you studied S(s) + O2(g) → SO
2
2(g)
about a chemical reaction
and how it can be Example 2: Sodium, a silvery-white
described as a chemical metal, combines with chlorine, a pale yellow
equation. A large number green gas, to form sodium chloride, an edible
of chemical reactions compound. Here one of the reactants is a metal
are taking place around us every day.Are they (sodium) and the other (chlorine) is a non-
taking place in a similar way? No. Each reaction metal.
2Na(s) + Cl2(g) → 2NaCl(s)
involves different kinds of atoms and hence the
way they react also differs. Thus, based on the
manner by which the atoms of the reactants are Test Yourself:
rearranged, chemical reactions are classified as Identify the possible combination
follows. reactions between the metals and non-metals
given in the following table and write their
(a) Combination reactions balanced chemical equations:
A combination reaction is a reaction in
which two or more reactants combine to form Metals Non-metals
a compound. It is otherwise called 'synthesis Na, K, Cs, Ca, Mg F, Cl, Br, I
reaction' or 'composition reaction'. When
a reactant ‘A’ combines with ‘B’, it forms the  Compound + Element → Compound
product ‘AB’. The generalised scheme of a In this case, a compound reacts with an
combination reaction is given below: element to form a new compound. For instance,
phosphorous trichloride reacts with chlorine
A + B → A B gas and forms phosphorous pentachloride.
PCl3(I) + Cl2(g) → PCl5(s)
Example: Hydrogen gas combines with
chlorine gas to form hydrogen chloride gas.  Compound + Compound → Compound
It is a reaction between two compounds
H2(g) + Cl2(g) → 2HCl(g)
to form a new compound. In the following
Depending on the chemical nature reaction, silicon dioxide reacts with calcium
of the reactants, there are three classes of oxide to form calcium silicate.
combination reactions:
SiO2(s) + CaO(s) → CaSiO3(s)
 Element + Element → Compound
In this type of combination reaction, Most of the combination reactions are
two elements react with one other to form exothermic in nature. Because, they involve
a compound. The reaction may take place the formation of new bonds, which releases
between a metal and a non-metal or two a huge amount of energy in the form of
non-metals. heat.
139 Types of Chemical Reactions

www.tntextbooks.in
Heat
(b) Decomposition reactions 2HgO(s) → 2Hg(l) + O2(g)
In a decomposition reaction, a single Similarly, when calcium carbonate is
compound splits into two or more simpler heated, it breaks down in to calcium oxide and
substances under suitable conditions. It is carbon dioxide. It is a type of compound to
the opposite of the combination reaction.
compound/compound decomposition.
The generalised scheme of a decomposition Heat
reaction is given below: CaCO3(s) → CaO(s) + CO2(g)
In thermal decomposition reaction,
heat is supplied to break the bonds. Such
reactions, in which heat is absorbed, are called
‘Endothermic reactions’.
Breaking of bonds is the major
phenomenon in a decomposition reaction and (ii) Electrolytic Decomposition Reactions
hence it requires energy to break the bonds,
In some of the decomposition reactions,
depending on the nature of the energy used in
electrical energy is used to bring about the
the decomposition reaction.
reaction. For example, decomposition of sodium
There are three main classes of chloride occurs on passing electric current
decomposition reactions. They are through its aqueous solution. Sodium chloride
(i) Thermal Decomposition Reactions decomposes in to metallic sodium and chlorine
gas. This process is termed as ‘Electrolysis’.
(ii) Electrolytic Decomposition Reactions
Electricity
(iii) Photo Decomposition Reactions 2NaCl(aq) 2Na(s) + Cl2(g)
A solution of slaked lime Here, a compound (NaCl) is converted into

is used for white washing elements (Na and chlorine). So it is a type of
walls. Calcium hydroxide compound to element/element decomposition.
reacts slowly with the carbon
dioxide in air to form a thin layer of (iii) Photo Decomposition Reactions
calcium carbonate on the walls. Calcium
carbonate is formed after two to three days Light is an another form of energy,
of white washing and gives a shiny finish which facilitates some of the decomposition
to the walls. It is interesting to note that reactions. For example, when silver bromide
the chemical formula for marble is also is exposed to light, it breaks down into silver
CaCO3 metal and bromine gas. As the decomposition
is caused by light, this kind of reaction is also
Ca(OH)2(aq) + CO2(g) → CaCO3(s) + H2O(I)
called ‘Photolysis’.
Slaked Carbon Calcium Water
Lime dioxide Carbonate
Light
2AgBr(s) → 2Ag(s) + Br2(g)
(i) Thermal Decomposition Reactions

In this type of reaction, the reactant is
decomposed by applying heat. For example, on
heating mercury (II) oxide is decomposed into
mercury metal and oxygen gas. As the molecule
is dissociated by the absorption of heat, it is
otherwise called ‘Thermolysis’. It is a class of
compound to element/element decomposition.
i.e. a compound (HgO) is decomposed into Figure 10.1 Photo decomposition of
two elements (Hg and Oxygen). silver bromide

www.tntextbooks.in
The yellow coloured silver bromide reactants. Will they all occur in practice?
turns into grey coloured silver metal. It No. This is most easily demonstrated with
is also a compound to element/element halogens. Let us consider the following two
decomposition. reactions:
(c) Single Displacement Reactions 2NaCl(aq) + F2(g) → 2NaF(aq) + Cl2(g)

It is a reaction between an element
2NaF(aq) + Cl2(g) → 2NaCl(aq) + F2(g)
and a compound. When they react, one of
the elements of the compound-reactant is
The first reaction involves the displacement
replaced by the element-reactant to form
of chlorine from NaCl, by fluorine. In the
a new compound and an element. The
second reaction, chlorine displaces fluorine
general schematic representation of a single
from NaF. Out of these two, the second
displacement reaction is given as:
reaction will not occur. Because, fluorine is
more active than chlorine and occupies the
upper position in the periodic table. So, in
displacement reactions, the activity of the
‘A’ displaces element ‘B’ from the elements and their relative position in the
compound ‘BC’ and hence a single periodic table are the key factors to determine
displacement reaction occurs. If zinc metal is the feasibility of the reactions. More active
placed in hydrochloric acid, hydrogen gas is elements readily displace less active elements
evolved. Here, hydrogen is displaced by zinc from their aqueous solution.
metal and zinc chloride is formed. The activity series of some elements is
given below:
Zn(s) + 2HCl(aq) → ZnCl2(aq) + H2(g)
To remember Activity Series
Fe(s) + CuSO4(aq) → FeSO4(aq) + Cu(s)
If an iron nail is placed in an aqueous
solution of copper (II) sulphate as shown in •• Please Potassium (K) Most reactive
•• Send Sodium (Na)
Fig. 10.2, the iron displaces copper from its •• Lions Lithium (Li)
aqueous solution and the so formed copper •• Cats Calcium (Ca)
•• Monkeys Magnesuim (Mg)
deposits over the iron nail. •• And Aluminium (Al)
•• Zebras Zinc (Zn)
•• Into Iron (Fe)
•• Lovely Lead (Pb)
•• Hot Hydrogen (H) non-metal
•• Countries Copper (Cu)
•• Signed Silver (Ag)
•• General Gold (Au)
•• Penguin Platinum (Pt) Least reactive
By referring the activity series, try to

answer the following questions:
Figure 10.2 Displacement of copper Which of the metals displaces hydrogen gas
from hydrochloric acid? Silver or Zinc. Give
It is easy to propose so many reactions the chemical equation of the reaction and
of this kind with different combinations of Justify your answer.

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 10.1 Differences between combination

Activity 10.1
and decomposition reactions
Take about 50 ml of toilet cleaning acid COMBINATION DECOMPOSITION
in a beaker REACTIONS REACTIONS
Place a small iron nail in it One or more A single reactant
Wait for about 10 minutes reactants combine to is decomposed to
Observe what happen in the beaker form a single product form one or more
Do you recognize any change? products
Report your observations with the Energy is released Energy is absorbed
chemical equation.
Elements or Single compound is
compounds may be the reactant
(d) Double Displacement Reactions the reactants
When two compounds react, if their ions
are interchanged, then the reaction is called When the clear aqueous solutions of
double displacement reaction. The ion of potassium iodide and lead (II) nitrate are
one compound is replaced by the ion of the mixed, a double displacement reaction takes
another compound. Ions of identical charges place between them.
are only interchanged, i.e., a cation can be
replaced by other cations. This reaction is also Pb(NO3)2(aq) + 2KI(aq) → PbI2(s)↓ + 2KNO3(aq)
called ‘Metathesis Reaction’. The schematic Potassium and lead displace or replace
representation of a double displacement one other and form a yellow precipitate of lead
reaction is given below: (II) iodide as shown in Fig. 10.3.
A B + C D → A D + C B
In a double displacement reaction Figure 10.3 Precipitation of PbI2

either one of the products must be either
a precipitate or water. By this way, there Activity 10.2
are major classes of double displacement
Take a pinch of silver nitrate crystals.
reactions. They are:
Collect about 5 ml of tap water in a test
(i) Precipitation Reactions tube.
(ii) Neutralization Reactions Add the silver nitrate crystals to water
and shake well.
(i) Precipitation Reactions
Observe what happen in the test tube.
When aqueous solutions of two
compounds are mixed, if they react to form an Report your observations and what you
insoluble compound and a soluble compound, infer from that?
then it is called precipitation reaction. Because
the insoluble compound, formed as one of (ii) Neutralization Reactions
the products, is a precipitate and hence the In your lower classes, you have learned
reaction is so called. the reaction between an acid and a base. It is

www.tntextbooks.in
another type of displacement reaction in which exothermic oxidation. If a flame is formed (as
the acid reacts with the base to form a salt and shown in Fig. 10.4), then it is called burning.
water. It is called 'neutralization reaction' as
both acid and base neutralize each other.
Acid + Base → Salt + Water
Reaction of sodium hydroxide with

hydrochloric acid is a typical neutralization
reaction. Here, sodium replaces hydrogen from
hydrochloric acid forming sodium chloride, a
Figure 10.4 Combustion of LPG gas
neutral soluble salt.
Which of the following is a combustion?
NaOH(aq) + HCl(aq) → NaCl(aq) + H2O(l)
(i) Digestion of Food
Similarly, when ammonium hydroxide (ii) Rusting of iron
reacts with nitric acid, it forms ammonium
Many thousands of reactions fall under
nitrate and water.
these five categories and further you will learn
HNO3(aq) + NH4OH(aq) → NH4NO3(aq) + H2O(l) in detail about these reactions in your higher
classes.
(e) Combustion Reactions
A combustion reaction is one in which 10.1.2 Classification based
the reactant rapidly combines with oxygen to on the direction of the
form one or more oxides and energy (heat). So reaction
in combustion reactions, one of the reactants You know that innumerable changes
must be oxygen. Combustion reactions are occur every day around us. Are all they
majorly used as heat energy sources in many permanent? For example, liquid water freezes
of our day to day activities. For instance, we into ice, but then ice melts into liquid water. In
use LPG gas for domestic cooking purposes. other words, freezing is reversed. So, it is not
We get heat and flame from LPG gas by its a permanent change. Moreover, it is a physical
combustion reaction of its constituent gases. change. Physical changes can be reversed
LPG is a mixture of hydrocarbon gases like easily. Can chemical changes be reversed?
propane, butane, propylene, etc. All these Can the products be converted into reactants?
hydrocarbons burn with oxygen to form Let us consider the burning of a wood. The
carbon dioxide and water. carbon compounds present in the wood are
C3H8(g) + 5O2(g) → 3CO2(g) + 4H2O(g) + Heat burnt into carbon dioxide gas and water.
Propane
Can we get back the wood immediately from
carbon dioxide and water? We cannot. So, it is
a permanent change. In most of the cases, we
cannot. But, some chemical reactions can be
reversed. Our mobile phone gets energy from
its lithium ion battery by chemical reactions.
It is called discharging. On recharging the
Since heat is evolved, it is an exothermic mobile, these chemical reactions are reversed.
reaction. As oxygen is added, it is also an Thus, chemical reactions may be reversed
oxidation. So, combustion may be called as an under suitable conditions. Hence, they are

www.tntextbooks.in
grouped into two categories such as reversible backward reaction. After sometimes, the
and irreversible reactions. speed of both the reactions become equal.
So, PCl5 cannot be completely converted into
the products as the reaction is reversed. It is a
reversible reaction. The actual measurements
of the given reaction show that the reaction is
at equilibrium, but the amount of PCl5 is more
than that of PCl3 and Cl2.
MORE TO KNOW
If hydrogen peroxide is poured on a wound,

Figure 10.5 Burning of wood and recharging
it decomposes into water and oxygen. The
of mobile battery
gaseous oxygen bubbles away as it is formed
Reversible Reactions and thus prevent the formation of H2O2.
A reversible reaction is a reaction in
which the products can be converted back
to the reactants. A reversible reaction is
represented by a double arrow with their heads
in the direction opposite to each other. Thus, a
reversible reaction can be represented by the Hydrogen peroxide on a wound
following equation:
Thus, more amount of products can
be obtained in a reversible reaction by the
periodical removal of one of the products or
the periodical addition of the reactants.
Explanation: Here, the compound ‘AB’
undergoes decomposition to form the products 2H2O2(aq) 2H2O(l) + O2(g)
‘A’ and ‘B’. It is the forward reaction. As soon as
Irreversible Reactions
the products are formed, they combine together
The reaction that cannot be reversed is
to form ‘AB’. It is the backward reaction. So,
called irreversible reaction. The irreversible
the reaction takes place in both the directions.
reactions are unidirectional, i.e., they take
Do you think then that no products are formed
place only in the forward direction. Consider
in the aforesaid reaction? If you think so, you
the combustion of coal into carbon dioxide and
are wrong. Because, even though the reaction
water.
takes place in both the directions, at the initial
stage the rates (speed) of these reactions are not C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g) + Heat
Coal Oxygen Carbon dioxide
equal. Consider the following decomposition
reaction of phosphorous pentachloride into In this reaction, solid coal burns with
phosphorous trichloride and chlorine. oxygen and gets converted into carbon dioxide
gas and water. As the product is a gas, as soon
PCl5(g) PCl3(g) + Cl2(g)
as it is formed it escapes out of the reaction
The forward reaction is the decomposition container. It is extremely hard to decompose
of PCl5 and the backward reaction is the a gas into a solid. Thus, the backward
combination of PCl3 and Cl2. Initially, the reaction is not possible in this case. So, it is an
forward reaction proceeds faster than the irreversible reaction. Table 10.2 provides the

www.tntextbooks.in
main differences between a reversible and an of a substance ‘A’ undergoes a reaction and
irreversible reaction: after an hour 50 g of ‘A’ is left.
A → Product
Table 10.2 Differences between reversible and In another instance, 100 g of substance ‘C’
irreversible reactions undergoes a reaction and after an hour, 20 g of
REVERSIBLE REACTION IRREVERSIBLE REACTION ‘C’ is left.
C → Product
It can be reversed It cannot be
under suitable reversed. Can you say which is the faster reaction?
conditions. In the first reaction, 50 g of the reactant (A) is
converted into products whereas in the second
Both forward It is unidirectional. reaction 80 g of the reactant is converted into
and backward It proceeds only in products in one hour. So, the second reaction is
reactions take place forward direction. faster. This measurement is called ‘the reaction
simultaneously. rate’.
It attains Equilibrium is not “Rate of a reaction is the change in the
equilibrium. attained. amount or concentration of any one of the
The reactants The reactants can be reactants or products per unit time”.
cannot be converted completely converted Consider the following reaction
completely into into products. A→B
products. The rate of this reaction is given by
It is relatively slow. It is fast. d[A] d[B]
Rate = – =+
dt dt
You will learn more about these reactions Where,
in your higher classes. [A] – Concentration of A
[B] – Concentration of B
10.2
R ATE OF A CHEMICAL The negative sign indicates the decrease in
REACTION the concentration of A with time.
The postive sign indicates the increase in
So far we discussed various types of the concentration of B with time.
chemical reactions and the nature of the Note: ‘[ ]’ represents the concentration, ‘d’
reactants and products. Let us consider the represents the infinitesimal change in the
following reactions: concentration.
Rusting of iron Why is reaction rate important?
Digestion of food Faster the reaction, more will be the
amount of the product in a specified time. So,
Burning of petrol
the rate of a reaction is important for a chemist
Weathering of rock for designing a process to get a good yield of a
How fast is each reaction? Rank them from product. Rate of reaction is also important for
the slowest to fastest. How will you determine, a food processor who hopes to slow down the
reactions that cause food to spoil.
which is the fastest and which is the slowest?
One of the ways to find out how fast a reaction 10.2.1 Factors influencing the
is as follows: Measure the amount of reactants rate of a reaction
or products before and after a specific period Can the rate of a reaction be changed?
of time. For example, let us assume that 100 g The rate of a reaction can be changed. For

www.tntextbooks.in
example, iron gets rusted faster in an acid than (iv) Pressure

in water. Important factors that affect rate of a If the reactants are gases, increasing their
reaction are pressure increases the reaction rate. This is
(i) Nature of the reactants because, on increasing the pressure the reacting
(ii) Concentration of the reactants particles come closer and collide frequently.
(iii) Temperature (v) Catalyst

A catalyst is a substance which increases
(iv) Catalyst the reaction rate without being consumed in
(v) Pressure the reaction. In certain reactions, adding a
(vi) Surface area of the reactants substance as catalyst speeds up the reaction.
For example, on heating potassium chlorate,
(i) Nature of the reactants it decomposes into potassium chloride and
The reaction of sodium with hydrochloric oxygen gas, but at a slower rate. If manganese
acid is faster than that with acetic acid. Do you dioxide is added, it increases the reaction
know why? Hydrochloric acid is a stronger acid rate.
than acetic acid and thus more reactive. So, the (vi) Surface area of the reactants
nature of the reactants influence the reaction
When solid reactants are involve in a
rate. reaction, their powdered form reacts more
2Na(s) + 2HCl(aq) → 2NaCl(aq) + H2 (g) (fast) readily. For example, powdered calcium
2Na(s) + 2CH3COOH(aq) → 2CH3COONa(aq) + H2(g)(slow) carbonate reacts more readily with hydrochloric
acid than marble chips. Because, powdering of
(ii) Concentration of the reactants the reactants increases the surface area and
Changing the amount of the reactants also more energy is available on collision of the
increases the reaction rate. The amount of the reactant particles. Thus, the reaction rate is
substance present in a certain volume of the increased.
solution is called ‘concentration’. More the You will study more about reaction rate in
concentration, more particles per volume exist you higher classes.
in it and hence faster the reaction. Granulated
zinc reacts faster with 2M hydrochloric acid 10.3 STATE OF EQUILIBRIUM
than 1M hydrochloric acid.
(iii) Temperature In a reversible reaction, both forward and
backward reactions take place simultaneously.
Most of the reactions go faster at higher
When the rate of the forward reaction becomes
temperature. Because adding heat to the
equal to the rate of backward reaction, then
reactants provides energy to break more bonds
no more product is formed. This stage of the
and thus speed up the reaction. Calcium reaction is called ‘equilibrium state’. After this
carbonate reacts slowly with hydrochloric stage, no net change in the reaction can occur
acid at room temperature. When the reaction and hence in the amount of the reactants and
mixture is heated the reaction rate increases. products. Since this equilibrium is attained
in a chemical reaction, it is called ‘Chemical
Food kept at room temperature
Equilibrium’. Chemical Equilibrium: It is state
spoils faster than that kept
of a reversible chemical reaction in which no
in the refrigerator. In the
change in the amount of the reactants and
refrigerator, the temperature is lower products takes place. At equilibrium,
than the room temperature and hence the
reaction rate is less. Rate of forward reaction = Rate of backward
reaction

www.tntextbooks.in
Explanation: Initially the rate of the

forward reaction is greater than the rate of
the backward reaction. However, during the
course of reaction, the concentration of the
reactants decreases and the concentration
of the products increases. Since the rate of
a reaction is directly proportional to the
concentration, the rate of the forward reaction
decreases with time, whereas the rate of the
backward reaction increases. Figure 10.6 State of physical equilibrium
At a certain stage, both the rates become
equal. From this point onwards, there will be Characteristics of equilibrium
no change in the concentrations of both the
In a chemical equilibrium, the rates of
reactants and the products with time. This
the forward and backward reactions are
state is called as equilibrium state.
equal.
Let us consider the decomposition of
calcium carbonate into lime and carbon The observable properties such as
dioxide. It is a reversible reaction. The pressure, concentration, colour, density,
speed of each reaction can be determined viscosity etc., of the system remain
by how quickly the reactant disappears. If unchanged with time.
the reaction is carried out in a closed vessel, The chemical equilibrium is a dynamic
it reaches a chemical equilibrium. At this
equilibrium, because both the forward
stage,
and backward reactions continue to occur
CaCO3(s) CaO(s) + CO2(g) even though it appears static externally.
The rate of decomposition of CaCO3 = The rate In physical equilibrium, the volume of all
of combination of CaO and CO2 the phases remain constant.
Not only chemical changes, physical
changes also may attain equilibrium. When
water kept in a closed vessel evaporates, it
Aerated soft drinks contain dissolved
forms water vapour. No water vapour escapes
carbon dioxide in a pop bottle (Soda).
out of the container as the process takes place
in a closed vessel. So, it builds up the vapour When the bottle is sealed,
pressure in the container. At one time, the the dissolved carbon dioxide
water vapour condenses back into liquid (in the form of carbonic
water and when the rate of this condensation acid) and gaseous CO 2 are
becomes equal to that of vapourisation, the in equilibrium with each other. When
process attains equilibrium. you open the bottle, the gaseous CO2 can
At this stage, the volume of the liquid escape. So, the dissolved CO 2 begins to
and gaseous phases remain constant. Since it undissolve back to the gas phase trying
is a physical change, the equilibrium attained to replace the gas that was lost, when you
is called ‘Physical Equilibrium’. Physical opened the bottle. That’s why if you leave
equilibrium is a state of a physical change at it open long enough, it will goes ‘flat’. All
which the volume of all the phases remain the CO2 will be gone, blown away in the
unchanged. air.
Evaporation
2 (l)
HO H2O(g)
Condensation

www.tntextbooks.in
10.4 IONIC PRODUCT OF WATER 10.5 pH SCALE
Although pure water is often considered All the aqueous solutions may contain
as a non-conductor of electricity, precise hydrogen and hydroxyl ions due to self-
measurements show that it conducts electricity ionisation of water. In addition to this
to a little extent. This conductivity of water has ionisation, substances dissolved in water
resulted from the self-ionisation of water. Self- also may produce hydrogen ions or hydroxyl
ions. The concentration of these ions decides
ionisation or auto ionisation is a reaction in
whether the solution is acidic or basic. pH
which two like molecules react to give ions.
scale is a scale for measuring the hydrogen
In the process of ionisation of water, a proton
ion concentration in a solution. The 'p' in
from one water molecule is transferred to
pH stands for ‘Potenz’ in German meaning
another water molecule leaving behind an 'power'. pH notation was devised by the
OH— ion. The proton gets dissolved in water Danish biochemist Sorensen in 1909. pH scale
forming the hydronium ion as shown in the is a set of numbers from 0 to 14 which is used
following equation: to indicate whether a solution is acidic, basic
or neutral.
H2O(l) + H2O(l) H3O+(aq) + OH–(aq)
 Acids have pH less than 7
 Bases have pH greater than 7
 A neutral solution has pH equal to 7
The pH is the negative logarithm of the
hydrogen ion concentration
The hydronium ion formed is a strong i.e pH = –log10[H+]
acid and the hydroxyl ion is a strong base. So
as fast as they are formed, they react again to COMMON pH COMMON pH
produce water. Thus, it is a reversible reaction ACIDS BASES
and attains equilibrium very quickly. So, HCl (4%) 0 Blood plasma 7.4
the extent of ionisation is very little and the Stomach acid 1 Egg white 8
concentration of the ions produced is also very Lemon juice 2 Sea water 8
less. The product of the concentration of the Vinegar 3 Baking soda 9
hydronium ion and the hydroxyl ion is called Oranges 3.5 Antacids 10
‘ionic product of water’. It is denoted as ‘Kw’. Soda, grapes 4 Ammonia 11
It is mathematically expressed as follows: water
Sour milk 4.5 Lime water 12
+ -
Kw = [H3O ] [OH ] Fresh milk 5 Drain cleaner 13
Human saliva 6-8 Caustic soda 14
[H3O+] may be simply written as [H+]. 4% (NaOH)
Thus the ionic product of water may also be Pure water 7 Milk of 10
expressed as magnesia
Tomato juice 4.2 Coffee 5.6
Kw = [H+] [OH-]
Its unit is mol2 dm-6. At 25° C, its value is How can we measure the pH of a given
1.00 × 10-14. solution using pH Paper

www.tntextbooks.in
The pH of a solution can be determined pH in our digestive system

by using a universal indicator. It contains It is very interesting to note that our
a mixture of dyes. It comes in the form of a stomach produces hydrochloric acid. It helps
solution or a pH paper. in the digestion of food without harming the
stomach. During indigestion the stomach
produces too much acid and this causes pain
and irritation. pH of the stomach fluid is
approximately 2.0.
pH changes as the cause of tooth decay

pH of the saliva normally ranges between
6.5 to 7.5. White enamel coating of our teeth
is calcium phosphate, the hardest substance in
our body. When the pH of the mouth saliva
Figure 10.7 pH Indicator
falls below 5.5, the enamel gets weathered.
A more common method of measuring Toothpastes, which are generally basic are
used for cleaning the teeth that can neutralise
pH in a school laboratory is by using the
the excess acid and prevent tooth decay.
pH paper. A pH paper contains a mixture
of indicators. It shows a specific colour at a pH of soil
given pH. A colour guide is provided with the In agriculture, the pH of the soil is very
bottle of the indicator or the strips of paper important. Citrus fruits require slightly
impregnated with it, which are called pH alkaline soil, while rice requires acidic soil and
paper strips. The test solution is tested with a sugarcane requires neutral soil.
drop of the universal indicator, or a drop of the
test solution is put on the pH paper. The colour pH of rain water
of the solution on the pH paper is compared The pH of rain water is approximately
with the colour chart and the pH value is read 7, which means that it is neutral and also
from it. The pH values thus obtained are only represents its high purity. If the atmospheric
air is polluted with oxide gases of sulphur and
approximate values.
nitrogen, they get dissolved in the rain water
and make its pH less than 7. Thus, if the pH of
10.6
R OLE OF pH IN rain water is less than 7, then it is called acid
EVERYDAY LIFE rain. When acid rain flows into the rivers it
lowers the pH of the river water also.
Are plants and animals pH sensitive?
Our body works within the pH range
Why pure
of 7.0 to 7.8. Living organisms can survive water has pH 7
only in a narrow range of pH change. at room
ual temperature?
Different body fluids have different pH n c ept
Co ughts
values. For example, pH of blood is ranging Tho
from 7.35 to 7.45. Any increase or decrease
in this value leads to diseases. The ideal pH The survival of aquatic life in such rivers
for blood is 7.4. becomes difficult.

www.tntextbooks.in
10.7 pH CALCULATION 10.8 PROBLEMS
The pH is the negative logarithm of the Example 1: Calculate the pH of 0.001 molar
hydrogen ion concentration solution of HCl.
pH = –log10 [H+] Solution: HCl is a strong acid and is completely
Example: Calculate the pH of 0.01 M HNO3? dissociated in its solutions according to the
Solution: process:
[H+] = 0.01 HCl(aq) → H+(aq) + Cl–(aq)
pH = –log10 [H+] From this process it is clear that one
mole of HCl would give one mole of H+ ions.
pH = –log10 [0.01]
Therefore, the concentration of H+ ions would
pH = –log10 [1 × 10-2]
be equal to that of HCl, i.e., 0.001 molar or
pH = –(log101 – 2 log1010) 1.0 × 10–3 mol litre–1.
pH = 0 + 2 × log1010 Thus, [H+] = 1 × 10–3 mol litre–1
pH = 0 + 2 × 1 = 2 pH = –log10[H+] = –log1010–3
pH = 2 = –(–3 × log10) = –(3 × 1) = 3
pOH: The pOH of an aqueous solution is Thus, pH = 3
realted to the pH.
Example 2: What would be the pH of an
The pOH is the negative logarithm of the aqueous solution of sulphuric
hydroxyl ion concentration
acid which is 5 × 10–5 mol litre–1 in
pOH = –log10[OH–] concentration.
Example: The hydroxyl ion concentration of a Solution: Sulphuric acid dissociates in water as:
solution is 1 × 10-9M. What is the pOH of the
H2SO4(aq) → 2 H+(aq) + SO42–(aq)
solution?
Each mole of sulphuric acid gives two mole
Solution
of H+ ions in the solution. One litre of H2SO4
pOH = –log10 [OH–] solution contains 5 × 10–5 moles of H2SO4
pOH = –log10 [1 × 10-9] which would give 2 × 5 × 10–5 = 10 × 10–5 or
pOH = –(log10 1.0 + log10 10-9) 1.0 × 10–4 moles of H+ ion in one litre of the
pOH = –(0–9 log1010) solution.
pOH = –(0 – 9) Therefore,
pOH = 9 [H+] = 1.0 × 10–4 mol litre–1
Relationship between pH and pOH pH = –log10[H+] = –log1010–4 = –(–4 × log1010)
The pH and pOH of a water solution at 25oC = –(–4 × 1) = 4
are related by the following equation. Example 3: Calculate the pH of 1 × 10–4 molar
pH + pOH = 14 solution of NaOH.
If either the pH or the pOH of a solution is Solution: NaOH is a strong base and dissociates
known, the other value can be calculated. in its solution as:
Example: A solution has a pOH of 11.76. NaOH(aq) → Na+(aq) + OH–(aq)
What is the pH of this solution? One mole of NaOH would give one mole of
pH = 14 – pOH OH– ions. Therefore,
pH = 14 – 11.76 = 2.24

www.tntextbooks.in
[OH–] = 1 × 10–4 mol litre–1 Double displacement reaction or

pOH = –log10[OH–] = –log10 × [10–4] metathesis may occur by the mutal
= –(–4 × log1010)= –(–4) = 4 exchange of ions.
Since, pH + pOH = 14 Precipitation reaction gives an insoluble

pH = 14 – pOH = 14 – 4 salt as the product.
= 10 Neutralisation reactions are reactions
Example 4: Calculate the pH of a solution in between an acid and a base that forms salt
which the concentration of the and water.
hydrogen ions is 1.0 × 10–8 mol litre–1.
Neutralisation prevents tooth decay.
Solution: Here, although the solution is
extremely dilute, the concentration given is not Most reactions in chemistry are irreversible
of an acid or a base but that of H+ ions. Hence, reactions.
the pH can be calculated from the relation:
Chemical equilibrium-the rate of the
pH = –log10[H+] forward reaction is equal to rate of the
given [H+] = 1.0 × 10–8 mol litre–1 back ward reactions.
pH = –log1010–8 = –(–8 × log1010)
Equilibrium is possible in a closed system.
= –(–8 × 1) = 8
Temperature increases the reaction rate.
Example 5: If the pH of a solution is 4.5, what
is its pOH? Pressure increases the reaction rate.
Solution:
The term pH means power of hydrogen.
pH + pOH = 14
pOH = 14 – 4.5 = 9.5 pH plays a vital role in everyday life.
pOH = 9.5 In humans all bio chemical reactions

take place between the pH value of 7.0
Points to Remember to 7.8.
A chemical change is a change in which If pH of rain water is below 5.6 its called
one or more new substances are formed. acid rain.
Most combination reactions are exothermic Pure water is a weak electrolyte.
All photo decomposition reaction are
endothermic reactions.

www.tntextbooks.in
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the correct answer. a. i, ii and iii b. i, ii and iv

1. H2(g) + Cl29(g) → 2HCl(g) is a c. ii, iii and iv d. i, iii and iv
a. Decomposition Reaction 6. A single displacement reaction is represented
b. Combination Reaction by X(s) + 2HCl(aq) → XCl2(aq) + H2(g). Which of
c. Single Displacement Reaction the following(s) could be X.
d. Double Displacement Reaction (i) Zn (ii) Ag (iii) Cu (iv) Mg.
2. Photolysis is a decomposition reaction Choose the best pair.
caused by ___________ a. i and ii b. ii and iii
c. iii and iv d. i and iv
a. heat b. electricity
c. light d. mechanical energy 7. Which of the following is not an
“element + element → compound” type
3. A reaction between carbon and oxygen is
reaction?
represented by C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g) + Heat.
a. C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g)
In which of the type(s), the above reaction
b. 2K(s) + Br2(l) → 2KBr(s)
can be classified? c. 2CO(g) + O2(g) → 2CO2(g)
(i) Combination Reaction d. 4Fe(s) + 3O2(g) → 2Fe2O3(s)
(ii) Combustion Reaction
8. Which of the following represents a
(iii) Decomposition
Reaction precipitation reaction?
(iv) Irreversible Reaction a. A(s) + B(s) → C(s) + D(s)
b. A(s) + B(aq) → C(aq) + D(l)
a. i and ii b. i and iv
c. A(aq) + B(aq) → C(s) + D(aq)
c. i, ii and iii d. i, ii and iv
d. A(aq) + B(s) → C(aq) + D(l)
4. The chemical equation 9. The pH of a solution is 3. Its [OH–]
Na2SO4(aq) + BaCl2(aq) → BaSO4(s)↓ + 2NaCl(aq) concentration is
represents which of the following types of a. 1 × 10–3 M
reaction? b. 3 M
a. Neutralisation c. 1 × 10–11 M
b. Combustion d. 11 M
c. Precipitation
10. Powdered CaCO3 reacts more rapidly than
d. Single displacement
flaky CaCO3 because of ___________.
5. Which of the following statements are a. large surface area
correct about a chemical equilibrium? b. high pressure
(i) It is dynamic in nature c. high concentration
d. high temperature
(ii) The rate of the forward and backward
reactions are equal at equilibrium II. Fill in the blanks
(iii)
Irreversible reactions do not attain 1. A reaction between an acid and a base is
chemical equilibrium called _________________.
(iv)
The concentration of reactants and 2. When lithium metal is placed in hydrochloric
products may be different acid, ________ gas is evolved.

www.tntextbooks.in
3. The equilibrium attained during the melting 7. Electrolysis is type of _______________

of ice is known as ___________. reaction
4. The pH of a fruit juice is 5.6. If you add slaked 8. The number of products formed in a
lime to this juice, its pH _____________ synthesis reaction is _________
(increse/decrese) 9. Chemical volcano is an example for
5. The value of ionic product of water at 250 C _______________ type of reaction
is _____________. 10. The ion formed by dissolution of H+ in water
6. The normal pH of human blood is is called _______________
_________
III. Match the following

1. Identify the types of reaction
REACTION TYPE
NH4OH(aq) + CH3COOH(aq) → CH3COONH4(aq) + H2O(l) Single Displacement
Zn(s) + CuSO4(aq) → ZnSO4(aq) + Cu(s) Combustion

Heat
ZnCO3(s) + → ZnO(s) + CO2(g) Neutralisation
C2H4(g) + 4O2(g) → 2CO2(g) + 2H2O(g) + Heat Thermal decomposition
IV. True or False: (If false give the correct 3. Define combination reaction. Give one
statement) example for an exothermic combination
1. Silver metal can displace hydrogen gas from reaction.
nitric acid. 4. Differentiate reversible and irreversible
2. The pH of rain water containing reactions
dissolved gases like SO 3, CO 2, NO 2 will
be less than 7.
VI. Answer in detail
3. At the equilibrium of a reversible reaction,
the concentration of the reactants and the 1. What are called thermolysis reactions?
products will be equal. 2. Explain the types of double displacement
4. Periodical removal of one of the products reactions with examples.
of a reversible reaction increases the 3. Explain the factors influencing the rate of a
yield. reaction
5. On dipping a pH paper in a solution, it turns 4. How does pH play an important role in
into yellow. Then the solution is basic. everyday life?
V. Short answer questions: 5. What is a chemical equilibrium? What are

its characteristics?
1. When an aqueous solution of potassium
chloride is added to an aqueous solution
of silver nitrate, a white precipitate is VII. HOT questions
formed. Give the chemical equation of this 1. A solid compound ‘A’ decomposes on
reaction. heating into ‘B’ and a gas ‘C’. On passing
2. Why does the reaction rate of a reaction the gas ‘C’ through water, it becomes acidic.
increase on raising the temperature? Identify A, B and C.

www.tntextbooks.in
2. Can a nickel spatula be used to stir copper REFERENCE BOOKS

sulphate solution? Justify your answer.
1. Text book of inorganic chemistry-P.L.Soni-
VIII. Solve the following problems S.Chand & sons publishers, New Delhi.
1. Lemon juice has a pH 2, what is the
2. Principles of Physical Chemistry- B.R.Ruri,
concentration of H+ ions?
L.R. Sharma, Vishal publishing Co Punjab.
2. Calculate the pH of 1.0 ×10–4 molar solution
of HNO3.
3. What is the pH of 1.0 × 10–5 molar solution
of KOH? Webliography:www.chem4kids.com
4. The hydroxide ion concentration of a
solution is 1 × 10–11M. What is the pH of the http://aravindguptatoys.com/filims.html
solution?
Concept Map

www.tntextbooks.in
UNIT CARBON AND ITS COMPOUNDS

11
Learning Objectives
After studying this lesson, the student will be able to:

know the importance of organic compounds.
classify the organic compounds and name them based on IUPAC rules.
identify the functional groups of organic compounds.
explain the preparation, properties and uses of ethanol and ethanoic acids.
know the composition and preparation of soap and detergent.
understand the cleansing action of soap and detergents.
differentiate soap and detergents.
INTRODUCTION are called organic compounds. In this lesson,

you will learn about carbon compounds.
You have studied, in your lower classes,
that carbon is an inseparable element in human 11.1 G ENERAL
life as we use innumerable number of carbon CHARACTERISTICS OF
ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
compounds in our day to day life. Because, the
food we eat, medicines we take when ill, clothes
Everything in this world has unique
we wear; domestic and automobile fuels, paint,
character, similarly organic compounds are
cosmetics, automobile parts, etc., that we use
unique in their characteristics. Some of them
contain carbon compounds. The number
are given below:
of carbon compounds found in nature and
man-made, is much higher than that of any Organic compounds have a high molecular
�
other element in the periodic table. Infact weight and a complex structure.
there are more than 5 million compounds of They are mostly insoluble in water, but
�
carbon. The unique nature of carbon, such soluble in organic solvents such as ether,
as catenation, tetravalency and multiple carbon tetrachloride, toluene, etc.
bonding, enables it to combine with itself � They are highly inflammable in nature
or other elements like hydrogen, oxygen,
Organic compounds are less reactive
�
nitrogen,sulphur etc., and hence form large compared to inorganic compounds. Hence,
number of compounds. All these compounds the reactions involving organic compounds
are made of covalent bonds. These compounds proceed at slower rates.
155

www.tntextbooks.in
Mostly organic compounds form covalent

� atoms are linked in a linear pattern to form
bonds in nature. the chain. If all the carbon atoms in the chain
They have lower melting point and boiling
� are connected by single bonds, the compound
point when compared to inorganic is called as saturated. If one or more double
compounds bonds or triple bonds exist between the
They exhibit the phenomenon of isomerism,
� carbon atoms, then the compound is said to
in which a single molecular formula unsaturated.
represents several organic compounds
that differ in their physical and chemical CH3-CH2-CH3 CH3-CH=CH2
properties Propane Propene
� They are volatile in nature. Saturated compound Unsaturated compound
Organic compounds can be prepared in the

� 2. Cyclic Compounds: Organic
laboratory compounds in which the chain of carbon
atoms is closed or cyclic are called cyclic
11.2 CLASSIFICATION OF compounds. If the chain contains only carbon
ORGANIC COMPOUNDS atoms, such compounds are called carbocyclic
BASED ON THE PATTERN (Homocyclic) compounds. If the chain
contains carbon and other atoms like oxygen,
OF CARBON CHAIN
nitrogen, sulphur, etc., these compounds are
What is the significance of classification? called heterocyclic compounds. Carbocyclic
There are millions of organic compounds compounds are further subdivided into
alicyclic and aromatic compounds. Alicyclic
known and many new organic compounds
compounds contain one or more carbocyclic
are discovered every year in nature or
rings which may be saturated or unsaturated
synthesized in laboratory. This may mystify
whereas aromatic compounds contain one or
organic chemistry to a large extent. However,
more benzene rings (ring containing alternate
a unique molecular structure can be assigned
double bonds between carbon atoms). E.g.
to each compound and it can be listed by
using systematic methods of classification Carbo (Homo) cyclic compounds
and eventually named on the basis of its
H
structural arrangements. In early days, H2C CH2 HC
C
CH
chemists recognised that compounds having or or

HC CH
H2C CH2
similar structural features have identical H2C CH2
Cyclobutane HC
H
C
C
H Benzene
CH
Aromatic Compound
chemical properties. So they began to classify or
Alicyclic Compound or
HC CH
H2C CH2
compounds based on the common structural HC CH C
H Benzene
Cyclobutane or
arrangements found among them. HCHetrocyclic
Alicyclic Compound CH
Aromatic Compound
compounds
O o
HC CH
Organic chemistry is the chemistry of Furan
Heterocyclicor
Compound
catenated carbon compounds. The carbon HC CH
O o
atoms present in organic compounds are Furan
linked with each other through covalent bonds Heterocyclic Compound
and thus exist as chains. By this way, organic

compounds are classified into two types as Figure 11.1 depicts the classification of
follows: organic compounds based on the pattern of
1. Acyclic or Open chain compounds: carbon arrangements and their bonding in
These are the compounds in which the carbon organic compounds:

www.tntextbooks.in
Organic compounds
Acyclic or Open chain Cyclic or Closed chain

compounds compounds
Saturated
Unsaturated Carbocyclic Heterocyclic
(Compounds
(double or triple Compounds Compounds (Ring
containing C-C
bond) (Only cabon containing carbon and
bonds)
Ethene CH2 = CH2 ring) other element)
E.g.Ethane
Ethyne CH CH E.g Pyridine, Furan
C2H6
Alicyclic Aromatic
Compounds Compounds
E.g Cyclobutane E.g Benzene
Figure 11.1 Classification of organic compounds
11.3 C
LASSES OF ORGANIC (b) Alkenes: The hydrocarbons, which contain
COMPOUNDS (BASED ON one or more C=C bonds are called alkenes.
THE KIND OF ATOMS) These are unsaturated compounds. They are
represented by the general formula CnH2n. The
Other than carbon, organic compounds simplest alkene contains two carbon atoms
contain atoms like hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, (n=2) and is called ethylene (C2H4).
etc., bonded to the carbon. Combination of these (c) Alkynes: The hydrocarbons containing carbon
kinds of atoms with carbon gives different classes to carbon triple bond are called alkynes. They
of organic compounds. In the following section, let are also unsaturated as they contain triple
us discuss various classes of organic compounds. bond between carbon atoms. They have the
general formula CnH2n – 2. Acetylene (C2H2)
11.3.1 Hydrocarbons is the simplest alkyne, which contains two
The organic compounds that are composed carbon atoms. Table 11.1 lists the first five
of only carbon and hydrogen atoms are called hydrocarbons of each class:
hydrocarbons. The carbon atoms join together Table 11.1 Hydrocarbons containing 1to 5
to form the framework of the compounds. These carbon atoms
are regarded as the parent organic compounds No. of
and all other compounds are considered to be carbon Alkane Alkene Alkyne
(CnH2n + 2) (CnH2n) (CnH2n - 2)
derived from hydrocarbons by replacing one atoms
or more hydrogen atoms with other atoms or Methane - -
group of atoms. Hydrocarbons are, further, sub 1
(CH4)
divided into three classes such as: Ethane Ethene Ethyne
2
(C2H6) (C2H4) (C2H2)
(a) Alkanes: These are hydrocarbons, which Propane Propene Propyne
contain only single bonds. They are represented 3
(C3H8) (C3H6) (C3H4)
by the general formula CnH2n + 2 (where n = Butane Butene Butyne
1,2, 3, ……). The simplest alkane (for n=1) is 4
(C4H10) (C4H8) (C4H6)
methane (CH4). Since, all are single bonds in Pentane Pentene Pentyne
5
alkanes, they are saturated compounds. (C5H12) (C5H10) (C5H8)
157 Carbon and its Compounds

www.tntextbooks.in
11.3.2 Characteristics of 11.3.3 Classification of organic

hydrocarbons: compounds based on
functional groups
Lower hydrocarbons are gases at room
�
temperature E.g. methane, ethane are gases. The structural frameworks of organic
compounds are made of carbon and hydrogen,
� They are colourless and odourless. which are relatively less reactive. But, the
The boiling point of hydrocarbons increases
� presence of some other atoms or group of
with an increase in the number of carbon atoms makes the compounds more reactive
and thus determines the chemical properties
atoms.
of the compound. These groups are called
They undergo combustion reaction with
� functional groups.
oxygen to form CO2 and water.
Alkanes are least reactive when compared
� A functional group is an atom or group
to other classes of hydrocarbons. of atoms in a molecule, which gives its
characteristic chemical properties.
Alkynes are the most reactive due to the
�
The chemical properties of an organic
presence of the triple bond. compound depend on its functional group
Alkanes are saturated whereas alkenes and
� whereas its physical properties rely on
remaining part of the structure. Carbon to
alkynes are unsaturated.
carbon multiple bonds (C=C, C C) also are
� They are insoluble in water. considered as functional groups as many
of the properties are influenced by these
Test to identify saturated and unsaturated bonds. Other functional groups include,
compounds: –OH, –CHO, –COOH, etc.
� Take the given sample solution in a test For example, ethane is a hydrocarbon
tube. having molecular formula C2H6. If one of its
hydrogen is replaced by –OH group, you will
Add a few drops of bromine water and
� get an alcohol. Leaving the functional group,
observe any characteristic change in colour. the rest of the structure is represented by ‘R’.
If the given compound is unsaturated, it
� Thus an alcohol is represented by ‘R-OH’
will decolourise bromine water.
Functional
Saturated compounds do not decolourise
� Group
bromine. CH3-CH3 CH3-CH2-OH
Ethane Ethanol
Hydrocarbon Alcohol
ALKANE ALKENE
Does not react with Will react with bromine A series of compounds containing the
bromine water, and water, and as such also
does not decolourise decolourises same functional group is called a class of
bromine water bromine water organic compounds. Table 11.2 shows various
classes or families of organic compounds and
their functional groups:
ADDITION OF BROMINE WATER TO
ALKANES AND ALKENES
Figure 11.2 Test to identify unsaturated compounds

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 11.2 Classes of organic compounds based on functional group
Class of the Functional

Common Formula Examples
compound group
Alcohol –OH R-OH Ethanol, CH3CH2OH
O
Aldehyde || R-CHO Acetaldehyde, CH3CHO
−C−H
O
Ketone || R–CO-R Acetone, CH3COCH3
−C−
O
Carboxylic acid || R-COOH Acetic acid, CH3COOH
−C−OH
O Methyl acetate,
Ester || R-COOR
−C−OR CH3COOCH3
R-O-R
Ether –O–R Dimethyl ether, CH3OCH3
11.4 HOMOLOGOUS SERIES 11.4.1 Characteristics of

homologous series
Homologous series is a group or a class of
organic compounds having same general Each member of the series differs from the
�
formula and similar chemical properties in preceding or succeeding member by one
which the successive members differ by a - methylene group (–CH2) and hence by a
CH2 group. molecular mass of 14 amu.
Let us consider members of alkanes given All members of a homologous series
�
in Table 11.1. Their condensed structural
contain the same elements and functional
formulas are given below:
group.
Methane - CH4 They are represented by a general molecular

�
Ethane - CH3CH3 formula. e.g. Alkanes, CnH2n + 2.
Propane - CH3CH2CH3 The members in each homologous series

�
show a regular gradation in their physical
Butane - CH3(CH2)2CH3
properties with respect to their increase in
Pentane - CH3(CH2)3CH3
molecular mass.
If you observe the above series. you can Chemical properties of the members of a
�
notice that each successive member has one homologous series are similar.
methylene group more than the precedent
All the members can be prepared by a
�
member of the series and hence they are called
common method.
homologs.

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 11.3 Root words of hydrocarbons

11.5 N
OMENCLATURE OF
ORGANIC COMPOUNDS No. of carbon atoms Root word
1 Meth-
11.5.1 Why do we need 2 Eth-
nomenclature?
3 Prop-
In ancient days, the names of organic 4 But-
compounds were related to the natural things
5 Pent-
from which they were obtained. For example,
the formic acid was initially obtained by 6 Hex-
distillation of ‘red ants’. Latin name of the red 7 Hept-
ant is ‘Formica’. So, the name of the formic acid 8 Oct-
was derived from the Latin name of its source 9 Non-
Later, the organic compounds were synthesized
10 Dec-
from sources other than the natural sources.
So scientists framed a systematic method for
(ii) Prefix: The prefix represents the
naming the organic compounds based on their substituents or branch present in the parent
structures. Hence, a set of rules was formulated chain. Atoms or group of atoms, other than
by IUPAC (International Union of Pure and hydrogen, attached to carbon of the parent chain
Applied Chemistry) for the nomenclature of are called substituents. Table 11.4 presents the
chemical compounds. major substituents of organic compounds and
respective prefix used for them:
11.5.2 C
omponents of an IUPAC
name Table 11.4 Prefix for IUPAC Name
The IUPAC name of the any organic Substituent Prefix used
compound consists of three parts:
-F Fluoro
i. Root word
-Cl Chloro
ii. Prefix
iii. Suffix -Br Bromo
These parts are combined as per the -I Iodo
following sequence to get the IUPAC name of -NH2 Amino
the compound:
-CH3 Methyl
Prefix Root Word Suffix IUPAC Name -CH2CH3 Ethyl
(i) Root word: It is the basic unit, which (iii) Suffix

describes the carbon skeleton. It gives the The suffix forms the end of the name. It
number of carbon atoms present in the parent is divided into two parts such as (a) Primary
chain of the compound and the pattern of their suffix and (b) Secondary suffix. The primary
arrangement. Based on the number of carbon suffix comes after the root word. It represents
atoms present in the carbon skeleton, most of the nature in carbon to carbon bonding of
the names are derived from Greek numerals the parent chain. If all the bonds between the
(except the first four). Table 11.3 shows the root carbon atoms of the parent chain are single, then
words for the parent chain of hydrocarbons suffix ‘ane’ has to be used. Suffix ‘ene’ and ‘yne’
containing 1to10 carbon atoms: are used for the compounds containing double

www.tntextbooks.in
and triple bonds respectively. The secondary specify its location and identity.
suffix describes the functional group of the
compound. 11.5.4 IUPAC Nomenclature of
hydrocarbons – Solved
Table 11.5 Suffix for IUPAC Name examples
Class of the Functional Let us try to name, systematically, some
Suffix used
Compound group of the linear and substituted hydrocarbons by
following IUPAC rules:
Alcohol −OH -ol
Example 1: CH3-CH2-CH2-CH2-CH3
Aldehyde −CHO -al Step 1: It is a five- carbon chain and hence the
root word is ‘Pent’. (Rule 1)
O
Ketone || -one Step 2: All the bonds between carbon atoms are
−C− single bonds, and thus the suffix is ‘ane’.
Carboxylic So, its name is Pent + ane = Pentane
−COOH -oic acid
acid Example 2:
11.5.3 IUPAC rules for naming CH3
|
organic compounds: CH3−CH−CH2−CH2−CH3
Rule1: Identify the longest chain of carbon
� Step 1: The longest chain contains five
atoms to get the parent name (root word). carbon atoms and hence the root word is ‘Pent’.
Rule 2: Number the carbon atoms of the
� Step 2: There is a substituent. So, the carbon
parent chain, beginning at the closest chain is numbered from the left end, which is
end of the substituent or functional closest to the substituent. (Rule 2)
group. These are called locant numbers. CH3
1 |2 3 4 5
If both functional group and substituent are CH3−CH−CH2−CH2−CH3
present, then the priority will be given to the
functional group. Step 3: All are single bonds between the
Rule 3: In case of alkenes and alkynes,
� carbon atoms and thus the suffix is ‘ane’.
locate the double bond or triple bond and Step 4: The substituent is a methyl group
use its locant number followed by a dash and it is located at second carbon atom. So, its
and a primary suffix. The carbon chain is locant number is 2. Thus the prefix is ‘2-Methyl’.
(Rule 6).
numbered in such a way that the multiple
The name of the compound is
bonds have the lowest possible locant
2-Methyl + pent +ane = 2-Methylpentane
number.
Rule 4: If the compound contains functional
� Example 3:
group, locate it and use its locant number CH3
followed by a dash and a secondary suffix.
− −
CH2
Rule 5: When the primary and secondary
�
CH3− CH− CH2− CH2− CH2 − CH3
suffixes are joined, the terminal ‘e’ of the
primary suffix is removed. Step 1: The longest chain contains seven
Rule 6: Identify the substituent and use a
� carbon atoms and hence the root word is ‘Hept’.
number followed by a dash and a prefix to Step 2: There is a substituent. So, the

www.tntextbooks.in
carbon chain is numbered from the end, which Step1: The parent chain consists of 3
is closest to substituent. (Rule 2) carbon atoms. The root word is ‘Prop’.
1 CH Step 2: There are single bonds between
3
− − the carbon atoms of the chain. So, the primary
2 CH2
suffix is ‘ane’.
CH3− CH− CH2− CH2− CH2 − CH3
3 4 5 6 7
Correct Step 3: Since, the compound contains –
OH group, it is an alcohol. The carbon chain is
CH3 numbered from the end which is closest to –OH
− −
CH2 group. (Rule 3)
CH3− CH− CH2− CH2− CH2 − CH3 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6
CH3− CH2− CH2− OH
Wrong
Step 4: The locant number of –OH group is

Step 3: All are single bonds between the 1 and thus the secondary suffix is ‘1-ol’.
carbon atoms and thus the suffix is ‘ane’.
Step 4: The substituent is a methyl group
Prop + ane + (1-ol) = Propan-1-ol
and it is located at third carbon. So, its locant
number is 3. Thus the prefix is ‘3-Methyl’. Note: Terminal ‘e’ of ‘ane’ is removed as per
(Rule 6) Rule 5
Hence the name of the compound is
Example 2: CH3COOH
3-Methyl + hept + ane = 3 –Methylheptane
Step1: The parent chain consists of 2
Example 4: CH3-CH2-CH2-CH=CH2 carbon atoms. The root word is ‘Eth’.
Step 1: It is a ‘five- carbon atoms chain’ and Step 2: All are single bonds between the
hence the root word is ‘Pent’. (Rule 1) carbon atoms of the chain. So the primary
Step 2: There is a carbon to carbon double suffix is ‘ane’.
bond. The suffix is ‘ene’.
Step 3: Since the compound contains
Step 3: The carbon chain is numbered from the–COOH group, it is a carboxylic acid. The
the end such that double bond has the lowest secondary suffix is ‘oic acid’
locant number as shown below: (Rule 3):
5 4 3 2 1 Eth + ane + oic acid) = Ethanoic acid
CH3− CH2− CH2− CH= CH2
Table 11.6 lists IUPAC names homologs of
Step 4: The locant number of the double various classes of organic compounds
bond is 1 and thus the suffix is ‘-1-ene’.
Test yourself:
So, the name of the compound is
Pent + (-1-ene) = Pent-1-ene Obtain the IUPAC name of the following
compounds systematically:
11.5.5 IUPAC Nomenclature of (a) CH3CHO
other classes – Solved
(b) CH3CH2COCH3
examples
(c) ClCH2-CH2-CH2-CH3
Example 1: CH3-CH2-CH2-OH

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 11.6 IUPAC Name of various classes of compounds

No. of IUPAC Name
carbons
atoms Alcohols Aldehydes Ketones Carboxylic acid
Methanol Methanal Methanoic acid

1 -
(CH3OH) (HCHO) (HCOOH)
Ethanol Ethanal Ethanoic acid
2 -
(CH3CH2OH) (CH3CHO) (CH3COOH)
Propanol Propanal Propanone Propanoic acid
3
(CH3CH2CH2OH) (CH3CH2CHO) (CH3COCH3) (CH3CH2COOH)
Butanol Butanal Butanone Butanoic acid
4
(CH3CH2CH2CH2OH) (CH3CH2CH2CHO) (CH3COCH2CH3) (CH3CH2CH2COOH)
5 Pentanol Pentanal Pentanone Pentanoic acid

(CH3CH2CH2CH2 CH2OH) (CH3CH2CH2CH2 CHO) (CH3COCH2CH2 CH3) (CH3CH2CH2CH2 COOH)
11.6 ETHANOL (CH3CH2OH) (ii) Addition of Nitrogen source

Ethanol is commonly known as alcohol. Molasses usually contains enough nitrogenous
All alcoholic beverages and some cough syrups matter to act as food for yeast during the
contain ethanol. Its molecular formula is fermentation process. If the nitrogen content
C2H5OH. Its structural formula is of the molasses is poor, it may be fortified
by the addition of ammonium sulphate or
H H ammonium phosphate.
— —
— —
H—C—C—O—H
(iii) Addition of Yeast
H H
Ethanol (C2H5OH) The solution obtained in step (ii) is collected in
large ‘fermentation tanks’ and yeast is added to
it. The mixture is kept at about 303K for a few
days. During this period, the enzymes invertase
11.6.1 Manufacture of ethanol and zymase present in yeast, bring about the
Ethanol is manufactured in industries conversion of sucrose into ethanol.
by the fermentation of molasses, which is a invertase
invertase C6HH12O
by-product obtained during the manufacture C
C12H22O
H +H
O11 + H2OO C O6 +
6 12 6
+C H12O
C66H O6
12 6
12 22 11
Sugar
2
glucose
glucose fructose
fructose
of sugar from sugarcane. Molasses is a Sugar
dark coloured syrupy liquid left after the zymase

zymase
C H12O
C6H O6 2C2H
2C OH +
H5OH + 22 CO
CO2
6 12 6 2 5 2
crystallization of sugar from the concentrated glucose
glucose or
or fructose
fructose ethanol
ethanol
sugarcane juice. Molasses contain about 30%
of sucrose, which cannot be separated by The fermented liquid is technically called
crystallization. It is converted into ethanol by wash.
the following steps: (iv) Distillation of 'Wash'
(i) Dilution of molasses The fermented liquid (i.e. wash), containing
Molasses is first diluted with water to bring 15 to 18 percent alcohol, is now subjected to
down the concentration of sugar to about 8 to fractional distillation. The main fraction drawn
10 percent. is an aqueous solution of ethanol which contains

www.tntextbooks.in
95.5% of ethanol and 4.5% of water. This is called (iii) Oxidation:

rectified spirit. This mixture is then refluxed Ethanol is oxidized to ethanoic acid with
over quicklime for about 5 to 6 hours and then alkaline KMnO4 or acidified K2Cr2O7
allowed to stand for 12 hours. On distillation of
this mixture, pure alcohol (100%) is obtained. K2Cr2O7 / H
+
This is called absolute alcohol. CH3CH2OH CH3COOH +H2O

2[O] Ethanoic acid
More to know During this reaction, the orange colour
Yeast and Fermentation: Yeasts are of K2Cr2O7 changes to green. Therefore, this
reaction can be used for the identification of
single–celled microorganisms, belonging
alcohols.
to the class of fungi. The enzymes present
in yeasts catalyse many complex organic (iv) Esterification:
reactions. Fermentation is conversion of The reaction of an alcohol with a carboxylic
complex organic molecules into simpler acid gives a compound having fruity odour. This
molecules by the action of enzymes. E.g. compound is called an ester and the reaction is
Curdling of milk called esterification. Ethanol reacts with ethanoic
acid in the presence of conc. H2SO4 to form ethyl
11.6.2 Physical properties ethanoate, an ester.
conc.H2SO4
i) E
thanol is a colourless liquid, having a C2H5OH + CH3COOH CH3COOC2H5 + H2O
pleasant smell and a burning taste. Ethanol Ethanoic acid Ethyl ethanoate
ii) I t is a volatile liquid. Its boiling point is 780 C

(v) Dehydrogenation:
(351K), which is much higher than that of
its corresponding alkane, i.e. ethane (Boiling When the vapour of ethanol is passed over
Point = 184 K). heated copper, used as a catalyst at 573 K, it is
dehydrogenated to acetaldehyde.
iii) It is completely miscible with water in all
Cu
proportions. CH3CH2OH CH3CHO + H2
573K
Ethanol Acetadehyde
11.6.3 Chemical Properties
(i) Dehydration (Loss of water) (vi) Combustion:
When ethanol is heated with con H2SO4 at Ethanol is highly inflammable liquid. It burns
443K, it loses a water molecule i.e. dehydrated to with oxygen to form carbon dioxide and water.
form ethene. C2H5OH + 3O2 2CO2 + 3H2O
Ethanol Carbon dioxide
Conc.H SO4
CH3CH2OH 2
CH2 = CH2 + H2O
443K
Ethanol Ethene 11.6.4 Uses of ethanol
Ethanol is used
(ii) Reaction with sodium:
� in medical wipes, as an antiseptic.
Ethanol reacts with sodium metal to form
as an anti-freeze in automobile radiators.
�
sodium ethoxide and hydrogen gas.
for effectively killing micro organisms
�
2C2H5OH + 2Na 2C2H5ONa + H2 ↑ like bacteria, fungi, etc., by including it in
sodium ethoxide
many hand sanitizers.

www.tntextbooks.in
as an antiseptic to sterilize wounds in

� (ii) It is sour in taste.
hospitals. (iii) It is miscible with water in all proportions.
as a solvent for drugs, oils, fats, perfumes,
� (iv) Its boiling point is higher than the
corresponding alcohols, aldehydes and
dyes, etc.
ketones.
in the preparation of methylated spirit
�
(v) On cooling, pure ethanoic acid is frozen to
(mixture of 95% of ethanol and 5% of form ice like flakes. They look like glaciers,
methanol) rectified spirit (mixture of so it is called glacial acetic acid.
95.5% of ethanol and 4.5% of water), power
alcohol (mixture of petrol and ethanol) 11.7.3 Chemical Properties
and denatured spirit (ethanol mixed with (i) Reaction with metal: Ethanoic acid reacts
pyridine). with active metals like Na, Zn, etc., to liberate
to enhance the flavour of food extracts,
� hydrogen and form their ethanoate.
for example vanilla extract; a common 2CH3COOH + Zn → (CH3COO)2 Zn + H2 ↑
food flavour, which is made by processing
vanilla beans in a solution of ethanol and 2CH3COOH + 2Na → 2CH3COONa + H2 ↑
water.
(ii)
Reaction with carbonates and
bicarbonates: Ethanoic acid reacts with
11.7 ETHANOIC ACID (CH3COOH) sodium carbonate and sodium bicarbonate,
which are weaker bases and liberates CO2,
Ethanoic acid or acetic acid is one of the with brisk effervescence.
most important members of the carboxylic
2CH3COOH + Na2CO3 → 2CH3COONa +
acid family. Its molecular formula is C2H4O2. Its
CO2↑ + H2O
structural formula is
CH3COOH + NaHCO3 → CH3COONa +
H O
CO2↑ + H2O
—
—
—
H — C — C — OH
(iii) Reaction with base: Ethanoic acid reacts
—
H with sodium hydroxide to form sodium

ethanoate and water.
11.7.1 M
anufacture of ethanoic CH3COOH + NaOH → CH3COONa + H2O
acid
(iv) Decarboxylation (Removal of CO2):
Ethanoic acid is prepared in large scale, When a sodium salt of ethanoic acid is
by the oxidation of ethanol in the presence of heated with soda lime (solid mixure of 3 parts
alkaline potassium permanganate or acidified of NaOH and 1 part of CaO), methane gas is
potassium dichromate. formed.
-
CH3CH2OH KMnO4/ OH
2[O] CH3COOH + H2O NaOH / CaO
CH3COONa CH4 ↑ + Na2CO3
Ethanol Ethanoic acid
11.7.4 Uses of ethanoic acid
11.7.2 Physical Properties
Acetic acid, in lower concentration,
(i) Ethanoic acid is a colourless liquid having an (vinegar) is used as a food additive, a flavoring
unpleasant odour. agent and a preservative.

www.tntextbooks.in
Ethanoic acid is used

11.9 SOAPS AND DETERGENTS
in the manufacture of plastic.
�
Soaps and the Detergents are materials that
in making dyes, pigments and paint.
�
are used by us for cleaning purposes because
in printing on fabrics.
� pure water alone cannot remove all types of dirt
as a laboratory reagent.
� or any oily substance from our body or clothes.
for coagulating rubber from latex.
� They contain ‘surfactants’, which are compounds
in the production of pharmaceuticals.
� with molecules that line up around water to
break the ‘surface tension’. Both of them having
a different chemical nature. Soap is a cleaning
11.8 O
RGANIC COMPOUNDS agent that is composed of one or more salts of
IN DAILY LIFE fatty acids. Detergent is a chemical compound
or a mixture of chemical compounds, which is
Organic compounds are inseparable in used as a cleaning agent, also. They perform their
human life. They are used by mankind or cleaning actions in certain specific conditions.
associated at all stages of life right from one's You will learn more about this in detail, in the
birth to death. Various classes of organic following units.
compounds and their uses in our daily life as
follows: 11.9.1 Soap
Soaps are sodium or potassium salts of some
Hydrocarbons
long chain carboxylic acids, called fatty acids.
Fuels like LPG, Petrol, Kerosene. Soap requires two major raw materials: i) fat
Raw materials for various important and ii) alkali. The alkali, most commonly used
synthetic materials. in the preparation of soap is sodium h ydroxide.
Polymeric materials like tyre, plastic Potassium hydroxide can also be used. A
containers. potassium-based soap creates a more water-

Alcohols soluble product than a sodium-based soap. Based
As a solvent and an antiseptic agent. on these features, there are two types of soaps:
Raw materials for various important A. HARD SOAP
synthetic materials.
Soaps, which are prepared by the
Aldehydes
saponification of oils or fats with caustic soda
Formaldehyde as a disinfectant. (sodium hydroxide), are known as hard soaps.
Raw materials for synthetic materials. They are usually used for washing purposes.
Ketones B. SOFT SOAP
As a solvent.
Soaps, which are prepared by the
Stain Remover. saponification of oils or fats with potassium
Ethers salts, are known as soft soaps. They are used
for cleansing the body.
Anaesthetic agents.
Pain Killer. Manufacture of soap
Esters KETTLE PROCESS:
All the cooking oils and lipids contain This is the oldest method. But, it is still
esters. widely used in the small scale preparation of

www.tntextbooks.in
soap. There are mainly, two steps to be followed These soaps possess the desirable properties of
in this process. ordinary soaps and also can be used with hard
i) Saponification of oil: water and in acidic solutions. These are salts
of sulphonic acids or alkyl hydrogen sulphates
The oil, which is used in this process,
in comparison to soap, which are salts of
is taken in an iron tank (kettle). The alkaline
carboxylic acids. The detergents do not form
solution (10%) is added into the kettle, a little
precipitates with Ca2+ and Mg2+ present in hard
in excess. The mixture is boiled by passing
water. So, the cleansing action of detergents is
steam through it. The oil gets hydrolysed after
better than that of soaps.
several hours of boiling. This process is called
Saponification Preparation of detergents
ii) Salting out of soap: Detergents are prepared by adding sulphuric
Common salt is then added to the boiling acid to the processed hydrocarbon obtained
mixture. Soap is finally precipitated in the tank. from petroleum. This chemical reaction result
After several hours the soap rises to the top of the in the formation of molecules similar to the
liquid as a ‘curdy mass’. The neat soap is taken fatty acid in soap. Then, an alkali is added to the
off from the top. It is then allowed to cool down. mixture to produce the ‘surfactant molecules’,
which do not bond with the minerals present in
Effect of hard water on soap
the hard water, thus preventing the formation of
Hard water contains calcium and their precipitates.
magnesium ions (Ca2+ and Mg2+) that limit
In addition to a ‘surfactant’, the modern
the cleaning action of soap. When combined
detergent contains several other ingredients.
with soap, hard water develops a thin layer
They are listed as follows:
(precipitates of the metal ions) called ‘scum’,
which leaves a deposit on the clothes or skin i) Sodium silicate, which prevents the corrosion
and does not easily rinse away. Over time, this and ensures that the detergent does not
can lead to the deterioration of the fabric and damage the washing machine.
eventually ruin the clothes. On the other hand, ii) Fluorescent whitening agents that give a glow
detergents are made with chemicals that are not to the clothes.
affected by hard water. iii) Oxygen bleaches, such as ‘sodium perborate’,
enable the removal of certain stains from the
Why ordinary soap is not cloth.
suitable for using with hard iv)
Sodium sulphate is added to prevent the
water? caking of the detergent powder.
Ordinary soaps when treated v)
Enzymes are added to break down some
with hard water, precipitate as salts of stains caused by biological substances like
calcium and magnesium. They appear blood and vegetable juice.
at the surface of the cloth as sticky grey
vi) Certain chemicals that give out a pleasant
scum. Thus, the soaps cannot be used
smell are also added to make the clothes
conveniently in hard water.
fragrant after they are washed with detergents.
11.9.2 Detergents 11.9.3 Cleansing action of soap

Development of synthetic detergents is A soap molecule contains two chemically
a big achievement in the field of cleansing. distinct parts that interact differently with

www.tntextbooks.in
water. It has one polar ¾¾ d

o an effective and safe cleansing,
end, which is a short keeping even synthetic fabrics brighter
head with a carboxylate and whiter.
group (–COONa) and one
Biodegradable and Non-biodegradable
non-polar end having
detergents:
the long tail made of the
hydrocarbon chain. a) Biodegradable detergents:
The polar end is hydrophilic (Water They have straight hydrocarbon chains,
loving) in nature and this end is attracted which can be easily degraded by bacteria.
towards water. The non-polar end is
hydrophobic (Water hating) in nature and it
is attracted towards dirt or oil on the cloth,
Soap molucules
but not attracted towards water. Thus, the Soap solutoin
Dirty cloth
hydrophobic part of the soap molecule traps
the dirt and the hydrophilic part makes the Dirt
entire molecule soluble in water.

When a soap or detergent is dissolved in
water, the molecules join together as clusters
called ‘micelles’. Their long hydrocarbon
chains attach themselves to the oil and dirt.
The dirt is thus surrounded by the non-polar
Hydrophilic head
end of the soap molecules (Figure 11.3).
The charged carboxylate end of the soap
molecules makes the micelles soluble in
water. Thus, the dirt is washed away with
the soap. Aqueous
soluon
Advantages of detergents over soaps

Detergents are better than soaps because they:
Hydrophobic tail
¾¾ c an be used in both hard and soft water and
can clean more effectively in hard water Figure 11.3 Cleansing action of soap
than soap.
¾¾ can also be used in saline and acidic water. b) Non-biodegradable detergents:
¾¾ d
o not leave any soap scum on the tub or They have highly branched hydrocarbon
clothes. chains, which cannot be degraded by bacteria.
¾¾ d
issolve freely even in cool water and rinse
freely in hard water. Disadvantages of Detergents
¾¾ c an be used for washing woollen garments, 1. Some detergents having a branched hydro-
where as soap cannot be used. carbon chain are not fully biodegradable by
¾¾ h
ave a linear hydrocarbon chain, which is micro-organisms present in water. So, they
biodegradable. cause water pollution.
2. They are relatively more expensive than
¾¾ are active emulsifiers of motor grease. soap.

www.tntextbooks.in
11.9.4 Comparison between soap and detergents
Soap Detergent
It is a sodium salt of long chain fatty acids. It is sodium salts of sulphonic acids.
– + –
The ionic part of a soap is –COO Na . The ionic part in a detergent is –SO 3Na+.
It is prepared from animal fats or vegetable oils. It is prepared from hydrocarbons obtained from
crude oil.
Its effectiveness is reduced when used in hard It is effective even in hard water.
water.
It forms a scum in hard water. Does not form a scum in hard water.
It has poor foaming capacity. It has rich foaming capacity.
Soaps are biodegradable. Most of the detergents are non-biodegradable.
Have you noticed the term Functional group may be defined as an

"TFM" in soap atom or group of atom or reactive part
which is responsible for the characteristic
properties of the compounds
Ethanoic acid is most commonly known as
acetic acid and belongs to a group of acids
called carboxylic acids.
Ethanol or ethyl alcohol or simply alcohol
is one of the most important members of
the family of alcohols.
TFM means TOTAL FATTY MATTER.
It is the one of the important factors to be The slow chemical change that takes
considered to assess the quality of soap. A place in complex organic compounds
soap, which has higher TFM, is a good bathing by the action of enzymes leading to the
soap. formation of simple molecules is called
fermentation.
Soaps are sodium or potassium salts of
Points to Remember
some long chain carboxylic acids.
A group or class of organic compounds
Detergents are sodium salts of sulphonic
related to each other by a general molecular
acids. Thus instead of –COOH group in
formula constitutes homologous series.
soaps, detergents contain –SO3H group
The IUPAC name of the any organic
compound consist of three parts.
ROOTWORD, PREFIX and / or SUFFIX.

www.tntextbooks.in
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the best answer.

9. Which of the following statements is wrong
1. The molecular formula of an open chain
about detergents?
organic compound is C3H6. The class of the
a. It is a sodium salt of long chain fatty
compound is acids
a. alkane b. alkene b. It is sodium salts of sulphonic acids
c. alkyne d. alcohol –
c. The ionic part in a detergent is –SO3 Na+
2. The IUPAC name of an organic compound is d. It is effective even in hard water.
3-Methyl butan-1-ol. What type compound
it is?
1. An atom or a group of atoms which is
a. Aldehyde b. Carboxylic acid
responsible for chemical characteristics of an
c. Ketone d. Alcohol
organic compound is called ____________.
3. The secondary suffix used in IUPAC 2. The general molecular formula of alkynes is
nomenclature of an aldehyde is ____ _____________
a. - ol b. – oic acid
3. In IUPAC name, the carbon skeleton of a
c. - al d. - one
compound is represented by _________
4. Which of the following pairs can be the (root word / prefix / suffix)
successive members of a homologous series? 4. (Saturated / Unsaturated) ___________
a. C3H8 and C4H10 compounds decolourize bromine water.
b. C2H2 and C2H4
5. Dehydration of ethanol by conc. Sulphuric
c. CH4 and C3H6
acid forms _______ (ethene/ ethane)
d. C2H5OH and C4H8OH
6. 100 % pure ethanol is called ____________
5. C2H5OH + 3O2 → 2CO2 + 3H2O is a
a. Reduction of ethanol 7. Ethanoic acid turns _______ litmus to
b. Combustion of ethanol _________
c. Oxidation of ethanoic acid 8. The alkaline hydrolysis of fatty acids is
d. Oxidation of ethanal termed as _____________
6. Rectified spirit is an aqueous solution which
9. Biodegradable detergents are made of
contains about _______ of ethanol _________(branched / straight) chain
a. 95.5 % b. 75.5 % hydrocarbons
c. 55.5 % d. 45.5 %
7. Which of the following are used as III. Match the following
anaesthetics? Functional group - Benzene
a. Carboxylic acids b. Ethers –OH
c. Esters d. Aldehydes Heterocyclic - Potassium stearate
8. TFM in soaps represents ___________ Unsaturated - Alcohol
content in soap
Soap - Furan
a. mineral b. vitamin
c. fatty acid d. carbohydrate Carbocyclic - Ethene

www.tntextbooks.in
IV. Assertion and Reason: (ii) Evolution of carbon dioxide by the action
Answer the following questions using the of ethanoic acid with NaHCO3.
data given below: Oxidation of ethanol by acidified
(iii)
i) A and R are correct, R explains the A. potassium dichromate.
ii) A is correct, R is wrong. (iv) Combustion of ethanol.
iii) A is wrong, R is correct. 5. Explain the mechanism of cleansing action
iv) A and R are correct, R doesn’t explains A. of soap.
1. Assertion: Detergents are more effective
cleansing agents than soaps in hard water. VII. HOT questions
Reason: Calcium and magnesium salts of 1. The molecular formula of an alcohol is
detergents are water soluble.
C4H10O. The locant number of its –OH
2. Assertion: Alkanes are saturated group is 2.
hydrocarbons.
(i) Draw its structural formula.
Reason: Hydrocarbons consist of covalent
bonds. (ii) Give its IUPAC name.
(iii) Is it saturated or unsaturated?
V. Short answer questions
2. An organic compound ‘A’ is widely used
1. Name the simplest ketone and give its as a preservative and has the molecular
structural formula. formula C2H4O2. This compound reacts
2. Classify the following compounds based on with ethanol to form a sweet smelling
the pattern of carbon chain and give their compound ‘B’.
structural formula: (i) Propane (ii) Benzene
(i) Identify the compound ‘A’.
(iii) Cyclobutane (iv) Furan
(ii)
Write the chemical equation for
3. How is ethanoic acid prepared from ethanol?
its reaction with ethanol to form
Give the chemical equation.
compound ‘B’.
4. How do detergents cause water pollution?
(iii) Name the process.
Suggest remedial measures to prevent this
pollution?
5. Differentiate soaps and detergents. REFERENCE BOOKS
VI. Long answer questions 1. Organic chemistry - B.S.Bahl & Arun Bahl
1. What is called homologous series? Give any S.Chand publishers, New delhi.
three of its characteristics? 2. Organic chemistry - R.T.Morrision &
2. Arrive at, systematically, the IUPAC name R.MN. Boyd - Prentice Hall Publishers.
of the compound: CH3–CH2–CH2–OH. New Delhi
3. How is ethanol manufactured from
sugarcane?
4. Give the balanced chemical equation of the
following reactions: https://www.tutorvista.com/
(i) Neutralization of NaOH with ethanoic https://www.topperlearning.com/
acid. http://www.chem4kids.com/

www.tntextbooks.in
Ether Concept Map alcohol

Ester
Organic acid
Carboxylic
acids Functional Drugs
Daily use
group
Ketones Fuel
Aldehydes Tyre
Alcohols Carbon Plastic

and its
compounds
Saturated
Open chain Root word
compounds
Unsaturated
IUPAC Prefix
Classification Naming Suffix
Carbo cyclic Common

Source
compounds name
Closed chain
compounds
Hetero cyclic
compounds
Organic Carbon and its

ICT CORNER Compounds
The students can know about the

Hydrocarbons, its formulae, descriptions
and also in animated form.
Steps
• Type the URL or use the QR code to access the application “Organic chemistry visualized / OCV” and
install in the mobile.
• Click ‘Content’ to view the list of Hydrocarbon. Explore about the hydrocarbons by clicking those.
• On clicking ‘anim’ button, you can view the formulae of hydrocarbon as well as in animated form.
• Click ‘Quiz’ to evaluate yourself in this topic.
URL: https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.budgietainment.oc
or Scan the QR Code.

www.tntextbooks.in
PLANT ANATOMY
AND PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
Learning Objectives
At the end of this lesson the students will be able to:
Understand vascular tissue system- their types and functions.
Know the structure of dicot root, stem, leaf and monocot root, stem, leaf.
Differentiate the internal structure of dicot root, stem, leaf with that of monocot root,
stem, leaf.
Name the different pigments found in chloroplast.
Elaborate on the structure and functions of plastids.
Enumerate the steps involved in photosynthesis.
Understand the structure of mitochondria
List the basic events of aerobic and anerobic respiration.
can be broadly classified into two, based on

Introduction
their ability to divide. They are
Plants exhibits varying degrees of i) Meristamatic tissue
organization. Atoms are organized into ii) Permanent tissue.
molecules, molecules into organelles, organelles
into cells, cells into tissues and tissues into
organs. The first account of internal structure 12.2 Tissue system
of plants was published by English Physician Sachs (1875) classified tissue system in
Nehemiah Grew. He is known as Father of plants into three types
Plant Anatomy. Plant anatomy (Gk Ana = as
i) Dermal or Epidermal tissue system
under; Temnein = to cut) is the study of internal
ii) Ground tissue system
structure of plants. You have already studied the
iii) Vascular tissue system
different kinds of tissues in standard IX. In this
lesson, you will study about the internal structure The functions of these tissues are given in
of plant tissues, process of photosynthesis and Table 12.1.
respiration.
12.2.1 Dermal or Epidermal
12.1 Tissues Tissue System
Tissues are the group of cells that are It consists of epidermis, stomata and
similar or dissimilar in structure and origin, epidermal outgrowths. Epidermis is the outer most
but perform similar function. Plant tissues layer. It has many minute pores called stomata.
173

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 12.1 Tissue system and its functions

Tissue System Components Functions
Epidermis and Periderm • Protection
Dermal Tissue System
(in older stems and roots) • Prevention of water loss
Parenchyma tissue • Photosynthesis
• Food storage
Ground Tissue System Collenchyma tissue • Regeneration
Sclerenchyma tissue • Support
• Protection
Vascular tissues • Transport of water and
Vascular Tissue System - Xylem tissue minerals
- Phloem tissue • Transport of food
Cuticle is present on the outer wall of epidermis to (ii) Conjoint bundles

check evaporation of water. Trichomes and root Xylem and phloem lie on the same radius.
hairs are the epidermal outgrowths. There are two types of conjoint bundles.
Functions: a) Collateral
i) Epidermis protects the inner tissues. Xylem lies towards the centre and phloem
ii) Stomata helps in transpiration. lies towards the periphery.
iii) Root hairs help in absorption of water and When cambium is present in collateral
minerals. bundles, it is called open. e.g. dicot stem and
collateral bundle without cambium is called
12.2.2 Ground Tissue System closed. e.g. monocot stem.
It includes all the tissues of the plant b) Bicollateral
body except epidermal and vascular tissues
In this type of bundle, the phloem is
like (i) Cortex (ii) Endodermis (iii) Pericycle
present on both outer and inner side of xylem.
(iv) Pith
e.g. Cucurbita
12.2.3 Vascular Tissue System (iii) Concentric Bundles
It consists of xylem and phloem tissues. Vascular bundle in which xylem completely
They are present in the form of bundles called surrounds the phloem or viceversa is called
vascular bundles. Xylem conducts water and concentric vascular bundle. It is of two types:
minerals to different parts of the plant. Phloem 1. Amphivasal: Xylem surrounds phloem.
conducts food materials to different parts of e.g. Dracaena
the plant.
2. Amphicribral: Phloem surrounds xylem.
There are three different types of vascular e.g. Ferns
bundles namely (i) Radial (ii) Conjoint Endarch: Protoxylem lies towards the centre
(iii) Concentric and metaxylem lies towards the periphery. e.g.
(i) Radial Bundles stem.
Xylem and phloem are present in different Exarch : Protoxylem lies towards the periphery
radii alternating with each other. e.g. roots and metaxylem lies towards the centre. e.g. roots.

www.tntextbooks.in
Phloem
Cambium
Xylem
Phloem Xylem
Radial Conjoint, collateral and open Conjoint, collateral and closed
Outer Phloem
Outer Cambium
Xylem Xylem
Phloem
Inner Cambium
Inner Phloem
Conjoint, Bicollateral Concentric and Amphicribral Concentric and Amphivasal
Figure 12.1 Types of vascular bundle

(a) Pericycle: Inner to endodermis lies a
12.3 Internal Structure of
single layer of pericycle. It is the site of origin
Dicot Root (Bean)
of lateral roots.
A thin transverse section of dicot root (b) Vascular bundle: It is radial.
shows the following structures. Xylem is exarch and tetrach. The tissue
(i) Epiblema: It is the outermost layer. present between xylem and phloem is called
Cuticle and stomata are absent. Unicellular conjunctive tissue. In dicot root, it is made up
root hairs are present. It is also known as of parenchyma.
Rhizodermis or Piliferous layer. (c) Pith: Young root contains pith whereas
(ii) Cortex: It is a multilayered large zone in old root pith is absent.
made of thin-walled parenchymatous cells with
intercellular spaces. It stores food and water.
(iii) Endodermis: It is the innermost layer 12.4 Internal Structure of
of cortex. The cells are barrel - shaped, closely Monocot Root (Maize)
packed, and show band like thickenings on
their radial and inner tangential walls called A thin transverse section of monocot
casparian strips. But these casparian strips are root, shows the following characteristic
absent in the endodermis cells which are located features.
opposite the protoxylem these thin walled cells i. Epiblema or Rhizodermis: It is the
without casparian strips are called passage cell. outermost layer of the root, and is made up
It helps in the movement of water and dissolved of single layer of thin walled, parenchymatous
salts from cortex into xylem. cell. Stomata and cuticle are absent. The root
(iv) Stele: All tissues inner to endodermis hair helps in absorption of water and minerals
constitute stele. It includes pericycle and from the soil. This layer also protects the inner
vascular bundle. tissues.
175 Plant Anatomy and Plant Physiology

www.tntextbooks.in
Root hair
Root hair
Piliferous layer
Piliferous layer
Cortex
Cortex
Phloem Endodermis
Xylem
Pith
Ground plan
Ground plan
Root hair
Piliferous layer Root hair

Piliferous layer
Cortex
Passage cell Cortex
Endodermis Casparian strip

Phloem Endodermis
Pericycle Pericycle
Xylem
Conjunctive Phloem
tissue
Xylem
Casparian strip
Pith
A sector enlarged
A sector enlarged
Figure 12.3 Transverse section of

Figure 12.2 Transverse section of Dicot root
Monocot root
c) Pith: It is present at the center. It is made up

ii. Cortex: It is multilayered large zone, of parenchyma cells with intercellular spaces.
composed of parenchymatous cells with It contains abundant amount of starch grains.
intercellular spaces. It stores water and food It stores food.
material.
iii. Endodermis: It is the innermost layer 12.5 Internal Structure of Dicot
of cortex with characteristic casparian strips Stem (Sunflower)
and passage cells. Casparian strips are band
like thickening made of suberin. The transverse section of a dicot stem
reveals the following structures.
iv. Stele: All the tissues inner to
endodermis constitute stele. It includes 1. Epidermis: It is the outermost layer. It is
pericycle, vascular tissues and pith. made up of single layer of parenchyma
a) Pericycle: It is a single layer of thin walled cells, its outer wall is covered with cuticle.
cells. The lateral roots originate from this layer. It is protective in function.
b) Vascular tissues: It consists of many patches 2. Cortex:- It is divided into three regions:
of xylem and phloem arranged radially. The (i) Hypodermis: It consists of 3 - 6 layers
xylem is exarch and polyarch. The conjunctive of collenchyma cells. It gives mechanical
tissue is made up of sclerenchyma. support.

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 12.2 Differences between Dicot and Monocot root
S. No. Tissues Dicot Root Monocot Root

1 Number of Xylem Tetrarch Polyarch
Present (During secondary
2 Cambium Absent
growth only)
3 Secondary Growth Present Absent
4 Pith Absent Present
Conjunctive Tissue Parenchyma Sclerenchyma
5
Ex. Bean Maize
(ii) Middle cortex: It is made up of few cells. It is covered with thick cuticle.
layers of chlorenchyma cells. It is involed Multicellular hairs are absent and stomata
in photosynthesis due to the presence of are also less in number.
chloroplast. 2. Hypodermis: It is made up of few layers
(iii) Inner cortex: It is made up of few
of sclerenchyma cells interrupted by
layers of parenchyma cells. It helps in gaseous
chlorenchyma. Sclerenchyma provides
exchange and stores food materials.
Endodermis is the inner most layer of mechanical support to plant.
cortex it consists of a single layer of barrel 3. Ground tissue: The entire mass of
shaped cells, these cells contain starch grains. parenchyma cells next to hypodermis
So it is also called starch sheath.
Epidermal hair
3. Stele: The central part of the stem inner to
Epidermis
endodermis is known as stele. It consists of Hypodermis
pericycle, vascular bundle and pith. Cortex
(i) Pericycle: It occurs between vascular Endodermis
bundle and endodermis. It is multilayered,
parenchymatous with alternating patches of Vascular bundle
sclerenchyma. Pith
(ii) Bundle Cap: There is a patch of hard
Ground plan
sclerenchyma tissue outside to the phloem of
vascular bundle is calld Bundle Cap. Epidermal hair
(iii) Vascular bundle: Vascular bundles Cuticle
are conjoint, collateral, endarch and open. Epidermis
They are arranged in the form of a ring around Collenchyma
Chlorenchyma
the pith.
Parenchyma
(iv) Pith: The large central parenchymatous Endodermis
zone with intercellular spaces is called pith. It
Bundle Cap
helps in the storage of food materials.
Phloem
Cambium
12.6 Internal Structure of
Monocot Stem (Maize) Xylem
A transverse section of monocot stem Pith

reveals the following structures.
1. Epidermis: It is the outermost layer. It is A sector enlarged
made up of single layer of parenchyma
Figure 12.4 Transverse section of Dicot stem

www.tntextbooks.in
and extending to the centre is called Epidermis
ground tissue. It is not differentiated into

Ground tissue
endodermis, cortex, pericycle and pith. Vascular bundles
4. Vascular Bundle: Vascular bundles are skull

shaped and scattered in the ground tissue.
Vascular bundles are conjoint, collateral, Ground plan
endarch and closed. Each vascular bundle

Cuticle
is surrounded by few layer of sclerenchyma Epidermis
cells called bundle sheath. Hypodermis
Chlorenchyma
(a) Xylem: It consists of metaxylem and
protoxylem. Xylem vessels are arranged
in V or Y shape. In mature vascular Vascular bundles
bundle, the lower most protoxylem Ground tissue
disintegrates and form a cavity. This is
called protoxylem lacuna.
Phloem
(b) Phloem: It consists of sieve tube Metaxylem
elements and companion cells. Phloem Protoxylem
parenchyma, and phloem fibers are Bundle sheath

absent.
A sector enlarged
5. Pith: Pith is not differentiated in monocot
Figure 12.5 Transverse section of
stems.
Monocot stem
Table 12.3 Differences between Dicot Stem Ex.Sunflower and Monocot Stem Ex.Maize
S. No. Tissues Dicot Stem Monocot Stem
1 Hypodermis Collenchymatous Sclerenchymatous

Differentiated into cortex,
2 Ground tissue Undifferentiated
endodermis, pericycle and pith
(i) Less in number (i) Numerous
(ii) Uniform in size (ii) Smaller near periphery, bigger
in the centre
3 Vascular bundles
(iii) Arranged in a ring (iii) Scattered
(iv) Open (Cambium present) (iv) Closed (Cambium absent)
(v) Bundle sheath absent (v) Bundle sheath present
4 Secondary growth Present Mostly absent
5 Pith Present Absent
6 Medullary rays Present Absent
12.7 Internal Structure of (i) Upper epidermis: This is the outermost layer
Dicot Leaf (Dorsiventral made of single layered parenchymatous
Leaf) Ex. Mango Leaf cells without intercellular spaces. The outer
wall of the cells are cuticularized. Stomata
The transverse section of leaf shows the are less in number.
following structures.

www.tntextbooks.in
Cuticle
Upper epidermis
Palisade parenchyma
Xylem
Spongy parenchyma
Phloem
Bundle sheath
Stoma
Epidermal hair
Lower epidermis
Figure 12.6 Transverse section of Dicot leaf
(ii) Lower epidermis: It is a single layer of parenchymatous cells called bundle

parenchymatous cells with a thin cuticle. It sheath. Each vascular bundle consists
contains numerous stomata. Chloroplasts of xylem lying towards the upper
are present only in guard cells. The lower epidermis and phloem towards the
epidermis helps in the exchange of gases. lower epidermis.
The loss of water vapour is facilitated
through this chamber. 12.8 Internal Structure
(iii) Mesophyll: The tissue present between of Monocot Leaf
the upper and lower epidermis is called (Isobilateral Leaf)
mesophyll. It is differentiated into Palisade Ex.Grass Leaf
parenchyma and Spongy parenchyma.
The transverse section of a monocot leaf
a) Palisade parenchyma: It is found just reveals the following structures.
below the upper epidermis. The cells
(i) Epidermis: Monocot leaf has upper and
are elongated. These cells have more
lower epidermis. Epidermis is made up
number of chloroplasts. The cells do
of parenchyma cells. Cuticle is present on
not have intercellular spaces and they
the outer wall stomata are present on both
take part in photosynthesis.
upper and lower epidermis. Some cells of
b) Spongy parenchyma: It is found upper epidermis are large and thin walled
below the palisade parenchyma they are known as bulliform cells.
tissue. Cells are almost spherical or
(ii) Mesophyll: It is the ground tissue that is
oval and are irregularly arranged.
present between both epidermal layers.
Cells have intercellular spaces. It
Mesophyll is not differentiated into
helps in gaseous exchange.
palisade and spongy parenchyma. The cells
(iv) Vascular bundles: Vascular bundle are irregularly arranged with inter-cellular
are present in mid-rib and lateral spaces. These cells contain chloroplasts.
veins. Vascular bundles are conjoint, (iii) Vascular bundles: Large number of
collateral and closed. Each vascular vascular bundles are present, some of
bundle is surrounded by a sheath of which are small and some are large.

www.tntextbooks.in
Cuticle
Bulliform cells
Upper epidermis
Mesophyll
Bundle sheath
Xylem
Phloem
Lower epidermis
Stoma
Figure 12.7 Transverse section of Monocot Leaf
Each vascular bundle is surrounded by 12.9.2 Structure of Chloroplast

parenchymatous bundle sheath. Vascular
Chloroplasts are green plastids containing
bundles are conjoint, collateral and closed.
green pigment called chlorophyll. Chloroplasts
Xylem is present towards upper epidermis
are oval shaped organelles having a diameter
and phloem towards lower epidermis.
of 2-10 micrometer and a thickness of 1-2
Table 12.4 Differences between of Dicot and micrometer.
Monocot Leaf
Chloroplast
Stroma
DNA Thylakoid
S. No. Dicot Leaf Monocot Leaf Starch granule Inner membrane
Stroma lamella Outer membrane
1 Dorsiventral leaf Isobilateral leaf
Mesophyll is Mesophyll is not
differentiated differentiated
Figure 12.8 Ultrastructure of Chloroplast
2 into palisade into palisade
1. Envelope: Chloroplast envelope has outer
and spongy and spongy
and inner membranes which is seperated
parenchyma parenchyma
by intermembrane space.
2. Stroma: Matrix present inside to the
12.9 Plant Physiology membrane is called stroma. It contains
DNA, 70 S ribosomes and other molecules
12.9.1 Plastids required for protein synthesis.
Plastids are double membrane bound 3. Thylakoids: It consists of thylakoid
organelles found in plants and some algae. They membrane that encloses thylakoid lumen.
are responsible for preparation and storage of Photosynthetic pigments are present in
thylakoids. Thylakoids forms a stack of disc
food. There are three types of plastids.
like structures called a grana (singular-
Chloroplast - green coloured plastids granum).
Chromoplast - yellow, red, orange coloured 4. Grana: Thylakoids arranged in the form
plastids of discs stacked one above the other called
Leucoplast - colourless plastids granum. Grana are inter connected by
stroma lamella.

www.tntextbooks.in
12.9.3 Functions of Chloroplast 12.9.7 Role of Sunlight in

1. Photosynthesis 2. Storage of starch Photosynthesis
3. Synthesis of fatty acids 4. Storage of lipids The entire process of photosynthesis takes
5. Formation of chloroplasts place inside the chloroplast. The structure of
chloroplast is such that the light dependent
12.9.4 Photosynthesis (Light reaction) and light independent (Dark
Photosynthesis (Photo reaction) take place at different sites in the
= light; synthesis = to organelle
build) is a process by which
1. Light dependent Reaction (Hill reaction
autotrophic organisms like
\ Light reaction)
green plants, algae and
This was discovered by Robin Hill (1939).
chlorophyll containing
This reaction takes place in the presence of
bacteria utilize the energy from sunlight to
light energy in thylakoid membranes (grana)
synthesize their own food. In this process,
of the chloroplasts. Photosynthetic pigments
carbon dioxide combines with water in the
absorb the light energy and convert it into
presence of sunlight and chlorophyll to form
chemical energy ATP and NADPH2. These
carbohydrates. During this process oxygen is
released as a byproduct. products of light reaction move out from the
thylakoid to the stroma of the chloroplast.
Light
6CO + 12HO C6H12O6 + 6 HO + 6O↑
chlorophyll
More to Know
Carbon dioxide + Water Glucose + Water + Oxygen ATP Adenosine Triphosphate
ADP Adenosine Diphosphate
12.9.5 Where does
Nicotinamide Adenine
photosynthesis occur? NAD
Dinucleotide
Photosynthesis occurs in all green parts of Nicotinamide Adenine
the plant especially in green leaves. NADP
Dinucleotide Phosphate
12.9.6 Photosynthetic Pigments

A cell cannot get its energy
Pigments involved in photosynthesis
directly from glucose. So
are called Photosynthetic pigments.
in respiration the energy
Photosynthetic pigments are of two classes
released from glucose is used to make ATP
namely, the primary pigments and accessory
(Adenosine Triphosphate)
pigments. Chlorophyll a is the primary
pigment that traps solar energy and converts
it into electrical and chemical energy. Thus it 2. Light independent reactions (Dark reaction)
is called the reaction centre. Other pigments (Biosynthetic phase)
such as chlorophyll b and carotenoids are Dark reaction or biosynthetic pathway is
called accessory pigments as they pass on takes place in stroma. During this reaction CO2
the absorbed energy to chlorophyll a (Chl.a) is reduced into carbohydrates with the help of
molecule. Reaction centre (Primary pigments) light generated ATP and NADPH2. This is also
and harvesting centre (Accessary pigments) called as Calvin cycle and is carried out in the
together form Pigment systems. absence of light. It is called dark reaction.

www.tntextbooks.in
In Calvin cycle the inputs are CO2 from

12.10 Mitochondria
the atmosphere and the ATP and NADPH2
produced from light reaction. Mitochondria are filamentous or
granular cytoplasmic organelles present in
cells. The mitochondria were first discovered
by Kolliker in 1857 as granular structures in
striated muscles. Mitochondria (singular:
mitochondrion) are organelles within
eukaryotic cells that produce adenosine
triphosphate (ATP) which form the energy
currency of the cell, for this reason, the
mitochondria is referred to as the “Power
house of the cell”. Mitochondria vary in size
from 0.5 µm to 2.0 µm. Mitochondria contain
Figure 12.9 Overview of Hill and 60-70% protein, 25-30% lipids, 5-7% RNA and
Calvin cycle small amount of DNA and minerals.
12.10.1 Structure of Mitochondria
Melvin Calvin, an American Mitochondrial Membranes: It consists
biochemist, discovered two membranes called inner and outer
chemical pathway for membrane. Each membrane is 60-70 A˚ thick.
photosynthesis. The cycle is Outer mitochondrial membrane is smooth
named as Calvin cycle. He and freely permeable to most small molecules.
was awarded with Nobel It contains enzymes, proteins and lipids. It
has porin molecules (proteins) which form
Prize in the year 1961 for his discovery.
channels for passage of molecules through it.
12.9.8 Factors Affecting
Photosynthesis
a) Internal Factors: Oxysome
i) Pigments ii) Leaf age iii) Accumulation of

carbohydrates iv) Hormones
b) External Factors:
i) Light ii) Carbon dioxide iii) Temperature
iv) Water v) Mineral elements
Info bit
Artificial photosynthesis
is a method for producing Figure 12.10 Structure of Mitochondria
renewable energy by the use
Inner mitochondrial membrane is semi
of sunlight. Indian scientist
C.N.R. Rao who was permeable membrane and regulates the passage
conferred the Bharat Ratna of materials into and out of the mitochondria.
(2013) is also working on similar technology It is rich in enzymes and carrier proteins. It
of artificial photosynthesis to produce - consists of 80% proteins and lipids.
Hydrogen fuel (renewable energy).

www.tntextbooks.in
Cristae: The inner mitochondrial their environment and release carbon dioxide
membrane gives rise to finger like projections and water vapour. This exchange of gases is
called cristae. These cristae increase the inner known as external respiration. It is a physical
process. Biochemical process occurs within
surface area (fold in inner membrane) of the
cells where the food is oxidized to obtain
mitochondria to hold variety of enzymes.
energy, this is known as cellular respiration
Oxysomes: The inner mitochondrial
12.11.1 Aerobic respiration
membrane bear minute regularly spaced tennis
racket shaped particles known as oxysomes Aerobic respiration is the type of celluar
(F1 particle). They involve in ATP synthesis. respiration in which organic food is completely
oxidized with the help of oxygen into carbon
dioxide, water and energy. It occurs in most
F1 Head plants and animals.
C6H12O6 + 6O2 → 6CO2 + 6H2O + ATP
Stages of Aerobic respiration
Stalk
a. Glycolysis (Glucose splitting): It is
the breakdown of one molecule of glucose
F0 Base
(6 carbon) into two molecules of pyruvic acid
Figure 12.11 Structure of Oxysomes (3 carbon). Glycolysis takes place in cytoplasm
Mitochondrial matrix - It is a complex mixture of the cell. It is the first step of both aerobic and
of proteins and lipids. Matrix contains enzymes anerobic respiration.
for Krebs cycle, mitochondrial ribosomes(70 b. Krebs Cycle: This cycle occurs in
S), tRNAs and mitochondrial DNA. mitochondria matrix. At the end of glycolysis,
2 molecules of pyruvic acid enter into
12.10.2 Functions of Mitochondria
mitochondria. The oxidation of pyruvic acid into
• Mitochondria is the main organelle of cell CO2 and water takes place through this cycle. It is
respiration. They produce a large number also called Tricarboxylic Acid Cycle (TCA).
of ATP molecules. So they are called as c. Electron Transport Chain: This is
power houses of the cell or ATP factory accomplished through a system of electron
of the cell. carrier complex called electron transport
• It helps the cells to maintain normal chain (ETC) located on the inner membrane
concentration of calcium ions. of the mitochondria. NADH2 and FADH2
• It regulates the metabolic activity of the cell. molecules formed during glycolysis and Krebs
cycle are oxidised to NAD+ and FAD+ to release
12.11 TYPES OF RESPIRATION the energy via electrons. The electrons, as they
move through the system, release energy which
Respiration involves exchange of gases
is trapped by ADP to synthesize ATP. This
between the organism and the external
is called oxidative phosphorylation. In this
environment. The plants obtain oxygen from

www.tntextbooks.in
process, O2 the ultimate acceptor of electrons Points to Remember

gets reduced to water.
Tissue is a group of similar or dissimilar
12.11.2 Anaerobic respiration cells, having a common orgin and
performing similar functions.
Anaerobic respiration takes place without
oxygen. Glucose is converted into ethanol Plants are capable of synthesizing glucose
from CO2 and H2O in the presence of light,
(Ethanol fermentation by yeast) or lactic acid
by the process of photosynthesis.
(lactic acid fermentation by bacteria).
Light reaction takes place in grana of
C6H12O6 → 2CO2 + 2C2H5OH + Energy (ATP) chloroplast.
Dark reaction takes place in stroma of
12.11.3 Respiratory quotient chloroplast.
(R.Q)
Respiration involves both external and
Respiratory quotient is the ratio of volume cellular respiration.
of carbon dioxide liberated and the volume Aerobic respiration takes place in the
of oxygen consumed during respiration. It is presence of oxygen.
expressed as
Aerobic respiration occurs in three major
Volume of CO2 liberated steps like Glycolysis, Krebs cycle and
RQ =
Volume of O2 consumed Electron transport chain.
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the correct answer

5. Kreb’s cycle takes place in
1. Casparian strips are present in the
a) chloroplast
_____________ of the root.
b) mitochondrial matrix
a) cortex b) pith c) stomata
c) pericycle d) endodermis d) inner mitochondrial membrane
2. The endarch condition is the characteristic 6. Oxygen is produced at what point during
feature of photosynthesis ?
a) root b) stem a) when ATP is converted to ADP
c) leaves d) flower b) when CO2 is fixed
3. The xylem and phloem arranged side by c) when H2O is splitted
side on same radius is called _________ d) All of these
a) radial b) amphivasal II. Fill in the blanks.
c) conjoint d) None of these 1. The innermost layer of cortex in root is
4. Which is formed during anaerobic called ____________.
respiration 2. Xylem and phloem are arranged in an
a) Carbohydrate b) Ethyl alcohol alternate radii constitute a vascular bundle
b) Acetyl CoA d) Pyruvate called ____________.

www.tntextbooks.in
3. Glycolysis takes place in _______________. 6. What is respiratory quotient?

7. Why should the light dependent reaction
4. The source of O2 liberated in photosynthesis
occur before the light independent reaction?
is ________________.
8. Write the reaction for photosynthesis?
5. ______________ is ATP factory of the cells
VII. Long answer questions
III. State whether the statements are true or
1. Differentiate the following
false. Correct the false statement.
a) Monocot root and Dicot root
1. Phloem tissue is involved in the transport
of water in plant. b) Aerobic and Anaerobic respiration
2. The waxy protective covering of a plant is 2. Describe and name three stages of cellular
called as cuticle. respiration that aerobic organisms use to
3. In monocot stem cambium is present in obtain energy from glucose.
between xylem and phloem. 3. How does the light dependent reaction
4. Palisade parenchyma cells occur below differ from the light independent reaction?
upper epidermis in dicot root. What are the end product and reactants
5. Mesophyll contains chlorophyll. in each? Where does each reaction occur
6. Anaerobic respiration produces more ATP within the chloroplast?
than aerobic respiration.
VIII. Higher Order Thinking Skills(HOTS)
IV. Match the following 1. The reactions of photosynthesis make up a
1. Amphicribal - Dracaena biochemical pathway.
2. Cambium - Translocation of food A) What are the end product of light and
3. Amphivasal - Fern dark reaction of photosynthesis?
4. Xylem - Secondary growth B) Explain how the biochemical pathway
5. Phloem - Conduction of water of photosynthesis recycles many of its
V. Answer in a sentence own reactions and identify the recycled
1. What is collateral vascular bundle? reactants.
2. Where do the light dependent reaction and
2. Where does the carbon that is used in
the Calvin cycle occur in the chloroplast?
photosynthesis come from?
3. What is the common step in aerobic and
anaerobic pathway? REFERENCE BOOKS
4. Name the phenomenon by which
carbohydrates are oxidized to release ethyl 1. Bajracharya D, Experiments in Plant
alcohol. Physiology, Narosa Publishing House,
New Delhi
2. Pandey B.P. Plant Anatomy, S. Chand and
1. Give an account on vascular bundle of
Company Ltd, New Delhi
dicot stem.
3. Verma P.S. and Agarwal V.K. Cytology,
2. Write a short note on mesophyll.
S.Chand and Company Ltd, New Delhi
3. Draw and label the structure of oxysomes.
4. Name the three basic tissues system in I NT ER NET R ES O URCES
flowering plants.
5. What is photosynthesis and where in a www.science daily.com
cell does it occur? www.britannica.com

www.tntextbooks.in
Concept Map
Affecting
Factors
Chloroplast
structure
ETC
Light
dependent
Krebs reaction
cycle
Light
Respiration Photo independent
synthesis reaction
Glycolysis Living
world of
plants
Affecting
factors
Mitochondria
structure
Plant
Anatomy
Monocot
root, Dicot root,
stem, Vascular stem, leaves
leaves system
ICT CORNER PLANT ANATOMY

PHOTOSYNTHESIS – This application
enables students to play a game to adjust
sunlight rays to reach the plant.
Steps
• Access the application Photosynthesis with the help of the provided URL or QR code. Install in your
device. After opening the app, Click LEVELS to begin the game.
• A palnt sapling will be in one side, and sun rays will be at the other side. You have to drag and adjust
the mirror so that the sunlight rays will fall on the plant.
• At the top left, there is a indicator to show the timings.
• Explore and complete the other levels gradually.
Cells alive
URL : https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.Rinekso.PhotoSHinythesis

www.tntextbooks.in
STRUCTURAL ORGANISATION
13 OF ANIMALS
Learning Objectives

Understand the external morphology of the leech and rabbit.
Recognise the structural features of different organ systems.
Will be able to understand the physiology of various organ systems of leech and rabbit.
Learn the parasitic adaptations of leech.
Identify the type of dentition and its significance in rabbit.
Perceive the differences between the structural organisation of an invertebrate (leech)
and vertebrate (rabbit).
The scientific name of the Indian cattle

Introduction
leech is Hirudinaria granulosa which
The variety in nature and habits of belongs to Phylum Annelida. Annelids are
animals in the biosphere are quite amazing and metamerically segmented worms with well
interesting. What we see around us may be just developed organ systems.
few, but there are innumerable species living in The scientific name of the common rabbit
this world. You have learnt in lower classes about is Oryctolagus cuniculus. It is represents
the classification of animal kingdom. We will Phylum Chordata and Class Mammalia.
recall here that ‘Kingdom Animalia’ is divided Mammals occupy the highest group in the
into two groups, Invertebrates and Chordates. animal kingdom and show advancement over
There occurs a great diversity in the habit, the other groups of animals. They are warm
habitat, structural organisation and mode of blooded and possess covering of hair on the
reproduction between the animals existing body. Mammary gland in females is the most
on earth. In this chapter, you will understand striking feature of a mammal. Let us now
the structural morphology and anatomy of an study about the morphology of leech and
Invertebrate (Leech) and a Vertebrate (Rabbit). rabbit in detail.
187
10th_Science Unit-13.indd 187 11-01-2020 15:39:01

www.tntextbooks.in
13.1 The Indian Cattle Leech (\HV 0RXWK

(Hirudinaria granulosa)
$QWHULRU

VXFNHU
VW
Taxonomic Position QHSKULGLRSRUH
Phylum Annelida
0DOHJHQLWDO
Class Hirudinea DSHUWXUH
Order Gnathobdellida )HPDOHJHQLWDO
Genus Hirudinaria DSHUWXUH
Species granulosa
13.1.1 Habit and Habitat

6HJPHQWDO
Hirudinaria granulosa (Indian Cattle UHFHSWRU
RUJDQV
Leech) is found in India, Bangladesh, Pakistan,
Myanmar and Srilanka. It lives in freshwater 1HSKULGLRSRUHV
ponds, lakes, swamps and slow streams. They

$QXV
are ectoparasitic and feed on the blood of fishes,
3RVWHULRU
frogs, cattle and human. It is sanguivorous $ VXFNHU %
(blood sucking) in nature.
Figure 13.1 External morphology of Leech
13.1.2 External Morphology A. Dorsal View B. Ventral view
Shape and Size: The body of a leech is soft,
vermiform, elongated and segmented. It becomes Suckers: Leech has two suckers. The
ribbon shaped when extended and almost sucker located at the anterior end is called
cylindrical when contracted. Leeches may grow anterior sucker or oral sucker which is ventral
to a length of 35cm. in position occupying the first five segments.
Colouration: Dorsal surface is olive green The posterior sucker is formed by the fusion
in colour and the ventral surface is orange of the last seven segments. The anterior sucker
yellow or orange red in colour. helps in feeding, while both the suckers help in
Segmentation: Metamerism is the attachment and locomotion.
segmentation of the body. The body of leech is
External apertures
metamerically divided into 33 segments. The
(i) Mouth: It is located in the middle of
segments are arranged one behind the other.
anterior sucker.
Each segment is further superficially subdivided
into rings or annuli. A temporary clitellum is (ii) Anus: Anus is a small aperture that
formed on segments 9-11, which is meant to opens on the mid-dorsal side of 26th
produce a cocoon during the breeding season. segment.
Receptors: On the dorsal side there are (iii) Nephridiopores: Nephridia open to the
five pairs of eyes on the first five segments. exterior by 17 pairs of nephridiopores.
Each segment bears a number of sensory They lie ventrally on the last annulus of
projections called receptors. Annular each segment from 6 to 22.
receptors are located in each annulus and (iv) Male genital pore: It is a mid-ventral
segmental receptors are located on the first opening, situated between second and
annulus of each segment. third annuli of 10th segment.

www.tntextbooks.in
(i) Looping or Crawling movement

Activity 1
This type of movement is brought about by
(i) Observe the external morphology of leech the contraction and relaxation of muscles. The two
specimen in your biology laboratory. suckers serve for attachment during movement
(ii) Can you find leeches in your locality? on a substratum.
(iii)
I n which geographical areas are (ii) Swimming movement
leeches found more predominantly in
Leeches swim very actively and perform
India?
undulating movements in water.
(v) Female genital pore: It lies mid-ventrally 13.1.6 Digestive System

between second and third annuli of 11th The digestive system includes the long
segment. alimentary canal and the digestive glands.
13.1.3 Divisions of the Body Alimentary Canal

The alimentary canal of leech is a straight
The body of leech is divided into six
tube running from the mouth to the anus.
regions.
Mouth is a triradiate aperture situated in
Region Segments the middle of the anterior sucker that leads
into the small buccal cavity. The wall of the
Cephalic region 1st - 5th buccal cavity bears three jaws with single row
Pre-clitellar region 6th, 7th and 8th of minute teeth. The jaws are provided with
Clitellar region 9th, 10th and 11th papillae which bear the openings of salivary
glands. Mouth and buccal cavity occupy the
Middle region 12th - 22nd
first five segments.
Caudal region 23rd - 26th The buccal cavity leads into muscular
Posterior sucker 27th - 33rd pharynx. It is surrounded by salivary glands.
The secretion of saliva contains hirudin which
prevents the coagulation of blood. Pharynx
13.1.4 Body wall leads into crop through a short and narrow
Body wall of leech includes five layers: oesophagus.
(i) cuticle (outermost layer) (ii) epidermis Crop is the largest portion of the alimentary
which lies below the cuticle (iii) dermis canal. It is divided into a series of 10 chambers.
which lies below the epidermis formed The chambers communicate with one another
of connective tissue (iv) muscular layer through circular apertures surrounded by
formed of circular and longitudinal sphincters. A pair of lateral, backwardly
muscles (v) botryoidal tissue lies beneath directed caecae arises as blind outgrowth from
longitudinal muscles and fills the entire each chamber known as caeca or diverticula.
coelom around the gut. Crop and its diverticula can store large amount
of blood which can be slowly digested.
13.1.5 Locomotion The last chamber of crop opens into
Locomotion in leech takes place by (i) stomach. The stomach leads into intestine which
looping or crawling movement (ii) Swimming is a small straight tube that opens into rectum.
movement. The rectum opens to the exterior by anus.
189 Structural Organisation of Animals

www.tntextbooks.in
Food, Feeding and Digestion

More to Know
The leech feeds by sucking the blood of
cattle and other domestic animals. During Leeches do not have ear, hence can
feeding the leech attaches itself to its victim sense vibrations through their skin.
strongly by the posterior sucker. The leech Leeches have 2 to 10 tiny eyes, which
makes a triradiate or Y shaped incision in helps them to locate their food.
the skin of the host by the jaws protruded Leeches can suck blood five times more
through the mouth. The blood is sucked by than their body weight.
muscular pharynx and the salivary secretion
It may take more than a year for the
is poured.
complete digestion and absorption of
The ingested blood is stored in crop a full meal.
chambers and its diverticulum. The blood
passes from the crop into the stomach.
Digestion takes place in stomach by the Table 13.1 Segmentation of Leech
action of proteolytic enzyme. The digested
External and Segments in which the
blood is then absorbed slowly by the intestine. Internal features structures are present
Undigested food is stored in rectum and
egested through anus. Body segments 33
Leeches prevent blood clotting by Anterior Sucker,

1st - 5th
secreting a protein called hirudin. They also Mouth, Eyes
inject an anaesthetic substance that prevents Posterior sucker 27th - 33rd
the host from feeling their bite. Pharynx 5th - 8th
Crop 9th - 18th

-DZ Stomach 19th

Intestine 10th - 22nd
3KDU\Q[
Rectum 23rd - 26th

2HVRSKDJXV
Anus 26th

&URSFKDPEHUV Nephridiopores 6th - 22nd

Male genital
10th
aperture
&URSGLYHUWLFXOD
Female genital
11th

aperture

6WRPDFK
13.1.7 Respiratory System

,QWHVWLQH Respiration takes place through the skin in
leech. Dense network of tiny blood vessels called
5HFWXP
as capillaries containing the haemocoelic fluid

$QXV extend in between the cells of the epidermis.
The exchange of respiratory gases takes place
by diffusion. Oxygen dissolved in water diffuses
Figure 13.2 Digestive system of Leech through the skin into haemocoelic fluid, while

www.tntextbooks.in
carbon dioxide diffuses out. The skin is kept and is formed of suprapharyngeal ganglion
moist and slimy due to secretion of mucus (brain), circumpharyngeal connective and
which also prevents it from drying. subpharyngeal ganglion. The subpharyngeal
ganglion lies below the pharynx and is formed
13.1.8 Circulatory System by the fusion of four pairs of ganglia.
In leech, circulation is brought about
13.1.10 Excretory System
by haemocoelic system. There are no true
blood vessels. The blood vessels are replaced In leech, excretion takes place by
by channels called haemocoelic channels or segmentally arranged paired tubules called
canals filled with blood like fluid. The coelomic nephridia. There are 17 pairs of nephridia
fluid contains haemoglobin. which open out by nephridiopores from 6th to
There are four longitudinal channels. One 22nd segments.
channel lies above (dorsal) the alimentary canal,
13.1.11 Reproductive System
one below (ventral) the alimentary canal. The
other two channels lie on either (lateral) side Leech is hermaphrodite because both
of the alimentary canal which serve as heart the male and female reproductive organs are
and have inner valves. All the four channels present in the same animal.
are connected together posteriorly in the 26th
segment. Male Reproductive System
There are eleven pairs of testes, one pair
13.1.9 Nervous System in each segment from 12 to 22 segments. They
The central nervous system of leech consists are in the form of spherical sacs called testes
of a nerve ring and a paired ventral nerve sacs. From each testis arises a short duct called
cord. The nerve ring surrounds the pharynx vas efferens, which join with the vas deferens.
The vas deferens becomes convoluted to form
the epididymis or sperm vesicle, to store
spermatozoa.
%UDLQ
The epididymis leads to a short duct called
ejaculatory duct. The ejaculatory ducts on
both sides join to form the genital atrium.
The atrium consists of two regions, the coiled
9HQWUDOQHUYH
FRUG prostate glands and the penial sac consisting of
penis that opens through the male genital pore.
Female Reproductive System
*DQJOLRQ
It consists of ovaries, oviducts and vagina.
There is a single pair of ovary in the 11th
segment on the ventral side. Each ovary is a
coiled ribbon-shaped structure.
The ova are budded off from the ovary. From
each ovary runs a short oviduct. The oviducts of
the two sides joins together, to form a common
oviduct. The common oviduct opens into a
pear-shaped vagina which lies mid-ventrally in
Figure 13.3 Nervous system of Leech the posterior part of the 11th segment.

www.tntextbooks.in
Development 13.1.12 Parasitic Adaptations

(i) Internal fertilization takes place. This is of Leech
followed by cocoon formation. Cocoon is Leeches lead a parasitic
also known as egg case which is formed mode of life by sucking the
around the 9th, 10th and 11th segments. blood of vertebrates and
(ii) Development is direct and proceeds show several important
in cocoon which contain one to adaptations in their structure.
24 embryos. 1. Blood is sucked by pharynx.
(iii) Young leech resembling the adult 2. Anterior and posterior ends of the body are
emerges. provided with suckers by which the animal
attaches itself to the body of the host.
Eyes
3. The three jaws inside the mouth, causes a
painless Y-shaped wound in the skin of the
host.
1st 4. The salivary glands produce hirudin which
nephridum
does not allow the blood to coagulate. Thus, a
Atrium continuous supply of the blood is maintained.
Epididymis 5. Parapodia and setae are completely
Ovary absent
Testis sac 6. Blood is stored in the crop. It gives
Vagina nourishment to the leech for several months.
Due to this reason there is no elaborate
Vas deferens secretion of the digestive juices and enzymes.
Blood letting is a technique of

bleeding in a patient to remove
toxic impurities from the body.
17th
nephridum
13.2 Rabbit
Anus
(Oryctolagus cuniculus)
Posterior sucker
Taxonomic Position
Figure 13.4 Reproductive system of Leech
Phylum Chordata
More to Know Sub-phylum Vertebrata
Class Mammalia
Medicinal value of Leech
Leeches are effective in increasing Order Lagomorpha
blood circulation and breaking up blood Genus Oryctolagus
clots. It is surprising that they can be used to Species cuniculus
treat cardiovascular diseases. Biochemical
substances derived from leech saliva are 13.2.1 Habit and Habitat
used for preparation of pharmaceutical Rabbits are gentle and timid animals. They
drugs that can treat hypertension. show leaping movement and live in burrows.

www.tntextbooks.in
They are distributed throughout the world. They external ear or pinnae is situated at the top of
are herbivorous animals feeding on grass and the head.
vegetables like turnips, carrots and lettuce. Rabbits Neck: The neck connects the head with the
are gregarious (moving in groups) animals trunk. It helps to turn the head.
Trunk: The trunk is divisible into an anterior
The pygmy rabbit was listed thorax and a posterior abdomen. In females,
as a threatened species in four or five teats or nipples are present on
Washington in 1990, because the ventral surface between the thorax and
of decline in its population size and abdomen.
distribution due to habitat loss. In March The trunk bears two pairs of pentadactyl
2003, the Columbia Basin Pygmy Rabbit was limbs. The forelimbs are shorter than the hind
federally listed as an endangered species. limbs. All the digits bear claws.
The anus is present at the posterior end
of the abdomen at the base of tail. In females
13.2.2 External Morphology
on the ventral side a slit like vulva is present.
Ear
In males penis is present in the ventral side of
anus. The male has a pair of testes enclosed by
scrotal sacs.
Neck
Tail: The tail is short. It is used to give signals

Eye
Trunk
to other rabbits in the event of danger.
Mouth
Integument (Skin): The integument forms
the outer covering of the body. The structures
Upper arm
Thigh
Fore arm
Tail
which are derived from it are hairs, claws,
Digits nails and glands like sweat glands, sebaceous
glands and mammary glands.
Foot
Figure 13.5 Rabbit- External features

Mammary glands are modified glands
Shape, Size and Colouration: It has an of the skin. They secrete milk and help in
elongated and cylindrical body. Males and
nourishing young ones. The sweat glands
females are of the same size. They grow about and sebaceous glands embedded in the skin
45 cm in length and weigh about 2.25 kg as regulate the body temperature.
adult. The colour varies from white to black
and white. Body is covered with fur which
serves to keep it warm. 13.2.3 Coelom (Body cavity)
Body-division: The body of the rabbit is Rabbit is a coelomate animal. The

divisible into the head, neck, trunk and tail. body is divisible into thoracic cavity and
abdominal cavity separated by transverse
Head: Head is ovoid, flattened and bears
a truncate snout. It contains mouth, external partition called diaphragm. Diaphragm is the
nares, eyes, ears and vibrissae. The mouth is a characteristic feature of mammals. Breathing
transverse slit-like bounded by upper lip and movements are brought by the movement of
lower lip. Just above the mouth are two oblique the diaphragm.
openings called nostrils. From each side of the Lungs and heart lie in the thoracic cavity,
upper lip tactile hairs or vibrissae (whiskers) whereas, abdominal cavity encloses digestive
project outwards. A pair of large, movable and urinogenital system.

www.tntextbooks.in
13.2.4 Digestive System rabbit has two sets of teeth. The existence of
two sets of teeth in the life of an animal is called
The digestive system includes the
diphyodont dentition. The two types of teeth
alimentary canal and the associated digestive
are milk teeth (young ones) and permanent
glands. The alimentary canal consists of mouth,
teeth (in adults).
buccal cavity, pharynx, oesophagus, stomach,
small intestine, caecum, large intestine and anus. In rabbit the teeth are of different types.
Mouth is a transverse slit bounded by Hence, the dentition is called heterodont. There
upper and lower lips. It leads into the buccal are four kinds of teeth in mammals viz. the
cavity. The floor of the buccal cavity is occupied incisors (I), canines (C), premolars (PM) and
by a muscular tongue. Jaws bear teeth. molars (M). This is expressed in the form of a
dental formula.
The buccal cavity leads into the oesophagus
through the pharynx. Oesophagus opens
into the stomach followed by small intestine.
Caecum is a thin walled sac present at the
junction of small intestine and large intestine.
Upper Jaw
It contains bacteria that helps in digestion of Diastema
cellulose. The small intestine opens into the Premolars Molars

large intestine which has colon and rectum. Incisors
The rectum finally opens outside by the anus. a

tem
Dias
Lower Jaw
Digestive glands
The digestive glands are salivary glands,
Figure 13.7 Dentition of Rabbit
gastric glands, liver, pancreas and intestinal
(Arrangement of teeth in jaws)
glands. The secretions of digestive glands help
in digestion of food in the alimentary canal. Dental formula is the simple method
of representing the teeth of a mammal. The
Dentition in Rabbit
number of each kind of tooth in the upper and
Teeth are hard bone-like structures used the lower jaws on one side is counted.
to cut, tear and grind the food materials. The 2 0 3 3
Dental formula is (I , C , PM. , M .)
1 0 2 3
Liver
2033
in rabbit which is written as . Canines
1023
Gall bladder
Oesophagus are absent. The gap between the incisors

and premolar is called diastema. It helps in
Stomach mastication and chewing of food in herbivorous
animals.
Pancreas
13.2.5 Respiratory System

Small interstine
Respiration takes place by a pair of lungs,
Caecum
which are light spongy tissues enclosed in the
Colon
thoracic cavity. The thoracic cavity is bound
Rectum dorsally by the vertebral column and ventrally
by the sternum, laterally by the ribs. On the
lower side of the thoracic cavity is the dome
Anus
Figure 13.6 Digestive System of Rabbit shaped diaphragm.


www.tntextbooks.in
6\VWHPLFDUFK
Larynx 3UHFDYDOVYHLQV
Trachea 5LJKWDXULFOH
SXOPRQDU\DUWHU\
Bronchi
Right anterior /HIWDXULFOH
lobe
3RVWDFYDOYHLQV
Left anterior lobe
Lobules 5LJKWYHQWULFOH
/HIWYHQWULFOH
/HIWYH
Left posterior lobe 'RUVDODRUWD

Right posterior
lobe
Fig. 13.9 Heart of Rabbit - Ventral View

Fig. 13.8 Lungs of Rabbit
Each lung is enclosed by a double The heart is four chambered with two
membranous pleura. Atmospheric air passes auricles and two ventricles. The right and
through the external nostril and nasal passages left auricles are separated by interauricular
septum, similarly right and left ventricles are
into the pharynx. From the pharynx it passes
separated by interventricular septum.
through the glottis into the wind pipe.
The right auricle opens into the right
The anterior part of the wind pipe is
ventricle by right auriculoventricular
enlarged to form the larynx or voice box with
aperture, guarded by a tricuspid valve. The
its wall supported by four cartilaginous plates.
left auricle opens into the left ventricle by left
Inside the larynx lies the vocal cord and its
auriculoventricular aperture guarded by a
vibrations result in the production of sound.
bicuspid valve or mitral valve. The opening of
The larynx leads into trachea or wind pipe. the pulmonary artery and aorta are guarded by
Tracheal walls are supported by rings of three semilunar valves.
cartilage which help in the free passage of air. The right auricle receives deoxygenated
The epiglottis prevents the entry of food into blood through two precaval (superior vena cava)
the trachea through the glottis. The trachea and one postcaval (inferior vena cava) veins
divides into two branches called the bronchi from all parts of the body. The left auricle receives
one entering into each lung and dividing into oxygenated blood from the pulmonary veins
further branches called bronchioles which from the lungs. From the right ventricle arises
end in alveoli. pulmonary trunk which carries the deoxygenated
The respiratory events consist of blood to the lungs and from the left ventricle
inspiration (breathing in) and expiration arises the systemic arch (aorta) which supplies
(breathing out) allowing exchange of gases oxygenated blood to all parts of the body.
(oxygen and carbon dioxide). Inspiration is
13.2.7 Nervous System
an active process while expiration is a passive
process. The nervous system in rabbit is formed of
the central nervous system (CNS), peripheral
13.2.6 Circulatory System nervous system (PNS) and autonomic nervous
The circulatory system is formed of blood, system (ANS).
blood vessels and heart. The heart is pear shaped CNS consists of brain and spinal cord. PNS
and lies in the thoracic cavity in between the is formed of 12 pairs of cranial nerves and 37 pairs
lungs. It is enclosed by pericardium, a double of spinal nerves. ANS comprises sympathetic
layered membrane. and parasympathetic nerves.

www.tntextbooks.in
Brain is situated in the cranial cavity are dark red, bean shaped organs situated in
and covered by three membranes called an the abdominal cavity. From each kidney arises
outer duramater, an inner piamater and a the ureters which open posteriorly into the
middle arachnoid membrane. The brain is urinary bladder and leads into a thick walled
divided into forebrain (prosencephalon), muscular duct called urethra.
midbrain (mesencephalon) and hindbrain
(rhombencephalon). Reproductive System
Forebrain consists of a pair of olfactory lobes, Sexual dimorphism is exhibited in rabbits.
cerebral hemispheres and diencephalon. The The male and female sexes are separate and
right and left cerebral hemispheres are connected are morphologically different.
by transverse band of nerve tissue called corpus
callosum. Male Reproductive system
The male reproductive system of rabbit
2OIDFWRU\OREH
consists of a pair of testes which are ovoid in
shape. Testes are enclosed by scrotal sacs in
the abdominal cavity. Each testis consists of
&HUHEUDOKHPLVSKHUH
numerous fine tubules called seminiferous
tubules. This network of tubules lead into a
coiled tubule called epididymis, which lead
into the sperm duct called vas deferens. The
vas deferens join in the urethra just below the
urinary bladder. The urethra runs backward
'LHQFHSKDORP
2SWLFOREHV and passes into the penis.
&HUHEHOOXP
There are three accessory glands namely
prostate gland, cowper’s gland and perineal
0HGXOOD2EORQJDWD gland. Their secretions are involved in
Fig. 13.10 Brain of Rabbit (Dorsal view) reproduction.
The midbrain includes the optic lobes. 5LJKWNLGQH\ /HIWNLGQH\
The hindbrain consists of the cerebellum, pons

varolii and medulla oblongata. You will study 8UHWHU
about the details of mammalian brain in the 8ULQDU\EODGGHU

9DVGHIHUHQV
chapter on nervous system. 3URVWDWHJODQGV
(SLGLG\PLV
13.2.8 Urinogenital System &RZSHU¶VJODQGV

7HVWLV
It comprises the urinary or excretory 3HULQHDOJODQGV 6FURWDOVDF
system and the genital or reproductive system.

Therefore, they are usually described as 8UHWKUD
urinogenital system in vertebrates.

Fig. 13.11 Male reproductive system of Rabbit
Excretory system
Each kidney is made of several nephrons. Female reproductive system
It separates the nitrogenous wastes from blood The female reproductive system of rabbit
and excretes it in the form of urea. Kidneys consists of a pair of ovaries which are small

www.tntextbooks.in
ovoid structures. They are located behind the

kidneys in the abdominal cavity. Ovary
A pair of oviducts opens into the body

Kidney
Fallopian tube
cavity by a funnel shaped opening from each
side of the ovary. The anterior part of the Uterus Ureter
oviduct is the fallopian tube. It leads into a Urinary bladder
wider tube called the uterus. The uterus join Vagina
together to form a median tube called vagina.

The common tube is formed by the union of Perineal gland
urinary bladder and the vagina and is called Urethra
the urinogenital canal or vestibule. It runs
backwards and opens to the exterior by a slit- Fig. 13.12 Female reproductive system
like aperture called vulva. of Rabbit
A pair of Cowper’s gland and perineal
gland are the accessory glands present in the Rabbits are warm blooded vertebrates.
female reproductive system. Canine teeth are absent in rabbit.
Respiration takes place through a pair of
Points to Remember lungs in rabbit.
Leech is metamerically segmented and has The heart is four chambered consisting of
33 segments. two auricles and two ventricles.
It has two suckers which are used to Urinogenital system comprises the
attach to the body of the host. It is also urinary (or) excretory system and the
involved in locomotion. genital (or) reproductive system.
The salivary glands of leech produce
Mammary glands are modified glands of
an anticoagulating substance called
the skin and help in nourishing the young
hirudin. ones.
Leech is a hermaphrodite.
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION

1. In leech locomotion is performed by c) Reproductive system d) Respiratory system
a) Anterior sucker 4. The brain of leech lies above the
b) Parapodia a) Mouth b) Buccal Cavity
c) Setae c) Pharynx d) Crop
d) Contraction and relaxation of muscles
5. The body of leech has
2. The segments of leech are known as
a) 23 segments b) 33 segments
a) Metameres (somites) b) Proglottids c) 38 segments d) 30 segments
c) Strobila d) All the above 6. Mammals are ______________ animals.
3. Pharyngeal ganglion in leech is a part of a) Cold blooded b) Warm blooded
a) Excretory system b) Nervous system c) Poikilothermic d) All the above

www.tntextbooks.in
7. The animals which give birth to young ones are V. Answer in a sentence
a) Oviparous b) Viviparous 1. Give the common name of the Hirudinaria
c) Ovoviviparous d) All the above granulosa.
II. Fill in the blanks 2. How does leech respire?
1.
The posterior sucker is formed by the 3. Write the dental formula of rabbit.
fusion of the ___________ segments. How many pairs of testes are present in leech?
4.
2. The existence of two sets of teeth in the life 5. How is diastema formed in rabbit?
of an animal is called ______ dentition. 6. What organs are attached to the two bronchi?
3. The anterior end of leech has a lobe-like 7. Which organ acts as suction pump in leech?
structure called _____________. 8. What does CNS stand for?
4. The blood sucking habit of leech is known 9. Why is the teeth of rabbit called heterodont?
as _________. 10. How does leech suck blood from the host?
5. ___________ separate nitrogenous waste
from the blood in rabbit.
1. Why are the rings of cartilages found in
7. _____________ spinal nerves are present
trachea of rabbit?
in rabbit.
2. List out the parasitic adaptations in leech.
III. I dentify whether the statements are True
or False. Correct the false statement VII. Long answer questions
1. An anticoagulant present in saliva of leech
1. How is the circulatory system designed in
is called heparin.
leech to compensate the heart structure ?
2.
The vas deferens serves to transport the
2. How does locomotion take place in leech?
ovum.
3. Explain the male reproductive system of
3. Diastema is a gap between premolar and
rabbit with a labelled diagram.
molar teeth in rabbit.
4.
The cerebral hemispheres of rabbit are VIII. Higher Order Thinking Skills (HOTS)
connected by band of nerve tissue called
1. Arjun is studying in tenth standard. He
corpora quadrigemina.
was down with fever and went to meet the
IV.
Match columns I, II and III correctly doctor. As he went to the clinic he saw a
patient undergoing treatment for severe
Membranous leech bite. Being curious, Arjun asked the
Organs Location
Covering doctor why leech bite was not felt as soon
Brain pleura abdominal as it attaches to the skin ? What would have
cavity
been the reply given by the doctor?
Kidney capsule mediastinum
Heart meninges enclosed in 2. Shylesh has some pet animals at his home.
thoracic cavity He has few rabbits too, one day while
Lungs pericardium cranial cavity feeding them he observed something
different with the teeth. He asked his
grandfather, why is it so? What would have
been the explanation of his grandfather?

www.tntextbooks.in
IX. Value based questions 3. Kotpal R.L, 2012 Modern Text Book of
1. Leeches do not have an elaborate secretion Zoology -Vertebrates, Rastogi Publications,
of digestive juices and enzymes -Why ? Meerut
4. Jordan E.L. and Verma P.S. 2003 Chordate
2. How is the digestive system of rabbit suited Zoology, S. Chand and Company Ltd,
for herbivorous mode of feeding? New Delhi.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Kotpal R.L, 2014 Modern Text Book of
Zoology -Invertebrates,Rastogi Publications, http://leeches-medicinalis.com/
Meerut. http://www.biologydiscussion.com/zoology
2. Ekambaranatha Ayyar M and Anantha http://animaldiversity.org/accounts/Hirudo_
krishnan T. N. 2003. Manual of Zoology, medicinalis/
Vol I, Part I & II (Invertebrates), http://w w w.notes onzo olog y.com/rabbit/
S.
Viswanathan Printers and Publishers external-morphology/external-morphology-of-
Pvt Ltd. rabbit-with-diagram-chordata-zoology/7642
Concept Map
LEECH RABBIT
Moist slimy skin Skin, Hairs,

External Morphology
External Morphology
Claws and Nails
Metameres
Head, Trunk, Tail
Annular, Segmental Receptors External Ear
Anterior, Posterior Sucker Sweat, Sebaceous and

Mammary Glands
Organ and Organ Systems
Organ and Organ Systems
Digestion Buccal cavity, Stomach,

Crop, Stomach, Intestine Intestine, Liver, Pancreas
Cutaneous (Skin) Respiration Pulmonary (Lungs)
Haemocoelomic channels Circulation Heart
Supra and Brain Fore, Mid and Hind Brain

Sub pharyngeal ganglion
Nephridia Excretion Metanephric Kidney
Hermaphrodite Sexual Dimorphism (Testis

(Testis and Ovary) Reproduction
in Male and Ovary in Female)

www.tntextbooks.in
TRANSPORTATION IN PLANTS
AND
14 CIRCULATION IN ANIMALS
Learning Objectives
At the end of this lesson the students will be able to :
Learn how the water and minerals move from soil to the plant.
Learn how prepared food by the leaf is translocated to various parts of the plant.
Understand the role of osmosis and transpiration.
Understand the composition of blood.
Identify and explain the structure of heart and associated blood vessels.
Understand systemic, pulmonary and coronary circulation.
Differentiate the events of the cardiac cycle.
Know about blood pressure and heart beat.
Understand the use of stethoscope and sphygmomanometer.
Identify the different blood groups.
Understand the role of lymphatic system.
of the plant. To understand this we need to recall

Introduction
the anatomy of the plants. Water and mineral
Multicellular organisms possess millions salts absorbed by the roots reach all parts of the
of cells in their body. Every cell needs a constant plant through the xylem. The food synthesised
supply of essential substances like nutrients and by the leaves are translocated to all parts of the
oxygen to maintain life and survival. Food is plant through the phloem. The bulk movement
the only source of energy and every cell gets of substances through the vascular tissue is called
its energy by the breakdown of glucose. The Translocation.
cells utilise this energy and govern various vital ‘Transport’ means to carry things from
activities of life. one place to another. Have you ever wondered
Have you ever wondered how water and how in animals the useful substances are
nutrients absorbed by the root are transported transported to other cells and toxic substances
to the leaves? How is the food prepared by the are removed? In larger organisms transport of
leaves carried to the other parts of the plant? nutrients, salts, oxygen, hormones and waste
Do you know how water reaches the top of tall products around the body are performed by the
plants inspite of not having a circulatory system ‘Circulatory system’. The circulatory system
like animals? Water absorbed by the roots have consists of the circulating fluids, the blood and
to reach entire plant and the food synthesised by lymph and the heart and blood vessels which
the leaves have to be distributed to all the parts form the collecting and transporting system.
200

www.tntextbooks.in
Diagrammac view of normal plant cell and

plasmolysed plant cell
14.1 Means of Transport

in Plants Cell wall
Protoplasm
The transport of materials in and out of Nucleus
Loss of
water
the cells is carried out by diffusion and active
Normal plant cell Plasmolysed plant cell
transport in plants.
Figure 14.2 Plasmolysis
14.1.1 Diffusion
The movement of solid liquid and gaseous Activity 1
molecules from a region of higher concentration Demonstration of Osmosis
to a region of their lower concentration without
A thistle funnel whose
the utilization of energy is called diffusion. This
mouth is covered
is a passive process.
with a semipermeable Starng
Sugar
soluon
membrane, is filled with lever

Water
sucrose solution. It is Beaker
Thistle
kept inverted in a beaker funnel
containing water. The Parchment

paper
water will diffuse across

Before diffusion After diffusion the membrane due to osmosis and raise the
Figure 14.1 Diffusion level of the solution in the funnel.
Imbibition
14.1.2 Active Transport
Imbibition is a type of diffusion in
Active transport utilizes energy to pump
which a solid plant material absorbs water
molecules against a concentration gradient.
and gets swelled up. eg. absorption of water
Active transport is carried out by membrane
by dry seeds and grapes. If it were not for
bound proteins. These proteins use energy to carry
substances across the cell membrane hence they imbibition, seedlings would not have been
are often referred to as pumps. These pumps can able to emerge out of the soil.
transport substances from a low concentration to
14.2 Root Hair-Water
a high concentration (‘uphill’ transport).
Absorbing Unit
14.1.3 Osmosis There are millions of root hairs on the tip
Osmosis is the movement of solvent of the root which absorb water and minerals by
or water molecules from the region of diffusion. Root hairs are thin walled, slender
higher concentration to the region of lower extension of epidermal cell that increase the
concentration through a semi-permeable surface area of absorption.
membrane. This process is carried out till an
equilibrium is reached. Osmosis is the passive Region of
maturaon
movement of water or any other solvent molecules.
Root hair
Plasmolysis
Region of
It occurs when a living plant cell is placed elongaon
in a hypertonic solution water molecule moves Region of

meristemac
out of the cell and resulting in the shrinkage of Root cap acvity
protoplasm away from the cell wall. Figure 14.3 Root Tip with Root Hairs
201 Transportation in Plants and Circulation in Animals

www.tntextbooks.in
Plasma membrane
14.3 Pathway of Water Cell Wall Casparian strip
Absorbed by Roots
Once the water enters the root hairs, the

Apoplast
concentration of water molecules in the root
Symplast
hair cells become more than that of the cortex.
Thus water from the root hair moves to the
cortical cells by osmosis and then reaches the
Plasmodesmata Pericycle cells
xylem. From there the water is transported to Endoderm
the stem and leaves. Figure 14.5 Symplastic and Apoplastic
Xylem pathways of Water
Root hair cell vessels
Root cortex cell
14.5 Transpiration
Transpiration is the evaporation of water

from the aerial parts of the plant especially
through stomata in leaves. Stomata are open in
Figure 14.4 T. S. of the root showing movement the day and closed at night. The opening and
of water from soil to xylem closing of the stomata is due to the change in
turgidity of the guard cells. When water enters
14.4 Types of Movement of into the guard cells, they become turgid and the
Water into the Root Cells stoma open. When the guard cells lose water, it
becomes flaccid and the stoma closes.
Once water is absorbed by the root hairs, it
can move deeper into root layers by two distinct
pathways: Plasc Water
bag droplets
• Apoplast pathway Plant
• Symplast pathway
14.4.1 Apoplast Pathway

The apoplastic movement of water occurs Figure. 14.6 Process of Transpiration
exclusively through the intercellular spaces
and the walls of the cells. Apoplastic movement Water evaporates from mesophyll cells of
does not involve crossing the cell membrane. leaves through the open stomata, this lowers
This movement is dependent on the gradient. water concentration in mesophyll cells. As a
result, more water is drawn into these cells
14.4.2 Symplast Pathway from the xylem present in the veins through
the process of osmosis. As water is lost from the
In this method, water molecules move
leaves, pressure is created at the top to pull more
to the adjacent cells, through the plasma
water from the xylem to the mesophyll cells, this
membrane, cytoplasm and plasmodesmata. process is called transpiration pull. This extends
This method of transport is slow as water up to the roots causing the roots to absorb more
moves through plasma membrane. It is in water from the soil to ensure continuous flow of
accordance to the concentration gradient. water from the roots to the leaves.

www.tntextbooks.in
14.5.1 Factors affecting soil as charged particles (ions) that cannot move
Transpiration across cell membranes and (ii) the concentration
Transpiration is affected by several external of minerals in the soil is usually lower than the
factors such as temperature, light, humidity, concentration of minerals in the root. Therefore,
and wind speed. Internal factors that affect most minerals enter the root by active absorption
transpiration include number and distribution through the cytoplasm of epidermal cells. This
of stomata, percentage of open stomata, water needs energy in the form of ATP. Then it is
status of the plant, canopy structure etc. transported to all parts by transpiration pull.
Guard cells Guard cells

(swollen) (shrunken) 14.8 Translocation of Mineral
Vacuole
Ions
Chloroplast
Cell wall Minerals are remobilised from older dying

leaves to younger leaves. This phenomenon
Stoma
Nucleus can be seen in deciduous plants. Elements like
Stoma open Stoma closed
phosphorus, sulphur, nitrogen and potassium
Figure. 14.7 Guard cell in turgid and flaccid are easily mobilised, while elements like calcium
condition are not remobilised. Small amounts of material
Significance of Transpiration exchange takes place between xylem and phloem.
• Creates transpirational pull for transport of
water 14.9 Phloem Transport
• Supplies water for photosynthesis
• Transports minerals from soil to all parts of The food synthesised by the leaves are
the plant transported by the phloem either to the area of
• Cools the surface of the leaves by requirement or stored. Phloem tissue is composed
evaporation. of sieve tubes which have sieve plates. Cytoplasmic
• Keeps the cells turgid; hence, maintains strands pass through the pores in the sieve plates.
their shape Phloem transports food (sucrose) from a
source to a sink. The source is part of the plant
that synthesize food, i.e., the leaf, and sink, is
14.6 Root Pressure
the part that needs or stores the food. But, the
As mineral ions from the soil are actively source and sink may be reversed depending on
transported into the xylem tissue of the root, the season, or the plant’s need.
water moves along and increases the pressure Since the source-sink relationship is
inside the xylem. This pressure is called root variable, the direction of movement in the
pressure and is responsible for pushing water phloem can be upwards or downwards, i.e.,
upward to some extent. bidirectional. In contrast, the movement is
always unidirectional in xylem i.e., upwards.
14.7 Uptake of Minerals

14.10 Translocation of Sugars
Plants depend on minerals from soil for its
nutritional requirements. All minerals cannot The mechanism of translocation of sugars
be passively absorbed by the roots. Two factors from source to sink is through pressure flow
account for this: (i) minerals are present in the hypothesis Glucose prepared at source (by

www.tntextbooks.in
photosynthesis) is converted to sucrose. Sucrose in the xylem because of forces of adhesion

moves into the companion cells, then into the and cohesion among the molecules.
living phloem sieve tube cells by active transport. 4. Cohesion: The force of attraction between
This process produces a hypertonic condition in molecules of water is called cohesion.
the phloem. Water in the adjacent xylem moves
5. Adhesion: The force of attraction between
into the phloem by osmosis. As osmotic pressure
molecules of different substances is called
builds up, the phloem sap moves to areas of lower
adhesion.Water molecules stick to a xylem
pressure. By active transport sucrose moves into
because of force of adhesion.
the cells where it is utilised or stored. As sugars
are removed, the osmotic pressure decreases and More to Know
water moves out of the phloem.
Dews like water droplets on the leaves of grass
seen in the early mornings, when the climate
14.11 Ascent of Sap and its is humid and excess of water is present in the
Events – An Overview plants, the excess water is exudated in the form
of liquid. This is due to root pressure .This
The upward movement of water and phenomenon is called Guttation which
minerals from roots to different plant parts is takes place through specialized cells called
called ascent of sap. A number of factors play Hydathodes.
a role in ascent of sap and it takes places in
Transpiration Pull: Transpiration through
following steps
stomata creates vacuum which creates a suction.
Ascent of sap called transpiration pull. The transpiration pull
Transpiraon creates
transpiraon pull
sucks the water column from the xylem tubes
and thus water is able to rise to great heights
even in the tallest plants.
Root pressure Adhesion cohesion makes

pushes water column of water molecules Activity 2
to stem
Osmosis pushes
Demonstration of Root Pressure
Capillary acon results in rise
water to up water at the base of stem Choose a small soft stemed plant. Cut the
root hairs
stem horizontally near the base with a
Figure 14.8 Ascent of Sap blade in the morning. You will see drops of
solution oozing out of the cut stem due to
1. Root Pressure: Water from soil enters the root pressure.
root hairs due to osmosis. Root pressure is
responsible for movement of water up to the
base of the stem. 14.12 Blood
2. Capillary Action: Water or any liquid rises Blood is the main circulatory medium
in a capillary tube because of physical forces, in the human body. It is a red coloured fluid
this phenomenon is called capillary action. connective tissue.
In the same way, in stem water rises up to
Components of Blood: The blood consists
certain height because of capillary action.
of two main components. The fluid plasma
3. Adhesion-cohesion of Water Molecules: and the formed elements (blood cells) which
Water molecules form a continuous column
are found suspended in the plasma.

www.tntextbooks.in
Plasma: It is slightly alkaline, containing

non-cellular substance which constitutes about
55% of the blood. Organic substances like
proteins, glucose, urea, enzymes, hormones,
vitamins and minerals are present in the
plasma.
Formed Elements of Blood: Blood
corpuscles are of three types
1. Red blood corpuscles (RBC) or Figure 14.9 Leucocytes
Erythrocytes
2. White blood corpuscles (WBC) or The white blood corpuscles can be
Leucocytes grouped into two categories:
3. Blood platelets or Thrombocytes. 1. Granulocytes 2. Agranulocytes.
Red blood corpuscles (Erythrocytes) Granulocytes
They are the most They contain granules in their cytoplasm.

abundant cells in the human Their nucleus is irregular or lobed. The
granulocytes are of three types
body. RBCs are formed in
the bone marrow. The RBCs (i) Neutrophils (ii) Eosinophils
Erythrocytes (iii) Basophils
impart red colour to the
blood due to presence of respiratory pigment
(i) Neutrophils
haemoglobin. Matured mammalian RBCs do
They are large in size and have a 2 - 7 lobed
not have cell organelles and nucleus. They are
nucleus. These corpuscles form 60% - 65% of the
biconcave and disc-shaped. Their life span
total leucocytes. Their numbers are increased
is about 120 days. RBC is involved in the
during infection and inflammation.
transport of oxygen from lungs to tissues.
(ii) Eosinophils
Why does mammalian RBC lack
It has a bilobed nucleus and constitute
cell organelles and nucleus?
2% - 3% of the total leucocytes. Their number
Mammalian RBC lack increases during conditions of allergy
nucleus and makes the cells biconcave and
and parasitic infections. It brings about
increase surface area for oxygen binding,
detoxification of toxins.
loss of mitochondria allows the RBC to
transport all the oxygen to tissues, and loss (iii) Basophils
of endoplasmic reticulum allows more Basophils have lobed nucleus. They form
flexibility for RBC to move through the 0.5-1.0% of the total leucocytes. They release
narrow capillaries. chemicals during the process of inflammation.
White blood corpuscles (Leucocytes) Agranulocytes

WBC's are colourless. They do not have Granules are not found in the cytoplasm of
haemoglobin and are nucleated cells. It is found these cells. The agranulocytes are of two types:
in the bone marrow, spleen, thymus and lymph
(i) Lymphocytes (ii) Monocytes
nodes. They are capable of amoeboid movement

www.tntextbooks.in
(i) Lymphocytes
14.13 Blood Vessels -
These are about 20-25% of the total leucocytes. Arteries and Veins
They produce antibodies during bacterial and
viral infections. Blood vessels are a network of branched
tubes that transport blood. There are three
(ii) Monocytes
types of blood vessels namely arteries, veins
They are the largest of the leucocytes and are and capillaries
amoeboid in shape. These cells form 5 - 6 % of
the total leucocytes.They are phagocytic and Arteries: They are thick and elastic vessels
can engulf bacteria. that carry blood away from the heart to various
organs of the body. All arteries carry oxygenated
Blood Platelets or Thrombocytes blood except the pulmonary artery which carry
These are small and deoxygenated blood to the lungs.
colourless. They do not
have nucleus. There are Veins: Veins are thin and non-elastic vessels
about 2,50,000 – 4,00,000 that transport blood to the heart from the
platelets / cubic mm different organs. All veins carry deoxygenated
of blood. Life span of Thrombocytes blood except the pulmonary vein which carry
platelets is 8–10 days. They play an important oxygenated blood from the lungs to the heart.
role in clotting of blood. Platelets form clot at the Capillaries: Capillaries are narrow tubes
site of injury and prevent blood loss.
formed by branching of arterioles which then
unite to form the venules and veins. They are
More to Know
about 8 µm in diameter. Capillaries are formed
Anaemia: Decrease in number of erythrocytes. of single layer of endothelial cells.
Leucocytosis: Increase in the number of
leukocytes. Table 14.1 Differences between Artery and Vein
Leukopenia: Decrease in number of
leukocytes. S.No Artery Vein
Thrombocytopenia: Decrease in the 1 Distributing vessel Collecting vessel
number of thrombocytes. 2 Pink in colour Red in colour
Functions of blood 3 Deep location Superficial in

location
i) Transport of respiratory gases (Oxygen
and CO2). Blood flow with Blood flow with
4
high pressure low pressure
ii) Transport of digested food materials to the
different body cells. 5 Wall of artery is Wall of vein is
iii) Transport of hormones. strong, thick and weak, thin and
iv) Transport of nitrogenous excretory elastic non-elastic
products like ammonia, urea and uric acid. 6 All arteries carry All veins carry
v) It is involved in protection of the body and oxygenated blood deoxygenated
defense against diseases. except pulmonary blood except
vi) It acts as buffer and also helps in regulation arteries pulmonary veins
of pH and body temperature. 7 Internal valves are Internal valves are
vii) It maintains proper water balance in the absent present
body.

www.tntextbooks.in
From heart To heart slightly tilted toward the left and above the
diaphragm in the thoracic cavity. The heart is
Capillaries
made of specialized type of muscle called the
Artery Vein cardiac muscle.
The heart is enclosed in a double walled
sac called pericardium. It contains lubricating
pericardial fluid which reduces friction during
heart beat and protects it from mechanical injuries.
Arteriole Venule
Figure 14.10 Structure of blood vessel Superior

Aorta
vena cava
Pulmonary artery
Pulmonary vein
14.14 Types of Circulatory
Left atrium
System Right atrium Mitral valve
Pulmonary Aortic valve
Animals possess two types of circulatory valve Left ventricle
system. They are Tricuspid valve
1. Open type Right ventricle
2. Closed type Figure 14.11 External structure of human heart

Open type
The human heart is four chambered. The
In open type the blood is pumped by heart
two upper thin walled chambers of the heart
into blood vessels that open into blood spaces
are called auricle or atria (sing: atrium) and
called as sinuses. These sinuses are the body
two lower thick walled chambers are called
cavities which are called haemocoel. Capillary
ventricles. The chambers are separated by
system is absent. e.g. Arthropods, Molluscs
partition called septum. The septum between
and Ascidians.
auricles and ventricles prevents the mixing of
Closed type oxygenated and deoxygenated blood.
In closed type the blood flows in a complete The two auricles are separated from each
circuit around the body through specific blood other by interatrial septum.The left atrium is
vessels. The blood flows from arteries to veins smaller than the right atrium. The right atrium
through small blood vessels called capillaries. receives deoxygenated blood from different parts
e.g Vertebrates. of the body through the main veins superior
vena cava, inferior vena cava and coronary
More to Know
sinus. Pulmonary veins bring oxygenated
Closed circulatory system was discovered by blood to the left atrium from the lungs. The right
William Harvey (1628) who is regarded the and left auricles pump blood into the right and
Father of Modern Physiology. left ventricles respectively.
The ventricles form the lower part of the
14.15 Structure of Human Heart heart. The two ventricles are separated from
each other by an interventricular septum. The
Heart is a muscular pumping organ that left and right ventricles have thick walls because
pumps out the blood into the blood vessels. the ventricles have to pump out blood with force
Human heart is situated between the lungs, away from the heart. From the right ventricle

www.tntextbooks.in
arises the pulmonary trunk which bifurcates to Semilunar valves: The major arteries
form right and left pulmonary arteries. The right (pulmonary artery and aorta) which leave the
and left pulmonary arteries supply deoxygenated heart have semilunar valves which prevent
blood to the lungs of the respective side. The left backward flow of blood into the ventricles. They
ventricle is longer and narrower than the right are the pulmonary and aortic semilunar valves.
ventricle. The walls are about three times thicker
than the right ventricle. The left ventricle gives 14.15.1 Types of Blood Circulation
rise to aorta. The oxygenated blood is supplied The blood circulates
by the aorta to various organs of the body. The in our body as oxygenated
coronary arteries supply blood to the heart. and deoxygenated blood.
The types of circulation are:
Superior vena cava Aorta
i Systemic circulation:
Pulmonary trunk
Circulation of
Right atrium Left atrium oxygenated blood from the left ventricle of
Pulmonary vein the heart to various organs of the body and
Aortic valve
Pulmonary valve return of deoxygenated blood to the right
Tricuspid valve Bicuspid valve atrium. Aorta carries oxygenated blood to
Right ventricle Left ventricle all the organs of the body.
ii Pulmonary circulation: The path of
Inferior vena cava Cardiac muscle
pulmonary circulation starts in the right
Figure. 14.12 Internal structure of human heart ventricle. Pulmonary artery arises from
the right ventricle and reaches the lungs
Valves: The valves are the muscular flaps with deoxygenated blood. Pulmonary
that regulate the flow of blood in a single veins collect the oxygenated blood from
direction and prevent back flow of blood. The the lungs and supplies it to the left atrium
heart contains three types of valves. of the heart.
Right atrioventricular valve: It is located iii Coronary circulation: The supply of
between the right auricle and right ventricle. blood to the heart muscles (cardiac
It has three thin triangular leaf like flaps and muscles) is called as coronary
therefore called tricuspid valve. The apices of the circulation. Cardiac muscles receive
flaps are held in position by chordae tendinae oxygenated blood from coronary
arising from the muscular projection of the arteries that originate from the aortic
ventricle wall known as papillary muscles. arch. Deoxygenated blood from the
Left atrioventricular valve: It is located cardiac muscles drains into the right
between the left auricle and left ventricle. It atrium by the coronary sinuses.
has two cusps and therefore called bicuspid or
When the blood circulates twice through
mitral valve.
the heart in one complete cycle it is called
double circulation. In double circulation
More to Know
the oxygenated blood do not mix with the
Heart chambers in vertebrate animals deoxygenated blood.
Two chambered: Fishes However, in some animals the oxygenated
Three chambered: Amphibians and deoxygenated blood are mixed and pass
Incomplete four chambered: Reptiles through the heart only once. This type of
Four chambered: Aves, Mammals and circulation is called single circulation. e.g.,
Crocodiles (Reptile)
fishes, amphibians and certain reptiles.

www.tntextbooks.in
Figure 14.13 Systemic and

Pulmonary circulation
14.15.2 Heart Beat Sino-atrial node acts as the ‘pacemaker’ of

the heart because it is capable of initiating
One complete contraction (systole)
impulse which can stimulate the heart muscles
and relaxation (diastole) of the atrium and
to contract. The impulse from the sinoatrial
ventricles of the heart constitute heartbeat. The
node spreads as a wave of contraction over the
heart normally beats 72 – 75 times per minute.
right and left atrial wall pushing the blood
More to Know through the atrioventricular valves into the
ventricles. The wave of contraction from SA
Neurogenic and Myogenic Heart Beat
node reaches the atrioventricular (AV) node
Neurogenic heart beat is initiated by a
which is stimulated to emit an impulse of
nerve impulse caused from a nerve ganglion
contraction spreading to the ventricular muscle
situated near the heart. e.g. Annelids, most
via the atrioventricular bundle and the
arthropods
Purkinje fibres.
Myogenic heart beat is initiated by a
specialized group of modified heart muscle
Atrioventricular bundle
fibres. e.g. Mollusca and Vertebrates
was discovered by His (1893).
Initiation and conduction of Heart beat So is called Bundle of His.
The human heart is myogenic in nature.
Pulse: When the heart beats the blood is
Contraction is initiated by a specialized portion
forced into the arteries. The expansion of the
of the heart muscle, the sino-atrial (SA) node
artery every time the blood is forced into it is
which is situated in the wall of the right atrium
called pulse. It can be felt by placing the fingertip
near the opening of the superior vena cava.
on the artery near the wrist. Normal pulse rate
The SA node is broader at the top and tapering
ranges from 70 – 90 / min.
below. It is made up of thin fibres.

www.tntextbooks.in
14.15.4 Heart Sound

Activity 3
The rhythmic closure and opening of the
Determining Heart Rate valves cause the sound of the heart.
Materials : The first sound LUBB is of longer duration
Stop watch or Stop clock. and is produced by the closure of the tricuspid
Procedure: and bicuspid valves after the beginning of
1. Have your partner to find the pulse in ventricular systole. The second sound DUPP is of
your wrist and count your heartbeats for a shorter duration and produced by the closure of
15 seconds while you are seated. Calculate semilunar valves at the end of ventricular systole.
your resting heart rate in beats per minute.
2. Have your partner to count your heart
beats for 15 seconds after you jog or run 14.16 Blood pressure
for 5 minutes. Calculate your heart rate in
beats per minute. Blood pressure is the force exerted during
the flow of blood against the lateral walls of
Analyse: arteries. The blood pressure is high in the
• What causes your pulse ? arteries gradually drops in the arterioles and
• What causes the change in your heart beat capillaries and become very low in the veins.
rate in each situation ?
Blood pressure is usually expressed in terms
of the systolic pressure and diastolic pressure.
14.15.3 Cardiac Cycle Systolic pressure: During ventricular
The sequence of events occurring from systole, the left ventricle contracts and forces
the beginning to the completion of one heart blood into the aorta. The pressure rises to a peak
beat is called cardiac cycle. During cardiac cycle which is referred as systolic pressure.
blood flows through the chambers of the heart Diastolic pressure: During diastole, the
in a specific direction. Each cardiac cycle lasts ventricles relax and the pressure falls to the
about 0.8 second. The events during a single lowest value which is referred as diastolic
cardiac cycle involves pressure.
(a) Atrial systole: Contraction of auricles In an healthy adult during normal resting
(0.1 sec) condition systolic and diastolic blood pressure
(b) Ventricular systole: Contraction of is expressed as 120mm / 80mm Hg. Blood
ventricles (0.3 sec) pressure varies during conditions of physical
(c) Ventricular diastole: Relaxation of exercise, anxiety, emotions, stress and sleep.
ventricles (0.4 sec) A prolonged or constant elevation of
blood pressure is a condition known as
hypertension (High blood pressure) can
Atrial
systole increase the risk of heart attack and stroke.
(0.1 sec)
Decrease in blood pressure is termed
Ventricular hypotension (Low blood pressure).
systole
Ventricular
(0.3 sec)
diastole (0.4 sec)
Stethoscope
A stethoscope is used to detect the sound
produced by the internal organs of human
body. The heart sound is heard by placing the

www.tntextbooks.in
stethoscope on the chest. It is a useful diagnostic Human blood contains certain specific
tool to identify and localize health problems substances called agglutinogens or antigens
and diagnose disease. The modern electronic (Ag) and agglutinins or antibodies (Ab).
stethoscopes are high precisioned instruments. Antigens are found on the membrane surface of
RBC. Antibodies are present in blood plasma.
Based on the presence or absence of antigen
and antibodies human blood group is classified
into four groups called A, B, AB and O. An
individual has one of the four blood groups.
(i) ‘A’ group individuals: Antigen A is present

on the surface of RBC and antibody b
(anti-b) is present in the plasma.
(ii) ‘B’ group individuals: Antigen B is present
on the surface of RBC and antibody a
Figure 14.14 Stethoscope (anti - a) is present in the plasma.
(iii) ‘AB’ group individuals: Antigens A and B
Sphygmomanometer
are present on the surface of RBC and both
Sphygmomanometer is a clinical instrument the antibodies are absent in the plasma.
used to measure blood pressure when a person is (iv) ‘O’ group individuals: Antigen A or B are
in a relaxed and resting condition. The pressure absent on the surface of RBC. However,
of the brachial artery is measured. It helps to the plasma contains both the antibodies a
estimate the state of blood circulation and and b (anti a and b).
the working of the heart. It helps to diagnose
conditions such as increased or decreased blood Blood donation
pressure. Monometric and modern digital types In blood transfusion one must consider the
are the apparatus used to measure blood pressure. antigen and antibody compatibility (matching)
between the donor and the person receiving
blood (recipient). When an individual receives
a mismatched blood group from the donor
agglutination (clumping) of blood occurs in
the body which leads to death.
Persons with ‘AB’ blood group are called
‘Universal Recipient’ as they can receive
blood from persons with any blood group.
(A) (B)
Persons with ‘O’ blood group are called
Figure 14.15 Monometric (A) and Digital (B)
‘Universal Donor’ as they can donate blood
type blood pressure apparatus to persons with any blood group.
14.17 Blood Groups Rh factor

The concept of blood grouping was Rh factor was discovered by Landsteiner
developed by Karl Landsteiner (1900). He and Wiener in 1940 in Rhesus monkey. The
identified blood groups A, B and O. AB blood surface of RBC contains the antigen for Rh
group was recognized by Decastello and Steini factor. Rh+ ( positive) persons have Rh antigen
(1902). on the surface of RBC while, Rh– (negative)

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 14.2 Distribution of Antigen (RBC) and Antibody (Plasma) in different Blood Groups
Blood
Antigens on RBC Antibodies in Plasma Can donate to Can receive from
Group
A Antigen A anti- b A and AB A and O
B Antigen B anti- a B and AB B and O
A, B, AB and O
AB Antigen A and B No antibody AB
(Universal Recipient)
A, B, AB and O
O No Antigen Both anti a and b O
(Universal Donor)
persons do not have Rh antigen on the surface but is colourless and contains less proteins.The
of RBC. Antibodies developed against this Rh lymph contains very small amount of nutrients,
antigen is called Rh antibodies. oxygen, CO2, water and WBC.
Functions of Lymph
14.18 Lymphatic System
•• Supplies nutrients and oxygen to those
The lymphatic system comprises of parts where blood cannot reach
lymphatic capillaries, lymphatic vessels, lymph •• It drains away excess tissue fluid and
nodes and lymphatic ducts. Lymph is the fluid metabolites and returns proteins to the
that flows through the lymphatic system. blood from tissue spaces.
The lymphatic capillaries unite to form •• The lymph also carries absorbed fats from
large lymphatic vessels. Lymph nodes are small intestine to the blood. The lymphatic
small oval or pear shaped structures located capillaries of intestinal villi (lacteals)
along the length of lymphatic vessels. absorb digested fats.
•• Lymphocytes in the lymph defend the body
Lymph node
from infections.
Lymph
Lymphatic node Points to Remember
duct
Thoracic The movement of molecules from a region
duct
of higher concentration to a region of
their lower concentration without the
utilization of energy is called diffusion.
Osmosis is the movement of solvent or
water molecules from the region of higher
concentration to the region of lower
Figure 14.16 Lymphatic System in Man concentration through a semi-permeable
membrane.
Lymph
Transpiration is the evaporation of
Lymph from the intercellular spaces water in plants through stomata in the
drains into lymphatic capillaries. Lymph is a leaves.
colourless fluid formed when plasma, proteins
and blood cells escape into intercellular spaces The circulatory system consists of the
in the tissues through the pores present in the circulating fluids, the blood and lymph
walls of capillaries. It is similar to blood plasma, and the heart and its blood vessels.

www.tntextbooks.in
The blood consists of two main The sequence of events which occur
components. The fluid plasma and the during the beginning and completion of
formed elements (blood cells) which are one heart beat is called cardiac cycle.
found suspended in the plasma. Blood pressure is usually expressed as
A muscular pumping organ that pumps systolic pressure and diastolic pressure
out the blood into the blood vessels is (120mm / 80 mm Hg)
called heart. An individual has one of the four blood
The blood circulates in our body as groups A, B, AB and O.
oxygenated and deoxygenated blood. Rh factor was discovered by Landsteiner
The supply of blood to the heart muscles and Wiener in 1940.
(cardiac muscles) is called as coronary Lymph is a colourless fluid formed when
circulation. plasma, proteins and blood cells escape
One complete contraction (systole) into intercellular spaces in the tissues
and relaxation (diastole) of atrium and through the pores present in the walls of
ventricles of heart is called a heartbeat. capillaries.
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the correct answer 5. Which of the following process requires
1. Active transport involves energy?
a) movement of molecules from lower to a) active transport b) diffusion

higher concentration c) osmosis d) all of them
b) expenditure of energy 6. The wall of human heart is made of
c) it is an uphill task a) Endocardium b) Epicardium
d) all of the above
c) Myocardium d) All of the above
2. Water which is absorbed by roots is
7. Which is the correct sequence of blood flow
transported to aerial parts of the plant
through a) ventricle atrium vein arteries
a) cortex b) epidermis b) atrium ventricle veins arteries
c) phloem d) xylem c) atrium ventricle arteries vein
d) ventricles vein atrium arteries
3. During transpiration there is loss of
a) carbon dioxide b) oxygen 8. A patient with blood group O was injured
in an accident and has blood loss. Which
c) water d) none of the above
group of blood should be used by doctor
4. Root hairs are for transfusion?
a) cortical cell b) projection of a) O group b) AB group
epidermal cell c) A or B group d) all blood group
c) unicellular d) both b and c

www.tntextbooks.in
9. ‘Heart of heart’ is called IV. State whether True or False. If false write

a) SA node b) AV node the correct statement
c) Purkinje fibres d) Bundle of His 1. The phloem is responsible for the
translocation of food.
10. Which one of the following shows correct
2. Plants lose water by the process of
composition of blood
transpiration.
a) Plasma - Blood + Lymphocyte 3. The form of sugar transported through the
b) Serum - Blood + Fibrinogen phloem is glucose.
c) Lymph - Plasma + RBC + WBC 4. In apoplastic movement the water travels
d) Blood - Plasma + RBC+ WBC +Platelets through the cell membrane and enter the cell.
5. When guard cells lose water the stoma
opens.
1. __________ involves evaporative loss of
6. Initiation and stimulation of heart beat
water from aerial parts.
take place by nerves.
2. Water enters into the root hair cell through 7. All veins carry deoxygenated blood.
__________ membrane. 8. WBC defend the body from bacterial and
viral infections.
3. Part of the root that absorbs water from the
soil is __________. 9. The closure of the mitral and tricuspid
valves at the start of the ventricular systole
4. Normal blood pressure is __________. produces the first sound ‘LUBB’.
5. The normal human heartbeat rate is about
____________ time per minute. V. Answer in a word or sentence
1. Name two layered protective covering of
human heart.
III. Match the following
2. What is the shape of RBC in human blood?
Section I
3. Why is the colour of the blood red ?
1. Symplastic pathway - Leaf 4. Which kind of cells are found in the lymph?
2. Transpiration - Plasmodesmata 5. Name the heart valve associated with the
3. Osmosis - Pressure in xylem major arteries leaving the ventricles.
4. Root Pressure - Pressure gradient 6. Mention the artery which supplies blood to
the heart muscle.
Section II
1. Leukemia - Thrombocytes
2. Platelets - Phagocyte 1. What causes the opening and closing
of guard cells of stomata during
3. Monocytes - Decrease in leucocytes
transpiration?
4. Leucopenia - Blood Cancer
2. What is cohesion?
5. AB blood group - Allergic condition
6. O blood group - Inflammation 3. Trace the pathway followed by water
molecules from the time it enters a
7. Eosinophil - Absence of antigen
plant root to the time it escapes into the
8. Neutrophils - Absence of antibody
atmosphere from a leaf.

www.tntextbooks.in
4. What would happen to the leaves of a 3.

Why are leucocytes classified as
plant that transpires more water than its granulocytes and agranulocytes? Name
absorption in the roots? each cell and mention its functions.
5. Describe the structure and working of the 4. Differentiate between systole and diastole.
human heart. Explain the conduction of heart beat.
6. Why is the circulation in man referred to as 5. Enumerate the functions of blood.
double circulation?
IX. Assertion and Reasoning
7. What are heart sounds? How are they
Direction: In each of the following questions
produced?
a statement of assertion (A) is given and a
8. What is the importance of valves in the corresponding statement of reason (R) is given
heart? just below it. Mark the correct statement as.
9. Who discovered Rh factor? Why was it a. If both A and R are true and R is correct
named so? explanation of A
10. How are arteries and veins structurally b. If both A and R are true but R is not the
different from one another? correct explanation of A
11 Why is the Sinoatrial node called the c. A is true but R is false
pacemaker of heart? d. Both A and R are false
12. Differentiate between systemic circulation
1. Assertion: RBC plays an important role in
and pulmonary circulation.
the transport of respiratory gases.
13. The complete events of cardiac cycle last Reason: RBC do not have cell organelles
for 0.8 sec. What is the timing for each and nucleus.
event?
2. Assertion: Persons with AB blood group
are called an universal recipients, because
VII. Give reasons for the following statements
they can receive blood from all groups.
1. Minerals cannot be passively absorbed by Reason: Antibodies are absent in persons
the roots. with AB blood group.
2. Guard cells are responsible for opening and
closing of stomata. X. Higher Order Thinking Skills (HOTS)
3. The movement of substances in the phloem 1. When any dry plant material is kept in
can be in any direction. water, they swell up. Name and define the
4. Minerals in the plants are not lost when the phenomenon involved in this change.
leaf falls. 2. Why are the walls of the left ventricle
5. The walls of the right ventricle are thicker thicker than the other chambers of the
than the right auricles. heart?
6. Mature RBC in mammals do not have cell 3. Doctors use stethoscope to hear the sound
organelles. of the heart. Why?
4. How does the pulmonary artery and
VIII. Long answer questions pulmonary vein differ in their function when
1. How do plants absorb water? Explain. compared to a normal artery and vein?
2. What is transpiration? Give the importance 5. Transpiration is a necessary evil in plants.

of transpiration. Explain.

www.tntextbooks.in
REFERENCE BOOKS 4. Elain N. Marieb and Katja Hoehn, 2011,

Anatomy and Physiology, 4th Edition,
1. V.K. Jain, Fundamentals of Plant
Pearson Publications.
physiology, S.Chand and Company, New
Delhi
2. D.G Maclean and Dave Hayward, Biology
Cambridge IGCSE http://www.britannica.com/science/human-
3. S.C.Rastogi., Essential of Animal circulatory-system
Physiology, 4th Edition, New Age http://biologydictionary.net/circulatory-
International Publishers system/
Concept Map
Diffusion
Active transport
Osmosis
Transport in plants
Plasmolysis
Imbibition
Root hair
Apoplast
Pathway of water
absorbed by plants
Symplast
Stomata
Transportation Transpiration
in plants
Importance of
transpiration
Root pressure
Mineral ions
Translocation
Sugar
Ascent of sap

www.tntextbooks.in
Circulatory System
Blood Lymph Blood vessels and Heart and its

types of circulation functioning
Systemic Four chambered

Arteries circulation
Blood groups structure
Plasma Blood cells
Pulmonary
Capillaries circulation Heart beat
Red Blood ABO
grouping
Corpuscles Coronary
Neutrophils circulation Cardiac cycle
Veins
Eosinophils Rh factor
Basophils White Blood Heart sound
Corpuscles
Lymphocytes Blood pressure
Monocytes
Blood
Platelets
ICT CORNER CIRCULATION IN ANIMALS
CHE-cardiovascular system- This 3D

application enables the student to know
about the structure and functions of cardio
vascular system.
Steps
• Access the application CHE – cardiovascular system with the help of URL or QR code given below.
After installing it in your device, when you open the app, you can see 4 sections as Introduction, Heart
– structure & functions, Blood circulatory system and Blood.
• In each section, description as well as supportive images will be given.
• If you click the picture, a video will be played in it. You can zoom in and zoom out the images and also
you can see its any direction by making movements.
• We can maximize as well as minimize the speed of the 3D animation to get clear details of it.
Cells alive
URL : https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.bodyxq.appbookCardio

www.tntextbooks.in
NERVOUS SYSTEM
15
Learning Objectives
At the end of the lesson the students will be able to :

Admire nervous system as the control and coordinating centre of the
body.
Learn the components of the nervous system.
Analyse the transmission of nerve impulses.
Understand the divisions of human nervous system.
Interpret the different sections of brain which handle different functions.
Know the significance of reflex action and its operative pathway.
To provide the correct response to a

Introduction
stimulus, it is necessary that all the organs
One of the characteristic features of all living work together in a proper coordinated manner.
organisms is responding to stimuli. ‘Stimulus’ This working together of various organs in
refers to the changes in the environmental a systematic, controlled and efficient way to
condition, that are detected by receptors present produce proper response to various stimuli
in the body. Relevant changes in the activities is called coordination. In animals including
of organisms to a particular stimuli are called human the coordination between the various
their reactions or responses. Living organisms cells and organs is essential for their diverse
show their response to different kinds of stimuli activities to maintain physiological balance called
like light, heat, cold, sound, smell, taste, touch, homeostasis. In this unit we shall learn about
pressure, pain or the force of gravity etc. For one of the major regulatory systems the nervous
example, withdrawal of hand when we touch system and its control over the body activities.
hot objects or closing the eyes when flashed
with bright light, in this condition heat or 15.1 Nervous System
light is the stimulus to which the body shows The nervous system is made up of
its response. Thus, on receiving a stimulus, nervous tissues. It is formed of three distinct
the body responds in a manner that is most components namely the neurons, neuroglia
appropriate for its survival and functioning. and nerve fibres.
218

www.tntextbooks.in
(i) Neuron or nerve cell: A neuron or nerve (i) Cyton: Cyton is also called cell body or
cell is the structural and functional unit of perikaryon. It has a central nucleus with
the nervous system. It is the longest cell abundant cytoplasm called neuroplasm.
of the human body with a length of over The cytoplasm has large granular body
100mm. These cells are highly specialised called Nissl’s granules and the other
to detect, receive and transmit different cell organelles like mitochondria,
kinds of stimuli. Information is conducted ribosomes, lysosomes, and endoplasmic
through neurons in the form of electrical recticulum. Neurons do not have the
impulses from one part of the body to ability to divide. Several neurofibrils are
another. present in the cytoplasm that help in
(ii) Neuroglia: Neuroglia are also called transmission of nerve impulses to and
as glial cells. They are non-exciting, from the cell body.
supporting cell of the nervous system. (ii) Dendrites: These are the numerous
They do not initiate or conduct nerve branched cytoplasmic processes that
impulses. project from the surface of the cell body.
(iii) Nerve fibres: The nerve fibres are the long They conduct nerve impulses towards the
slender processes of neurons. A number cyton. The branched projections increase
of nerve fibres are bundled up together to the surface area for receiving the signals
form nerves. from other nerve cells.
15.1.1 Structure of Neuron (iii) Axon: The axon is a single, elongated,
slender projection. The end of axon
A neuron typically consists of three basic
terminates as fine branches which
parts: Cyton, Dendrites and Axon.
terminate into knob like swellings called
synaptic knob. The plasma membrane
of axon is called axolemma, while the
cytoplasm is called axoplasm. It carries
impulses away from the cyton. The axons
Cyton may be covered by a protective sheath
called myelin sheath which is further
covered by a layer of Schwann cells called
neurilemma. Myelin sheath breaks at
intervals by depressions called Nodes of
Ranvier. The region between the nodes is
called as internode. Myelin sheath acts as
insulator and ensures rapid transmission
of nerve impulses.
Synapse: A junction between synaptic
knob of axon of one neuron and dendron
of next neuron is called synaptic
junction. Information from one neuron
can pass to another neuron through
these junctions with the release of
chemicals known as neurotransmitters
Fig. 15.1 Structure of Neuron from the synaptic knob.
219 Nervous System

www.tntextbooks.in
On the basis of functions neurons are

Activity 1
categorised as:-
Create a model of a neuron using clay (i) Sensory or afferent neurons which carry
or beads. impulses from the sense organ to the
central nervous system.
(ii) Motor or efferent neurons which carry
15.1.2 Types of Neurons
impulses from the central nervous system
The neurons may be of different types to effector organ such as the muscle fibre
based on their structure and functions. or the gland.
(iii) Association neurons conduct impulses
between sensory and motor neurons.
15.1.3 Types of Nerve Fibres

(A)
Nerve fibres are of two types based on the
presence or absence of myelin sheath.
(i) Myelinated nerve fibre: The axon is
(C)
(B) covered with myelin sheath
(ii) Non-myelinated nerve fibre: The axon is
Fig. 15.2 Unipolar (A), Bipolar (B) and
not covered by myelin sheath.
multipolar (C) neurons
Myelinated and non-myelinated nerve fibres
Structurally the neurons may be of the form the white matter and grey matter of the brain.
following types:
(i) Unipolar neurons: Only one nerve 15.2 Transmission of Nerve

process arises from the cyton which acts Impulse
as both axon and dendron.
All the information from the environment
(ii) Bipolar neurons: The cyton gives rise to are detected by the receptors located in our
two nerve processes of which one acts as sense organs such as the eyes, the nose, the
an axon while another as a dendron. skin etc. Information from the receptors is
(iii) Multipolar neurons: The cyton gives rise transmitted as electrical impulse and is
to many dendrons and an axon received by the dendritic tips of the neuron.
This impulse travels from the dendrite to
Unipolar Found in early embryos but not the cell body and then along the axon to its
Neurons in adult terminal end. On reaching the axonal end, it
causes the nerve endings to release a chemical
(neurotransmitter) which diffuses across a
Found in retina of eye and synapse and starts a similar electrical impulse
Bipolar
olfactory epithelium of nasal in the dendrites of the next neuron, then to
Neurons
chambers their cell body to be carried along the axon.
In this way, the electrical signal reaches
Multipolar Found in cerebral cortex of the brain or spinal cord. The response from
Neurons brain brain (or spinal cord) is similarly passed on to
the effector organs such as the muscle or gland
cell, that undergoes the desired response.

www.tntextbooks.in
The CNS acts as centre for information

processing and control. It consists of the brain
and the spinal cord. The PNS is made up of the
nerves which connect the brain and spinal cord
to all parts of the body. The ANS is formed of
sympathetic and parasympathetic nerves.
15.3.1 Central Nervous System

The brain and the
spinal cord being delicate
vital structures are well
protected in bony cavities of
Fig. 15.3 Nerve impulse transmission
the skull and the vertebral
The flow of nerve impulses from axonal column respectively. CNS
end of one neuron to dendrite of another is formed of two types of
neuron through a synapse is called synaptic matter such as white matter or grey matter
transmission. with respect to the presence or absence of
myelin sheath which we have discussed earlier.
Each neuron can transmit Meninges

1,000 nerve impulses per
second and make as many as
ten thousands of synaptic contacts with
other neurons.
15.2.1 Neurotransmitters
Neurotransmitters are the chemicals
which allow the transmission of nerve impulse
from the axon terminal of one neuron to the
dendron of another neuron or to an effector Fig. 15.4 Meninges of Brain
organ. The important neurotransmitter The brain is the controlling centre of
released by neurons is called Acetylcholine. all the body activities. It is covered by three
connective tissue membrane or meninges :
15.3 Human Nervous System (i) Duramater (dura: tough; mater:
membrane)is the outermost thick fibrous
The complexity of nervous system can be membrane
observed during the course of evolution. We (ii) Arachnoid membrane (arachnoid:
the human beings differ from other animals spider) is the middle, thin vascular
in our ability to think and take actions, which membrane providing web like cushion
is due to the well developed nervous system. (iii) Piamater (Pia: soft or tender) is the
Human nervous system is differentiated into innermost, thin delicate membrane richly
central nervous system (CNS), peripheral supplied with blood.
nervous system (PNS) and autonomic
Meningeal membranes protect the brain
nervous system (ANS).
from mechanical injury.
221 Nervous System

www.tntextbooks.in
Each cerebral hemisphere is divisble into

Meningitis is an inflammation
a frontal lobe, a parietal lobe, a temporal lobe
of the meninges. It can occur
and an occipital lobe. These lobes are also
when fluid surrounding the
known as cerebral lobes and are associated
meninges becomes infected. The most
with specific functions. Any damage in specific
common causes of meningitis are viral and
lobe inturn affects its function.
bacterial infections.
The cerebrum is responsible for the
thinking, intelligence, consciousness, memory,
A human brain is formed of three imagination, reasoning and willpower.
main parts: (a) forebrain (b) midbrain and
Thalamus
(c) hindbrain.
Thalamus present in cerebral medulla
is a major conducting centre for sensory and
Corpus callosum motor signalling. It acts as a relay centre.
Cerebrum
Ventricles Hypothalamus
Hypothalamus
It lies at the base of the thalamus. It
Pituitary gland Midbrain controls involuntary functions like hunger,
Pons thirst, sleep, sweating, sexual desire, anger,
Cerebellum
Medulla Brain ﬆem
fear, water balance, blood pressure etc. It acts
as a thermoregulatory (temperature control)
Fig. 15.5 L.S of Human Brain center of the body. It controls the secretion of
hormones from anterior pituitary gland and is
Forebrain: The forebrain is formed an important link between nervous system and
of cerebrum and diencephalon. The latter endocrine system.
consists of dorsal thalamus and ventral
Midbrain
hypothalamus.
It is located between thalamus and hind
Cerebrum brain. The dorsal portion of the mid brain
consists of four rounded bodies called corpora
It is the largest portion forming nearly two-
quadrigemina that control visual and auditory
third of the brain. The cerebrum is longitudinally (hearing) reflexes.
divided into two halves as right and left cerebral
hemispheres by a deep cleft called median cleft. Hindbrain
Two cerebral hemispheres are interconnected It is formed of three parts cerebellum,
by thick band of nerve fibres called corpus pons and medulla oblongata.
callosum. The outer portion of each cerebral
hemisphere is formed of grey matter and is The human brain
called cerebral cortex. The inner or deeper part constitutes nearly 60 percent of
is formed of white matter and is called cerebral fat. The most crucial molecules
medulla. The cortex is extremely folded forming that determine our brain’s integrity and the
ability are Essential Fatty Acids (EFAs). EFAs
elevations called gyri with depressions between
cannot be synthesised and must be obtained
them termed as sulci that increase its surface
from food. Fish, green leafy vegetables,
area.
almond, walnut are rich sources of EFAs.

www.tntextbooks.in
Cerebellum
More to Know
It is second largest part of the brain formed
of two large sized hemispheres and middle Electroencephalogram (EEG) is an
vermis. It coordinates voluntary movements instrument which records the electrical
and also maintains body balance. impulses of brain. An EEG can detect
abnormalities in the brain waves and help
Pons in diagnoses of seizures, epilepsy, brain
‘Pons’ a latin word meaning bridge. It is tumors, head injuries,etc.
a bridge of nerve fibre that connects the lobes
of cerebellum. It relay signals between the Spinal Cord
cerebellum, spinal cord, midbrain and cerebrum. Spinal cord is a cylindrical structure
It controls respiration and sleep cycle. lying in the neural canal of the vertebral
column. It is also covered by meninges.
Medulla Oblongata
It extends from the lower end of medulla
Medulla oblongata is the posterior most oblongata to the first lumbar vertebra. The
part of the brain that connects spinal cord and posterior most region of spinal cord tapers
various parts of brain. It has cardiac centres, into a thin fibrous thread like structure called
respiratory centres, vasomotor centres to filum terminale.
control heart beat, respiration and contractions
Internally, the spinal cord contains a
of blood vessels respectively. It also regulates
cerebrospinal fluid filled cavity known as the
vomiting and salivation.
central canal. The grey matter of spinal cord is
‘H’ shaped. The upper end of letter ‘H” forms
Table 15.1 Overview of brain functions
posterior horns and lower end forms anterior
Structure Functions horns. A bundle of fibres pass into the posterior
Cerebral cortex Sensory preception, horn forming dorsal or afferent root. Fibres
control of voulntary pass outward from the anterior horn forming
functions, language, ventral or efferent root. These two roots joins
thinking, memory, to form spinal nerves. The white matter is
decision making, creativity external and have bundle of nerve tracts. Spinal
cord conducts sensory and motor impulses to
Thalamus Acts as relay station and from the brain. It controls reflex actions of
Hypothalamus Temperature control, the body.
thirst, hunger, urination,
important link between
nervous system and
endocrine glands
Cerebellum Maintenance of posture
and balance,coordinate
voluntary muscle activity
Pons and Role in sleep-awake cycle,
medulla cardiovascular, respiratory
and digestive control
centers Fig. 15.6 Structure of spinal cord
223 Nervous System

www.tntextbooks.in
The pathway taken by nerve impulse to

15.4 Cerebrospinal Fluid
accomplish reflex action is called reflex arc.
The brain is suspended in a special fluid Now, let us understand how the body executes
environment called cerebrospinal fluid (CSF). reflex action when we touch a hot plate.
It is lymph like, watery fluid that surrounds (i) When we touch a very hot pan, the
and protects the brain within the skull. It also stimulus is the heat which is sensed
fills the central canal of the spinal cord. by receptor called as heat receptors
or thermoreceptors in our hand. This
Functions: stimulus (heat) inturn triggers an impulse
(i) It acts as shock absorbing fluid and in sensory neuron.
protects the brain from damage when it is
subjected to sudden jerk.
(ii) It supplies nutrients to the brain.
(iii) It collects and removes wastes from the
brain.
(iv) It is also responsible for maintaining a
constant pressure inside the cranium.
15.5 Reflex Action

Fig. 15.7 Reflex action and its pathway
A reflex is any response that occurs (ii) The sensory neuron transmits or conveys
automatically without consciouness. There are the message to the spinal cord.
two types of reflexes.
(iii) Spinal cord interprets the stimulus and
(i) Simple or basic reflexes: These reflexes the impulse is passed on to the relay
are inbuilt and unlearned responses. neuron which inturn transmits it to a
Many of the actions we perform in our motor neuron.
day to day life are simple reflexes. e.g.,
(iv) Motor neurons carry command from
winking of eyes when any dust particles
spinal cord to our arm.
enters, sneezing, coughing, yawning,
etc. We perform these actions without (v) Muscle in our arm contracts and we
thinking. withdraw our hand immediately from
the pan.
(ii) Acquired or conditioned reflexes: These
reflexes are the result of practice and In this example, muscle is an effector
learning. Playing harmonium by striking organ which has responded to the heat. You
a particular key on seeing a music note will study in higher classes how the neuronal
is an example of conditioned reflexes impulse triggers the muscular movement.
which required conscious training effort.
Can you think of some more examples of 15.6 Peripheral Nervous
conditioned reflexes? System
Most of the reflex actions are monitored Peripheral nervous system is formed
and controlled by the spinal cord, hence also by the nerves arising from the brain and the
known as spinal reflexes. spinal cord. The nerves arising from the brain

www.tntextbooks.in
15.7 Autonomic Nervous

Activity 2
System
You must say the colour of the word but
Autonomic nervous system (ANS) is also
not the name of the word.
called as visceral nervous system as it regulates
BLUE RED YELLOW ORANGE the function of internal visceral organs of our
body through its two antagonistic (opposite)
GREEN BLUE PURPLE RED
components sympathetic and parasympathetic
systems. They enable the body to perform
PURPLE YELLOW RED BLUE
rapid and specific visceral activities in order to
maintain steady state. It controls the involuntary
functions of the visceral organs.
are called cranial nerves. Nerves arising from
spinal cord are called spinal nerves.
Cranial Nerves
In man, there are 12 pairs of cranial
nerves. Some of the cranial nerves are sensory
e.g. optic nerve which innervates the eye.
Some are motor nerves which helps in rotation
of eyeball. It also innervates the eye muscles,
muscles of iris and tear gland.
Spinal Nerves
There are 31 pairs of spinal nerves. Each
spinal nerve has a dorsal sensory root and the
ventral motor root. The direction of impulses
in dorsal spinal root is towards the spinal cord
and in ventral spinal root away from the spinal
cord. Fig. 15.8 Sympathetic and Parasympathetic
nervous system
Activity 3
Use the letter and number code to decode the given information
24 18 13 26 8 2 15 24 4 9 4 5 8 25 7
19 1 15 21 1 9 8 7 22 2 7 18 23
25 1 4 12 10 8 2 13 8 13 5 1 5
B Z 19 1 15 21 1 9 8 7 22 8 7 8 24 26
1 9 1 15 12 23 24 9 18 7 3 23 12 1 9
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
24 2 21 18 1 22 12 10 4 16 14 26 20
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
9 7 19 6 15 5 8 13 11 25 3 23 0
225 Nervous System

www.tntextbooks.in
Points to Remember according to the instructions from the

brain or the spinal cord.
Nervous system controls and coordinates
CNS is formed of brain and spinal cord.
the activities of our body.
PNS consists of all nerves which connect
Neuron is the structural and functional brain and spinal cord to all parts of the body.
unit of the cell and has three parts- cyton, ANS operates automatically and formed of
dendrites and axon. sympathetic and parasympathetic nerves
A receptor is a cell or group of cells that A reflex action is a rapid, automatic
receives the stimuli. An effector is a part of response to a stimulus which is not under
the body which can respond to a stimulus the voluntary control of the brain.
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the correct answer 7. The neurons which carries impulse from
1. Bipolar neurons are found in the central nervous system to the muscle
(a) retina of eye (b) cerebral cortex fibre.
(c) embryo (d) respiratory epithelium (a) afferent neurons (b) association neuron
(c) efferent neuron (d) unipolar neuron
2. Site for processing of vision, hearing,
memory, speech, intelligence and thought is 8. Which nervous band connects the two
(a) kidney (b) ear cerebral hemispheres of brain?
(c) brain (d) lungs (a) thalamus (b) hypothalamus
3. In reflex action, the reflex arc is formed by (c) corpus callosum (d) pons
(a) brain, spinal cord, muscle 9. Node of Ranvier is found in
(b) receptor, muscle, spinal cord (a) muscles (b) axons
(c) muscle, receptor, brain (c) dendrites (d) cyton
(d) receptor, spinal cord, muscle
10. Vomiting centre is located in
4. Dendrites transmit impulse cell
body and axon transmit impulse (a) medulla oblongata (b) stomach
cell body. (c) cerebrum (d) hypothalamus
(a) away from, away from 11. Nerve cells do not possess
(b) towards, away from
(a) neurilemma (b) sarcolemma
(c) towards,towards
(c) axon (d) dendrites
(d) away from, towards
5. The outer most of the three cranial 12. A person who met with an accident
meninges is lost control of body temperature, water
(a) arachnoid membrane (b) piamater balance, and hunger. Which of the
(c) duramater (d) myelin sheath following part of brain is supposed to be
damaged?
6. There are pairs of cranial nerves
and pairs of spinal nerves. (a) Medulla oblongata (b) cerebrum
(a) 12, 31 (b) 31, 12 (c) 12, 13 (d) 12, 21 (c) pons (d) hypothalamus

www.tntextbooks.in
II. Fill in the blanks IV. Match the following

1. is the longest cell in our body. Column I Column II
2. Impulses travels rapidly in A. Nissil’s granules Forebrain
neurons.
B. Hypothalamus Peripheral Nervous
3. A change in the environment that causes system
an animal to react is called .
C. Cerebellum Cyton
4. carries the impulse towards the
D. Schwann cell Hindbrain
cell body.
5. The two antagonistic component of
V. U
nderstand the assertion statement.
autonomic nervous system are
Justify the reason given and choose the
and .
correct choice
6. A neuron contains all cell organelles except
a. Assertion is correct and reason is wrong
.
b. Reason is correct and the assertion is
7. maintains the constant pressure
wrong
inside the cranium.
c. Both assertion and reason are correct
8. and increases the
d. Both assertion and reason are wrong
surface area of cerebrum.
1. Assertion: Cerebrospinal fluid is present
9. The part of human brain which acts as
throughout the central nervous system.
relay center is .
Reason: Cerebrospinal fluid has no such
functions.
III. State whether true or false, if false write
2. Assertion: Corpus callosum is present in
the correct statement
space between the duramater and piamater.
1. Dendrons are the longest fibres that Reason: It serves to maintain the constant
conducts impulses away from the cell intracranial pressure.
body.
2. Sympathetic nervous system is a part of VI. Short answer questions
central nervous system. 1. Define stimulus.
2. Name the parts of the hind brain.
3. Hypothalamus is the thermoregulatory 3. What are the structures involved in the
centre of human body. protection of brain?
4. Cerebrum controls the voluntary actions 4. Give an example for conditioned reflexes.
of our body. 5. Which acts as a link between the nervous
5. In the central nervous system myelinated system and endocrine system?
fibres form the white matter. 6. Define reflex arc.
6. All the nerves in the body are covered and VII. Differentiate between
protected by meninges. 1. Voluntary and involuntary actions.
7. Cerebrospinal fluid provides nutrition to 2. Medullated and non-medullated nerve
brain. fibre.
8. Reflex arc allows the rapid response of the VIII. Long answer questions
body to a stimulus. 1. With a neat labelled diagram explain the
9. Pons helps in regulating respiration. structure of a neuron.
227 Nervous System

www.tntextbooks.in
2. Illustrate the structure and functions of (i) Name the cells L

brain. (ii) What are M and N?
3. What will you do if someone pricks (iii) What is the gap O?
your hand with a needle? Elucidate the
(iv) Name the chemical substance P
pathway of response with a neat labelled
diagram.
REFERENCE BOOKS
4. Describe the structure of spinal cord.
5. How nerve impulses are transferred from 1. Guyton and Hall, 2003, Textbook of
one neuron to next neuron? Medical Physiology; Harcourt Indian
6. Classify neurons based on its structure. Private Limited.
IX. Higher Order Thinking Skills (HOTS) 2. Sherwood. L., 2007, Human Physiology:
1. ‘A’ is a cylindrical structure that begins From cells to systems 6th Edition, Indian
from the lower end of medulla and extend edition, Thomson Brooks/Cole.
downwards. It is enclosed in bony cage 3. Singh, H.D., 2007, Handbook of Basic
‘B’ and covered by membranes ‘C’. As Human Physiology for Paramedical
many as ‘D’ pairs of nerves arise from the Students. S. Chand and Company Ltd.
structure ‘A’. New Delhi.
(i) What is A?
(ii)
Name (a) bony cage ‘B’ and (b) I NT ER NET R ES O U RCES
membranes ‘C’
1. http://w w w.britannica.com/s cience/
(iii) How much is D?
nervous-system
2. Our body contains a large number of cells
‘L’ which are the longest cells in the body. 2. http://www.sumanasine.com/webcontent/
L has long and short branch called as ‘M’ animations/neurobiology.html
and ‘N’ respectively. There is a gap ‘O’
between two ‘L’ cells, through which nerve
impulse transfer by release of chemical
substance ‘P’.
Concept Map
HUMAN NERVOUS SYSTEM
Central Peripheral Autonomic

Nervous System Nervous System Nervous System
Spinal Cranial Spinal Parasympathetic Sympathetic

Brain
Cord Nerves Nerves Nerves Nerves

www.tntextbooks.in
PLANT AND ANIMAL

16 HORMONES
Learning Objectives

Define hormone.
List out plant hormones.
Classify plant hormones into growth promoters and growth inhibitors.
Differentiate the physiological effects of various plant hormones.
Understand how plant hormones control and coordinate various physiological activities
in plants.
Know the various endocrine glands in the human body.
Identify the location and structure of the endocrine glands in the human body.
Differentiate exocrine and endocrine glands.
Know the specific site of action and their functions.
Identify the disorders which occur due to decreased or increased hormone secretion.
functions by chemical integration. The

Introduction
endocrine system acts through chemical
The word hormone is derived from the messengers known as hormones which are
Greek word “hormon” meaning “ to excite”. produced by specialized glands. Physiological
The function of control and coordination in processes such as digestion, metabolism,
plants is performed by chemical substances growth, development and reproduction are
produced by the plants called plant hormones. controlled by hormones.
In plants several cells are capable of producing
hormones. These phytohormones are 16.1 Plant Hormones
transported to different parts of the plants to
perform various physiological functions. Plant hormones are organic molecules that
Endocrine glands in vertebrate animals are produced at extremely low concentration in
possess a diversified communication system plants. These molecules control morphological,
to co-ordinate physiological and metabolic physiological and biochemical responses.
229

www.tntextbooks.in
Types of Plant Hormones and effect of auxin in plants. He did a series of

There are five major experiments in Avena coleoptiles.
classes of plant hormones. In his first experiment he removed the tips
They are: of Avena coleoptiles. The cut tips did not grow
1. Auxins indicating that the tips produced something
2. Cytokinins essential for growth.In his second experiment
3. Gibberellins he placed the agar blocks on the decapitated
4. Abscisic Acid (ABA) coleoptile tips. The coleoptile tips did not show
5. Ethylene any response. In his next experiment he placed
the detached coleoptile tips on agar blocks.
Among all these plant hormones auxins,
After an hour, he discarded the tips and placed
cytokinins and gibberellins promote plant
this agar block on the decapitated coleoptile. It
growth while abscisic acid and ethylene inhibit
grew straight up indicating that some chemical
plant growth.
had diffused from the cut coleoptile tips into
the agar block which stimulated the growth.
From his experiments Went concluded
that a chemical diffusing from the tip of
coleoptiles was responsible for growth, and he
named it as “Auxin” meaning ‘to grow”.
Figure 16.1 Hormonal interaction in plant

growth and development
16.1.1 Auxins
Figure 16.2 Went’s Experiment
Auxins (Gk. auxein = to grow) were the
first plant hormones discovered. The term Types of Auxins: Auxins are classified into
auxin was introduced by Kogl and Haagen- two types, namely natural auxins and synthetic
Smith (1931). Auxins are produced at the tip auxins.
of stems and roots from where they migrate to
1. Natural Auxins: Auxins produced by
the zone of elongation. Charles Darwin (1880),
the plants are called natural auxins.
observed unilateral growth and curvature of
Example: IAA (Indole – 3 - Acetic Acid)
canary grass (Phalaris canariensis) coleoptiles.
He came to the conclusion that some ‘influence’ 2. Synthetic Auxins: Artificially synthesized
was transmitted from the tip of the coleoptile auxins that have properties like auxins
to the basal region. This ‘influence’ was later are called as synthetic auxins. Example: 2,
identified as Auxin by Went. 4 D (2,4 Dichlorophenoxy Acetic Acid).
16.1.1.1 Went’s Experiment Physiological effects of auxins: Auxins bring

Frits Warmolt Went (1903– 1990), a about a variety of physiological effects in
Dutch biologist demonstrated the existence different parts of the plant body.

www.tntextbooks.in
1. Auxins promote the elongation of stems Physiological effects of cytokinins

and coleoptiles which makes them to grow. 1. Cytokinin induces cell division
(cytokinesis) in the presence of auxins.
Auxin
2. Cytokinin also causes cell enlargement.
3. Both auxins and cytokinins are essential
for the formation of new organs from the
callus in tissue culture (Morphogenesis).
4. Cytokinins promote the growth of lateral
buds even in the presence of apical bud.
5. Application of cytokinin delays the process
of ageing in plants. This is called Richmond
Lang effect.
16.1.3 Gibberellins
Figure 16.3 Cell Elongation
Gibberellins are the most abundantly found
2. Auxins induce root formation at low
plant hormones. Kurosawa (1926) observed
concentration and inhibit it at higher
Bakanae disease or foolish seedling disease
concentration.
in rice crops. This internodal elongation in rice
3. The auxins produced by the apical buds
was caused by fungus Gibberella fujikuroi. The
suppress growth of lateral buds. This is
active substance was identified as Gibberellic
called apical dominance.
acid.
4. Seedless fruits without fertilization are
induced by the external application of Physiological effects of gibberellins
auxins. (Parthenocarpy). Examples: Application of gibberellins on plants
1.
Watermelon, Grapes, Lime etc. stimulate extraordinary elongation of
5. Auxins prevent the formation of abscission internode. e.g. Corn and Pea.
layer.
Phenyl Acetic Acid (PAA)

and Indole 3 Acetonitrile (IAN)
Bolted shoot
are natural auxins. Indole 3
Butyric Acid (IBA), Indole-3-
Propionic Acid, α-Naphthalene Acetic Acid
Rosette leaves
(NAA), 2, 4, 5-T (2,4,5 Trichlorophenoxy
Acetic Acid) are some of the synthetic auxins.
16.1.2 Cytokinins
Cytokinins (Cytos - cell; kinesis - division)
are the plant hormones that promote cell
division or cytokinesis in plant cells. It was first
Figure 16.4 Bolting
isolated from Herring fish sperm. Zeatin was
the cytokinin isolated from Zea mays. Cytokinin 2. Treatment of rosette plants with gibberellin
is found abundantly in liquid endosperm of induces sudden shoot elongation followed
coconut. by flowering. This is called bolting.
231 Plant and Animal Hormones

www.tntextbooks.in
Gibberellins promote the production

3. 3. ABA promotes senescence in leaves by
of male flowers in monoecious plants causing loss of chlorophyll.
(Cucurbits). 4. ABA induces bud dormancy towards the
4. Gibberellins break dormancy of potato approach of winter in trees like birch.
tubers. 5. ABA is a powerful inhibitor of lateral bud
5.
Gibberellins are efficient than auxins in growth in tomato.
inducing the formation of seedless fruit -
16.1.5 Ethylene
Parthenocarpic fruits (Development of
fruits without fertilization) e.g. Tomato. Ethylene is a gaseous plant hormone. It is
a growth inhibitor. It is mainly concerned with
16.1.4 Abscisic Acid maturation and ripening of fruits. Maximum
synthesis of ethylene occurs during ripening of
Abscisic acid (ABA) is a growth inhibitor fruits like apples, bananas and melons
which regulates abscission and dormancy. It
increases tolerance of plants to various kinds Physiological effects of ethylene
of stress. So, it is also called as stress hormone.
1. Ethylene promotes the ripening of fruits.
It is found in the chloroplast of plants.
e.g. Tomato, Apple, Mango, Banana, etc.
Physiological effects of abscisic acid
1. ABA promotes the process of abscission
(separation of leaves, flowers and fruits
from the branch).
2. During water stress and drought conditions
ABA causes stomatal closure.
Figure 16.6 Ethylene
2. Ethylene inhibits the elongation of stem
Abscised
Healthy,
Senescence,
plant leaf and root in dicots.
green plant
yellow plant
3. Ethylene hastens the senescence of leaves
and flowers.
Figure 16.5 Senescence and abscission
4. Ethylene stimulates formation of
abscission zone in leaves, flowers and
Activity fruits. This leads to premature shedding.
5. Ethylene breaks the dormancy of buds,
Place two or three unripe tomatoes in a seeds and storage organs.
brown paper bag with a ripe bananas and roll
the top closed. In another bag place two or three 16.2 Human Endocrine Glands
unripe tomatoes only and roll the top closed,
Observe what happens to the tomatoes? Why? Endocrine glands in animals possess a
versatile communication system to coordinate
As the banana continues to ripen in
biological functions. Exocrine glands and
the first bag, it produces ethylene gas. The
endocrine glands are two kinds of glands found
gas trapped in the bag will cause tomatoes
in animals. Endocrine glands are found in
to ripen.The tomatoes remain unripe in the
different regions of the body of animals as well as
second bag.
human beings. These glands are called ductless

www.tntextbooks.in
glands. Their secretions are called hormones gland is anatomically composed of two lobes and
which are produced in minute quantities. The perform different functions. They are the anterior
secretions diffuse into the blood stream and are lobe (adenohypophysis) and the posterior lobe
carried to the distant parts of the body. They act (neurohypophysis). The intermediate lobe is
on specific organs which are referred as target non-existent in humans.
organs. The pituitary gland forms the major
endocrine gland in most vertebrates. It regulates
The branch of biology which and controls other endocrine glands and so is
deals with the study of the called as the “Master gland”.
endocrine glands and its Hormones secreted by the anterior lobe
physiology is known as (Adenohypophysis) of pituitary
‘Endocrinology’. Thomas Addison is The anterior pituitary is composed of
known as Father of Endocrinology. English different types of cells and secrete hormones
physiologists W. M. Bayliss and E. H. Starling which stimulates the production of hormones
introduced the term hormone in 1909. They first by other endocrine glands. The hormones
discovered the hormone secretin. secreted by anterior pituitary are
a. Growth Hormone
Exocrine glands have specific ducts to
b. Thyroid stimulating Hormone
carry their secretions e.g. salivary glands,
c. Adrenocorticotropic Hormone
mammary glands, sweat glands.
d. Gonadotropic Hormone which
Endocrine glands present in human and
comprises the Follicle Stimulating
other vertebrates are
Hormone and Luteinizing Hormone
a. Pituitary gland e. Prolactin
b. Thyroid gland
c. Parathyroid gland a. Growth hormone (GH)
d. Pancreas (Islets of Langerhans) GH promotes the development and
e. Adrenal gland (Adrenal cortex and enlargement of all tissues of the body. It
Adrenal medulla) stimulates the growth of muscles, cartilage and
f. Gonads(Testes and Ovary) long bones. It controls the cell metabolism.
g. Thymus gland The improper secretion of this hormone
leads to the following conditions.
16.2.1 Pituitary Gland Dwarfism: It is caused by decreased
secretion of growth hormone in children. The
The pituitary gland or hypophysis
characteristic features are stunted growth,
is a pea shaped compact mass of cells located
delayed skeletal formation and mental
at the base of the midbrain attached to the
disability.
hypothalamus by a pituitary stalk. The pituitary
Gigantism: Oversecretion of growth
hormone leads to gigantism in children. It is
Optic Chiasma
characterised by overgrowth of all body tissues
and organs. Individuals attain abnormal
Pars Intermedia Hypothalamus
increase in height.
Pituitary
Gland Anterior
Pituitary Posterior Acromegaly: Excess secretion of growth
Lobe Pituitary
Lobe hormone in adults may lead to abnormal
Figure 16.7 Pituitary Gland enlargement of head, face, hands and feet.

www.tntextbooks.in
b. Thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH) glands during pregnancy and stimulates the
TSH controls the growth of thyroid production of milk after child birth.
gland, coordinates its activities and hormone Hormones secreted by the posterior lobe
secretion. (Neurohypophysis) of pituitary
c. Adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH) The hormones secreted by the posterior
ACTH stimulates adrenal cortex of the pituitary are
adrenal gland for the production of its hormones. a. Vasopressin or Antidiuretic hormone
It also influences protein synthesis in the adrenal
b. Oxytocin
cortex.
Vasopressin or Antidiuretic hormone
a.
d. Gonadotropic hormones (GTH)
(ADH)
The gonadotropic hormones are follicle
In kidney tubules it increases
stimulating hormone and luteinizing hormone
reabsorption of water. It reduces loss of water
which are essential for the normal development
through urine and hence the name antidiuretic
of gonads.
hormone.
Follicle stimulating hormone (FSH)
Deficiency of ADH reduces
In male, it stimulates the germinal reabsorption of water and causes an increase
epithelium of testes for formation of sperms. in urine output (polyuria). This deficiency
In female it initiates the growth of ovarian disorder is called Diabetes insipidus.
follicles and its development in ovary.
b. Oxytocin
Luteinizing hormone (LH) It helps in the contraction of the smooth
In male, it promotes the Leydig cells of the muscles of uterus at the time of child birth and
testes to secrete male sex hormone testosterone. milk ejection from the mammary gland after
In female, it causes ovulation (rupture of mature child birth.
graafian follicle), responsible for the development
of corpus luteum and production of female sex 16.2.2 Thyroid Gland
hormones estrogen and progesterone.
The thyroid gland is composed of two
e. Prolactin (PRL) distinct lobes lying one on either side of the
PRL is also called lactogenic hormone. This trachea. The two lobes are connected by means
hormone initiates development of mammary of a narrow band of tissue known as the isthmus.
This gland is composed of glandular follicles and
More to Know
Melatonin is a hormone produced by the
pineal gland. It is known as a ‘time messenger’.
It signals night time information throughout
the body.
Exposure to light at night, especially
short-wavelength light, can decrease
melatonin production interrupting sleep.
Suppression of melatonin has been implicated
in sleep disturbances and related metabolic
disorders.
Figure 16.8 Thyroid Gland

www.tntextbooks.in
lined by cuboidal epithelium.The follicles are Goitre

filled with colloid material called thyroglobulin. It is caused due to
An amino acid tyrosine and iodine are the inadequate supply of
involved in the formation of thyroid hormone. iodine in our diet. This is
The hormones secreted by the thyroid gland are commonly prevalent in
a. Triiodothyronine (T3) Himalayan regions due to low level of iodine
b. Tetraiodothyronine or Thyroxine (T4) content in the soil. It leads to the enlargement
of thyroid gland which protrudes as a marked
Functions of thyroid hormones swelling in the neck and is called as goitre.
The functions of thyroid hormones are
Cretinism
Production of energy by maintaining the It is caused due to decreased secretion
Basal Metabolic Rate (BMR) of the body. of the thyroid hormones in children. The
Helps to maintain normal body conditions are stunted growth, mental defect,
temperature. lack of skeletal development and deformed
Influences the activity of central nervous bones. They are called as cretins.
system. Myxoedema
Controls growth of the body and bone It is caused by deficiency of thyroid
formation. hormones in adults. They are mentally sluggish,
Essential for normal physical, mental and increase in body weight, puffiness of the face
personality development . and hand, oedematous appearance.
It is also known as personality hormone. Hyperthyroidism
Regulates cell metabolism. It is caused due to the excess secretion of
the thyroid hormones which leads to Grave’s
More to Know disease. The symptoms are protrusion of the
eyeballs (Exopthalmia), increased metabolic
Edward C. Kendal in 1914 first
crystallised thyroxine hormone. Charles rate, high body temperature, profuse sweating,
Harrington and George Barger identified loss of body weight and nervousness.
the molecular structure of thyroxine in 1927.
Thyroid gland requires “120 µg” of iodine 16.2.3 Parathyroid Gland
everyday for the production of thyroxine. The parathyroid glands are four small
oval bodies that are situated on the posterior
Thyroid Dysfunction surface of the thyroid lobes. The chief cells of
When the thyroid gland fails to secrete the gland are mainly concerned with secretion
the normal level of hormones, the condition of parathormone.
is called thyroid dysfunction. It leads to the
following conditions
Hypothyroidism
Parathyroid
It is caused due to the decreased secretion of Thyroid gland
gland
the thyroid hormones. The abnormal conditions Parathyroid

gland
are simple goitre, cretinism and myxoedema. Trachea
Figure 16.9 Parathyroid Gland


www.tntextbooks.in
Functions of Parathormone The Islets of Langerhans consists of two

The parathormone regulates calcium and types of cells namely alpha cells and beta cells.
phosphorus metabolism in the body.They act The alpha cells secrete glucagon and beta cells
on bone, kidney and intestine to maintain secrete insulin.
blood calcium levels. Functions of Pancreatic hormones
Parthyroid Dysfunction A balance between insulin and glucagon
The secretion of parathyroid hormone can production is necessary to maintain blood
be altered due to the following conditions. glucose concentration.
Removal of parathyroid glands during
Insulin
thyroidectomy (removal of thyroid) causes
•• Insulin helps in the conversion of glucose
decreased secretion of parathormone. The
into glycogen which is stored in liver and
conditions are
skeletal muscles.
•• Muscle spasm known as Tetany (sustained •• It promotes the transport of glucose into
contraction of muscles in face, larynx, the cells.
hands and feet).
•• It decreases the concentration of glucose
•• Painful cramps of the limb muscles. in blood.
16.2.4 Pancreas (Islets of Glucagon

Langerhans)
•• Glucagon helps in the breakdown of
Pancreas is an elongated, yellowish gland glycogen to glucose in the liver.
situated in the loop of stomach and duodenum. •• It increases blood glucose levels.
It is exocrine and endocrine in nature. The
exocrine pancreas secretes pancreatic juice which Diabetes mellitus
plays a role in digestion while, the endocrine
The deficiency of insulin causes Diabetes
portion is made up of Islets of Langerhans.
mellitus. It is characterised by
Bile duct
Blood vessel •• Increase in blood sugar level
Islets of Langerhans (Hyperglycemia).
•• Excretion of excess glucose in the urine
(Glycosuria).
•• Frequent urination (Polyuria).
Pancreatic
•• Increased thirst (Polydipsia).
Acinar cells
duct
•• Increase in appetite (Polyphagia).
Duodenum
Figure 16.10 Pancreas 16.2.5 Adrenal Gland
The adrenal glands are located above each

Human insulin was first
kidney. They are also called supra renal glands.
discovered by Fredrick Banting,
Charles Best and MacLeod in The outer part is the adrenal cortex and
1921. Insulin was first used in the inner part is the adrenal medulla. The two
treatment of diabetes on 11th January 1922. distinct parts are structurally and functionally
different.

www.tntextbooks.in
•• It regulates electrolyte balance, body

fluid volume, osmotic pressure and blood
pressure.
More to Know
The cortisol hormones of adrenal cortex

serves to maintain the body in living condition
and recover it from the severe effects of stress
reactions. Thus an increased output of cortisol
is “life saving” in “shock conditions”. It is also
known as life-saving hormone.
Figure 16.11 Adrenal Gland
Adrenal Medulla
Adrenal Cortex The adrenal medulla is composed of
The adrenal cortex consists of three layers chromaffin cells.They are richly supplied with
of cells. They are zona glomerulosa, zona sympathetic and parasympathetic nerves.
fasciculata and zona reticularis
Hormones of Adrenal Medulla
Hormones of Adrenal Cortex It secretes two hormones namely
The hormones secreted by the adrenal a. Epinephrine (Adrenaline)
cortex are corticosteroids. They are classified b. Norepinephrine (Noradrenaline)
into
They are together called as “Emergency
a. Glucocorticoids hormones”. It is produced during conditions
b. Mineralocorticoids of stress and emotion. Hence it is also referred
as “flight, fright and fight hormone”.
Functions of adrenocortical hormones
Functions of adrenal medullary hormones
Glucocorticoids
Epinephrine (Adrenaline)
The glucocorticoids secreted by the zona
•• It promotes the conversion of glycogen to
fasciculata are cortisol and corticosterone
glucose in liver and muscles.
•• They regulate cell metabolism. •• It increases heart beat and blood pressure.
•• It stimulates the formation of glucose from •• It increases the rate of respiration by
glycogen in the liver. dilation of bronchi and trachea.
•• It is an anti-inflammatory and anti-allergic •• It causes dilation of the pupil in eye.
agent. •• It decreases blood flow through the skin.
Norepinephrine (Noradrenalin)
Mineralocorticoids
Most of its actions are similar to those of
The mineralocorticoids secreted by zona
epinephrine.
glomerulosa is aldosterone
•• It helps to reabsorb sodium ions from the 16.2.6 Reproductive Glands
renal tubules. (Gonads)
•• It causes increased excretion of potassium The sex glands are of two types the testes
ions. and the ovaries. The testes are present in male,
while the ovaries are present in female.

www.tntextbooks.in
Testes •• It maintains pregnancy.

Testes are the reproductive glands of the •• It is essential for the formation of placenta.
males. They are composed of seminiferous
tubules, Leydig cells and Sertoli cells. Leydig 16.2.7 Thymus Gland
cells form the endocrine part of the testes.
Thymus is partly an endocrine gland and
They secrete the male sex hormone called
partly a lymphoid gland. It is located in the
testosterone.
upper part of the chest covering the lower end
Functions of testosterone of trachea. Thymosin is the hormone secreted
•• It influences the process of spermatogenesis. by thymus.
•• It stimulates protein synthesis and controls
muscular growth. Right lobe
Left lobe
•• It is responsible for the development of Capsule
secondary sexual characters (distribution Cortex
of hair on body and face, deep voice Thymic

corpuscle
pattern, etc). Medulla
Lymph duct
Vein
Artery
Ovary
The ovaries are the female gonads located Figure 16.12 Thymus Gland
in the pelvic cavity of the abdomen. They secrete
Functions of Thymosin
the female sex hormones
•• It has a stimulatory effect on the immune
a. Estrogen
function.
b. Progesterone
•• It stimulates the production and
Estrogen is produced by the Graafian differentiation of lymphocytes.
follicles of the ovary and progesterone from
the corpus luteum that is formed in the ovary
Points to Remember
from the ruptured follicle during ovulation.
Auxins are produced at the tip of stems
Functions of estrogens
and roots from where they migrate to the
•• It brings about the changes that occur zone of elongation.
during puberty. Cytokinins are the plant hormones that
•• It initiates the process of oogenesis. promote cell division or cytokinesis in
•• It stimulates the maturation of ovarian plant cells.
follicles in the ovary. G ibberellins induce the formation of
•• It promotes the development of secondary seedless fruit and parthenocarpic fruits.
sexual characters (breast development, Abscisic acid is a growth inhibitor which
high pitched voice etc). regulates abscission and dormancy. It
increases tolerance of plants to various
Functions of progesterone
kinds of stress.
•• It is responsible for the premenstrual
Ethylene is a gaseous plant hormone mainly
changes of the uterus.
concerned with maturation and ripening of
•• It prepares the uterus for the implantation
fruits.
of the embryo.

www.tntextbooks.in
The pituitary gland regulates and controls Pancreas secretes insulin and glucagon.
other endocrine glands and so is called as They maintain blood glucose level.
the “Master gland”. Adrenal cortex secrete coritsol and
The hormones secreted by the thyroid aldosterone and adrenal medulla secretes
gland are triiodothyronine (T3), and epinephrine and norepinephrine.
tetraiodothyronine or thyroxine (T4) The sex glands are of two types the testes
The parathormone act on bone, kidney and the ovaries which secrete testosterone
and intestine to maintain blood calcium and estrogens respectively.
levels.
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I Choose the correct answer 8. Which organ acts as both exocrine gland
1. Gibberellins cause: as well as endocrine gland
a) Shortening of genetically tall plants a) Pancreas b) Kidney c) Liver d) Lungs
b) Elongation of dwarf plants
9. Which one is referred as “Master Gland”?
c) Promotion of rooting
d) Yellowing of young leaves a) Pineal gland b) Pituitary gland
2. The hormone which has positive effect on c) Thyroid gland d) Adrenal gland
apical dominance is:
II Fill in the blanks
a) Cytokinin b) Auxin
c) Gibberellin d) Ethylene 1. _________ causes cell elongation, apical
dominance and prevents abscission.
3. Which one of the following hormones is
naturally not found in plants: 2. _________ is a gaseous hormone involved
in abscission of organs and acceleration of
a) 2, 4-D b) GA3
fruit ripening.
c) Gibberellin d) IAA
4. Avena coleoptile test was conducted by 3. _________ causes stomatal closure.
a) Darwin b) N. Smit 4. Gibberellins induce stem elongation in

c) Paal d) F.W. Went _________ plants.
5. To increase the sugar production in 5. The hormone which has negative effect on
sugarcanes they are sprayed with _______ apical dominance is _________.
a) Auxin b) Cytokinin 6. Calcium metabolism of the body is
c) Gibberellins d) Ethylene controlled by _________.
6. LH is secreted by 7. In the islets of Langerhans, beta cells
a) Adrenal gland b) Thyroid gland secrete _________.
c) Anterior pituitary d) Hypothalamus. 8. The growth and functions of thyroid gland
7. Identify the exocrine gland is controlled by _________.
a) Pituitary gland b) Adrenal gland 9. Decreased secretion of thyroid hormones
c) Salivary gland d) Thyroid gland in the children leads to _________.

www.tntextbooks.in
III a) Match Column I with Columns II and III a. If both A and R are true and R is correct
explanation of A
Column I Column II Column III
b. If both A and R are true but R is not the
Auxin Gibberella Abscission correct explanation of A
fujikuroi
c. A is true but R is false
Ethylene Coconut milk Internodal d. B oth A and R are false
elongation
1. Assertion: Application of cytokinin to
Abscisic acid Coleoptile tip Apical dominance marketed vegetables can keep them fresh
for several days.
Cytokinin Chloroplast Ripening
Reason: Cytokinins delay senescence of
Gibberellins Fruits Cell division leaves and other organs by mobilisation of
nutrients.
III b) Match the following hormones with 2. Assertion (A): Pituitary gland is referred
their deficiency states as “Master gland”.
Hormones Disorders Reason (R): It controls the functioning of
a) Thyroxine - Acromegaly other endocrine glands.
b) Insulin - Tetany Assertion (A): Diabetes mellitus increases
3.
the blood sugar levels.
c) Parathormone - Simple goitre
Reason (R):Insulin decreases the blood
d) Growth hormone - Diabetes insipidus
sugar levels.
e) ADH - Diabetes mellitus
VI Answer in a word or sentence
IV State whether True or false, If false write
the correct statement 1. Which hormone promotes the production
of male flowers in Cucurbits?
1. A plant hormone concerned with
2. Write the name of a synthetic auxin.
stimulation of cell division and promotion
3. Which hormone induces parthenocarpy in
of nutrient mobilization is cytokinin.
tomatoes?
2. Gibberellins cause parthenocarpy in
4. What is the hormone responsible for the
tomato.
secretion of milk in female after child birth?
3. Ethylene retards senescence of leaves, 5. Name the hormones which regulates water
flowers and fruits. and mineral metabolism in man.
4. Exopthalmic goiter is due to the over 6. Which hormone is secreted during
secretion of thyroxine. emergency situation in man?
5. Pituitary gland is divided into four lobes. 7. Which gland secretes digestive enzymes
6. Estrogen is secreted by corpus luteum. and hormones?
8. Name the endocrine glands associated with
V Assertion and Reasoning kidneys.
Direction: In each of the following questions
a statement of assertion (A) is given and a VII Short answer questions
corresponding statement of reason (R) is given 1. What are synthetic auxins? Give examples.
just below it. Mark the correct statement as. 2. What is bolting? How can it be induced
artificially?

www.tntextbooks.in
3. Bring out any two physiological activities 2. A plant hormone was first discovered in
of abscisic acid Japan when rice plants were suffering
4. What will you do to prevent leaf fall and from Bakanae disease caused by Gibberella
fruit drop in plants? Support your answer fujikoroi. Based on this information answer
with reason. the following questions:
5. What are chemical messengers? a. Identify the hormone involved in this
6. Write the differences between endocrine process.
and exocrine gland. b. Which property of this hormone
7. What is the role of parathormone? causes the disease?
8. What are the hormones secreted by c. Give two functions of this hormone.
posterior lobe of the pituitary gland? 3. Senthil has high blood pressure, protruded
Mention the tissues on which they exert eyeball and an increased body temperature.
their effect. Name the endocrine gland involved and
9. Why are thyroid hormones refered as hormone secretion responsible for this
personality hormone? condition.
10. Which hormone requires iodine for its 4. Sanjay is sitting in the exam hall. Before
formation? What will happen if intake of the start of the exam , he sweats a lot, with
iodine in our diet is low? increased rate of heart beat. Why does this
condition occur?
VIII. Long answer questions
5. Susan’s father feels very tired and frequently
1. (a) Name the gaseous plant hormone. urinates. After clinical diagnosis he was
Describe its three different actions in plants. advised to take an injection daily to
(b) Which hormone is known as stress maintain his blood glucose level. What
hormone in plants ? Why? would be the possible cause for this?
Describe
2. an experiment which Suggest preventive measures.
demonstrates that growth stimulating
hormone is produced at the tip of coleoptile. REFERENCE BOOKS
3. Write the physiological effects of
1. Helgi Opik and Stephen Rolfe, The
gibberellins.
Physiology of Flowering Plants,
4. Where are estrogens produced? What is the Cambridge University Press.
role of estrogens in the human body?
2. Berry AK, A Textbook of Endocrinology,
5. What are the conditions which occur due 11th edition, Emkay Publications, New Delhi
to lack of ADH and insulin? How are the
3. Prakash S Lohar, Endocrinology, Hormones
conditions different from one another?
and Human Health, MJP Publishers
(TamilNadu Book House), Chennai
IX Higher Order Thinking Skills (HOTS)
1. What would be expected to happen if I NT ER NET R ES O U RCES

a. Gibberellin is applied to rice 1. https://www.biologydiscussion.com >
seedlings. auxins-his
b. A rotten fruit gets mixed with unripe 2. https://www.mcdaniel.edu/biology/Bot.
fruits. (dia)
c. When cytokinin is not added to 3. h t t p s : / / w w w . n d s u . e d u / p u b w e b /
culture medium chiwonlee/plsc210

www.tntextbooks.in
Concept Map
Plant Hormones
Growth Promoters Growth Inhibitors
Auxins
Abscisic Acid
Cytokinins
Gibberellins Ethylene
Human Endocrine Glands - Concept Map

VASOPRESSIN,
OXYTOCIN
GH, PRL, TSH, ADENOHYPOPHYSIS NEUROHYPOPHYSIS
ACTH, FSH, LH
THYROID T3, T4
PITUITARY GLAND GLAND
INSULIN, PANCREAS (ISLETS
GLUCAGON OF LANGERHANS) PARATHORMONE
PARATHYROID
ENDOCRINE GLAND
GLANDS
THYMUS GLAND
GONADS TESTIS
THYMOSIN
ADRENAL
GLAND OVARY TESTOSTERONE
ADRENAL CORTEX ADRENAL
MEDULLA ESTROGEN,
CORTISOL, PROGESTERONE
ALDOSTERONE EPINEPHRINE
NOREPINEPHRINE

www.tntextbooks.in
REPRODUCTION
IN
17 PLANTS AND ANIMALS
Learning Objectives

Differentiate vegetative, asexual and sexual reproduction.
Describe parts of flower and their functions.
Understand the types and modes of pollination and their significance.
Understand the process of double fertilization, steps involved in fertilization (syngamy
and triple fusion), embryo development, endosperm development and formation of seed.
Understand the process of sexual reproduction in human beings.
Know the structure of testicular and ovarian cells.
Know the structural details of human sperm and ovum.
Realize the events of menstrual cycle and fertilization.
Gain awareness on reproductive health and strategies.
Gain knowledge on personal and social hygiene.
by the union of male and female gametes

Introduction
(sperm and egg). The male and female gametes
“Living organisms cannot survive for contain the genetic material or genes present
an indefinite period on earth. All living on the chromosomes which transmit the
organisms have the ability to produce more of characteristic traits to the next generation.
its own kind by the process called reproduction. There are three types of reproduction in
Reproduction is the unfolding of life forms plants namely i) Vegetative ii) Asexual and
where new individuals are formed. It ensures iii) Sexual reproduction.
continuity and survival of the species. This
process is to preserve individual species 17.1 Vegetative Reproduction
and it is called as self-perpetuation. The
time required to reproduce also varies from In this type, new plantlets are formed
organism to organism. You may find great from vegetative (somatic) cells, buds or organs
variations in period of reproduction in yeast, of plant. The vegetative part of plant (root,
bacteria, rat, cow, elephant and humans. In stem, leaf or bud) gets detached from the
sexual reproduction offsprings are produced parent body and grows into an independent
243

www.tntextbooks.in
daughter plant. It has only mitotic division, atleast one cell, may give rise to a new filament
no gametic fusion and daughter plants are of the algae by cell division e.g. Spirogyra.
genetically similar to the parent plant.
Vegetative reproduction may take place
through
(i) Leaves: In Bryophyllum small plants grow
at the leaf notches
Leaf notches
Figure 17.3 Fragmentation in Spirogyra
b. Fission: In this type the parent cell divides

into two daughter cells and each cell develops
into a new adult organism e.g. Amoeba.
Figure 17.1 Vegetative reproduction by leaf
(ii) Stems: In strawberry aerial weak stems

touch the ground and give off adventitious
roots and buds. When the connections with
the parent plant is broken, the offspring
beomes independent.
Figure 17.4 Fission in Amoeba
c. Budding: Formation of a daughter individual

shoot
from a small projection, the bud, arising on the
parent body is called budding. e.g. Yeast.
Figuer 17.2 Vegetative reproduction by stem
(iii) Root: Tuberous roots (Asparagus and

Sweet potato) can be used for vegetative
propagation.
(iv) Bulbils: In some plants the flower buds
modified into globose which are called as Figure 17.5 Budding in Yeast
bulbils. When these falls on the ground they
grow into new plants. e.g. Agave. d. Regeneration: The ability of the lost body
(v) Other types of Vegetative Reproduction parts of an individual organism to give rise to
a. Fragmentation: In filamentous algae, an whole new organism is called regeneration.
breaking of the filament into many fragments It takes place by specialized mass of cells e.g
is called fragmentation. Each fragment having Hydra and Planaria.

www.tntextbooks.in
To understand this further we need to study

17.2 Asexual Reproduction
the structure of a flower.
Production of an offspring by a single
parent without the formation and fusion of 17.3.1 Parts of a Typical Flower
gametes is called asexual reproduction. It
A flower is a modified shoot with limited
involves only mitotic cell divisions and meiosis
does not occur. Offspring produced by asexual growth to carry out sexual reproduction. A
reproduction are not only identical to parents flower consists of four whorls borne on a
but are also exact copies of their parent. thalamus. These whorls are from outside
Asexual reproduction occurs by spore a) Calyx – consisting of sepals
formation. This is the most common method b) Corolla – consisting of petals
of asexual reproduction in fungi and bacteria. c) Androecium – consisting of stamens
During spore formation a structure called d) Gynoecium or pistil – consisting of carpels
sporangium develops from the fungal hypha.
The nucleus divides several times within the
sporangium and each nucleus with small
amount of cytoplasm develops into a spore. The
spores are liberated and they develop into new
hypha after reaching the ground or substratum.
Figure 17.7 Parts of a flower
Activity 2
Take a shoe flower from a growing plant.

Figure 17.6 Spore formation in Rhizopus
Observe the floral parts Calyx, Corolla,
Androecium and Gynoecium.
Activity 1
Separate the stamens and carpels and
Wet a slice of bread, and keep it in a observe the parts.
cool, moist and dark place. Dust the pollen grains on a slide and
Observe the surface of the slice with a observe under a microscope.
magnifying glass.
Record your observations for a week. The two outermost whorls calyx and corolla
are non–essential or accessory whorls as they
do not directly take part in the reproduction. The
17.3 S
exual Reproduction in other two whorls androecium and gynoecium
Plants are known as the essential whorls, because both
take part directly in reproduction.
Sexual reproduction is the process in
which two gametes (male and female) are Androecium: Androecium, the male part of
fused to produce offspring of their own kind. flower is composed of stamens. Each stamen
In such cases both sexes, male and female consists of a stalk called the filament and a
sex organs are needed to produce gametes. small bag like structure called anther at the tip.
You have already learnt that the flower is a The pollen grains are produced in the anther
reproductive organ of a flowering plant. within the pollen sac.
245 Reproduction in Plants and Animals

www.tntextbooks.in
Anthers Exine The embryo sac contains seven cells and

Stamen
Vegetative
nucleus
Intine the eighth nuclei located within the nucellus.
Germ pore
Filament Generative Generative Three cells at the micropylar end form the egg
nucleus cell
apparatus and the three cells at the chalaza end
Anther Pollen Grain are the antipodal cells. The remaining two nuclei
Figure 17.8 Structure of Anther are called polar nuclei found in the centre. In the
and Pollen grain egg apparatus one is the egg cell (female gamete)
and the remaining two cells are the synergids.
Pollen grain: Pollen grains are usually spherical
Process of sexual reproduction in
in shape. It has two layered wall. The hard-
flowering plants. It involves:
outer layer is known as exine. It has prominent
apertures called germpore. The inner thin layer is 1. Pollination
known as intine. It is a thin and continuous layer 2. Fertilization
made up of cellulose and pectin. Mature pollen
grains contain two cells, the vegetative and the
generative cell. Vegetative cell contains a large 17.4 Pollination
nucleus. The generative cell divides mitotically to The transfer of pollen
form two male gametes. Stigma
grains from anther to stigma of
Gynoecium: Gynoecium is a flower is called as pollination
the female part of the flower
and is made up of carpels. It Importance of Pollination
Style
has three parts: 1. It results in fertilization
1. Ovary which leads to the formation of fruits and
2. Style seed.
Ovary
3. Stigma Female 2. New varieties of plants are formed through

gamete
new combination of genes in case of cross
The ovary contains the pollination.
ovules. Figure 17.9
Gynoecium 17.4.1 Types of Pollination
17.3.2 Structure of the Ovule 1. Self-pollination
The main part of the ovule is the nucellus 2. Cross pollination
which is enclosed by two integuments leaving
Self-pollination (Autogamy)
an opening called as micropyle. The ovule is
Self-pollination is also known as autogamy.
attached to the ovary wall by a stalk known as
funiculus. Chalaza is the basal part. The transfer of pollen grains from the anther
to the stigma of same flower or another flower
Chalaza borne on the same plant is known as self-
Nucellus pollination. e.g. Hibiscus.
Antipodal
cells
Embryo sac
Advantages of self-pollination
Secondary
nucleus 1. Self-pollination is possible in bisexual
Integuments
Egg flowers.
Synergids
Micropyle 2. Flowers do not depend on agents for
Funicle
pollination.
Figure 17.10 Structure of an Ovule 3. There is no wastage of pollen grains.

www.tntextbooks.in
Disadvantages of self-pollination This takes place through the agency of animals,

1. The seeds are less in numbers. insects, wind and water.
2. The endosperm is minute. Therefore, the 1. Pollination by wind

seeds produce weak plants. The pollination with the help of wind is
3. New varieties of plants cannot be produced called anemophily. The anemophilous flowers
produce enormous amount of pollen grains.
Cross pollination The pollen grains are small, smooth, dry and
Cross-pollination is the transfer of pollen light in weight. Pollen of such plants are blown
from the anthers of a flower to the stigma of off at a distance of more than 1,000 km. The
a flower on another plant of the same species stigmas are comparatively large, protruding
e.g. apples, grapes, plum, etc. and sometimes hairy to trap the pollen grains.
e.g. Grasses and some cacti.
Advantages of cross pollination
2. Pollination by insects
1. The seeds produced as a result of cross
Pollination with the help of insects like
pollination, develop and germinate
honey bees, flies are called entomophily.
properly and grow into better plants, i.e.
To attract insects these flowers are brightly
cross pollination leads to the production of
coloured, have smell and nectar. The pollen
new varieties.
grains are larger in size, the exine is pitted,
2. More viable seeds are produced. spiny etc., so they can be adhered firmly on
the sticky stigma. Approximately, 80% of the
Disadvantages of cross-pollination
pollination done by the insects is carried by
1. Pollination may fail due to distance barrier. honey bees.
2. More wastage of pollen grains
3. Pollination by water
3. It may introduce some unwanted characters
The pollination with the help of water is
4. Flowers depend on the external agencies called hydrophily.This takes place in aquatic
for pollination plants.
(i) Pollen grains are produced in large
Activity 3 numbers.
(ii) Pollen grains float on surface of water till
Observe the flowers in a garden. they land on the stigma of female flowers
Identify the insects and birds that act as e.g. Hydrilla, Vallisneria.
pollinating agents.
Maintain a record of pollinating agents
Pollen Water
and the plants. grain
Male
f lower Female
f lower
17.5 Agents of Cross

Pollination
In order to bring about cross pollination,

it is necessary that the pollen should be carried
from one flower to another of a different plant. Figure 17.11 Hydrophily

www.tntextbooks.in
3. Pollination by Animals two types of fusion syngamy and triple

When pollination takes place with the fusion take place in an embryo sac the
help of animals, it is called Zoophily. Flowers process is termed as double fertilization.
of such plants attract animals by their bright After triple fusion, primary endosperm
color, size, scent etc. e.g. sun bird pollinates nucleus develops into an endosperm.
flowers of Canna, Gladioli etc., Squirrels
Endosperm provides food to the
pollinate flowers of silk cotton tree.
developing embryo.
17.6 Fertilization in Plants Later the synergids and antipodal cells

degenerate.
Stigma Significance of Fertilization

(i) It stimulates the ovary to develop into
fruit.
(ii) It helps in development of new characters
from two different individuals.
Secondary Egg
Post fertilization changes:
1. The ovule develops into a seed.
Male gamete
2. The integuments of the ovule develop into
the seed coat.
Figure 17.12 Process of Fertilization 3. The ovary enlarges and develops into a fruit.
Pollen grains reach the right stigma and The seed contains the future plant or
begin to germinate. embryo which develops into a seedling under
appropriate conditions.
Pollen grain forms a small tube-like
structure called pollen tube which emerges
through the germ pore. The contents of
17.7 Sexual Reproduction in
the pollen grain move into the tube.
Human
Pollen tube grows through the tissues of
You have studied the structural details of
the stigma and style and finally reaches
the male and female reproductive system in
the ovule through the micropyle.
9th standard. In human beings the male and
Vegetative cell degenerates and the female reproductive organs differ anatomically
generative cell divides to form two sperms and physiologically. New individuals develop
(or male gametes). by the fusion of gametes. Sexual reproduction
Tip of pollen tube bursts and the two involves the fusion of two haploid gametes
sperms enter the embryo sac. (male and the female gametes) to form a
diploid individual (zygote).
One sperm fuses with the egg (syngamy)
and forms a diploid zygote. The other sperm Organs of the reproductive system are
fuses with the secondary nucleus (Triple divided into primary and secondary (accessory)
fusion) to form the primary endosperm sex organs.
nucleus which is triploid in nature. Since

www.tntextbooks.in
Primary reproductive organs include the lie between the seminiferous tubules and
gonads (Testes in male and Ovaries in secrete testosterone. It initiates the process
female). of spermatogenesis.
Accessory sex organs
Male: Vas deferens, epididymis, seminal Vas deferens
vesicle, prostate gland and penis.
Female: Fallopian tubes, uterus, cervix Epididymis
Straight tubule
and vagina. Efferent ductules
Seminiferous
tubule
The secondary (accessory) sex organs
include those structures which are involved Parietal layer
in the Cavity
Visceral layer
Process of ovulation Capsule
(Tunica albuginea)
Fusion of the male and female gametes
(fertilization)
Figure 17.13 L.S of human testes
Division of the fertilized egg upto the
formation of embryo
17.7.2. Female Reproductive
Pregnancy Organ - Structure of Ovary
Development of foetus
The ovaries are located on either side of
Child birth.
the lower abdomen composed of two almond
Now let’s see the cells of the primary shaped bodies, each lying near the lateral end
reproductive organs in human male and of fallopian tube. Each ovary is a compact
female and their role in reproduction. structure consisting of an outer cortex and an
inner medulla. The cortex is composed of a
network of connective tissue called as stroma
17.7.1 M
ale Reproductive Organ -
and is lined by the germinal epithelium.
Structure of Testes
The epithelial cells called the granulosa cells
Testes are the reproductive glands of the surround each ovum in the ovary together
male that are oval shaped organs which lie forming the primary follicle. As the egg grows
outside the abdominal cavity of a man in a sac larger, the follicle also enlarges and gets filled
like structure called scrotum. Now we shall with the fluid and is called the Graafian
study the various cells which are present in the follicle.
testes.
Each testes is covered with a layer of
fibrous tissue called tunica albuginea. Many Info bits
septa from this layer divide the testes into The number of primordial follicles in new
pyramidal lobules, in which lie seminiferous born female child ranges over 7 million and
tubules, cells of Sertoli, and the Leydig cells during reproductive period (at puberty) the
(interstitial cells). number is around 60,000 to 70,000. During a
The process of spermatogenesis takes woman’s lifetime, she will only ovulate 300 to
place in the seminiferous tubules. The 400 of the 1-2 million eggs, she was initially
Sertoli cells are the supporting cells and born with. On the other side, men will produce
provide nutrients to the developing sperms.
over 500 billion sperms in their lifetime.
The Leydig cells are polyhedral in shape and

www.tntextbooks.in
like structure called acrosome. It contains

hyaluronidase an enzyme that helps the
sperm to enter the ovum during fertilization.
A short neck connects the head and middle
piece which comprises the centrioles.The
middle piece contains the mitochondria
which provides energy for the movement of
tail. It brings about sperm motility which is
essential for fertilization.
Figure 17.14 L.S of human ovary
17.8.2 Structure of Human Ovum
The mature ovum or egg is spherical
17.8 Gametogenesis
in shape.The ovum is almost free of yolk. It
The formation of the sperm in male and contains abundant cytoplasm and the nucleus.
the ovum in female is called gametogenesis. The ovum is surrounded by three membranes.
It involves spermatogenesis (formation of The plasma membrane is surrounded by inner
spermatozoa) and oogenesis (the formation of thin zona pellucida and an outer thick corona
ova). Gametes with haploid cells are produced radiata. The corona radiata is formed of follicle
through gametogenesis. cells. The membrane forming the surface layer
of the ovum is called vitelline membrane. The
17.8.1 Structure of Human fluid-filled space between zona pellucida and
Sperm the surface of the egg is called perivitelline
The spermatozoan consists of head, a space.
middle piece and tail. The sperm head is Follicle cells of
corona radiata
elongated and formed by the condensation Nucleus
of nucleus. The anterior portion has a cap Cytoplasm
Vitelline membrane
Head
Zona pellucida
Acrosome
Head Nucleus
Figure 17.16 Structure of ovum

Midpiece Mitochondria Puberty
The reproductive system in both males
and females becomes functional and an
increase in sex hormone production resulting
in puberty. This phenomenon tends to start
earlier in females than in males. Generally
Tail
boys attain puberty between the age of 13 to
14 years, while girls reach puberty between
11 to 13 years. In male, the onset of puberty
is triggered by the secretion of the hormone
testosterone in the testes, in female the
Figure 17.15 Structure of sperm secretion of estrogens and progesterone from

www.tntextbooks.in
the ovary. The secretion of both male and 3. Ovulatory Phase

female hormones are under the control of the 4. Luteal or Secretory Phase
pituitary gonadotropins luteinizing hormone
(LH) and follicle stimulating hormone (FSH).
17.9 Menstrual Cycle-Process

of Ovulation
The cyclic events that take place in a

rhythmic fashion during the reproductive
period of a woman’s life is called menstrual
cycle. In human females the menstrual cycle
starts at the age of 11-13 years which marks the
onset of puberty and is called menarche, and
ceases around 48-50 years of age and this stage
is termed menopause. The reproductive period
is marked by characteristic events repeated
almost every month in physiologically normal
women (28 days with minor variation) in the Figure 17.17 Menstrual cycle
form of a menstrual flow. The menstrual cycle
consists of 4 phases These phases show simultaneous
1. Menstrual or Destructive Phase synchrony of events in both ovary and uterus.
2. Follicular or Proliferative Phase Changes in the ovary and the uterus are
Table 17.1 Events of Menstrual Cycle and the Role of Hormones
Phase Days Changes in Ovary Changes in Uterus Hormonal Changes

Menstrual 4–5 Development of Breakdown of uterine Decrease in
phase days primary follicles endometrial lining leads to progesterone and
bleeding oestrogen
Follicular 6th–13th Primary follicles grow Endometrium regenerates FSH and oestrogen
phase day to become a fully through proliferation increase
mature Graafian follicle
Ovulatory 14th day The Graafian follicle Increase in endometrial LH peak
phase ruptures, and releases thickness
the ovum(egg)
Luteal 15th– Emptied Graafian Endometrium is prepared for LH and FSH
phase 28th day follicle develops into implantation if fertilization of decrease, Corpus
corpus luteum egg takes place, if fertilization luteum produces
does not occur corpus luteum progesterone and
degenerates, uterine wall its level increases
ruptures, bleeding starts and followed by a
unfertilized egg is expelled decline, if menstrual
bleeding occurs

www.tntextbooks.in
induced by the pituitary hormones (LH and

Info bits
FSH) and ovarian hormones (estrogen and
progesterone). Normally one egg matures in the ovary
each month. Ovulation is the rupture of
Info bit the follicle releasing the egg or ovum .
The uterus prepares itself to receive the
Menstruation is a periodical phenomenon
fertilized egg every month. The uterine
that continues from puberty to menopause.
lining becomes thick and spongy for
This will happen if the released ovum is not
implantation of the fertilized egg.
fertilized by the sperm. Lack of menstruation
generally indicates pregnancy. Events leading to when fertilization
occurs and does not occur
If fertilization takes place the corpus
17.10 Fertilization to Foetal luteum persists, continues to secrete
Development progesterone maintains the thickened state
Fertilization of uterine wall and prevents maturation of
Fertilization in human is internal and another follicle till the end of pregnancy
occurs in the oviduct of the female genital If fertilization does not occur, corpus
tract. It takes place usually in the ampulla of luteum degenerates, the egg disintegrates
the fallopian tube. An oocyte is alive for about and the uterine lining slowly breaks,
24 hours after it is released from the follicle. discharged as blood and mucus leading to
Fertilisation must take place within 24 hours. menstrual events.
The sperm enters into the ovum and fuses
with it, resulting in the formation of a ‘zygote’.
This process is called fertilization. The zygote layers (ectoderm, mesoderm and endoderm)
is a fertilized ovum. by rearrangement of the cells is called
gastrulation. This takes place after the process
Cleavage and Formation of Blastula of implantation.
The first cleavage takes place about 30
hours after fertilization. Cleavage is a series
of rapid mitotic divisions of the zygote to
form many celled blastula (Blastocyst) which
comprises an outer layer of smaller cells and
inner mass of larger cells.
Implantation
The blastocyst (fertilized egg) reaches
the uterus and gets implanted in the uterus.
The process of attachment of the blastocyst
to the uterine wall (endometrium) is called Figure 17.18 Developmental stages of zygote
implantation. The fertilized egg becomes from cleavage to blastocyst formation
implanted in about 6 to 7 days after fertilization.
Organogenesis
Gastrulation The establishment of the germ layers
The transformation of blastula into namely ectoderm, mesoderm and endoderm
gastrula and the formation of primary germ initiates the final phase of embryonic

www.tntextbooks.in
development. During organogenesis the The ejection of milk is stimulated by posterior

various organs of the foetus are established pituitary hormone oxytocin.
from the different germ layers attaining a
functional state. Info bits
Formation of Placenta The milk produced from the breast during
the first 2 to 3 days after child birth is called
The placenta is a disc shaped structure
colostrum. It contains immune substances
attached to the uterine wall and is a temporary
and provides immunity to the new born
association between the developing embryo
which is essential for the body.
and maternal tissues. It allows the exchange of
food materials, diffusion of oxygen, excretion of
nitrogenous wastes and elimination of carbon 17.11. Reproductive Health
dioxide. A cord containing blood vessels that
connects the placenta with the foetus is called According to World Health Organization
the umbilical cord. (WHO) reproductive health means a total well
being in all aspects of reproduction, ability to
Pregnancy (Gestation) reproduce and regulate fertility, women's ability to
It is the time period during which the undergo pregnancy and safe child birth,maternal
embryo attains its development in the uterus. and infant survival and well being.
Normally gestation period of human last for Several measures were undertaken by the
about 280 days. During pregnancy the uterus government to improve the reproductive health
expands upto 500 times of its normal size. of the people by launching National Health
Parturition (Child Birth) Programmes such as the
Parturition is the expulsion of young i. Family Welfare Programme
one from the mother’s uterus at the end ii. Reproductive and Child Health Care (RCH)
of gestation. Oxytocin from the posterior Programme
pituitary stimulates the uterine contractions Family welfare programme: The National
and provides force to expel the baby from the Family Welfare Programme is a comprehensive
uterus, causing birth. scheme which includes:
1. Maternal and child health care (MCH)
Sometimes ovaries releases
2. Immunization of mothers, infants and
two eggs and each is fertilised
children.
by a different sperm, resulting in
3. Nutritional supplement to pregnant women
Non-Identical Twins (Fraternal
and children.
Twins). If single egg is fertilised and then divides
4. Contraception with health education, to
into two foetus, Identical Twins develop.
motivate couples to accept contraceptive
Lactation methods and to have small family norms,
which improve economic status, living
The process of milk production after child
status and the quality of life.
birth from mammary glands of the mother is
called lactation. The first fluid which is released Reproductive and Child Health Care (RCH)
from the mammary gland after child birth is Programme: It has integrated all services
called as colostrum. Milk production from which include
alveoli of mammary glands is stimulated by •• Pregnancy and child birth
prolactin secreted from the anterior pituitary. •• Postnatal care of the mother and child

www.tntextbooks.in
•• Importance of breast feeding 1. Barrier methods

•• Prevention of reproductive tract infections 2. Hormonal methods
and sexually transmitted diseases. 3. Intra-Uterine Devices (IUDs)
4. Surgical methods
17.12 Population Explosion Barrier Methods
and Family Planning
This method prevents sperms from meeting
Population explosion defined as the the ovum. Its entry into the female reproductive
sudden and rapid rise in the size of population, tract is prevented by barrier.
especially human population. Realizing the (a) Condom: Condom prevents deposition
dangers inherent in population growth, of sperms in the vagina. Condoms are made
the Government of India has taken several of thin rubber or latex sheath. Condom also
measures to check population growth and protect against sexually transmitted diseases
introduced family planning. India has been (STD) like syphilis, AIDS.
one of the first country in the world to launch
(b) Diaphragm (Cervical cap): Vaginal
the nation wide family planning programme
diaphragm fitting into the vagina or a cervical
in 1952.
cap fitting over the cervix. This prevents the
Family planning is a way of living that is entry of sperms into the uterus.
adopted voluntarily by couples on the basis of
knowledge and responsible decisions to promote Hormonal Methods
the health and welfare of the family group and Hormonal preparations are in the form of
society. The WHO (World Health Organisation) pills or tablets (contraceptive pills). These
has also stressed the importance of family hormones stop (interfere with ovulation) the
planning as global strategy health for all. release of egg from the ovary.
Intra-Uterine Devices (IUDs)
The inverted red triangle The intrauterine device (IUD) are
is a symbol of family planning contraceptive devices inserted into the uterus.
in India for family welfare. It There are two synthetic devices commonly
is displayed prominently at all hospitals, used in India are Lippe’s Loop and Copper-T
primary health clinics and family welfare made of copper and plastic (non irritant). This
centres where any help or advice about family can remain for a period
planning is available free of cost. The symbol of 3 years. This reduces
is displayed along with a slogan Small Family, the sperm fertilizing
Happy Family. capacity and prevents
implantation. This also
17.12.1. Contraception helps to give adequate
time interval between
Contraception is one of the best birth pregnancies. Figure 17.19
control measures. A number of techniques Copper-T
or methods have been developed to prevent Surgical Methods
pregnancies in women. The devices used Surgical contraception or sterilization
for contraception are called contraceptive techniques are terminal methods to prevent any
devices. Common contraceptive methods pregnancy. This procedure in males is vasectomy
used to prevent pregnancy are discussed here. (ligation of vas deferens) and in females it is

www.tntextbooks.in
tubectomy (ligation of fallopian tube). These Cloth towels used to dry our hands or
are methods of permanent birth control. body should be dried after each use and
laundered regularly. Clothes, handkerchief,
17.13 Urinary Tract Infection undergarments and socks should be washed
(UTI) daily. Washing prevents body odour, infections
and skin irritation.
Many diseases affect both women and men,
but a few diseases occur at a higher frequency
17.14.2 Toilet Hygiene
in woman. Woman are susceptible to UTI from
the bacteria that are present on skin, rectum The toilet has a lot to do with personal
or vagina. This will enter the urethra, before hygiene and general health as it is a place that
moving upwards. The types of UTI are: cannot be avoided and used regularly. Parents
should guide and practice their children on
1. Cystitis or Bladder infection
how to use the toilets at home, in schools and
Bacteria lodged in the urinary bladder other public places so that it will protect the
thrive and multiply leading to inflammation. children from various contagious infections
It is most common in the age group of 20 to 50.
and diseases.The following measures can
2. Kidney Infection ensure toilet hygiene
The bacteria can travel from the urinary 1. The floors of the toilet should be maintained
bladder and upward to ureter and affect one clean and dry. This helps to reduce the bad
or both the kidneys. It also infects the blood odour and also infection.
stream and leads to serious life-threatening
complications. 2. Toilet flush handles, door knobs, faucets,
paper towel dispensers, light switches and
3. Asymptomatic Bacteriuria walls should be cleaned with disinfectants
The bacteria present in the urinary bladder to kill harmful germs and bacteria.
which may not show any symptoms.
3. Hands should be washed thoroughly with
soap before and after toilet use.
17.14 Personal Hygiene
Hygiene is the practice of healthy living 17.14.3 Menstrual and Napkin

and personal cleanliness. Personal hygiene is Hygiene
caring of one’s own body and health. Social
Women’s health depends upon the level
hygiene is proper care of the surrounding of cleanliness to keep them free from skin and
environment. The main aspect of hygiene are genitourinary tract infection.
body hygiene, food hygiene, sanitary hygiene
and hygienic environment. Menstrual hygiene
Maintaining menstrual hygiene is
17.14.1 Body Hygiene
important for the overall health of women. The
Washing is vital to all age group of people basic menstrual hygiene ways are
which maintains our personal hygiene. A daily 1. Sanitary pads should be changed regularly,
bath regularly keeps skin clean and free of to avoid infections due to microbes from
germs. Hair should be kept clean by frequent vagina and sweat from genitals.
washing. Mouth wash should be done after 2. Use of warm water to clean genitals helps
every meal. We should wash our hands many to get rid of menstrual cramps.
times during the day.

www.tntextbooks.in
3. Wearing loose clothing rather than tight Points to Remember

fitting clothes will ensure the airflow
around the genitals and prevent sweating. Many bacteria and protozoa simply divide
into two or more daughter cells by fission.
More to Know Organisms such as hydra can regenerate
if they are broken into pieces. They can
Every year May 28 is observed as Menstrual also give out buds which mature into new
Hygiene day to make girls and women individuals.
aware of maintaining menstrual hygiene and Reproduction in flowering plants involves
importance of menstrual hygiene for good transfer of pollen grains from the anther
health. By way of awareness through films, to the stigma which is referred to as
discussions and campaigns menstrual hygiene pollination. This is followed by fertilization.
has taken quite the centre stage in recent days. Sexual reproduction involves the fusion of
two haploid gametes (male and the female
Napkin hygiene gametes) to form a diploid individual
The parents and teachers are to create (zygote).
awareness among the school girls about the The formation of the sperm in male and the
use of napkins and their proper disposal. Girls ovum in female is called gametogenesis. It
should be educated in the following ways involves spermatogenesis (formation of
1. The sanitary pad and tampons should be spermatozoa) and oogenesis (the formation
wrapped properly and discarded because of ova).
they can spread infections. The cyclic events that take place in a
2. Sanitary pad or tampon should not be rhythmic manner during the reproductive
flushed down the toilet. period of a woman’s life is called menstrual
3. Napkin incinerators are to be used properly cycle.
for disposal of used napkins. The process of attachment of the blastocyst
to the uterine wall (endometrium) is called
Info bits implantation.
The menstrual hygiene scheme to provide The placenta is a temporary association
subsidized sanitary napkins was launched between the developing embryo and
by the Health ministry in 2011. maternal tissues.
Parturition is the expulsion of young one
In Tamil Nadu, UNICEF has developed
from the mother’s uterus.
an affordable incinerator that uses firewood
Contraception is one of the best birth control
to handle sanitary napkin waste at schools
measures. The devices used for contraception
and special wells are equipped where
are called contraceptive devices.
sanitary napkins are composted.
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION

1. The plant which propagates with the help 2. Asexual reproduction takes place through
of its leaves is ___________ . budding in ___________ .
a) Onion b) Neem a) Amoeba b) Yeast
c) Ginger d) Bryophyllum c) Plasmodium d) Bacteria

www.tntextbooks.in
3. Syngamy results in the formation of 11. Which one of the following is an IUCD?
_________ . a) Copper – T b) Oral pills
a) Zoospores b) Conidia c) Diaphragm d) Tubectomy
c) Zygote d) Chlamydospores
4. The essential parts of a flower are II. Fill in the blanks
___________ . 1. The embryo sac in a typical dicot at the
a) Calyx and Corolla time of fertilization is ___________ .
b) Calyx and Androecium 2. After fertilization the ovary develops into
c) Corolla and Gynoecium ___________ .
d) Androecium and Gynoecium 3. Planaria reproduces asexually by
___________ .
5. Anemophilous flowers have __________ .
4. Fertilization is __________ in humans
a) Sessile stigma
5. The implantation of the embryo occurs at
b) Small smooth stigma
about ___________ day of fertilization
c) Colored flower
6. ___________ is the first secretion from
d) Large feathery stigma
the mammary gland after child birth
6. Male gametes in angiosperms are formed
7. Prolactin is a hormone produced by
by the division of ___________ .
___________ .
a) Generative cell
III. (a) Match the following
b) Vegetative cell
c) Microspore mother cell Column 1 Column 2
d) Microspore Fission Spirogyra
7 What is true of gametes? Budding Amoeba
Fragmentation Yeast
a) They are diploid
b) They give rise to gonads III. (b)
Match the following terms with
c) They produce hormones their respective meanings
d) They are formed from gonads a) Parturition - 1) Duration between
8. A single highly coiled tube where sperms pregnancy and birth
are stored, get concentrated and mature is b) Gestation - 2) Attachment of zygote
known as to endometrium
a) Epididymis b) Vasa efferentia c) Ovulation - 3) Delivery of baby from
uterus
c) Vas deferens d) Seminiferous tubules
d) Implantation
- 4)
Release of egg from
9. The large elongated cells that provide
Graafian follicle
nutrition to developing sperms are
a) Primary germ cells b) Sertoli cells IV. State whether the following statements are
True or False. Correct the false statement
c) Leydig cells d) Spermatogonia
1. Stalk of the ovule is called pedicle.
10 Estrogen is secreted by
2. Seeds are the product of asexual
a) Anterior pituitary b) Primary follicle
reproduction.
c) Graffian follicle d) Corpus luteum

www.tntextbooks.in
3. Yeast reproduces asexually by means of 4. Define triple fusion.

multiple fission. 5. Write the characteristics of insect
4. The part of the pistil which serves as a receptive pollinated flowers.
structure for the pollen is called as style. 6. Name the secondary sex organs in male
5. Insect pollinated flowers are characterized 7. What is colostrum? How is milk
by dry and smooth pollen. production hormonally regulated ?
6. Sex organs produce gametes which are 8. How can menstrual hygiene be maintained
diploid. during menstrual days?
7. LH is secreted by the posterior pituitary. 9. How does developing embryo gets its
nourishment inside the mother's body?
8. Menstrual cycle ceases during pregnancy.
10. Identify the parts A, B, C and D
9. Surgical methods of contraception prevent
gamete formation. A
D B
10.
The increased level of estrogen
C
and progesterone is responsible for
menstruation.
11. Write the events involved in the sexual
V. Answer in a word or sentence reproduction of a flowering plant.
1. If one pollen grain produces two male a. Discuss the first event and write the types.
gametes, how many pollen grains are b. Mention the advantages and the
needed to fertilize 10 ovules? disadvantages of that event.
2. In which part of the flower germination of 12. Why are the human testes located outside
pollen grains takes place? the abdominal cavity? Name the pouch in
3. Name two organisms which reproduces which they are present .
through budding. 13. Luteal phase of the menstrual cycle is also
4. Mention the function of endosperm. called the secretory phase. Give reason.
5. Name the hormone responsible for the 14.
Why are family planning methods not
vigorous contractions of the uterine muscles. adopted by all the people of our country?
6. What is the enzyme present in acrosome
of sperm? VII. Long answer questions
7. When is World Menstrual Hygiene Day 1. With a neat labelled diagram describe the
observed? parts of a typical angiospermic ovule.
8. What is the need for contraception ? 2. What are the phases of menstrual cycle?
9. Name the part of the human female Indicate the changes in the ovary and uterus.
reproductive system where the following
VIII. Higher Order Thinking Skills (HOTS)
occurs.
1. In angiosperms the pollen germinates
a. Fertilization b. Implantation
to produce pollen tube that carries two
VI. Short answer question gametes. What is the purpose of carrying
two gametes when single gamete can
1. What will happen if you cut planaria into
fertilize the egg?
small fragments?
2. Why is vegetative propagation practiced 2. Why menstrual cycle does not take place
for growing some type of plants? before puberty and during pregnancy ?
3. How does binary fission differ from 3. Read the following passage and answer
multiple fission? the questions that follow

www.tntextbooks.in
Rahini and her parents were watching a 3.

Rastogi S.C. Essentials of Animal
television programme. An advertisement Physiology, 3rd Edition, Rastogi
flashed on the screen which was promoting Publications, Meerut.
use of sanitary napkins. Rahini’s parents 4.
Winwood R.S. and Smith J. L., Sear’s
suddenly changed the channel, but she Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses,
objected to her parents and explained the 6th Edition, Edward Arnold and Jaypee
need and importance of such advertisement. Brothers.
a)
What is first menstruation called?
When does it occur ? I NT ER NET R ES O U RCES
b) List out the napkin hygiene measures
1. http://www.importantindia.com/10606/
taken during menstruation ?
population-explosion-in-India/
c) Do you think that Rahini’s objection
2. http : / / w w w. you r ar t i cl el ibr ar y. c om /
towards her parents was correct? If so,
population/3-important...control-
Why?
overpopulation/26950
REFERENCE BOOKS 3. h t t p : / / w w w . m o m j u n c t i o n .
com>pregnancy>Health
1. Verma P.S and Agarwal, V.K. and Tyagi 4. https://leadership.ng/2018/04/08/toilet-
B.S, Animal Physiology, S.Chand and hygiene
Company, New Delhi
5. h t t p s : / / w w w. b o l d s k y. c o m / h e a l t h /
2. Knut Schmidt and Nielsen, Animal
wellness/2018/world-menstrual-hygiene-
Physiology, Foundations of Modern
day
Biology series
Concept Map
Reproduction in plants
Asexual Vegetative Sexual reproduction

reproduction reproduction
Fission Fertilization Pollination

Spore Leaves,stem,
formation root, Bulbils Budding Syngamy Self
Pollination
Regeneration Double
Fertilization Cross
Fragmentation Pollination

www.tntextbooks.in
SEXUAL REPRODUCTION IN HUMAN
SEXUAL REPRODCUTION FAMILY WELFARE PROGRAMMES HYGIENE
MALE FEMALE
POPULATION EXPLOSION FAMILY PLANNING PERSONAL HYGIENE
TESTIS OVARY
TOILET MENSTRUAL
SPERMATOGENESIS OOGENESIS HYGIENE HYGIENE
SPERM OVUM CONTRACEPTION
MENSTRUAL
CYCLE
FERTILIZATION
BARRIER HORMONAL SURGICAL
IUDs METHODS
IMPLANTATION FOLICULAR PHASE METHODS METHODS
GESTATION OVULATORY PHASE
PARTURITION
LUTEAL PHASE
LACTATION
ICT CORNER REPRODUCTION

WHO HTS INFO – This application
enables the students to know about HIV
tests and information. It was created by
World Health Organization.
Steps
• You can see the moving Menu bar at the top of the home screen. The same thing can be accessed from
the Menu at the left bottom.
• You can view the latest news and events about HIV by clicking the News button.
• It includes many updates and information in Testing strategies, Pre and Post test service.
• You can reach the home page from any page of the application by clicking HOME button.
Cells alive
URL : https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.whohtsinfo

www.tntextbooks.in
GENETICS
18
Learning Objectives

Know about Mendelian laws.
Differentiate between phenotype and genotype.
Understand the process of monohybrid and dihybrid cross.
Differentiate between a chromosome, DNA and gene.
Understand the structure of chromosome.
Classify the chromosomes based on the position of centromere.
Understand the structure and replication of DNA.
Define mutation and classify the chromosomal and gene mutation.
Identify the chromosomal abnormality of Down’s syndrome.
Heredity is transmission of characters,

Introduction
from one generation to the next generation,
“Like Begets Like” is an important and while variation refers to the differences shown
universal phenomenon of life as the living by the individuals of the same species and also
beings produce offspring of their own kind. by the offspring of the same parents. All these
Colour of eye, color of hair, shape of nose, type can happen only due to chromosomes. Now
of earlobe, etc, are inheritable traits. Have you let’s see what chromosomes are and how they
ever wondered, how do we inherit traits and are composed with DNA, that form the genetic
characteristics from our father and mother? material.
Some of our characteristics might have been
18.1 Gregor Johann Mendel -
inherited from our grandparents. How do
Father of Genetics
we inherit characters from one generation to
another? It is because of the genes we inherit Mendel (1822-1884) was an Austrian monk
from our parents. These genes are responsible who discovered the basic principles of heredity
for the physical outlook and biological through his experiments. His experiments are
functions. The branch of biology that deals the foundation for modern genetics. He was
with the genes, genetic variation and heredity born in 1822 to a family of farmers in Silesian of
of living organisms is called genetics. Czechoslovakia. After finishing his high school
261

www.tntextbooks.in
at the age of 18, he entered the Augustinian

18.2 M
onohybrid Cross –
Monastery at Brunn as a priest. From there he
Inheritance of One Gene
went to the University of Vienna for training
in physics, mathematics and natural science. Crosses involving inheritance of only
Mendel returned to the monastery in 1854 one pair of contrasting characters are called
and continued to work as a priest and teach in monohybrid crosses. For example it is a cross
high school. In his leisure time he started his between two forms of a single trait like a cross
famous experiments on the garden pea plant.
between tall and dwarf plant.
He conducted his experiments in the monastery
for about nine years from 1856 to 1865. He Mendel’s Explanation of Monohybrid Cross
had worked on nearly 10000 pea plants of 34
Parental generation: Pure breeding tall plant
different varieties. Mendel noted that they differ
and a pure breeding dwarf plant.
from one another in many ways.
Thus Mendel had chosen 7 pairs of F1 generation: Plants raised from the seeds of
contrasting characters for his study as shown pure breeding parental cross in F1 generation
in the table. were tall and monohybrids.
F2 generation: Selfing of the F1 monohybrids

Table 18.1 Constrasting characters of pea
resulted in tall and dwarf plants respectively
plant used by Mendel
in the ratio of 3:1. The actual number of tall
Characteris�c
studied
Dominant
character
Recessive
character and dwarf plants obtained by Mendel was 787
tall and 277 dwarf. External expression of a
Stem length Long Short
particular trait is known as phenotype. So the
phenotypic ratio is 3:1.
Flower Posi�on Axillary Terminal
In the F2 generation 3 different types were
obtained:
Flower colour Blue White
Pod shape Inﬂated Constricted Tall Homozygous – TT (Pure) – 1

Pod colour Green Yellow
Tall Heterozygous – Tt – 2
Seed shape Round Wrinkled Dwarf Homozygous – tt – 1
Seed colour Yellow Green So the genotypic ratio 1:2:1. A genotype is the
genetic expression of an organism
Reasons for Mendel’s success
He chose the pea plant as it was Mendel’s Interpretation on Monohybrid
advantageous for experimental work in many cross
aspects Based on these observations it was
1. It is naturally self-pollinating and so is very confirmed by Mendel that ‘factors’ are passed
easy to raise pure breeding individuals. on from one generation to another, now
2. It has a short life span as it is an annual refered to as genes. Tallness and Dwarfness
and so it was possible to follow several are determined by a pair of contrasting factors
generations. , tall plant possess a pair of factors (represented
3. It is easy to cross-pollinate. by T- taking the first letter of the dominant
character) and a plant is dwarf because it
4. It has deeply defined contrasting characters.
possess factors for dwarfness (represented as
5. The flowers are bisexual. t- recessive character). These factors occur

www.tntextbooks.in
Info bits
Parental
Genera�on Punnett square is a checker board form
TT (Tall) � (Dwarf)
devised by a British geneticist R.C.Punnett
Gametes T t for study of genetics. It is a graphical
T t
representation to calculate the probability
F1 Genera�on
Tt of all possible genotypes of offsprings in a
Genotype All are Tt X genetic cross.
(Ma�ng)
Phenotype All are tall
Tt Tt
Gametes T t T t
T T 18.3 Dihybrid Cross-

t TT t
Tt Tt Inheritance Two Genes
�
and Law of Independent
Assortment
F2 Genera�on
Genotype TT : Tt : � = 1 : 2 : 1
Phenotype Tall : Dwarf 3 : 1
Dihybrid cross involves the inheritance
TT Tt Tt �
(Tall) (Tall) (Tall) (Dwarf) of two pairs of contrasting characteristics
Figure 18.1 Monohybrid cross (or contrasting traits) at the same time. The
two pairs of contrasting characteristics chosen
in pairs and may be alike as in pure breeding by Mendel were shape and colour of seeds:
tall plants (TT) and dwarf plants (tt). This is round-yellow seeds and wrinkled-green
referred to as homozygous. If they are unlike seeds.
(Tt) they are referred to as heterozygous. Mendel crossed pea plants having round-
1. Two factors making up a pair of yellow seeds with pea plants having wrinkled-
contrasting characters are called alleles. green seeds. Mendel made the following
Phenotypic expression of alleles are called observations:
allelomorphs. One member of each pair is
1. Mendel first crossed pure breeding pea
contributed by one parent.
plants having round-yellow seeds with
2. When two factors for alternative
pure breeding pea plants having wrinkled-
expression of a trait are brought together
green seeds and found that only round-
by fertilization. The character which
yellow seeds were produced in the first
expresses itself is called dominant
(Tallness) condition and that which is generation (F1). No wrinkled-green seeds
masked is called recessive condition were obtained in the F1 generation. From
(Dwarfness). this it was concluded that round shape and
3. The factors are always pure and when yellow colour of the seeds were dominant
gametes are formed, the unit factors traits over the wrinkled shape and green
segregate so that each gamete gets one of color of the seeds.
the two alternative factors. It means that 2. When the hybrids of F1 generation pea
factors for tallness(T) and dwarfness(t) are plants having round-yellow seeds were
separate entities and in a gamete either T cross-bred by self pollination, then four
or t is present. When F1 hybrids are self types of seeds having different combinations
crossed the two entities separate and then
of shape and color were obtained in second
unite independently, forming tall and dwarf
generation or F2 generation. They were
plants.
263 Genetics

www.tntextbooks.in
Pure breeding Pure breeding Results of a Dihybrid Cross:

round, yellow wrinkled, green
seeds seeds Mendel got the following results from his
Parents dihybrid cross
RRYY rryy 1. Four Types of Plants: A dihybrid cross
produced four types of F2 offsprings in the
ry
ratio of 9 with two dominant traits, 3 with
RY Gametes
one dominant trait and one recessive trait,
3 with another dominant trait and another
Round, yellow
seeds recessive trait and 1 with two recessive traits.
F1 Dihybrid
(First genera�on) 2. New Combination: Two new combinations
RrYy × RrYy of traits with round green and wrinkled
yellow had appeared in the dihybrid cross
Self-pollina�on
(F2 generation).
RY rY Ry ry
18.4 Mendel’s Laws
RY
RRYY RrYY RRYy RrYy Based on his experiments of monohybrid
rY
and dihybrid cross, Mendel proposed three
RrYY rrYY RrYy rrYy important laws which are now called as
Mendel’s Laws of Heredity.
Ry
RRYy RrYy RRyy Rryy
• Law of Dominance:
ry
RrYy rrYy Rryy rryy
“When two homozygous individuals
with one or more sets of contrasting
Phenotypic ra�o of F2 genera�on - 9:3:3:1 characters are crossed, the characters that
Round, Yellow - 9 Wrinkled, Yellow - 3 appear in the F1 hybrid are dominant and
Round, Green - 3 Wrinkled, Green - 1 those that do not appear in F1 are recessive
characters".
Figure 18.2 Dihybrid Cross
• Law of Segregation or Law of purity of
round yellow, round-green, wrinkled gametes:
yellow and wrinkled-green seeds. “When a pair of contrasting factors are
The ratio of each phenotype (or appearance) brought together in a F1 hybrid. The two
of seeds in the F2 generation is 9:3:3:1. factors of the allelic pair remain together
This is known as the Dihybrid ratio. without mixing and when gametes are
formed, the two separate out, so that only
From the above results it can be one enters each gamete.”
concluded that the factors for each character
or trait remain independent and maintain • Law of independent assortment:
their identity in the gametes. The factors are “In case of inheritance of two or more
independent to each other and pass to the pairs of characters simultaneously, the
offsprings (through gametes).

www.tntextbooks.in
factors or genes of one pair assort out

independently of the other pair.”
More to Know
T.H. Morgan was awarded Nobel Prize in

1993 for determining the role of chromosomes
in heredity.
18.5 C
hromosomes, DNA
and Genes
Figure 18.3 Structure of chromosome
The human body is made up of million
A chromosome consists of the following
cells. The nucleus of each cell contains thin
regions
thread like structures called chromosomes.
The term ‘chromosomes’ was first coined by Primary constriction: The two arms of a
Waldeyer in 1888. The chromosomes are the chromosome meet at a point called primary
carrier of genetic material which contain the constriction or centromere. The centromere
heredity information. is the region where spindle fibres attach to the
The chromosomes are highly condensed chromosomes during cell division.
coiled chromatin fibres packed with the Secondary constriction: Some chromosomes
DNA (Deoxyribonucleic acid) that forms the possess secondary constriction at any point
genetic material. Genes are segments of DNA, of the chromosome. They are known as
which are responsible for the inheritance the nuclear zone or nucleolar organizer
of a particular phenotypic character. Each (formation of nucleolus in the nucleus).
gene is present at a specific position on a
Telomere: The end of the chromosome is called
chromosome called its locus. During cell
telomere. Each extremity of the chromosome
division, the genetic information present in
has a polarity and prevents it from joining
the genes are passed from one generation to
the adjacent chromosome. It maintains and
another.
provides stability to the chromosomes.
18.5.1 Structure of a Chromosome Satellite: Some of the chromosomes have an
elongated knob-like appendage at one end
The chromosomes are thin, long and
of the chromosome known as satellite. The
thread like structures consisting of two identical
chromosomes with satellites are called as the
strands called sister chromatids. They are held
sat-chromosomes.
together by the centromere. Each chromatid is
made up of spirally coiled thin structure called
Telomeres act as aging clock
chromonema. The chromonema has number of
in every cell.
bead-like structures along its length which are
Telomeres are protective
called chromomeres. The chromosomes are
sequences of nucleotides found in
made up of DNA,RNA, chromosomal proteins
chromosomes. As a cell divides every time,
(histones and non-histones) and certain metallic
they become shorter. Telomeres get too
ions. These proteins provide structural support
short to do their job, causing our cells to age.
to the chromosome .
265 Genetics

www.tntextbooks.in
Centromere Centromere
Short arm
Equal
Long arm
arm
Figure 18.4 Types of chromosomes based on position of centromere
18.5.2 Types of Chromosomes 18.5.4 Karyotype

based on the position of The number of chromosomes in any living
Centromere organism (animal or plant) is constant. In
Based on the position of centromere, the human, each cell normally contains 23 pairs
chromosomes are classified as Telocentric, of chromosomes. Out of which 22 pairs are
Acrocentric, Submetacentric and Metacentric autosomes and the 23rd pair is the allosome or
1. Telocentric– The centromere is found on sex chromosome.
the proximal end. They are rod shaped In the body cells of sexually reproducing
chromosomes. organisms, the chromosomes generally occur
2. Acrocentric – The centromere is found at in pairs. This condition is called diploid (2n).
The gametes produced by the organisms
the one end with a short arm and a long arm.
contain a single set of chromosomes. Hence,
They are also rod-shaped chromosomes.
the gametes are said to be haploid (n).
3. Submetacentric – The centromere is
Karyotype is the number, size and shape of
found near the centre of the chromosome.
chromosomes in the cell nucleus of an organism.
Thus forming two unequal arms. They are J
Idiogram is the diagrammatic representation
shaped or L shaped chromosomes.
of karyotype of a species. It consists of all
4. Metacentric – The centromere occurs in
the metaphasic chromosomes arranged in
the centre of the chromosome and form two homologous pairs according to decreasing
equal arms. They are V shaped chromosomes length, thickness, position of centromere, shape
etc., with the sex chromosomes placed at the end.
18.5.3 Types of Chromosomes
based on function
The eukaryotic chromosomes are classified
into autosomes and allosomes.
Autosomes contain genes that determine
the somatic (body) characters. Male and
female have equal number of autosomes.
Allosomes are chromosomes which
are responsible for determining the sex of
an individual. They are also called as sex Figure 18.5 Normal human karyotype
chromosomes or hetero-chromosomes. There
are two types of sex chromosomes, X and 18.6 Structure of DNA
Y- chromosomes. Human male have one X
DNA is the hereditary material as it contains
chromosome and one Y chromosome and
the genetic information. It is the most important
human female have two X chromosomes.
constituent of a chromosome. The most widely

www.tntextbooks.in
accepted model of DNA is the *

Cytosine (C) links Guanine (G) with
double helical structure of three hydrogen bonds( C ≡ G)
James Watson and Francis
This is called complementary base
Crick. They proposed the
pairing.
three-dimensional model of
DNA on the basis of X-ray
diffraction studies of DNA obtained by Rosalind
Franklin and Maurice Wilkins. In appreciation
of their discoveries on the molecular structure
of nucleic acids Watson, Crick and Wilkins were
awarded Nobel prize for Medicine in 1962.
Chemical Composition of DNA molecule
DNA is a large molecule consisting of
millions of nucleotides. Hence, it is also called
a polynucleotide. Each nucleotide consists of
three components.
1. A sugar molecules – Deoxyribose sugar.
2. A nitrogenous base. Figure 18.6 Structure of DNA
There are two types of nitrogenous bases in 5. Hydrogen bonds between the nitrogenous
DNA. They are bases make the DNA molecule stable.
(a) Purines (Adenine and Guanine)
6. Each turn of the double helix is 34 A°
(b) Pyrimidines (Cytosine and Thymine) (3.4 nm). There are ten base pairs in a
3. A phosphate group complete turn.
Nucleoside and Nucleotide 7. The nucleotides in a helix are joined
together by phosphodiester bonds.
Nucleoside = Nitrogen base + Sugar
Nucleotide = Nucleoside + Phosphate
The nucleotides are formed according to
the purines and pyrimidines present in them.
18.6.1 Watson and Crick model

of DNA
1. DNA molecule consists of two
polynucleotide chains.
2. These chains form a double helix structure
with two strands which run anti-parallel
Figure 18.7 Nucleotides in a DNA
to one another.
3. Nitrogenous bases in the centre are linked More to Know
to sugar-phosphate units which form the
backbone of the DNA. Chargaff rule of DNA base pairing
4. Pairing between the nitrogenous bases is Erwin Chargaff states that in DNA, the
very specific and is always between purine proportion of adenine is always equal to that
and pyrimidine linked by hydrogen bonds. of thymine. and the proportion of guanine
* Adenine (A) links Thymine (T) with two always equal to that of cytosine.
hydrogen bonds (A = T)
267 Genetics

www.tntextbooks.in
18.6.2 DNA Replication by the DNA template close to the origin of

DNA replication is one of the basic process replication site.
that occurs within a cell. DNA molecule
Synthesis of new complementary strand
produces exact copies of its own structure
from the parent strand
during replication process. The two strands
of a DNA molecule have complementary base After the formation of RNA primer,
pairs, the nucleotides of each strand provide the nucleotides are added with the help of
information needed to produce its new strand. an enzyme DNA polymerase and a new
The two resulting daughter cells contain exactly complementary strand of DNA is formed from
the same genetic information as the parent cell. each of the parent strand. The synthesis is
DNA replication involves the following steps unidirectional.
Origin of replication In one strand, the daughter strand is
synthesized as a continuous strand which is
The specific points on the DNA, where
called leading strand. In the other strand, short
the replication begins, is the site of origin of
replication. The two strands open and separate segments of DNA are synthesized. This strand
at this point forming the replication fork. is called lagging strand. The short segments
of DNA are called Okazaki fragments. The
Unwinding of DNA molecule fragments are joined together by the enzyme,
The enzyme called helicase, bind to the DNA ligase.
origin of replication site. Helicase separates the
The replication stops when the replication
two strands of the DNA. The enzyme called
fork of the two sides meet at a site called
topoisomerase separates the double helix above
terminus, which is situated opposite to origin
the replication fork and removes the twists
of replication site
formed during the unwinding process. Each
of the separated DNA strands function as a
18.6.3 Significance of DNA
template.
It is responsible for the transmission
Formation of RNA primer
of hereditary information from one
An RNA primer is a short segment of generation to next generation.
RNA nucleotides. The primer is synthesized
DNA polymerase
Original DNA
Topoisomerase
Okazaki RNA
fragment primer Primase
Helicase
Parent DNA
Figure 18.8 Replication of DNA

www.tntextbooks.in
It contains information required for the Now let’s see how the chromosomes take
formation of proteins. part in this formation. Fertilization of the egg
It controls the developmental process and (22+X) with a sperm (22+X) will produce a
life activities of an organism. female child (44+XX). while fertilization of the
egg (22+X) with a sperm (22+Y) will give rise
to a male child (44+XY).
18.7 Sex Determination
The formation of zygote into male or 18.7.2 Mutation

female sex during development is called The term mutation was introduced by
sex determination. Sex is determined by the Hugo De Vries in 1901 when he observed
chromosomes of an individual. phenotypic changes in the evening primrose
18.7.1 Sex Determination in Human plant, Oenothera lamarckiana. Mutation is
an inheritable sudden change in the genetic
Recall that human beings have 23 pairs
material (DNA) of an organism. Mutations
of chromosomes out of which 22 pairs are
are classified into two main types, namely
autosomes and one pair (23rd pair) is the sex
chromosomal mutation and gene mutation.
chromosome. The female gametes or the
eggs formed are similar in their chromosome 1. Chromosomal mutation
type (22+XX). Therefore, human females are The sudden change in the structure
homogametic. or number of chromosomes is called
The male gametes or sperms produced are of chromosomal mutation. This may result in
two types. They are produced in equal proportions. (i) Changes in the structure of
The sperm bearing (22+X) chromosomes and the chromosomes: Structural changes in the
sperm bearing (22+Y) chromosomes. The human chromosomes usually occurs due to errors
males are called heterogametic. in cell division. Changes in the number and
arrangement of genes takes place as a result of
deletion, duplication, inversion and translocation
in chromosomes.
(ii) Changes in the number of
chromosomes: They involve addition or
deletion in the number of chromosomes
present in a cell. This is called ploidy. There
are two types of ploidy
Female Male (a) Euploidy (b) Aneuploidy.
Figure 18.9 Sex determination in human
Euploidy: It is the condition in which the
It is a chance of probability as to which individual bears more than the usual number
category of sperm fuses with the egg. If the of diploid (2n) chromosomes. If an individual
egg (X) is fused by the X-bearing sperm an has three haploid sets of chromosomes, the
XX individual (female) is produced. If the condition is called triploidy (3n). Triploid
egg (X) is fused by the Y-bearing sperm an plants and animals are typically sterile.If it
XY individual (male) is produced. The sperm, has four haploid sets of chromosomes, the
produced by the father, determines the sex of condition is called tetraploidy (4n). Tetraploid
the child. The mother is not responsible in plants are advantageous as they often result in
determining the sex of the child. increased fruit and flower size.
269 Genetics

www.tntextbooks.in
Sickle cell anaemia is

caused by the mutation of a
single gene. Alteration in the
gene brings a change in the structure of
the protein part of haemoglobin molecule.
Due to the change in the protein molecule,
the red blood cell (RBC) that carries the
haemoglobin is sickle shaped.
Points to Remember
Triploid Oyster Diploid Oyster Variations are quite apparent among

closely related groups of organisms.
Figure 18.10 Euploidy
Mendel had choosen seven pairs of
Aneuploidy: It is the loss or gain of one distinguishing traits: flower colour,
or more chromosomes in a set. It is of three position, seed colour, shape, pod colour,
types. Monosomy (2n-1), Trisomy (2n+1)and pod shape, stem length.
Nullisomy (2n-2). In man, Down’s syndrome is Every pea plant has two ‘factors’ which
one of the commonly known aneuploid condition. are responsible for producing a particular
Down’s syndrome character or trait is called allele.
The process of acquiring characters or
This condition was first identified by a
traits from parents is called ‘Heredity’.
doctor named Langdon Down in1866.
Each human cell contains 23 pairs of
It is a genetic condition in which there is an
chromosomes. Out of these 22 pairs are
extra copy of chromosome 21 (Trisomy 21). It
called autosomes and one pair is called
is associated with mental retardation, delayed
allosomes.
development, behavioural problems, weak
muscle tone, vision and hearing disability are A chromosome consists of the regions:
some of the conditions seen in these children. primary constriction, centromere, secondary
constriction, telomere and satellite.
Based on the position of the centromere,
the chromosomes are classified as
telocentric, acrocentric, sub metacentric
and metacentric chromosomes.
Each nucleotide of DNA consists of a
deoxyribose sugar, a nitrogenous base
Figure 18.11 Aneuploidy and a phosphate group. Pairing is always
between a purine and a pyrimidine.
2. Gene or point mutation
The sperm, produced by the father,
Gene mutation is the changes occurring
in nucleotide sequence of a gene. It involves determines the sex of the child. The
substitution, deletion, insertion or inversion mother is not responsible in determining
of a single or more than one nitrogenous base. the sex of the child.
Gene alteration results in abnormal protein Mutation is an inheritable change in the
formation in an organism. genetic material of an organism.

www.tntextbooks.in
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION

8. Th
e loss of one or more chromosome in a ploidy
According to Mendel alleles have the
1. is called ___________.
following character
a) Tetraploidy b) Aneuploidy
a) Pair of genes c) Euploidy d) polyploidy
b) Responsible for character
c) Production of gametes II. Fill in the blanks
d) Recessive factors
The pairs of contrasting character (traits) of
1.
2. 9 : 3 : 3 : 1 ratio is due to Mendel are called _________.
a) Segregation b) Crossing over 2.
Physical expression of a gene is called
c) Independent assortment d) Recessiveness _________
3.
The thin thread like structures found
3.
The region of the chromosome where in the nucleus of each cell are called
the spindle fibres get attached during cell _________.
division
4. DNA consists of two ____________ chains
a) Chromomere b) Centrosome 5. An inheritable change in the amount or
c) Centromere d) Chromonema the structure of a gene or a chromosome is
4. The centromere is found at the centre of the called _______________.
________________ chromosome. Identify whether the statement are
III.
a) Telocentric b) Metacentric True or False. Correct the false statement
c) Sub-metacentric d) Acrocentric 1. A typical Mendelian dihybrid ratio of F2
5.
The _____________ units form the generation is 3:1.
backbone of the DNA. A recessive factor is altered by the presence
2.
a) 5 carbon sugar b) Phosphate of a dominant factor.
c) Nitrogenous bases d) Sugar phosphate 3. Each gamete has only one allele of a gene.
6. Okasaki fragments are joined together by 4. Hybrid is an offspring from a cross between
___________________. genetically different parent.
a) Helicase b) DNA polymerase S ome of the chromosomes have an
5.
c) RNA primer d) DNA ligase elongated knob-like appendages known as
7.
The number of chromosomes found in telomere.
human beings are __________________. 6.
New nucleotides are added and new
a) 22 pairs of autosomes and 1 pair of complementary strand of DNA is formed
allosomes. with the help of enzyme DNA polymerase.
b) 22 autosomes and 1 allosome 7. Down’s syndrome is the genetic condition
c) 46 autosomes with 45 chromosomes.
d) 46 pairs autosomes and 1 pair of
allosomes.
271 Genetics

www.tntextbooks.in

1. Autosomes - Trisomy 21
2. Diploid condition - 9:3:3:1
3. Allosome - 22 pair of chromosome
4. Down’s syndrome - 2n
5. Dihybrid ratio - 23rd pair of chromosome
V. Answer in a sentence

1. W hat is a cross in which inheritance of
two pairs of contrasting characters are 1.
Explain with an example the inheritance
studied? of dihybrid cross. How is it different from
monohybrid cross?
2. Name the conditions when both the alleles
are identical? 2.
How is the structure of DNA organised?
3.
A garden pea plant produces axial white What is the biological significance of DNA?
flowers. Another of the same species produced 3. The sex of the new born child is a matter of
terminal violet flowers. Identify the dominant chance and neither of the parents may be
trait? considered responsible for it. What would be
4.
What is the name given to the segments the possible fusion of gametes to determine
of DNA, which are responsible for the the sex of the child?
inheritance of a particular character?
5. Name the bond which binds the nucleotides VIII. Higher Order Thinking Skills (HOTS)
in a DNA. 1. Flowers of the garden pea are bisexual and
self-pollinated. Therefore, it is difficult to
VI. Short answers questions perform hybridization experiment by crossing
1.
Why did Mendel select pea plant for his a particular pistil with the specific pollen
experiments? grains. How Mendel made it possible in his
2.
What do you understand by the term monohybrid and dihybrid crosses?
phenotype and genotype? 2. Pure-bred tall pea plants are first crossed with
3. What are allosomes? pure-bred dwarf pea plants. The pea plants
4. What are Okazaki fragments? obtained in F1 generation are then selfed to
produce F2 generation of pea plants.
Why is euploidy considered to be
5.
advantageous to both plants and animals? a. What do the plants of F1 generation look
6. A pure tall plant (TT) is crossed with pure like?
dwarf plant (tt), what would be the F1 and F2 b. What is the ratio of tall plants to dwarf
generations? Explain. plants in F2 generation?
7. Explain the structure of a chromosome.
c.
Which type of plants were missing
8. Label the parts of the DNA in the diagram in F1 generation but reappeared in F2
given below. Explain the structure briefly. generation?

www.tntextbooks.in
3. Kavitha gave birth to a female baby. Her family IX. Value based question
members say that she can give birth to only 1. Under which conditions does the law of
female babies because of her family history. independent assortment hold good and
Is the statement given by her family members why?
true. Justify your answer.
REFERENCE BOOKS I NT ER NET R ES O U RCES
1.
Veer Bala Rastogi, Introductory Cytology, https://www.genome.gov
Rastogi Publications, Meerut https://www. genetics.edu.au
2. P. S. Verma and V.K. Agarwal, Genetics, S. https://www.bioexplorer.net/chromosomal-
Chand and Company, New Delhi mutation.html/
3. Gerald Karp, Janet Iwasa and Wallace Marshall, https://www.ndss.org/about-down-syndrome/
Cell and Molecular Biology - Concepts and down-syndrome/
Experiment, 8th Edition, Wiley and Sons
Publishers
Concept Map
Genetics
Mendel’s Laws
Chromosomes DNA Mutation
of Heredity
Structure Chromosomal mutation

•Primary constriction
Nucleotide
•Changes in the structure
Law of Dominance
•a pentose sugar •Law of Dominance
•Secondary constriction •Changes in number
•a nitrogenous base •Law of Segregation
•Centromere •Euploidy
• a phosphate group •Law of Independent
•Telomere •Aneuploidy
•Satellite • Down’s syndrome assortment
Replication Gene mutation

Types of chromosome
•Origin of replication •Substitution
•Telocentric •Unwinding of DNA •Deletion
•Acrocentric •Formation of RNA primer •Insertion
•Submetacentric •Synthesis of new •Inversion
•Metacentric complementary DNA
•Termination
Kinds of chromosomes
•Autosomes
•Allosomes
Sex determination
inhuman
•Male (44+XY)
•Female (44+XX
273 Genetics

www.tntextbooks.in
Learning Objectives

Know about Big Bang theory on the origin of universe.
Understand theories of origin of life.
Discuss the process of evolution on the basis of the available evidences.
Relate the principles of Lamarck and Darwin with evolution.
Know how variation occurs and its significance.
List the importance of fossils and describe the process of fossilization.
Identify the plants of ethnobotanical importance.
Realize about extraterrestrial life.
(Big Bang) and originated 15 billion years ago.

Introduction
The universe comprised of stars, clouds of gas
Living organisms possess distinct and dust which form the galaxies. The solar
characteristics, display organisational and system was probably created when the gaseous
functional unity, entail a mechanism of origin clouds started to collapse due to the force of
and evolution of diversities and maintain a its own gravity forming atoms and particles.
balanced relationship with nature. Most aspects Atoms, dust grains and gaseous disc aggregated
of evolution indicate that the knowledge of the to form clumps and gave rise to planets. This
past has become essential for fully understanding forms the solar system of the milky way galaxy.
the present. Life since its beginning on earth Earth was supposed to have been formed about
had changed through time. The history of life 4.5 billion years back. Life appeared 500 million
years after the formation of earth.
comprises of two aspects, one is the origin of life
on earth and the other is mechanism involved
in the gradual changes and adaptations of living 19.1 Theories on Origin of Life
organisms through time which is known as the
evolution of life. Many theories have been postulated to
explain the origin of life. The views on the origin
Origin of Earth: Origin of life is linked
of life has been putforth as
with the origin of earth. The Big Bang theory
explains the Origin of Universe. It proposes Special creation: This idea embodies
that the universe had an explosive beginning that life on Earth is a divine creation and also
274

www.tntextbooks.in
attributes to supernatural event at a particular 19.2.1 Evidences from

time in the past.It also emphasizes that life has Morphology and Anatomy
not changed ever since its origin.
The comparative study of morphology and
Spontaneous generation (Abiogenesis): anatomy of animals, reveal that they possess
According to this theory life originated common set of characteristics.
spontaneously from lifeless matter. It was
i. Homologous organs: The homologous
believed that fishes originated from mud, frogs
organs are those which have inherited
from moist soil and insects from decaying
from common ancestors with similar
matter.
developmental pattern in embryos. The
Biogenesis: It was speculated by Louis fore limbs of mammals are homologous
Pasteur (1862) that life originates from pre- structures. A human hand, a front leg of a
existing life. He showed that pre-sterilised cat, flipper of a whale and a bat’s wing look
flasks kept closed airtight, with killed yeast, did dissimilar and adapted for different
not give rise to any life form, while in another functions. Their mode of development
flask kept open to air living organisms arose and basic structure of bone are similar.
from killed yeast.
Human
Extraterresterial or Cosmic origin: Some Cat Whale Bat
scientists still believe that life came from outer Humerus
space. This states that units of life called spores Humerus

Ulna Radius
Carpal
(Panspermia) were transferred to different 5
Metacarpal
Radius
Ulna
4
planets including earth. This is still an idea of Carpal
1
Radius
some astronomers. Ulna
Carpal 5
Chemical Evolution of Life: This idea Meta- 1

3 4 2
carpal
was developed by Oparin (1922) and Haldane 5
1
5 43
2 2
3
Phalanges
(1929). They proposed that with the conditions 4 32 Phalanges
prevailing on earth, life arose by a series of Figure 19.1 Forelimbs of vertebrates showing
sequential chemical reactions. The first form homologous structure
of life could have come from pre-existing non-
ii. Analogous organs: The analogous
living inorganic molecules which gave rise
organs look similar and perform similar
to formation of diverse organic molecules
functions but they have different origin
which are transformed into colloid system to
produce life. The modern concept on chemical Bat wing
evolution regarding origin of life was accepted.
19.2 Evidences of Evolution Bird wing
Evolution can be better understood only

by observing the interrelationship between
the existing organisms and also relating the Insect wing
similarities with the extinct organisms. The inter

relationship of the organisms is also supported
by evidences from different branches of biology.
These evidences support the concept that all Figure 19.2 Analogous structure showing a bat
organisms have evolved from common ancestors. wing, a bird wing and an insect wing
275 Origin and Evolution of Life

www.tntextbooks.in
and developmental pattern. The function animal repeats the evolutionary history of the
of the wings of a bat, the wings of a bird entire race of the animal.
and wings of an insect are similar, but
their basic structures are different. 19.2.2 Evidences from
Palaeontology
iii. Vestigial organs: The degenerated
and non-functional organs of Palaeontology deals with
animals are called vestigial organs. the study of fossils. Leonardo
The same organs are found to be well- da Vinci is called the Father of
developed and functional, in some Palaeontology. The study of
of the related forms. Some of the fossils helps us to understand
vestigial organs in man are vermiform the line of evolution of many
appendix, nictitating membrane, invertebrates and vertebrates. Fossil records
caudal vertebra, coccyx etc. show that the evolution has taken a gradual
process from simple to complex organisms.
iv. Atavism: The reappearance of ancestral
The origin of modern birds is supported by the
characters in some individuals is called
evidences from palaeontology.
atavism. e.g. Presence of rudimentary
tail in new born babies, presence of Archaeopteryx: Archaeopteryx is the
thick hair on the human body. oldest known fossil bird. It was an early bird-
like form found in the Jurassic period.It is
19.2.2 Evidences from considered to be a connecting link between
Embryology reptiles and birds. It had wings with feathers,
like a bird. It had long tail, clawed digits and
The study of comparative embryology
conical teeth, like a reptile.
of different animals, supports the concept of
evolution. The embryos from fish to mammals
are similar in their early stages of development.
The differentiation of their special characters
appear in the later stages of development.
Gill-slits
Figure 19.4 Archaeopteryx - Fossil bird

Gill
slits
Tail Tail
Gills Fore-limb bud
19.3 Theories of Evolution

Hind-limb bud
Life had evolved along with evolution of

earth towards the end of 18th century. Evolution
is the gradual change occurring in living
Fish Salamander Tortoise Chick Rabbit Man
organisms over a period of time. Formation
Figure 19.3 Embryonic development of new species due to changes in specific
of vertebrates characters over several generations as response
Biogenetic law or Recapitulation theory to natural selection, is called evolution. The
was given by Ernst Haeckel. According to this natural changes occuring is explained through
theory, Ontogeny recapitulates Phylogeny. the theories of evolution as proposed by
The stages of development of the individual Lamarck and Darwin.

www.tntextbooks.in
19.3.1 Lamarckism leaves from trees. The continuous stretching

of their neck and forelimbs resulted in
Jean Baptiste Lamarck (1744-1829) was a
the development of long neck and long
French naturalist, well known for his theory of
forelimbs which is an example for constant
evolution. Lamarck’s theory of evolution was
published in ‘Philosophic Zoologique’ in the use of an organ. The degenerated wing of
year 1809. It is popularly known as ‘Theory of Kiwi is an example for organ of disuse.
inheritance of Acquired Characters” or “Use iv. Theory of Inheritance of acquired
and Disuse theory” or Lamarckism. characters
When there is a change in the environment,
Principles of Lamarckism the animals respond to the change. They
i. Internal vital force develop adaptive structures. The characters
Living organisms or their component parts developed by the animals during their life
tend to increase in size continuously. This time, in response to the environmental
increase in size is due to the inherent ability changes are called acquired characters.
of the organisms. According to Lamarck, the acquired
ii. Environment and new needs characters are transmitted to the offspring
A change in the environment brings about by the process of inheritance.
changes in the need of the organisms. In
response to the changing environment, 19.3.2 Darwinism or Theory of
the organisms develop certain adaptive Natural Selection
characters. The adaptations of the organisms Charles Darwin (1809-1882) was one
may be in the form of development of new of the great naturalist and philosopher of 18th
parts of the body. century. He was born in England in 1809. While
iii. Use and disuse theory studying in college through his friendship with
Lamarck’s use and disuse theory states that Professor J.S.Henslow he was fascinated towards
if an organ is used constantly, the organ nature. At that time the British Admiralty
develops well and gets strengthened. When planned a voyage of exploration for 5 years
an organ is not used for a long time, it on a ship named H.M.S. Beagle around South
gradually degenerates. America. Dr Henslow was asked to nominate
The ancestors of giraffe were provided a young naturalist for the voyage. Darwin was
with short neck and short forelimbs. Due to given the opportunity. During his five years
shortage of grass, they were forced to feed on (1831–1835) voyage he visited many parts of
Environmental change
Need for new structure
Development of new structure
Organs of Use Organs of Disuse
Inheritance of adaptive characters Degeneration of the structure
Origin of new species

Flow chart showing the postulates of Lamarckism

www.tntextbooks.in
the world, a number of islands including the remain the same. This creates an intense
Galapagos island and Pacific island. Darwin competition among the organisms for food
made elaborate observations on nature of the and space leading to struggle. The struggle
land, plants and animals of the regions he visited. for existence are of three types:
He further worked for a period of 20 years to a. Intraspecific struggle: Competition
develop the theory of natural selection. among the individuals of same species.
Darwin published his observations and b. Interspecific struggle: Competition
conclusions under the name ‘Origin of species’ between the organisms of different
in 1859. The book of Darwin demonstrates species living together.
the fact of evolution. It elaborates on the c. Environmental struggle: Natural
theory of Natural selection for evolutionary conditions like extreme heat or cold,
transformation, drought and floods can affect the
existence of organisms
Principles of Darwinism iii. Variations
i. Overproduction The occurrence of variation is a
Living beings have the ability to reproduce characteristic feature of all plants and
more individuals and form their own animals. Small variations are important
progeny. They have the capacity to for evolution. According to Darwin
multiply in a geometrical manner. This will favourable variations are useful to the
organism and unfavourable variations are
increase reproductive potential leading to
harmful or useless to the organism.
overproduction.
iv. Survival of the fittest or Natural selection
ii. Struggle for existence
During the struggle for existence, the
Due to over production, a geometric ratio
organisms which can overcome the
of increase in population occurs. The space
challenging situation, survive and adapt to
to live and food available for the organisms
Overproduction
Struggle for existence
Variations
Organisms eliminated from Natural selection

the environment
Survival of the fittest
Inheritance of acquired
characters
Gradual accumulation of
favourable characters
Origin of new species
Flowchart showing the postulates of Darwinism


www.tntextbooks.in
the surrounding environment. Organisms Discontinuous variation: These are sudden

which are unable to face the challenges, are changes which occur in an organism due to
unfit to survive and disappear. The process mutations. They do not have any intermediate
of selection of organisms with favourable forms. These large variations are not useful for
variation is called as natural selection.
evolution. e.g. short legged Ancon sheep, six or
v. Origin of species more digits (fingers) in human, etc.
According to Darwin, new species
originates by the gradual accumulation Discontinuous variation form the basis for
of favourable variations for a number of Mutation theory proposed by De Vries.
generations.
Relationship between Mutation and
19.4 Variation Variation
Mutation and Variation are two events
Sexual reproduction, which involves involved in the process of evolution. Mutation
meiosis helps in recombination of genes arises due to errors occurring in DNA during
during gametic fusion. This leads to replication or exposure to UV rays or chemicals.
differences in the phenotype of the offspring Mutation leads to variation. It brings about
from its parents. These differences are called changes in a single individual.
variation.
Variation is the difference found among
individuals of the same species and the 19.5 Paleobotany
offspring of the same parent. Variation is the
raw material which plays an important role Paleobotany is derived from Greek words
in evolution. Evolution would not be possible paleon that means “old” and botany the study
without variation. of plants. It is the branch of paleontology that
deals with recovery and identification of plant
Types of variations remains of geological past.
Somatic variation: These are the variations A plant fossil is any preserved part of
which affect the body (somatic) cells of the a plant that has died long back. Fossils may
organisms. They are not heritable. They occur be a prehistoric impression that may be
due to environmental factors. hundred to millions of years old. Majority
Germinal variation: These variations are of the plant fossils are disarticulated parts
produced in germ cells of an organism. They are of plants, it is rare to find plants to be
inherited. They may be present in ancestors or preserved as whole.
may occur suddenly. They are classified into two
types: Importance of fossils
1. Continuous variation i They throw light on phylogeny and
2. Discontinuous variation evolution of plants.
Continuous variation: These are small variations ii Fossil plants give a historical approach to
which occur among individuals of a population. plant kingdom.
They are also called as fluctuating variations. iii Fossils are useful in classification of
They occur by gradual accumulation in a plants.
population. e.g. skin colour, height and weight iv. Fossil plants can be used in the field of
of an individual, colour of eye, etc. descriptive and comparative anatomy.

www.tntextbooks.in
Kaspar Maria Von Sternberg bed and are covered by sediment. The process
He is the “Father of Paleobotany” (1761– of sedimentation goes on continuously and
1838) was born in Europe. He established the fossils are formed.
Bohemian National Museum in Prague and is
Infiltration or Replacement
deemed to be the founder of Modern Paleobotany.
The precipitation of minerals takes place
Birbal Sahani which later on infiltrate the cell wall. The
He is the “Father of Indian Paleobotany” process is brought about by several mineral
(1891–1949). He presented his research on two elements such as silica, calcium carbonate
different areas of Paleobotany (i) The anatomy and magnesium carbonate. Hard parts are
and morphology of Paleozoic Ferns (ii) The fossil dissolved and replaced by these minerals.
plants of the Indian Gondwana Formations.
Living Fossils: These are living
19.5.1 Fossilization
organisms that are similar in
The process of formation of fossil in the appearance to their fossilized
rocks is called fossilization. distant ancestors and usually have no
Common methods of fossilization includes extinct close features. e.g. Ginko biloba.
petrifaction, molds and cast, carbonization,
preservation, compression and infiltration.
19.5.2 Determination of age of
Petrifaction Fossils
Minerals like silica slowly penetrate in and The age of fossils is determined by radioactive
replace the original organic tissue and forms elements present in it. They may be carbon,
a rock like fossil. This method of fossilization uranium, lead or potassium. It is used in
can preserve hard and soft parts. Most bones paleobotany and anthropology for determining
and wood fossils are petrified. the age of human fossils and manuscripts.
Mold and Cast Radioactive carbon(C14) dating method
A replica of a plant or animal is preserved This method was discovered by
in sedimentary rocks. When the organism W.F. Libby (1956). Carbon consumption of
gets buried in sediment it is dissolved by animals and plants stops after death and since
underground water leaving a hollow depression then, only the decaying process of C14 occurs
called a mold. It shows the original shape continuously. The time passed since death of a
but does not reveal the internal structure. plant or animal can be calculated by measuring
Minerals or sediment fill the hollow depression the amount of C14. present in their body.
and forms a cast.
Preservation More to Know
Original remains can be preserved in What is the Geologic Time Scale?
ice or amber (tree sap). They protect the The geological time scale is a system of
organisms from decay. The entire plant or chronological dating that relates geological
animal is preserved. rock strata to time, and is used by geologists,
Compression paleontologists, and other Earth scientists to
describe the timing and relationships of events
When an organism dies, the hard parts
that have occurred during Earth’s history.
of their bodies settle at the bottom of the sea

www.tntextbooks.in
Tribal communities utilize

Thiruvakkarai fossil wood
ethnomedicinal plant parts like bark,
park (Villupuram district,
stem, roots, leaves, flower bud, flowers,
Tamil Nadu): 2 million years
fruits, seeds, oils, resins, dyes, gum for
ago tree trunks that got buried
the treatment of diseases like diarrhoea,
along the river, incourse of time the
fever, headache, diabetes, jaundice,
organic matter was replaced by silica and
snakebites, leprosy, etc.
was fossilized. They retained their color,
shape and texture and was converted
into solid rocks. The 19.7 Astrobiology/Exobiology
annular rings, the
texture, colors of the Are we alone in the universe? If your answer
layers, nodes and is no, then how do you detect the existence of
every properties of life in space? Astrobiology/exobiology is the
plants are still visible. science which looks for the presence of extra
terrestrial life in the universe.
Astrobiology deals with the origin,
19.6 Ethnobotany evolution and distribution of life in the
universe and to investigate the possibility of
Ethnobotany is the study of a region’s
life in other world.
plants and their practical uses through the
traditional knowledge of the local culture The major concept in astrobiology is the
of people. The term Ethnobotany was coined habitable zone. The theory explains that any
by J.W. Harshberger in 1895 to include the planets can support the existence of life, if it
study of plants used by the primitive and fulfills two important criteria.
aboriginal people. Though this discipline has i It must have a right mass to retain an
existed for ages, ethnobotany emerged as a atmosphere.
distinct academic branch of natural science in
ii It must have an orbit at just the right
20th century.
distance from its star (Sun) that it allows
Aspects of ethnobotany liquid water to exist. Thus, the distance
need to be neither too hot or not too cold
Ethnobotany has relevance with problems
and is often referred as Goldilock Zone for
of nutrition, health care and life support
life.
system, faith in plants, cottage industries,
economic upliftment, conservation of In our solar system ‘Earth’ is the only
biodiversity and sustainable use of plant planet in the goldilock zone. Since, this zone
resources. varies at times as the star evolves, we know
that Mars have also been habitable. The life on
Importance of Ethnobotany
Mars are likely to be the creatures, we find in
It provides traditional uses of plant. extreme environments on earth.
It gives information about certain The organisms which live in extreme
unknown and known useful plants. environmental conditions on earth are called
The ethnomedicinal data will serve extremophiles. Thus, within our own Solar
as a useful source of information for System, there are many areas that are different
the chemists, pharmacologists and from the Earth where it is probable to find the
practitioners of herbal medicine. presence of life similar to extremophile bacteria.

www.tntextbooks.in
Figure 19.5 Microbial diversity from sandstone and granite from the McMurdo Dry Valleys, Antarctica
selection and origin of species are the main

NASA is developing the Mars postulates of Darwinism.
2020 astrobiology to investigate
Each species tends to produce large

an astrobiologically relevant
number of offsprings, but only the fittest
ancient environment on Mars, its surface can survive.
geological processes and the possibility
Homologous, analogous organs and

of past life on Mars and preservation of embryological evidences explain
biosignatures within accessible geological evolutionary relationships.
materials. Some traits in organisms would be similar

because they are inherited from a common
Points to Remember
ancestor.
Lamarck proposed that the acquired
 Fossils are evidences of ancient life forms

characters are passed on to the offsprings or ancient habitats which have been
in the next generation preserved by natural processes.
Internal vital force, environment and
 Ethnobotanical importance of various

new needs, use and disuse theory and types of plants are know through
inheritance of acquired characters are the traditional knowledge.
main principles of Lamarckism. Astrobiology/exobiology is the science

Overproduction, struggle for existence,
 which looks for the presence of extra
variations, survival of the fittest or Natural terrestrial life in the universe
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I Choose the correct answer 2. The ‘use and disuse theory’ was proposed
1. Biogenetic law states that ______________ by ______________.
a. Ontogeny and phylogeny go together a. Charles Darwin
b. Ontogeny recapitulates phylogeny b. Ernst Haeckel
c. Phylogeny recapitulates ontogeny c. Jean Baptiste Lamarck
d.
There is no relationship between d. Gregor Mendel
phylogeny and ontogeny

www.tntextbooks.in
3. Paleontologists deal with IV Match the following

a. Embryological evidences Column A Column B
b. Fossil evidences a) Atavism caudal vertebrae and
c. Vestigial organ evidences vermiform appendix
d. All the above b) Vestigial a forelimb of a cat and a
organs bat’s wing
4. The best way of direct dating fossils of
c) Analogous rudimentary tail and
recent origin is by
organs thick hair on the body
a. Radio-carbon method d) Homologous a wing of a bat and
b. Uranium lead method organs a wing of an insect
c. Potassium-argon method e) Wood park radiocarbon dating
d. Both (a) and (c) f) W.F. Libby Thiruvakkarai
5. The term Ethnobotany was coined by
V Answer in a word or sentence
a. Khorana b. J.W. Harsbberger
1. A human hand, a front leg of a cat, a
c. Ronald Ross d. Hugo de Vries
front flipper of a whale and a bat’s wing
II Fill in the blanks look dissimilar and adapted for different
functions. What is the name given to these
1. The characters developed by the animals
organs?
during their life time, in response to
the environmental changes are called 2. Which organism is considered to be the
fossil bird?
______________.
3. What is the study of fossils called?
2. The degenerated and non-functional
organs found in an organism are called VI Short answers questions
______________.
1. The degenerated wing of a kiwi is an
3. The forelimbs of bat and human are acquired character. Why is it an acquired
examples of ______________ organs. character?
4. The theory of natural selection for 2. Why is Archaeopteryx considered to be a
evolution was proposed by ____________. connecting link?
3. Define Ethnobotany and write its importance.
III
State true or false. Correct the false
4. How can you determine the age of the fossils?
statements
1. The use and disuse theory of organs’ was VII Long answer questions
postulated by Charles Darwin. 1. Natural selection is a driving force for
2. The homologous organs look similar evolution-How?
and perform similar functions but they 2. How do you differentiate homologous
have different origin and developmental organs from analogous organs?
pattern. 3. How does fossilization occur in plants?
3. Birds have evolved from reptiles.

www.tntextbooks.in
IX Higher Order Thinking Skills (HOTS) 2. Stephen. C. Stearns and Rolf. F. Hoekstra

1. Arun was playing in the garden. Suddenly Evolution - An introduction
he saw a dragon fly sitting on a plant. He 3. Archer, S.D.J., Asuncion de los, R., Lee,
observed the wings of it. He thought it K.C., Niederberger, T.S., Cary, S.C.,
looked similar to a wing of a crow. Is he Coyne, K.J., Douglas, S., Lacap-Bugler,
correct? Give reason for your answer. D.C. and Pointing, S.B., 2017. A Endolithic
2. Imprints of fossils tell us about evolution- microbial diversity in sandstone and
How? granite from the McMurdo Dry Valleys,
3. Octopus, cockroach and frog all have eyes. Antarctica. Polar biology, 40 (5): 997-1006.
Can we group these animals together to
establish a common evolutionary origin.
Justify your answer. I NT ER NET R ES O U RCES
http://www.nhs.uk
REFERENCE BOOKS
http://www.eniscuola.net/en/2012/11/29/
1.
B. S.Tomar and S. P. Singh, An Introduction exobiology/
to General Biology, 9th Edition, Rastogi
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Astrobiology
Publications, Meerut.
Concept Map
Evolution
Origin of life Evidences for evolution Theories of evolution
Views Morphology and Anatomy Lamarckism

• Special creation •Homologous organs •Use and Disuse Theory
•Analogous organs
• Spontaneous •Vestigial organs
generation (Abiogenesis) •Atavism
Darwinism
• Biogenesis
• Theory of Natural Selection
• Extra terresterial
or Cosmic orgin Embryology
• Chemical evolution •Biogenetic law
of life
Paleontology
•Fossils

www.tntextbooks.in
Ethnic groups in india
Ethnobotany
Importance of ethnobotany
Petrifaction
Evolution
Mold and cast
Fossilization Preservation
Compression
Paleobotany Replacement
Determination of Radioactive carbon

age of fossils dating method
ICT CORNER ORIGIN AND EVOLUTION OF LIFE
This game will enable the students

to understand the evolution of living
organisms. But it was created on the basis
of general truths and not specific scientific
related.
Steps
• Access the application “HUMAN EVOLUTION CLICKER GAME:RISE OF MANKIND” with the help
of provided URL or QR code. Download and Install it in the mobile.
• You can view a bubble for ten seconds, touch it to reveal the hidden DNA.
• By joining two DNAs, a bacteria will be formed. By joining two bacteria, amoeba will be appeared.
• Continue the same to form many other species by combining different species. There are 52 living
organism exist now in the application. Explore everything.
Cells alive
https://play.google.com/store/apps/details?id=com.banana4apps.evolution&hl=en

www.tntextbooks.in
BREEDING
20 AND
BIOTECHNOLOGY
Learning Objectives

Define and discuss the steps and methods involved in plant breeding.
Know the crop varieties produced by crop improvement.
Understand animal breeding and its implications.
Point out the differences between inbreeding and outbreeding.
Know what is hybrid vigour and its importance.
Identify the steps involved in genetic engineering.
Understand the practical applications of DNA fingerprinting.
Gain knowledge on gene therapy.
Know the importance of stem cell technology.
which paved way to develop advanced healthcare

Introduction
products, diagnostic kits and food production to
India’s population is likely to reach 1.7 improve the quality of human life.
billion by 2050. Current rate of India’s food
production will be able to meet only 59% of 20.1 Modern Agricultural
the country’s food demand at that time. How Practices and Crop
can India feed 1.7 billion people by 2050? This Improvement
can be made possible by ‘Plant breeding’ and Modern agricultural practices are
‘Animal husbandry’. activities carried out to improve cultivation of
Plant breeding is the art of developing plants. It includes preparation of soil, sowing,
economically important plants with superior application of manures and fertilizers, proper
quality. irrigation, protection from weeds and pests
Animal husbandry involves the breeding of harvesting, threshing and storage.
animals. It aims at improving the genotypes of The aim of crop improvement is to
animals to make them more useful to the welfare develop improved crop varieties possesing
of mankind.This emphasizes domestication higher yield, better quality, resistance to
and propagation of animals,under controlled diseases and shorter duration.
conditions to enhance food production and
food quality. 20.2 Green Revolution
Another breakthrough was the emergence Green Revolution is the process of
of biotechnology as an entity of modern biology, increasing food production through high
286

www.tntextbooks.in
yielding crop varieties and modern agricultural Peta from Indonesia, and Dee-geo-woo-gen
techniques in underdeveloped and developing (DGWG) a dwarf variety from China.
nations. Dr. Norman E. Borlaug, an American
agronomist the “Father of the Green
Revolution”, received the Nobel Peace Prize in
1970. In India Dr. M. S. Swaminathan joined
with Dr.Borlaug in bringing Green Revolution
by introducing Mexican wheat varieties. This
eventually increased wheat and rice production
between 1960 and 2000.
Figure 20.1 IR-8
20.2.1 Breeding for high yield
and better quality More to Know
Major challenge that India faced during
Dr. G. Nammalvar
post-independance period was having
Dr. G. Nammalvar (1938-2013)
enough food production for the growing
was a Tamil agricultural
population. Efforts were taken to develop
scientist, environmental
high yielding varieties of crops, leading to
activist and organic farming
Green Revolution.
expert. He founded Nammalvar Ecological
Semi-Dwarf varieties in Wheat and Rice Foundation for Farm Research and Global
Sonalika, Kalyan Sona are semi-dwarf Food Security Trust (NEFFFRGFST-
varieties of wheat developed from high- Vanagam) to create public awareness about
yielding, semi-dwarf, fertilizer responsive the benefits of organic farming.
wheat varieties from Mexico. IR-8 (Miracle
rice) is a high-yielding semi-dwarf rice variety
20.2.2 Plant Breeding for
developed by International Rice Research
Disease Resistance
Institute (IRRI),Philippines. In 1966, this was
first introduced in Philippines and India. It Plant diseases are caused by pathogens like
was a hybrid of a high yielding rice variety viruses, bacteria and fungi. This affects crop
yield. Hence, it is important to develop disease
More to Know resistant varieties of crops, that would increase
the yield and reduce the use of fungicides and
Dr. M. S. Swaminathan bactericides. Some disease resistant varieties
Dr. Mankombu Sambasivan developed by plant breeding are given below:
Swaminathan is an Indian
scientist known for his Table 20.1 Disease resistant crop varieties
leading role in India’s Green Crop Variety Resistance to
Revolution. His research on diseases
potato, wheat, rice and jute are well known
Wheat Himgiri Leaf and stipe
plant breeding experiments. Due to his
rust, hill bunt
efforts the wheat production increased from
twelve million tonnes in 1960's to seventy Cauliflower Pusa Shubhra, Black rot
million tonnes now. He is aptly called as the Pusa Snowball K-1
“Father of Indian Green Revolution”. Cowpea Pusa Komal Bacterial blight
287 Breeding and Biotechnology

www.tntextbooks.in
20.2.3 Plant Breeding for

Insects/Pests Resistance
In addition to microorganisms, a large
number of insects and pests also cause damage
to the crops. Hence, insect and pest resistant
crop varieties were developed. Some of them
are given below:
Table 20.2 Insects /pests resistant varieties Figure 20.2 Protina–lysine rich Maize
Crop Variety Resistant to 2. Atlas 66, a protein rich wheat variety.

Insects/Pests
Brassica Pusa Gaurav Aphids
Flat Bean Pusa Sem 2, Leaf hopper,
Pusa Sem 3 aphids and
fruit borer
Lady’s finger Pusa Sawani, Shoot and fruit
Pusa A4 borer
Figure 20.3 Atlas 66-protein rich Wheat

20.2.4 Plant Breeding for Improved
Nutritional Quality 3. Iron rich fortified rice variety.
Undernutrition and protein malnutrition 4. Vitamin A enriched carrots, pumpkin and
among human population is a major health spinach.
problem which has been receiving much focus
throughout the world. Apart, from humans it also 20.3 Methods of Plant
affects the health of farm animals. To combat these Breeding for Crop
conditions, human and animal health are to be Improvement
determined by the nutritional quality of the feed
Methods of plant breeding to develop
crops. The nutritional quality of crops depends on
high yielding varieties are given below:
quality and quantity of nutrients.The nutritional
quality may be improved with respect to its 1. Introduction of new varieties of plants
1. Protein content and quality of protein 2. Selection
3. Polyploidy breeding
2. Oil content
4. Mutation breeding
3. Mineral content
5. Hybridization
Biofortification
20.3.1 Introduction of New
Biofortification is the scientific process Varieties of Plants
of developing crop plants enriched with high
levels of desirable nutrients like vitamins, It is a process of introducing high yielding
proteins and minerals. Some examples of crop varieties of plants from one place to another. Such
plants are called as exotic species. These imported
varieties developed as a result of biofortification
plant materials may carry pathogens and pests,
are given below:
hence they are thoroughly tested in a plant
1. Protina, Shakti and Rathna are lysine rich quarantine before being introduced to the fields.
maize hybrids (developed in India). e.g Phaseolus mungo was introduced from China.

www.tntextbooks.in
20.3.2 Selection is also called as individual plant selection.

In pureline selection large numbers of plants
Selection is one of the oldest methods of
are selected from a self-pollinated crop and
plant breeding in which individual plants or
harvested individually.
groups of plants are sorted out from a mixed
population based on the morphological Individual plant progenies from them are
characters. evaluated separately. The best one is released
as a pureline variety. Progeny is similar both
Methods of selection
genotypically and phenotypically.
There are three methods of selection.
They are 3. Clonal selection
1. Mass selection A group of plants produced from a
2. Pureline selection single plant through vegetative or asexual
3. Clonal selection reproduction are called clones.
All the plants of a clone are similar both
1. Mass selection
in genotype and phenotype. Selection of
Seeds of best plants showing desired
desirable clones from the mixed population of
characters are collected from a mixed
vegetatively propagated crop is called clonal
population. The collected seeds are allowed
selection.
to raise the second generation. This process is
carried out for seven or eight generations. At
the end, they will be multiplied and distributed 20.3.3 Polyploidy Breeding
to the farmers for cultivation. Sexually reproducing organisms have
Some common examples for mass two complete set of chromosomes in their
selection are groundnut varieties like TMV–2 somatic cells. This is called diploid (2n).
and AK–10. Its schematic representation is The gametic cells have only one set of
given below. chromosome. This is called haploid (n).
An organism having more than two sets of
chromosomes is called polyploid (Greek :
Polys = many + aploos = one fold + eidos =
form). Such condition is called Polyploidy. It
can be induced by physical agents such as
heat or cold treatment, X-rays and chemical
agents like colchicine.
Achievements of polyploidy breeding

Some achievements of polyploidy
breeding are
a. Seedless watermelons (3n) and bananas (3n).
b. TV-29 (triploid variety of tea) with larger
shoots and drought tolerance.
Figure 20.5 Mass Selection c. Triticale (6n) is a hybrid of wheat and rye. To
make this plant fertile polyploidy is induced.
2. Pureline selection It has higher dietary fibre and protein.
Pureline is “the progeny of a single d. Raphano brassica is an allotetraploid by
individual obtained by self breeding”. This colchicine treatment.

www.tntextbooks.in
20.3.4 Mutation Breeding Achievements of mutation breeding

Some achievements of mutation breeding are
Mutation is defined as the sudden
heritable change in the nucleotide sequence a. Sharbati Sonora wheat produced from
of DNA in an organism. It is a process by Sonora-64 by using gamma rays.
which genetic variations are created which b. Atomita 2 rice with saline tolerance and
in turn brings about changes in the organism. pest resistance
The organism which undergoes mutation is c. Groundnuts with thick shells
called a mutant.
The factors which induce mutations are 20.3.5 Hybridization
known as mutagens or mutagenic agents. Hybridization may be defined as the
Mutagens are of two types namely physical process of crossing two or more types of plants
mutagens and chemical mutagens. for bringing their desired characters together
into one progeny called hybrid. Hybrid is
More to Know superior in one or more characters to both
parents. Hybridization is the common method
Gamma Garden of creating genetic variation to get improved
Gamma garden or Atomic garden is a varieties.
concept popularised after World War II for
the peaceful use of atomic energy for crop Hybridization Experiment: Triticale (The
improvement. This is a type of induced first man – made cereal)
mutation breeding where radioactive sources Triticale is the first man- made cereal
particularly gamma rays from Cobalt-60 or hybrid. It is obtained by crossing wheat
Caesium-137 are used to induce desirable (Triticum durum, 2n = 28) and rye (Secale
mutations in crop plants. cereal, 2n = 14). The F 1 hybrid is sterile
(2n = 21). Then the chromosome number is
doubled using colchicine and it becomes a
hexaploid Triticale (2n = 42).
The cycle of crop raising and selection
continues till the plants with the desired
characters are finally obtained. The
development of new varieties is a long-drawn
process. Two main aspects of hybridization
are to combine the characters of two plants in
one plant and to utilize hybrid vigour.
i Physical mutagens
Radiations like X-rays, α, β and γ-rays, 20.4 Animal Breeding
UV rays, temperature etc. which induce
mutations are called physical mutagens A breed is a group of animals of common
origin within a species that has certain
ii Chemical mutagens distinguishing characters that are not found in
Chemical substances that induce other members of the same species like general
mutations are called chemical mutagens. appearance and others striking features.
e.g. Mustard gas and nitrous acid. The utilisation Breeding involves mating parents of
of induced mutation in crop improvement is
different varieties each having some desired
called mutation breeding.
trait which are passed onto the offspring.

www.tntextbooks.in
Objectives of Animal Breeding

Animal breeding aims at improving the
genotypes of domesticated animals to increase
their yield and improve the desirable qualities to
produce milk, egg and meat.
When breeding takes place between
animals of the same breed, it is called
inbreeding. The cross between different breeds
is called outbreeding.
20.4.1 Inbreeding
Inbreeding refers to the mating of closely
Figure 20.6 Cross breeding to produce Mule
related animals within the same breed for
with superior characters
about 4-6 generations. Superior males and
superior females of the same breed are identified Info bits
and mated in pairs. It helps in the accumulation
of superior genes and elimination of genes Cross breed of fowls:
which are undesirable. White Leghorn X Plymouth Rock
Hissardale is a new breed of sheep
developed in Punjab by crossing Bikaneri Hybrid fowl - yield more eggs
(Magra) ewes and Australian Marino rams.
Cross breed of cows:
Inbreeding depression: Continued inbreeding Developed by mating the bulls of exotic
reduces fertility and productivity. Inbreeding breeds and cows of indigenous breeds.
exposes harmful recessive genes that are
Brown Swiss X Sahiwal
eliminated by selection.
Karan Swiss - yield 2-3 times more milk

20.4.2 Outbreeding than indigenous cows.
It is the breeding of unrelated animals.

The offsprings formed are called hybrids. The
20.4.3 Heterosis
hybrids are stronger and vigorous than their
parents. Cross between two different species with The superiority of the hybrid obtained by
desirable features of economic value are mated. cross breeding is called as heterosis or hybrid
Let’s see what cross produce a mule. vigour.
Cross breeding
Effects of hybrid vigour in animal breeding
Male Donkey X Female Horse - Increased production of milk by
cattle
Mule - Increased production of egg by poultry
- High quality of meat is produced
Mule is superior to horse in strength,
- Increased growth rate in domesticated
intelligence, ability to work and resistance to
animals
diseases but they are sterile.

www.tntextbooks.in
a. Presence of plasmid in bacteria that can

20.5 Genetic Engineering
undergo replication independently along
Genetic engineering with chromosomal DNA.
is the manipulation and b. Restriction enzymes cuts or break DNA
transfer of genes from at specific sites and are also called as
one organism to another molecular scissors.
organisms to create a new c. DNA ligases are the enzymes which help in
DNA called as recombinant ligating (joining) the broken DNA fragments.
DNA(rDNA). The term
20.5.2 Gene Cloning
recombinant is used because DNA from two
different sources can be joined together. What reminds to your mind when you
Hence, genetic engineering is also called as hear the word clone? Of course, ‘DOLLY’
recombinant DNA technology. the cloned sheep. The carbon copy of an
individual is often called a clone. However,
Plasmid is the small more appropriately, a clone means to make a
circular double stranded genetically exact copy of an organism.
DNA molecule found in the In gene cloning, a gene or a piece of
cytoplasm of bacterial cell and separated DNA fragment is inserted into a bacterial cell
from chromosomal DNA. It can replicate where DNA will be multiplied (copied) as the
independently. cell divides. A brief outline of the basic steps
involved in gene cloning are:
i. Isolation of desired DNA fragment by
using restriction enzymes
ii. Insertion of the DNA fragment into a
suitable vector (Plasmid) to make rDNA
More to Know iii. Transfer of rDNA into bacterial host cell
(Transformation)
Restriction enzymes recognises a specific
iv. Selection and multiplication of recombinant
base pair sequence (palindromic sequence)
host cell to get a clone
in DNA called as restriction site and cleaves
v. Expression of cloned gene in host cell.
the phosphodiester bond within DNA.
Using this strategy several enzymes,
hormones and vaccines can be produced
20.5.1 Techniques of Genetic
Engineering – Basic
Requirements
Important discoveries that led to the Figure 20.7 Genetic engineering technique
stepping stone of rDNA technology were (Gene cloning)

www.tntextbooks.in
d. Tissue plasminogen activator is used to

Info bits
dissolve blood clots and prevent heart attack.
Development of Dolly
e. Development of vaccines against various
Dolly was the first cloned female sheep,
diseases like Hepatitis B and rabies
developed by Dr. Ian Wilmut and his
colleagues at the Roslin Institute, Scotland
in July 1996. She was created by somatic cell Eli Lilly and Company,
nuclear transfer technique. She lived for 6.5 United States, in 1979 first
years and died in 2003 because of lung disease. started commercial production
of human insulin by using rDNA
technology.
Gene Therapy
Gene therapy refers to the replacement
of defective gene by the direct transfer of
functional genes into humans to treat genetic
disease or disorder. The genetic makeup of
the ‘patient’ cell is altered using recombinant
DNA technology. It was first successfully
implemented in 1990.
Somatic gene therapy is the replacement
Surrogate of defective gene in somatic cells.
mother (with
implanted
embryo)
Germ line gene therapy replacement of
defective gene in germ cell (egg and sperm).
Gene therapy conducted till date has
targeted only somatic (non-reproductive)
cells. Correction of genetic defects in somatic
cells may be beneficial to the patient but the
20.6 Biotechnology in Medicine corrected gene may not be carried to the next
generation.
Using genetic engineering techniques
medicinally important valuable proteins 20.7 Stem Cells
or polypeptides that form the potential
pharmaceutical products for treatment of Our body is composed of over 200
various diseases have been developed on a specialised cell types, that can carry out specific
commercial scale. functions. e.g. neurons or nerve cell that can
Pharmaceutical products developed by transmit signals, or heart cells which contract
rDNA technique to pump blood or pancreatic cells to secrete
insulin. These specialised cells are called as
a. Insulin used in the treatment of diabetes.
differentiated cells.
b. Human growth hormone used for treating
In contrast to differentiated cells, stem
children with growth deficiencies.
cells are undifferentiated or unspecialised
c. Blood clotting factors are developed to mass of cells. The stem cells are the cells of
treat haemophilia.

www.tntextbooks.in
variable potency. Potency refers to the number Parkinson’s disease and Alzheimer’s disease
of possible fates that a cell can acquire. The neuronal stem cells can be used to replace the
two important properties of stem cells that damaged or lost neurons.
differentiate them from other cells are:
i. its ability to divide and give rise to more 20.8 DNA Fingerprinting
stem cells by self-renewal Technology
ii. its ability to give rise to specialised cells The human genome has 3 billion base
with specific functions by the process of pairs. Did you know that the DNA pattern
differentiation. of two individuals cannot be same except for
identical twins. Each person’s DNA sequence
Types of stem cells is unique due to the small difference in the base
Embryonic stem cells can be extracted pairs. Therefore, if we want to compare the
genetic difference among the two individuals,
and cultured from the early embryos. These
DNA fingerprinting is the easier and quicker
cells are derived from the inner cell mass of
method. This technique was developed by
blastocyst. These cells can be developed into
Alec Jeffrey.
any cell in the body.
The technique analyses each individual’s
Adult stem cell or somatic stem cell are
unique DNA sequences and provides
found in the neonatal (new born) and adults.
distinctive characteristics of individual which
They have the ability to divide and give rise to
helps in identification. Variable number of
specific cell types. Sources of adult stem cells tandem repeat sequences (VNTRs) serve as
are amniotic fluid, umbilical cord and bone molecular markers for identification.
marrow.
In human beings, 99 % of the DNA base
sequences are the same and this is called
as bulk genomic DNA. The remaining 1 %
DNA sequence differs from one individual to
another. This 1 % DNA sequence is present
as small stretch of repeated sequences which
is known as satellite DNA. The number of
copies of the repeat sequence also called
as VNTRs differs from one individual to
another, and results in variation in the size of
the DNA segment.
Figure 20.8 Differentiation of stem cells
Stem-cell therapy
Sometimes cells, tissues and organs in the
body may be permanently damaged or lost due
to genetic condition or disease or injury. In such VNTRs illustration of three persons
situations stem cells are used for the treatment
As shown in the illustration, the sequence
of diseases which is called stem-cell therapy.
AGCT is repeated six times in first person, five
In treating neurodegenerative disorders like
times in second person and seven times in third

www.tntextbooks.in
person. Because of this, DNA segment of third genetically modified (GM) plants and animals.
person will be larger in size followed by DNA Genetic modification refers to the alteration
segment of first person and then the second or manipulation of genes in the organisms
person. Thus, it is clear that satellite DNA using rDNA techniques in order to produce
bring about variation within the population. the desired characteristics. The DNA fragment
Variation in DNA banding pattern reveals
inserted is called transgene. Plants or animals
differences among the individuals.
expressing a modified endogenous gene or
Applications of DNA Fingerprinting a foregin gene are also known as transgenic
i. DNA fingerprinting technique is widely organisms.
used in forensic applications like crime The transgenic plants are much stable,
investigation such as identifying the with improved nutritional quality, resistant to
culprit. It is also used for paternity testing diseases and tolerant to various environment
in case of disputes. conditions. Similarly transgenic animals
ii. It also helps in the study of genetic diversity are used to produce proteins of medicinal
of population, evolution and speciation. importance at low cost and improve livestock
quality.
20.9 Genetically Modified Some examples of genetically modified
Organisms (GMOs) plants and animals are given in the table
One of the most tremendous development below.
of genetic engineering is the production of
Genetically Modified Plants

Objective Gene inserted Achievement
Improved nutritional Beta carotene gene Golden Rice

quality in Rice (In humans, Beta carotene is required (Genetically modified rice can
for the synthesis of Vitamin A) produce beta carotene, that can
prevent Vitamin A deficiency)
Increased crop Bt gene from bacteria Bacillus Insect resistant plants

production thuringiensis. (These plants can produce the toxin
(Bt gene produces a protein that is toxic protein that kills the insects which
to insects) attack them)
Genetically Modified Animals

Objective Gene inserted Achievement
Improved wool quality Genes for synthesis of amino acid, Transgenic sheep
and production cysteine (gene expressed)
Increased growth in Salmon or Rainbow trout or Tilapia Transgenic fish

fishes growth hormone gene (gene expressed)

www.tntextbooks.in
Points to Remember The superiority of the hybrid obtained

by cross breeding is called as heterosis or
Crop improvement is the development of hybrid vigour.
improved crop varieties possesing higher
Genetic engineering is the manipulation
yield, better quality, resistance to diseases
and transfer of genes from one organism
and shorter duration.
to another organism.
When breeding takes place between
Stem cells are undifferentiated or
animals of the same breed, it is called
unspecialised mass of cells and can be used
inbreeding.The cross between different
for the treatment known as stem cell therapy.
breeds is called outbreeding.
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I Choose the correct answer c. vitamins

1. Which method of crop improvement can be d. both (a) and (b)
practised by a farmer if he is inexperienced? 6. We can cut the DNA with the help of
a. clonal selection b. mass selection
a. scissors b. restriction endonucleases
c. pureline selection d. hybridisation
c. knife d. RNAase
2. Pusa Komal is a disease resistant variety of
_________. 7. rDNA is a
a. sugarcane b. rice a. vector DNA
c. cow pea d. maize b. circular DNA
3. Himgiri developed by hybridisation and c. recombinant of vector DNA and
selection for disease resistance against desired DNA
rust pathogens is a variety of __________. d. satellite DNA
a. chilli b. maize
8. DNA fingerprinting is based on the
c. sugarcane d. wheat
principle of identifying ---------------
4. The miracle rice which saved millions of sequences of DNA
lives and celebrated its 50th birthday is a. single stranded b. mutated
_______ c. polymorphic d. repetitive
a. IR 8 b. IR 24 c. Atomita 2 d. Ponni
9. Organisms with modified endogenous
5. Which of the following is used to gene or a foregin gene are also known as
produce products useful to humans by (a) transgenic organsims
biotechnology techniques? (b) genetically modified
a. enzyme from organism (c) mutated
b. live organism (d) both a and b

www.tntextbooks.in
10. In a hexaploid wheat( 2n = 6 x = 42 ) the 4. Iron fortified rice variety determines the
haploid (n) and the basic(x) number of protein quality of the cultivated plant
chromosomes respectively are 5. Golden rice is a hybrid.
a. n = 7 and x = 21 b. n = 21 and x = 21 6. Bt gene from bacteria can kill insects.
c. n = 7 and x = 7 d. n = 21 and x = 7 7. In vitro fertilisation means the fertilisation
II Fill in the blanks done inside the body.
1. Economically important crop plants with 8. DNA fingerprinting technique was
superior quality are raised by_________. developed by Alec Jeffrey.
9. Molecular scissors refers to DNA ligases.
2. A protein rich wheat variety is ________.
3. __________is the chemical used for
IV Match the following
doubling the chromosomes.
Column A Column B
4. The scientific process which produces crop
plants enriched with desirable nutrients is 1. Sonalika Phaseolus mungo
called __________. 2. IR 8 Sugarcane
5. Rice normally grows well in alluvial soil, 3. Saccharum Semi-dwarf wheat
but _________ is a rice variety produced 4. Mung No. 1 Ground nut
by mutation breeding that grows well in 5. TMV – 2 Semi-dwarf Rice
saline soil.
6. Insulin Bacillus thuringienesis
6. __________ technique made it possible to 7. Bt toxin Beta carotene
genetically engineer living organism.
8. Golden rice first hormone produced
7. Restriction endonucleases cut the DNA using rDNA technique
molecule at specific positions known as
__________. V
Understand the assertion statement,
justify the reason given and choose the
8. Similar DNA fingerprinting is obtained
correct choice
for __________.
a. Assertion is correct and reason is wrong
9. __________ cells are undifferentiated b. Reason is correct and the assertion is
mass of cells. wrong
10. In gene cloning the DNA of interest is c. Both assertion and reason is correct
integrated in a __________. d. Both assertion and reason is wrong.
1. Assertion: Hybrid is superior than either
III State whether true or false. If false, write
of its parents.
Reason: Hybrid vigour is lost upon
1. Raphano brassica is a man-made tetraploid inbreeding.
produced by colchicine treatment. 2. Assertion: Colchicine reduces the
2. The process of producing an organism chromosome number.
with more than two sets of chromosome Reason: It promotes the movement of
is called mutation. sister chromatids to the opposite poles.
3. A group of plants produced from a single 3. Assertion: rDNA is superior over
plant through vegetative or asexual hybridisation techniques.
reproduction are called a pureline.

www.tntextbooks.in
Reason: Desired genes are inserted 2. Describe mutation breeding with an example.
without introducing the undesriable 3. Biofortification may help in removing
genes in target organisms. hidden hunger. How?
4. With a neat labelled diagram explain the
VI Answer in a sentence
techniques involved in gene cloning.
1. Give the name of wheat variety having
5. Discuss the importance of biotechnology
higher dietary fibre and protein.
in the field of medicine.
2. Semi-dwarf varieties were introduced
in rice. This was made possible by the IX Higher Order Thinking Skills (HOTS)
presence of dwarfing gene in rice. Name
1. A breeder wishes to incorporate desirable
this dwarfing gene.
characters into the crop plants. Prepare a
3. Define genetic engineering.
list of characters he will incorporate
4. Name the types of stem cells.
5. What are transgenic organisms? 2. Organic farming is better than Green
6. State the importance of biofertiliser. Revolution. Give reasons
3. Polyploids are characterised by gigantism.
VII Short answers questions
Justify your answer.
1. Discuss the method of breeding for disease
4. ‘P’ is a gene required for the synthesis of
resistance.
vitamin A. It is integrated with genome of
2. Name three improved characteristics of
‘Q’ to produce genetically modified plant ‘R’.
wheat that helped India to achieve high
productivity. i. What is P, Q and R?
3. Name two maize hybrids rich in amino ii. State the importance of ‘R’ in India.
acid lysine
4. Distinguish between REFERENCE BOOKS
a. somatic gene therapy and germ line
gene therapy 1. Chaudhari, H.K., Elementary Principles
b. undifferentiated cells and differentiated of Plant Breeding, 2nd Edition.
cells 2. Dubey, R.C., A Text book of Biotechnology.
5. State the applications of DNA fingerprinting 5th Edition. S. Chand and Company Pvt. Ltd.
technique. NewDelhi.
6. How are stem cells useful in regenerative
process?
7. Differentiate between outbreeding and https://www.embibe.com/study/transgenic-
inbreeding. cow-rosie-concept
VIII Long answers questions https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/DNA_profiling
1. What are the effects of hybrid vigour in https://www.krishijagran.com/news/tomato-
animals. at shoots-potato-in-roots

www.tntextbooks.in
Concept Map
Plant Breeding
Disease Insects/
resistance pests resistance
Improved
High yield Green Revolution nutritional quality
Crop Improvement Plant breeding
Methods
Natural Selection Hybridization
Polyploidy brecding Mutation breeding

Mass selection Artificial
Purelne selection Clonal selection
Animal Breeding and Biotechnology
Animal Breeding Genetic Engineering Applications of

Requirements Biotechnology
Desired gene Pharmaceutical

Inbreeding
products
Cloning vector
(Plasmid) Gene therapy
Outbreeding
Restriction DNA
endonucleases fingerprinting
Heterosis or
Hybrid vigour
DNA ligases Stem cell
technology
Recombinant Genetically
DNA (rDNA) modified plants
and animals
(Transgenics)

www.tntextbooks.in
HEALTH AND DISEASES

21
Learning Objectives

Understand the types of abuses and associated behavioural changes.
Gain knowledge of prevention and protection from child sexual abuse.
Know the causes for drug, tobacco and alcohol addiction and its effects on health.
Analyse the possible ways of de-addiction.
Know about the diseases and disorders associated with lifestyle modification.
Compare the features of Type-1 and Type-2 diabetes mellitus and relates the signs and
symptoms.
Explain the underlying cause and symptoms for obesity, heart disease, cancer and AIDS.
Suggest remedial measures for prevention and control of these diseases and disorders.
To create awareness among the individuals in the society to lead healthy life.
world. The health habits of the individuals and

Introduction
their behaviour influence the development of
Abuses occur in a variety of forms and are chronic and fatal diseases such as diabetes,
deeply rooted in cultural, social and economic obesity, heart disease, cancer and AIDS. These
practices. Solving this global problem however conditions can be substantially reduced by
requires a much better understanding of its adopting lifestyles that promote wellness and
occurrence, causes and consequences with protect their health by taking nutritious diet,
context to sexual and childhood abuse, this regular exercise and by avoiding drugs, alcohol
is followed by substance abuse. Are people and smoking.
leading healthier lives in today’s modern
world than their generations did in the past?
21.1 Abuse and Types of Abuse
For instance, smoking cigarettes, alcohol
addiction, use of drugs, eating high fat and Abuse refers to cruel, violent, harmful or
cholesterol rich diets, excessive intake of junk injurious treatment of another human being. It
foods, reduced physical activity are some of includes physical, emotional or psychological,
the risk factors for illness and early death. The verbal, child and sexual abuses. Abuse can
role of behaviour in health has been receiving occur within the family and with people who
increased attention in countries around the are not associated with the family.
300

www.tntextbooks.in
These days the use of drugs, alcohol and the victim. It refers to inappropriate or forced
tobacco has been increasing especially among sexual contact. Adolescent girls and women
teenagers and adolescents for adventure, encounter sexual harassment in different
excitement, curiosity and experimentation. forms. Sexual abuse is more common at work
Let's analyse some of the consequences of places. Verbal remarks, comments, gestures
sexual and childhood abuse, its prevention and and looks are the most common forms of
protection. abuse. This results in psychological distress,
physical illness and eating disorders in the
21.1.1 Child Abuse affected individuals.
Child abuse constitutes all forms of
physical or emotional ill treatment, sexual 21.1.3 Child Sexual Abuse
abuse, exploitation resulting in child’s ill Children are considered soft targets for
health, survival and development. Physical sexual abuse because they may not realize
abuse of a child is defined as those acts that that they are being abused. Commonly,
cause physical harm such as threatening, abusers are persons well known to the child,
beating, kicking and hitting the child. may even be living in the same locality.
Abusers also bribe (use chocolates and toys)
21.1.2 Sexual Abuse
to lure children and take advantage of the
Sexual harassment is a form of power child’s innocence.
and dominance of one person over another, Sexually abused children show symptoms
which can result in harmful consequence to of genital injury, abdominal pain, frequent
urinary infection and behavioural problems.
More to Know
21.1.4 Approaches for Protection
The Ministry of Women and Child
of an Abused Child
Development championed the introduction
of the Protection of Children from Sexual Measures adopted for monitoring
Offences (POCSO) Act, 2012. People who and assessment of abused child who have
traffic children for sexual purposes are also undergone signs and symptoms of distress are:
punishable under the provisions relating to Child Helpline: The Child Helpline
the Act. provides a social worker who can assist the
child by providing food, shelter and protection.
Counselling the child: Psychologists and social
workers should provide guidance, counselling
and continous support to a victimized child.
Family support: The victimized child should
Objectives of the POCSO Act, 2012 be supported by the family members. They
To protect children from the offences of should be provided with proper care and
attention to overcome their sufferings.
••Sexual assault
Medical care: A child victim of sexual offences
••Sexual harassment
should receive medical care and treatment
••Pornography
from health care professionals to overcome
To establish Special Courts for speedy mental stress and depression.
trial of such offences.
301 Health and Diseases

www.tntextbooks.in
Legal Counsel: The family or the guardian Not to receive money, toys, gifts or
of the child victim shall be entitled to free chocolates from known or unknown
assistance of a legal counsel for such offence. person to them without the knowledge of
Rehabilitation: Enrolling in schools and their parents.
resuming their education is an important step Not to allow known or unknown person to
towards rehabilitation of the child. It is essential touch them.
that the child’s life is gradually returned to
normal after the incidence of abuse. It is the responsibility of every individual
living in a society to ensure a safe and protected
Community based efforts: Conducting
awareness campaign on child abuse and its environment for our children to enable them
prevention. to live with dignity and free from any form of
violence.
More to Know
21.2 Drug, Alcohol and
The National Commission for
Tobacco Abuse
Protection of Child Rights (NCPCR) was set
up in March 2007 under the Commissions The physical and
for Protection of Child Rights (CPCR) Act, mental dependency
2005. This act emphasizes the principle of on alcohol, smoking
universality and inviolability of child rights and drugs is called
and recognizes the tone of urgency in all the addiction. The
child related policies of the country. addictive potential
Protection of all children of all age group of these substances
upto 18 years of age is of equal importance. pulls an individual
Policies define priority actions for the most into a vicious cycle leading to regular abuse
vulnerable children. and dependency. This is of serious concern
because abuse of tobacco, alcohol or drugs
produce many harmful effects in an individual,
to the family and even to the society. This
dangerous behavior pattern among youth can
be prevented through proper guidance.
CHILD HELPLINE 1098
21.3 Drug Abuse
Prevention of child sexual abuse
The most important social policy Drugs are normally used for the
proclaimed universally is the prevention of child treatment of disease on advice of a physician
abuse. Taking steps to prevent childhood sexual and withdrawn after recovery. A person who
abuse is parental and institutional responsibility. is habituated to a drug due to its prolonged
Instructions to be given by parents and teachers use is called drug addict. This is called drug
to the child are. addiction or drug abuse.
Do not talk to any suspected person or A drug that modifies the physical,
strangers and to maintain a distance. biological, psychological or social behaviour of a
Not to be alone with unknown person. person by stimulating, depressing or disturbing
To be careful while travelling alone in the functions of the body and the mind is called
public or private transport. addictive drug. These drugs interact with the

www.tntextbooks.in
central nervous system and affect the individual •• Fluctuation in body weight and appetite
physically and mentally. •• Always looking out for an easy way to get
money for obtaining drugs.
21.3.1 Types of Drugs •• Prone to infections like AIDS and
There are certain drugs called Hepatitis-B.
psychotropic drugs which acts on the brain
and alter the behaviour, consciousness, power World Health Organization
of thinking and perception. They are referred (WHO) 1984 suggested the use
as mood altering drugs. of the term drug dependence
in place of drug addiction or drug abuse
21.3.2 Drug Dependence
Persons who consume these drugs 21.3.4 Drug De-addiction
become fully dependent on them, they cannot
Management of de-addiction is a
live without drugs. This condition is referred
complicated and difficult task. The path to
as drug dependence.
recovery of drug addicts is long and often slow.
•• Physical and mental dependence Family members,
Dependence on the drug for normal friends and society on
condition of well being and to maintain the whole have a very
physiological state. important role to play.
•• Psychological dependence is a feel that
Detoxification: The first
drugs help them to reduce stress.
phase of treatment is detoxification. The
drug is stopped gradually and the addict
International
Day is helped to overcome the withdrawal
against Drug Abuse and Illicit symptoms. The addict undergoes severe
Trafficking - June 26. physical and emotional disturbance. This is
Narcotic Drugs and Psychotropic taken care by specific medication.
Substances Act was introduced in 1985. Psychotherapy: Individual and group
counselling is given by psychologists and
counsellors. The treatment includes efforts to
21.3.3 Behavioural Changes of
reduce the addict’s stress, taught new ways to
Drug Users
solve everyday’s problems, adequate diet, rest
Adverse effects of drug use among and relaxation.
adolescents are
Counselling to family members: Social
•• Drop in academic performance, absence workers counsell family members in order to
from school or college. change the attitude of rejection so that the
•• Lack of interest in personal hygiene, addict is accepted by the family and the society.
isolation, depression, fatigue and aggressive
behaviour. Rehabilitation: They are given proper
•• Deteriorating relationship with family and vocational training so that they can lead a
friends. healthy life and become useful members of
•• Change in food and sleeping habits. the society.

www.tntextbooks.in
21.4 Tobacco Abuse Info bits

World Health organization (WHO)
Tobacco is obtained from the tobacco plant
1984 suggested the use of the term drug.
Nicotiana tobaccum and Nicotiana rustica. The
WHO issued a directive under which all
dried and cured leaves of its young branches
cigarette advertisements and packs carry a
make the commercial tobacco used worldwide.
statutory warning “Smoking is injurious
Addiction to tobacco is due to ‘nicotine’ an
to Health”.
alkaloid present in it. Nicotine is a stimulant,
highly harmful and poisonous substance.
Activity 1
21.4.1 Tobacco Use
Tobacco is used for smoking, chewing Collect pictures of people affected by
and snuffing. Inhaling tobacco smoke from tobacco chewing and tobacco smoking.
cigars, cigarettes, bidis, pipes, hukka is called Identify which part of the body is affected
smoking. Tobacco in powder form is chewed and the health hazards it can lead to.
with pan. When powdered tobacco is taken
through nose, it is called snuffing.
21.4.3 Prevention of Smoking
21.4.2 Smoking Hazards and Knowing the dangers of smoking and
Effects of Tobacco chewing tobacco adolescents and the old
When smoke is inhaled, the chemicals get people need to avoid these habits. Proper
absorbed by the tissues and cause the following counselling and medical assistance can help an
harmful effects addict to give up the habit of smoking.
(i) Benzopyrene and polycyclic hydrocarbons

present in tobacco smoke is carcinogenic More to Know
causing lung cancer. Anti Tobacco Act was passed on May 1 st
(ii) Causes inflammation of throat and bronchi 2004. By 2030 tobacco is expected to be
leading to conditions like bronchitis and single biggest cause of death worldwide
pulmonary tuberculosis. accounting for 10 million deaths per
year.
(iii) Inflammation of lung alveoli, decrease
surface area for gas exchange and cause May 31st is observed as No Tobacco Day
(World Anti-Tobacco Day)
emphysema.
(iv) Carbon monoxide of tobacco smoke
binds to haemoglobin of RBC and
decreases its oxygen carrying capacity
causing hypoxia in body tissues.
(v) Increased blood pressure caused by
smoking leads to increased risk of heart
disease.
(vi) Causes increased gastric secretion which
leads to gastric and duodenal ulcers.
(vii) Tobacco chewing causes oral cancer
(mouth cancer).

www.tntextbooks.in
21.5 Alcohol Abuse 21.6 Rehabilitation Measures

for Alcoholics
The consumption of alcohol is a social evil
practiced by the wealthier and poorer sections Education and counselling: Education and
of the society. The dependence of alcohol is proper counselling will help the alcoholics to
called alcoholism and the addict is termed as overcome their problems and stress, to accept
alcoholic. It is called alcohol abuse. Drinking failures in their life.
of alcohol impairs one’s physical, physiological Physical activity: Individuals undergoing
and psychological functions. rehabilitation should be channelized into healthy
activities like reading, music, sports, yoga and
Activity 2 meditation.
Collect pictures of individuals with Seeking help from parents and peer groups:
normal liver and alcoholic liver, compare When a problematic situation occurs, the
and indicate the changes you find in them. affected individuals should seek help and
guidance from parents and peers. This would
21.5.1 Harmful Effects of Alcohol
help them to share their feeling of anxiety,
to Health
wrong doing and get rid of the habit.
Prolonged use of alcohol depresses the
nervous system, by acting as a sedative and Medical assistance: Individual should seek
analgesic substance. Some of the harmful help from psychologists and psychiatrists to
effects are get relieved from this condition and to lead a
•• Nerve cell damage resulting in various relaxed and peaceful life.
mental and physical disturbances Alcohol de-addiction and rehabilitation
•• Lack of co-ordination of body organs programmes are helpful to the individual so that
•• Blurred or reduced vision, results in road they could get rid of the problem completely
accidents and can lead a normal and healthy life.
•• Dilation of blood vessels which may affect
functioning of the heart
21.7 Diseases and Disorders
•• Liver damage resulting in fatty liver which
leads to cirrhosis and formation of fibrous due to Lifestyle
tissues Modifications
•• Body loses its control and consciousness Diseases are prevalent in our society due to
eventually leading to health complications our improper way of living, conditions of stress
and ultimately to death and strain. These diseases are non-communicable
and affect the person who are suffering from
particular symptoms. It is an impairment of the
body tissue or organ, disturbances in metabolic
function which require modification of an
individual's normal life.
21.8 Diabetes Mellitus
Diabetes mellitus is a chronic metabolic

disorder. In Greek (Diabetes – running
through; mellitus- sweet). It is characterised

www.tntextbooks.in
by increased blood glucose level due to aged and older people), obesity, sedentary life
insufficient, deficient or failure of insulin style, overeating and physically inactive.
secretion. This is the most common pancreatic
endocrine disorder. The incidence of Type-1 More to Know
and Type-2 diabetes is increasing worldwide.
One in every 8 individuals in India is a
diabetic. The revised WHO estimates for the
21.8.1 Type-1 Insulin Dependent
year 2025 is 57.2 million diabetics in India.
Diabetes Mellitus (IDDM)
The average age for the onset of diabetes is 40
IDDM accounts for 10 to 20% of the
years, while it is 55 years in other countries.
known diabetics. The condition also occurs
World Health Organizaation projects that
in children (juvenile onset diabetes) and
diabetes will be 7th leading cause of death by
young adults, the onset is usually sudden and
the year 2030.
can be life threatening. This is caused by the
destruction of β-cells of the pancreas. It is Symptoms: Diabetes mellitus is associated
characterized by abnormally elevated blood with several metabolic alterations.The most
glucose levels (hyperglycemia) resulting from important symptoms are
inadequate insulin secretion.
•• Increased blood glucose level
Causes: Genetic inheritance and environmental
(Hyperglycemia)
factors (infections due to virus, acute stress)
•• Increased urine output (Polyuria) leading
are the cause for this condition.
to dehydration
•• Loss of water leads to thirst (Polydipsia)
resulting in increased fluid intake
•• Excessive glucose excreted in urine
(Glycosuria)
•• Excess hunger (Polyphagia) due to loss of
glucose in urine.
•• Fatigue and loss of weight
According to WHO
recommendation, if the fasting
blood glucose is greater than
21.8.2 Type-2 Non-Insulin 140 mg/dl or the random blood glucose
Dependent Diabetes is greater than 200 mg /dl on more than
Mellitus (NIDDM) two occasions, diagnosis for confirming
This is also called as adult onset diabetes diabetes is essential.
and accounting for 80 to 90% of the diabetic
population. It develops slowly, usually milder 21.8.3 Prevention and Control of
and more stable. Insulin production by the Diabetes
pancreas is normal but its action is impaired.
Diet, hypoglycemic drugs, insulin injection
The target cells do not respond to insulin. It does
and exercise are the management options
not allow the movement of glucose into cells.
based on the type and severity of the condition.
Causes: The causes are multifactorial The overall goal of diabetes management is to
which include increasing age (affecting middle maintain normal blood glucose level.

www.tntextbooks.in
Table 21.1 Differences between Type-1 and Type-2 Diabetes Mellitus
Factors Type-1 Insulin dependent diabetes mellitus Type-2 Non-insulin dependent

(IDDM) diabetes mellitus (NIDDM)
Prevalence 10-20% 80-90%
Age of onset Juvenile onset (< 20 years) Maturity onset (>30 years)
Body weight Normal or Underweight Obese
Defect Insulin deficiency due to destruction of β-cells Target cells do respond to insulin
Treatment Insulin administration is necessary Can be controlled by diet,
exercise and medicine
Dietary management: Low carbohydrate

Info bits
and fibre rich diets are more appropriate.
Flax seeds containing insoluble fibre,
Carbohydrates should be taken in the form
Guavas, Tomatoes and Spinach are foods
of starch and complex sugars. Refined sugars
which help reduce blood sugar levels.
(sucrose and glucose) should be avoided.
Diet comprising whole grains, millets (jowar,
bajra, ragi), green leafy vegetables, wheat and 21.9 Obesity
unpolished rice should be included in diet
regularly. Obesity is the state in which there is
an accumulation of excess body fat with
Carbohydrates is maintained to about 50-
an abnormal increase in body weight.
55% of the total calories. High protein content of
Obesity is a complex multifactorial chronic
10-15% of the total intake is required to supply
disease developing from influence of social,
essential amino acids. Fat content in the diet
behavioural, psychological, metabolic and
should be 15-25% of the total calories. Saturated
cellular factors.
fat intake should be reduced. Polyunsaturated
fatty acid content should be higher. Obesity occurs if intake of calories is
more than the expenditure of energy. Over
Management with insulin: Commercially weight and obesity are conditions where the
available insulin preparations (short and long body weight is greater than the mean standard
acting) are also used to maintain blood glucose weight for age and height of an individual.
levels. Body mass index (BMI) is an estimate of body
Physical activity: Exercise plays an important fat and health risk.
2
role in facilitating a good control of diabetes, BMI = Weight (kg) / Height (m)
in addition to strengthening and toning up the
More to Know
muscles.
Every 7 calories of excess consumption
Education and Awareness: People with
leads to 1 gm fat deposit and increase in
diabetics should be educated on the nature
body weight. Weight due to fat in adipose
of disease they have and the possibility of
tissue exceeds more than 20% to 25 % of
complications of the disease, if blood sugar
body weight. An adult weighing 10% more
is not kept under control. Instructions
than the standard weight is OVERWEIGHT
regarding diet, exercise and drugs should be
and 20% more is OBESE.
explained.

www.tntextbooks.in
Causes and risk factors: Obesity is due to Risk factors: Hypercholesterolemia (High
genetic factors, physical inactivity, eating blood cholesterol) and high blood pressure
habits (overeating) and endocrine factors. (Hypertension) are the major causes and
Obesity is a positive risk factor in development contributing factors for heart disease and if
of hypertension, diabetes, gall bladder disease, untreated may cause severe damage to brain,
coronary heart disease and arthritis. kidney and eventually lead to stroke.
Causes: Heredity (family history), diet rich in
21.9.1 Prevention and Control of saturated fat and cholesterol, obesity, increasing
Obesity age, cigarette smoking, emotional stress, sedentary
Diet Management: Low calorie, normal lifestyle, excessive alcohol consumption and
protein, vitamins and mineral, restricted physical inactivity are some of the causes.
carbohydrate and fat, high fiber diet can Symptoms: Shortness of breath, headache,
prevent overweight. Calorie restriction for tiredness, dizziness, chest pain, swelling of leg,
weight reduction is safe and most effective. and gastrointestinal disturbances.
Physical exercise: A low calorie diet
accompanied by moderate exercise will be HDL (High Density
effective in causing weight loss. Meditation, Lipoprotein) or "good"
yoga and physical activity can also reduce cholesterol lowers risk of
stress related to overeating. heart disease while LDL (Low
Density Lipoprotein) or "bad" cholesterol
increases risk of heart disease.
21.10 Heart Disease
21.10.1 Prevention and Control
Cardiovascular disease (CVD) is
of Heart Disease
associated with diseases of the heart and
blood vessels. Coronary heart disease (CHD) Diet management: Reduction in the intake of
calories, low saturated fat and cholesterol rich
is the most common form and is caused by
food, low carbohydrates and common salt are
deposition of cholesterol in the blood vessels.
some of the dietary modifications. Diet rich in
It usually develops slowly over many years polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFA) is essential.
beginning from childhood, they may form a Increase in the intake of fibre diet, fruits and
fatty streak to a fibrous complicated plaque. It vegetables, protein, minerals and vitamin are
leads to the narrowing of blood vessels leading required.
to atherosclerosis in the large and medium Physical activity: Regular exercise, walking and
sized arteries that supply the heart muscle with yoga are essential for body weight maintenance
oxygen. It leads to sudden ischemia (deficient
Addictive substance avoidance: Alcohol
blood supply to heart muscle) and myocardial
consumption and smoking are to be avoided.
infarction (death of the heart muscle tissue).
Activity 3
More to Know
Prepare a chart showing the food items
Desirable level for blood cholesterol which are preferable and which should be
should be less than 200 mg/dl for Indians. avoided to prevent high blood pressure and
The risk of coronary heart disease increases heart disease. Apart from diet what are the
slowly as blood cholesterol levels increases other lifestyle modifications to be followed
from 200 to 300 mg/dl. to manage this condition.

www.tntextbooks.in
3. Leukaemia are characterized by an

21.11 Cancer
increase in the formation of white blood
Cancer causes about 4 million deaths cells in the bone marrow and lymph nodes.
annually throughout the world. In India more Leukaemia are called blood cancers. Most
than one million people suffer from cancer. common type of cancer which also affect
Cancer is derived from Latin word meaning children below 15 years of age.
crab. The study of cancer is called Oncology
(Oncos- Tumor). 21.11.2 Carcinogenic Agents
Cancer is an abnormal and uncontrolled Cancer causing agents are called
division of cells that invade and destroy carcinogens. They are physical, chemical
surrounding tissue forming a tumor or neoplasm agents, ionizing radiations and biological
(new growth). It is a heterogenous group of cells agents.
that do not respond to the normal cell division.
Physical Irritant: Heavy smoking causes lung
The cancerous cells migrate to distant parts
cancer and cancers of oral cavity, pharynx
of the body and affect new tissues. This process
is called metastasis. The frequent sites of (throat) and larynx. Betel and tobacco chewing
metastasis are lungs, bones, liver, skin and brain. causes oral cancer. Excessive exposure to
sunlight may cause skin cancer.
More to Know Chemical agents: Nicotine, caffeine, products
of combustion of coal and oil, pesticides,
World Cancer Day - 4th February
asbestos, nickel, certain dyes and artificial
National Cancer Awareness Day -7th November sweetners induce cancer.
21.11.1 Types of Cancers Radiations: Ionizing radiations like X-rays,

gamma- rays, radioactive substances and non-
Cancers are classified on the basis of the ionising radiations like UV rays cause DNA
tissues from which they are formed. damage leading to cancer.
1. Carcinomas arise from epithelial and
Biological agents: Cancer causing viruses are
glandular tissues. They include cancers of
called oncogenic viruses.
skin, lung, stomach and brain. About 85% of
the tumours are carcinomas
21.11.3 Treatment of Cancer
2. Sarcomas are occur in the connective and
muscular tissue. They include the cancer The treatment of cancer involves the
of bones, cartilage, tendons, adipose tissue following methods:
and muscles. These form 1% of all tumours. Surgery: Tumours are removed by surgery to
prevent further spread of cancer cells.
More to Know Radiation therapy: Tumour cells are irradiated
Types of Tumours by lethal doses of radiation while protecting
Benign tumours or Non malignant the surrounding normal cells.
tumours: Remain confined in the organ Chemotherapy: It involves administration
affected and do not spread to other parts of of anticancerous drugs which prevent cell
the body. division and are used to kill cancer cells.
Malignant tumours: Mass of Immunotherapy: Biological response
proliferating cells which grow very rapidly modifiers like interferons are used to activate
invading and damaging the surrounding the immune system and help in destroying the
normal tissues. tumors.

www.tntextbooks.in
21.11.4 Preventive measures for (iii) By transfusion of contaminated / infected

Cancer blood or blood products
Cancer control programmes should (iv) From infected mother to her child
focus on primary prevention and early through placenta.
detection.
To prevent lung cancer tobacco smoking 21.12.2 Symptoms and
is to be avoided and protective measures to be Treatment of AIDS
taken against exposure to toxic pollutants of Symptoms: Infected individuals become
industries. Excessive exposure to radiation is immunodeficient. The person becomes more
to be avoided to prevent skin cancer. susceptible to viral, bacterial, protozoan and
fungal infections. Swelling of lymph nodes,
21.12 AIDS (Acquired damage to brain, loss of memory, lack of appetite
Immunedeficiency and weight loss, fever, chronic diarrhoea, cough,
Syndrome) lethargy, pharyngitis, nausea and headache.
Diagnosis: The presence of HIV virus can be
AIDS is a severe viral disease and caused confirmed by Western Blot analysis or Enzyme
by Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV). It Linked Immunosorbent Assay (ELISA)
is a condition in which immune system fails
and suppress the body’s disease fighting Treatment: Anti-retroviral drugs and
mechanism. They attack the lymphocytes and immunostimulative therapy can prolong the life
the affected individual is prone to infectious of the infected person.
diseases.
21.12.3 Prevention and Control
of AIDS
Dr. Suniti Solomon, pioneered
HIV research and treatment The following steps may help in controlling
in India. She set up the first and prevent the spreading of HIV infection
voluntary testing and counselling (i) Screening of blood from blood banks for
centre and an AIDS Research group in Chennai
HIV before transfusion.
during 80's. Her team was the first to document
evidence of HIV infection in India in 1985 (ii) Ensuring the use of disposable needles and
(First Indian AIDS patient in Chennai). syringes in hospitals and clinics.
(iii) Advocating safe sex and advantages of
using condoms.
21.12.1 Transmission of HIV
(iv) Creating awareness campaign and
AIDS virus has been found in urine, tears, educating people on the consequences of
saliva, breast milk and vaginal secretions. The AIDS.
virus is transmitted by an infected patient
(v) Persons with HIV/AIDS should not be
who comes in contact with blood of a healthy
person. HIV/AIDS is not transmitted by touch isolated from the family and society.
or any physical contact. It spreads through
contact of body fluids or blood.
HIV is transmitted generally by
(i) Sexual contact with infected person
(ii) Use of contaminated needles or syringes
especially in case of intravenous drug
abusers

www.tntextbooks.in
Prolonged use of alcohol depresses the

More to Know
nervous system, by acting as a sedative and
Many people are ignorant about AIDS analgesic substance and causes fatty liver
and it has been said that – “don’t” die of (cirrhosis).
ignorance”. In our country NACO (National Diabetes mellitus is a chronic metabolic
AIDS Control Organization) and other disorder. It is characterised by increased
NGO’S (Non- Governmental Organizations) blood glucose level due to insufficient,
are educating people about AIDS. Every deficient or failure of insulin secretion and
year December 1st is observed as the “World insulin resistance.
AIDS Day”. Obesity is the state in which there is an
accumulation of excess body fat with an
Points to Remember abnormal increase in body weight.
Use of certain drugs by an individual as a Coronary heart disease is the most
regular habit. This is called drug addiction common form and is caused by deposition
or drug abuse. of cholesterol in the blood vessels.
Tobacco is used for smoking, chewing and Cancer is an abnormal and uncontrolled
snuffing. Inhaling tobacco smoke is called division of cells that invade and destroy
smoking. surrounding tissue forming a tumor or
neoplasm.
The dependence of alcohol is called
alcoholism and the addict is termed as AIDS is caused by Human
alcoholic. immunodeficiency virus.
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the correct answer 4. Which type of cancer affects lymph nodes and
spleen?
1. Tobacco consumption is known to stimulate
a) Carcinoma b) Sarcoma
secretion of adrenaline. The component
c) Leukemia d) Lymphoma
causing this could be
a) Nicotine b) Tannic acid 5. Excessive consumption of alcohol leads to
c) Curcumin d) Leptin a) Loss of memory
b) Cirrhosis of liver
2. World 'No Tobacco Day' is observed on c) State of hallucination
a) May 31 b) June 6 d) Supression of brain function
c) April 22 d) October 2 6. Coronary heart disease is due to
3. Cancer cells are more easily damaged by a) Streptococci bacteria
radiations than normal cells because they b) Inflammation of pericardium
are c) Weakening of heart valves
a) Different in structure
d) Insufficient blood supply to heart muscles
b) Non-dividing
7. Cancer of the epithelial cells is called
c) Mutated Cells
a) Leukemia b) Sarcoma
d) Undergoing rapid division c) Carcinoma d) Lipoma

www.tntextbooks.in
8. Metastasis is associated with 2. A highly poisonous chemicals derived from

a) Malignant tumour b) Benign tumour tobacco is _________________
c) Both (a) and (b) d) Crown gall tumour 3. Blood cancer is called ___________.
9. Polyphagia is a condition seen in 4. Less response of a drug to a specific dose

with repeated use is called ________
a) Obesity
b) Diabetes mellitus
5. Insulin resistance is a condition in
c) Diabetes insipidus d) AIDS
_____________diabetes mellitus
10. Where does alcohol effect immediately after
drinking? VI. Analogy type questions. Identify the
a) Eyes b) Auditory region first words and their relationship and
c) Liver d) Central nervous system suggest a suitable word for the fourth
blank
II. State whether True or False, if false write
1. Communicable: AIDS: Non communicable:
___________
1. AIDS is an epidemic disease.
2. Cancer causing genes are called Oncogenes. 2. Chemotherapy: Chemicals: Radiation
3. Obesity is characterized by tumour therapy: _____________
formation. 3. Hypertension: Hypercholesterolomia:
4. In leukemia both WBCs and RBCs increase Glycosuria: _______________
in number. VII. Answer in a sentence
5. Study of cause of disease is called etiology. 1. What are psychotropic drugs ?
6. AIDS is not transmitted by contact with a 2. Mention the diseases caused by tobacco
patient’s clothes. smoke.
7. Type 2 diabetes mellitus results due to
3. What are the contributing factors for Obesity?
insulin deficiency.
8. Carcinogens are cancer causing agents. 4. What is adult onset diabetes?
9. Nicotine is a narcotic drug. 5. What is metastasis?
10. Cirrhosis is associated with brain disorder. 6. How does insulin deficiency occur?
III. Expand the following abbreviations VIII. Short answer questions
1. IDDM 2. HIV 3. BMI 1. What are the various routes by which
4. AIDS 5. CHD 6. NIDDM transmission of human immuno deficiency
virus takes place ?
2. How is a cancer cell different from a normal
1. Sarcoma - Stomach cancer cell ?
2. Carcinoma - Excessive thirst 3. Differentiate between Type-1 and Type-2
3. Polydipsia - Excessive hunger diabetes mellitus
4. Polyphagia - Lack of blood flow to 4. Why is a dietary restriction recommended
heart muscle for an obese individual ?
5. Myocardial - Connective tissue 5. What precautions can be taken for
Infarction cancer
preventing heart diseases ?
V. Fill in the blanks
IX. Long answer questions
1. Cirrhosis is caused in liver due to excessive 1. Suggest measures to overcome the problems
use of __________________ of an alcoholic.

www.tntextbooks.in
2. Changes in lifestyle is a risk factor for XII. Assertion and Reasoning

occurrence of cardiovascular diseases. Can In each of the following questions, a statement
it be modified ? If yes, suggest measures for of Assertion is given and a corresponding
prevention. statement of Reason is given just below it.
X. Higher Order Thinking Skills (HOTS) Of statements given below mark the correct
1. What is the role of fat in the cause of answer as
atherosclerosis ? a. If both Assertion and Reason are true
2. Eating junk food and consuming soft drinks and Reason is the correct explanation of
results in health problems like obesity, still Assertion
children prefer. What are the suggestions b. If both Assertion and Reason are true that
you would give to avoid children eating Reason is not the correct explanation of
junk food/ consumption of soft drinks? Asssertion
3. Regular physical exercise is advisable for c. Assertion is true but Reason is false
normal functioning of human body. What d. Both Assertion and Reason are false
are the advantages of practising exercise in 1. Assertion: All drugs act on the brain.
daily life? Reason: Drugs disturb the functioning of
4. A leading weekly magazine has recently the body and mind.
published a survey analysis which says that 2. Assertion: Excretion of excess glucose in
number of AIDS patient in the country is urine is observed in a person with diabetes
increasing day by day. The report says that mellitus.
the awareness among the people about Reason: Pancreas is unable to produce
AIDS is still very poor. You are discussing sufficient quantity of insulin.
the magazine report in your class and a
team of your class decides to help people to
REFERENCE BOOKS
fight against the dreadful disease.
a) What problem you face when trying to 1. Edward P Sarafino and Timothy W. Smith.
educate the people in your village near 2012, Health Psychology, International
by your school? Student Version - 7th Edition, Wiley India
b) How do you overcome the problem ? (P) Ltd, New Delhi.
2. Srilakshmi, B. Dietetics, 2014, 7th Multi-
XI. Value based questions
color Edition, New Age International
1. Once a person starts taking drugs or alcohol
it is difficult to get rid of the habit. Why ? Publishers, New Delhi.
2. Men addicted to tobacco lead to oxygen 3. Sathyanarayana U. Biochemistry – Revised
deficiency in their body. What could be the Edition, Books and (P) Ltd, Kolkata.
possible reason?
3. Name any three foods that are to be avoided I NT ER NET R ES O URCES
and included in the diet of a diabetic patient.
https://www. ross and wilson.com / lecturers
Why should it be followed?
4. How can informational efforts change https://www.elsevier health.com
people’s HIV knowledge and behaviour? https://www.ncpcr.gov.in

www.tntextbooks.in
Concept Map
Abuses and Disorders due to Lifestyle Modification
Abuses Disorders due to Lifestyle

Protection and Modification
Child abuse
Prevention
Diabetes Protection and
Sexual abuse Mellitus Prevention
Counselling and
Psychotherapy
Drug abuse Obesity
Dietary
Family support management
Tobacco abuse Cancer
Community
Alcohol abuse Physical activity
based efforts
and body weight
maintenance
Abuse prevention Medication
campaigns and therapy
Education and
Rehabilitation awareness

www.tntextbooks.in
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
22
Learning Objectives

� Differentiate between renewable and non-renewable resources.
� Gain knowledge about the need for conservation of various natural resources.
� To know the various methods which can be adopted of conservation of natural resources.
� Create awareness about the limited exploitation of natural resources.
� Get motivated to participate in the protection of environment and its management.
situation where non-renewable resources may

Introduction come to an end after a certain period of time.
Environmental management deals Expanding human population resulted
with the different aspects of environment, in expanding needs of man. With scientific
its structure, function, its quality and its and technological advancement man started
maintenance including conservation of utilizing natural resources at a much larger
its living and non-living components. The scale. Continuous increase in population
diversified natural resources on this earth caused an increased demand for resources.
provide the necessities for survival of all forms Therefore, conservation of natural resources
of life including man. Everything that comes makes important contributions to the social
from nature has some utility for man but its and economic development of the country.
utilization is possible based on the availability
of appropriate technology.
22.1 Conservation and
Resources can be renewed simultaneously Judicious Use of
along with their exploitation (forests, crops, Resources
wildlife, groundwater, wind and solar
energy). They can maintain themselves by Natural resources are conserved for
natural recycling or can be replenished by their biological, economic and recreational
proper management. Simultaneously, non- values. The use of natural resources in excess
renewable resources cannot be recycled and and unplanned way leads to imbalance in the
can get exhausted by unlimited and continous environment. A judicious balance should be
use (mineral ores, coal, petroleum etc). They maintained between exploitation of resources
cannot be replaced easily. This would lead to a and its replenishment. Proper utilization and
315

www.tntextbooks.in
management of nature and its resources is

More to Know
termed as conservation.
We have to build a sustainable world, Chipko movement
which should last forever. Some of the ways to The Chipko movement was a non-violent
sustain continuous use of resources are practices agitation in 1973 that was aimed at protection
to utilise energy efficiently, avoid wastage of and conservation of trees. The name of the
water, avoid usage of plastics and other non- movement ‘Chipko’ comes from the word
biodegradable materials and to take care for ’embrace’, as the villagers hugged the trees and
the environment we live. It is important that we encircled them to prevent them from being
cut. The movement originated in the Chamoli
manage and use our resources carefully so as to
district of Uttar Pradesh (now Uttarakhand).
preserve for the future generations.
The protest of Chipko movement achieved a
major victory in 1980 with a 15 year ban on
22.2 Forest and its Importance cutting trees in the Himalayan forests.
Forests are an important component Effects of Deforestation

of our environment and are dominated by
Deforestation gives rise to ecological
microorganisms, flowering plants, shrubs,
problems like floods, drought, soil erosion, loss
climbers, dense trees and provide a vast habitat
of wild life, extinction of species, imbalance of
for wild animals. Forests also contribute to the
biogeochemical cycles, alteration of climatic
economic development of our country. Forests
conditions and desertification.
are vital for human life, it is a source for a wide
range of renewable natural resource. They 22.2.2 Conservation of Forests
provide wood, food, fodder, fibre and medicine.
India has an area of 752.3 lakh hectare
Forests are major factor of environmental classified as reserved forests and 215.1 lakh
concern. They act as carbon sink, regulate hectare as protected forests. The important
climatic conditions, increase rainfall, reduce measures taken for conservation of forests are
global warming, prevent natural hazards like as follows
flood and landslides, protect wildlife and also
act as catchments for water conservation. Afforestation: Activities for afforestation
They also play a vital role in maintaining the programme (Van Mahotsav) includes planting
ecological balance. and protecting trees with multiple uses which
help in restoration of green cover. Destruction
22.2.1 Deforestation and its of trees should be curtailed.
Effects Social forestry programme: It should be
Deforestation is the destruction of large undertaken on a large scale with active
area of forests. This happens for many reasons participation of the public and utilization of
like intensive agriculture, urbanization, common land to produce firewood, fodder and
construction of dams, roads, buildings and timber for the benefit of the rural community.
industries, hydroelectric projects, forest fires, This relieves pressure on existing forests and to
construction of mountain and forest roads. safeguard future of tribals.
It is a threat to the economy, quality of life Forest Conservation through Laws: Adopting
and future of the environment. India is losing stringent laws and policies to conserve and protect
about 1.5 million hectares of forest cover forests are through National Forest Policy, (1952
every year. and 1988) and Forest Conservation Act, 1980.

www.tntextbooks.in
The Wildlife protection Act was established

22.3 Wildlife and its
in 1972. The provisions of the act are
Conservation
• Prohibit killing and hunting of specified
Wild life refers to the undomesticated animals.
animals living in their natural habitats (forests, • Constitute sanctuaries, national parks,
grasslands and deserts) an area without human and closed areas for wildlife conservation.
habitation. They are needed for maintaining
• Special schemes for preservation of
biological diversity. It also helps in promoting
endangered species.
economic activities that generates revenue
through tourism. Conservation of forest and • Constitute Central Zoo Authority and
wildlife is interrelated with each other. recognition of zoos.
• Restrict, regulate or prohibit trade in wild
22.3.1 Decline in Wildlife animals and products obtained from them.
Population
� Jim Corbett National Park
Wildlife of India is a great natural was the first to be established
heritage. Exploitation of wildlife resources has in 1936 in Uttarakhand, India.
decreased global wildlife population by 52% � There are 15 biosphere reserves in India.
between 1970 and 2014. Over exploitation and � The Nilgiris is a biosphere reserve in
shrinking of forest cover areas has resulted in Tamil Nadu.
animals becoming extinct, some are threatened
and some are on the verge of extinction. In 22.3.4 Organisations Involved in
recent years, increase in human encroachment Conservation of Wildlife
has posed a threat to India’s wildlife.
(i) Indian Board for WildLife (IBWL)
22.3.2 Aims of Wildlife (ii) World Wildlife Fund (WWF) for Nature
Management (iii) World Conservation Union (WCN)
The main aim of wildlife conservation (iv) International Union for Conservation of
Nature and Natural resources (IUCN)
are:
(v) Convention of International Trade in
• To control and limit exploitation of
Endangered Species (CITES)
species.
(vi) Bombay Natural History Society (BNHS)
• To preserve the plants and animals from
extinction. (vii) Wild life Preservation Society of India,
Dehradun
• Maintenance of threatened species and
protect species which are on the verge of Rathika Ramasamy, a native
extinction. of Venkatachalapuram village,
• Preserve the endangered species. Theni District
in Tamil Nadu was the first
• To study the ecological relationship of
Indian woman to strike an
the plants and animals in natural habitat. International reputation
• Hunting and poaching should be as wildlife photographer.
prohibited. Her passion is towards bird photography.
A photobook on wildlife titled "The best
• Establishment of National parks, Wildlife
of wildlife moments" was published in
sanctuaries, protected areas and Biosphere November 2014.
reserves.
317 Environmental Management

www.tntextbooks.in
Info bits 22.5 Renewable and

Wildlife Conservation Initiatives In India. Non-Renewable Energy
� Project Tiger and Project Elephant Resources
has been launched in 1973 and 1992 Energy is an important input for
respectively development. The expansion of possible
� Crocodile Conservation Project was energy resources has been directly related
launched in 1976. with the pace of agricultural and industrial
� Sea Turtle Conservation Project was development in every part of the world. Energy
launched in 1999. resources can be classified as non-renewable
� Indian Rhino Vision 2020 is to conserve and renewable.
at least 3000 greater one-horned rhinos
in Assam, India by 2020. Non-renewable (Exhaustible) energy
resources
Energy obtained from sources that
cannot renew themselves over a short period
22.4 Soil Erosion of time is known as non-renewable energy.
The top layers of soil contain humus and These are available in limited amount in nature.
mineral salts, which are vital for the growth of They include coal, petroleum, natural gas and
plants. Removal of upper layer of soil by wind nuclear power. These conventional energy
and water is called soil erosion. Soil erosion resources account for 90% of the world’s
causes a significant loss of humus, nutrients production of commercial energy and nuclear
and decrease the fertility of soil. power account for 10%.
Renewable (Inexhaustible) energy resources

22.4.1 Agents of Soil Erosion
These energy resources are available in
Agents of soil erosion are high velocity unlimited amount in nature and they can
of wind, air currents, flowing water, landslide, be renewed over a short period of time,
human activities (deforestation, farming and inexpensive and can be harvested continuously.
mining) and overgrazing by cattle. These comprise the vast potential of non-
conventional energy resources which include
22.4.2 Management of Soil
biofuel, biomass energy, geothermal energy,
Erosion
water energy (hydroelectric energy and tidal
� Retain vegetation cover, so that soil is not energy), solar energy, wave energy and wind
exposed. energy.
� Cattle grazing should be controlled.
22.5.1 Fossil Fuels
� Crop rotation and soil management
improve soil organic matter. Fossil fuels are found inside the earth’s crust
and are energy rich substances formed by natural
� Runoff water should be stored in the
process, such as anaerobic decomposition of
catchment.
buried dead organisms, over millions of years.
� Reforestation, terracing and contour As the accumulating sediment layers produce
ploughing. heat and pressure, the remains of the organisms
� Wind speed can be controlled by planting are gradually transformed into hydrocarbons.
trees in form of a shelter belt. e.g. petroleum, coal and natural gas.

www.tntextbooks.in
22.5.2 Coal and Petroleum Case study of Taj Mahal

Coal and Petroleum are natural resources.
The Taj Mahal is one of the seven
They are called fossil fuels as they are formed
wonders of the world and is located in
from the degradation of biomass buried deep Agra, Uttarpradesh. It is built with white
under the earth millions of years ago. marble. The Mathura oil refinery owned by
Indian Oil Corporation present around this
India is the third largest area produce sulphur and nitrogen oxides.
consumer of crude oil in the The white marble became yellow due to
world, after the United States air pollution. The Government of India
and China. has set up emission standards around the
monument to protect it from the damage.
Coal is used for generation of electricity
at Thermal power plants. Petroleum also 22.6 Non-Conventional
known as crude oil is processed in oil refineries (Alternative) Energy
to produce petrol and diesel which are used Resources
to run automobiles, trucks, trains, ships and
airplanes etc. Kerosene and LPG (Liquefied The energy crisis has shown that for
Petroleum Gas) obtained from petroleum is sustainable development in energy sector we
used as domestic fuel for cooking food. must conserve the non-renewable conventional
resources from its rapid depletion and replace
The coal and petroleum reserves can get
them by non-polluting, renewable sources
exhausted if we continue using them at a rapid
which are environmentally clean.
rate. The formation of these fossil fuels is a Efforts are made to develop new sources
very slow process and takes very long period of energy which is called non-conventional
of time for renewal. sources of energy. It would provide greater
initiative to local people who could assess their
22.5.3 Steps to Conserve Coal needs and resources and plan a strategy that
and Petroleum Resources could be useful to them.
It is necessary to conserve or save coal 22.6.1 Solar Energy
and petroleum resources for the future Solar energy is the
use, which can be done by reducing their energy obtained from the
consumption. sun. The sun gives out vast
(i) If electricity is saved, it will inturn reduce amount of light and heat. It is
only a little less than half (47 %) of solar energy
the use of coal
which falls on the atmosphere reaches the earth’s
(ii) Using bicycle for covering short distances
surface. If we could use just a small part of this
instead of using cars, scooters or
energy it would fulfill all the country’s need for
motorcycles
power. Solar energy has advantages and also
(iii) Using pressure cooker can reduce the
certain limitations.
consumption of kerosene and LPG while
cooking food. Solar cooker and solar Solar Energy Devices
heaters can be used wherever possible The energy from the sun can be harnessed
(iv) Motor vehicles should be designed with to provide power. The various devices used for
fuel efficient engines to increase efficiency harnessing sun’s energy are called solar energy
and also reduce air pollution devices.

www.tntextbooks.in
Solar Cells box. The reflector is the plane mirror which

Solar cells (Photovoltaic devices) is made is attached to the box. The food is cooked by
up of silicon that converts sunlight directly energy radiated by the sun.
into electricity. Solar cell produces electricity
Solar thermal power plant
without polluting the environment. Since it uses
no fuel other than sunlight, no harmful gases, In solar thermal power plants, many solar
no burning and no wastes are produced. These panels are used to concentrate sun rays, to heat
up water into steam. The steam is used to run
can be installed in remote and inacessible areas
the turbines to produce electricity.
(forests and hilly regions) where setting up of
power plant is expensive. A capacity of 100 litres solar
Uses of Solar cells heater can save upto 1500 units
(i) It can be used for street lighting, traffic of electricity per year.
signals, water pumping, battery charging Advantages of Solar Energy
system etc. (i) It is available in abundance in our country
(ii) It is used in artificial satellites and space and is free of cost.
probes (ii) It is a renewable source of energy.
(iii) It provides radio and TV transmission to (iii) It can be used for generating electricity or
remote areas heat.
(iv) It is used in calculators, electronic toys (iv) It does not cause pollution.
and watches.
22.6.2 Biogas
Solar Panel Biogas is the mixture of methane (nearly
Arrangement of many solar cells side by 75 %), hydrogen sulphide, carbon dioxide and
hydrogen. It is produced by the decomposition
side connected to each other is called solar
of animal wastes (cow dung) and plant wastes
panel. The capacity to provide electric cuurent
in the absence of oxygen. It is also commonly
is much increased in the solar panel. But the
called as ‘Gobar gas’ since the starting material
process of manufacture is very expensive. used is cow dung which means gobar in Hindi.
Uses of biogas
(i) It is used as fuel for cooking .
(ii) It is used to run motors and pump sets.
(iii) It is used to generate electricity.
Advantages of biogas
(i) It burns without smoke and therefore
Figure 22.1 Solar Panel causes less pollution.
(ii) An excellent way to get rid of organic
Solar Cooker
wastes like bio-waste and sewage material.
It consist of an insulated (iii) Left over slurry is a good manure rich in
metal box or wooden box nitrogen and phosphorus
which is painted from inside (iv) It is safe and convenient to use
so as to absorb maximum
(v) It can reduce the amount of greenhouse
solar radiations. A thick glass gases emitted.
sheet forms the cover over the Solar Cooker

www.tntextbooks.in
22.6.3 Shale gas Windmill

Shale refers to the soft finely stratified Windmill is a machine that converts the
sedimentary rock that is formed from the energy of wind into rotational energy by broad
compaction of small old rocks containing blade attached to the rotating axis. When the
mud and minerals – such as quartz and calcite, blowing air strikes the blades of the windmill, it
trapped beneath earth’s surface. These rocks exerts force and causes the blades to rotate. The
contain fossil fuels like oil and gas in their pores. rotational movement of the blades operate the
generator and the electricity is produced. The
The fuel is extracted by a technique
energy output from each windmill is coupled
called hydraulic fracturing (drilling or well
together to get electricity on a commercial scale.
boring of sedimentary rocks layers to reach
productive reservoir layers).
Environmental concerns of shale gas

(i) Shale drilling could affect groundwater
reserves, which can contaminate the
drinking water resources and also affect
the fertility of the soil.
(ii) Million gallons of water is needed to Figure 22.2 Windmill
break and release the shale gas, which Advantages of Wind energy
inturn can affect the water table.
(i) Wind energy is free, eco-friendly,
renewable source of energy.
More to Know
(ii) It does not cause pollution.
India has identified six basins as areas (iii) Expenses on periodic maintenance is low
for shale gas exploration: Cambay (Gujarat), when compared to the other power sources.
Assam-Arakan (North East), Gondwana
(Central India), Krishna Godavari onshore
Activity 1
(East Coast), Cauvery onshore and Indo-
Gangetic basins. Collect information regarding the
(i) Tehri Dam project
22.6.4 Wind Energy (ii) Sardar Sarovar Dam project
The kinetic energy possessed by the
wind is due to its high speed, that can be 22.6.5 Water Energy
converted into mechanical power by wind Earth’s surface is covered with nearly 71 %
turbines. The rotatory motion of wind mill of water. Harnessing the energy from the
produces wind energy. It can be used for flowing water can be used to produce electricity.
generating electricity, run water pumps, flour The technique to harness the water energy is
mills, draw water from wells etc., called Hydropower.
The electrical energy is derived from
� The world’s largest and water flow, water falling from a height. Hilly
tallest wind turbine is areas are suitable for this purpose where there
situated in Hawaii. is continous flow of water in large amounts
falling from high slopes. It does not cause
� One wind turbine can produce environmental pollution or waste generation.
electricity for 300 homes.

www.tntextbooks.in
Hydropower plants converts the kinetic (ii) Recharge pit: In this method, the rainwater
energy of flowing water into electricity. This is is first collected from the roof tops or open
called hydroelectricity. spaces and is directed into the percolation
pits through pipes for filtration. After
22.6.6 Tidal Energy filtration the rainwater enters the recharge
Tidal energy is the energy obtained from pits or ground wells.
the movement of water due to ocean tides.
Tides are the rise and fall of sea levels caused
by the combined effects of the gravitational
forces exerted on the oceans of the earth.
A tidal stream is a fast flowing body of
water created by tides. Turbines are placed in
tidal streams. When the tides hit the turbine,
the turbine rotates and converts the tidal
energy into electric energy
Advantages of tidal energy
(i) Tidal energy does not produce any Figure 22.3 Rain water Harvesting
pollution.
People living in rural areas adopt a
(ii) It does not use any fuel and does not
variety of water collecting methods to capture
produce any waste.
and store as rain water. Some of the methods
(iii) Tides are predictable, so tidal energy can
used are
be produced at any time.
(i) Digging of tanks or lakes (Eris): It is
(iv) Water is denser than air and therefore can
one of the traditional water harvesting
generate electricity at lower speeds than
wind turbines. system in Tamil Nadu. Eris are constructed
in such a way that if the water in one eri
22.7 Rainwater Harvesting overflows, it automatically gets diverted to
the eri of the next village, as these eris are
Rainwater harvesting is a technique of interconnected.
collecting and storing rainwater for future
(ii) Ooranis: These are small ponds to collect
use. It is a traditional method of storing rain
rainwater. The water is used for various
water in underground tanks, ponds, lakes,
domestic purposes (drinking, washing and
check dams and used in future.
bathing). These ponds cater the nearby
The main purpose of rainwater harvesting
villages.
is to make the rainwater percolate under the
ground so as to recharge ‘groundwater level’.
More to Know
Methods of rainwater harvesting
kallanai Dam, also known as Grand Anicut,
(i) Roof top rainwater harvesting: Roof-
is the fourth oldest dam in the world,
tops are excellent rain catchers. The rain
water that falls on the roof of the houses, constructed by King Karikala Chola of the
apartments, commercial buildings etc. is Chola Dynasty in the 2nd century A.D.(CE). It
collected and stored in the surface tank still serves the people of Tamilnadu, The dam
and can be used for domestic purpose. is located on the River Kaveri, approximately
20 km from the city of Tiruchirapalli.

www.tntextbooks.in
Advantages of rainwater harvesting though also contain iron, copper, silicon,

Rainwater harvesting helps to aluminum and gold which can be recovered.
(i) Overcome the rapid depletion of ground Neverthless, only 5 % of e-wastes produced
water levels. are recycled.
(ii) To Meet the increase demand of water. Sources of e-wastes
(iii) Reduces flood and soil erosion Electronic devices: Computers,
(iv) Water stored in ground is not contaminated laptops, mobile phones, printers, monitors,
by human and animal wastes and hence televisions, DVD players, calculators, toys,
can be used for drinking purpose. sport equipments, etc.
22.8 Electrical Energy Household electrical appliances:

Management Refrigerators, washing machine, microwave
oven, mixer, grinder, water heater, etc.
Electricity or electric power is produced Accessories: Printing cartridges, batteries
by generators. The generators are operated by and chargers.
the turbines attached to it. The turbines are
rotated by steam, moving water or wind power
E-wastes include
to produce electricity.
Computer components - 66%
Conservation of electrical energy
Telecommunication components - 12 %
The following measures can be taken even Electronic components -5%
at home and school to save electricity
Biomedical components -7%
(i) Use energy efficient appliances to save Other components -6%
electricity like Compact Fluorescent
Lamps (CFL), Light Emiting Diode (LED)
Environmental impact of e-wastes
bulbs and other electric equipments.
Disposal of any kind of electrical and
(ii) Switch off the lights and fans, television
electronic devices without knowledge can
and other electrical appliances when not
become the landfill and water pollutants.
in use.
(iii) Switch of the mobile phone chargers
when not in use. More to Know
(iv) Maximise the use of solar radiation. Solar
water heating system can be used instead Health Effects of E- Wastes
of electric geysers. Lead: Damages central and peripheral nervous
(v) Minimise the use of air conditioners. system; affect brain development in children
Chromium: Asthmatic bronchitis
22.9 E-Wastes and its Cadmium: Accumulates in kidney and
Management liver; neural damage
Mercury: Chronic damage to brain and
E-wastes are generally called as electronic respiratory system
wastes, which includes the spoiled, outdated, Plastics including Polyvinyl Chloride
non-repairable electrical and electronic (PVC): Burning produces dioxin which
devices. These wastes contain toxic metals can cause developmental and reproductive
like lead, cadmium, chromium and mercury, problems, damages the immuns system.

www.tntextbooks.in
Electronic equipments contain many Sewage/wastewater treatment method

hazardous heavy metals such as lead, cadmium The conventional wastewater treatment
that can cause severe soil and groundwater methods involve the following steps
pollution. (a) Pre-screening (b) Aeration (c) Sludge
E-waste dumping yards and the places Management and (d) Water Reuse.
nearby are polluted and cause severe health Pre-screening: Wastewater generated
hazard. from domestic and industrial activities is
screened to remove soil and solid particulates.
22.10 Sewage Management Aeration: Screened wastewater is then
pumped to an aeration tank. Here the microbial
Untreated sewage or wastewater generated contaminants are removed by the biological
from domestic and industrial process is degradation that occurs in the presence of air.
the leading polluter of water sources in Sedimentation process: In this process,
India. Sewage water results in agricultural the solid particles in suspension form are
contamination and environmental allowed to settle. The particles that settle out
degradation. from the suspension is known as sludge.
Sources of Sewage/wastewater Sludge removal: The sludge generated
by the degradation process is transferred
• Domestic purpose or household activities
periodically from the tank for safe disposal.
• Dye and textile industries
Disinfection: Chlorination and
• Leather industries
ultraviolet (UV) radiation of treated water
• Sugar and breweries industries is required to remove any microorganism
• Paper and pulp industries contamination.
Water recycling: The water will then be
supplied for domestic or industrial purposes.
22.11 Solid Waste

Management
Solid wastes mainly include municipal

wastes, hospital wastes, industrial wastes and
e- wastes etc. The solid wastes are dumped in
Figure 22.4 A view of sewage treatment plant
the soil which results in landscape pollution.
Figure 22.5 Conventional Wastewater Treatment


www.tntextbooks.in
Solid-waste management involves the •• A gricultural wastes like coconut shells, jute
collection, treatment and proper disposing cotton stalk, bagasse of sugarcane can be
of solid material that is discarded from the used to make paper and hard board. Paddy
household and industrial activities. husk can be used as livestock fodder.
Methods of solid wastes disposal •• Cowdung and other organic wastes can be
(i) Segregation: It is the separation of different used in gobar gas plant to provide biogas
and manure for fields.
type of waste materials like biodegradable
and non biodegradable wastes.
4R Approach
(ii) Sanitary landfill: Solid wastes are dumped
The 4R approach such as Reduce, Reuse,
into low lying areas. The layers are
Recovery and Recycle may be followed for
compacted by trucks to allow settlement.
effective waste management.
The waste materials get stabilised in about
2-12 months. The organic matter undergoes
decomposition. Points to Remember
Conservation is a process which is

concerned with the use, preservation and
proper management of natural resources
from destructive activities of human
being.
Conservation of natural resources
Figure 22.6 Collection of degradable and non- contributes to the social and economic
development of the country.
degradable solid wastes
(iii) Incineration: It is the burning of non Forests of a country constitute a major
biodegradable solid wastes (medical asset for the people of the country.
wastes) in properly constructed furnace at National park is a reserved area for the
high temperature. conservation of entire wildlife including
(iv) Composting: Biodegradable matter of plants and animals.
solid wastes is digested by microbial action Sanctuary is a place reserved exclusively
or earthworms and converted into humus. for the use of animals.
Solar cell is a device that absorbs sunlight
and converts it into electric energy.
Solar water heater does not require
electricity, they heat up water directly
from sunlight.
Figure 22.7 Collection of various types of solid Biogas is produced by the anaerobic
wastes in separate bins decomposition of cow dung.
The technique of collecting and storing
Recycling of wastes rain water for future purpose is known as
•• P
apers from old books, magazines and rainwater harvesting.
newspapers are recycled to produce papers Unwanted, non-working and outdated
in papermills. electronic products become e-waste.

www.tntextbooks.in
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Fill in the blanks IV. Choose the correct answer

1. Deforestation leads to ______________ in 1. Which of the following is / are a fossil fuel?
rainfall. i. Tar ii. Coal iii. Petroleum
2. Removal of soil particles from the land is a) i only b) i and ii
called ______________. c) ii and iii d) i, ii and iii
2. What are the steps will you adopt for better
3. Chipko movement is initiated against
waste management?
______________ .
a) reduce the amount of waste formed
4. ______________ is a biosphere reserve in
Tamilnadu. b) reuse the waste
c) recycle the waste
5. Tidal energy is ___________ type of energy.
d) all of the above
6. Coal, petroleum and natural gas are called
______________ fuels. 3. The gas released from vehicles exhaust are
i. carbon monoxide
7. ______________ is the most commonly
ii. Sulphur dioxide
used fuel for the production of electricity. iii. Oxides of nitrogen
a) i and ii b) i and iii
II.
State whether True or False.
c) ii and iii d) i, ii and iii
Correct the statements which are false
4. Soil erosion can be prevented by
1. Biogas is a fossil fuel.
a) deforestation b) afforestion
2. Planting trees increases the groundwater
level. c) over growing d) removal of vegetation
3. Habitat destruction cause loss of wild life. 5. A renewable source of energy is
4. Nuclear energy is a renewable energy. a) petroleum b) coal
5. Overgrazing prevents soil erosion. c) nuclear fuel d) trees
6. Poaching of wild animals is a legal act. 6. Soil erosion is more where there is
7. National park is a protected park. a) no rain fall b) low rainfall
8. Wild life protection act was established c) rain fall is high d) none of these
in 1972. 7. An inexhaustible resources is
III. Match the following a) wind power b) soil fertility
1. Soil erosion - energy saving c) wild life d) all of the above
2. Bio gas - acid rain 8. Common energy source in village is
3. Natural gas - removal of vegetation a) electricity b) coal
4. Green house gas - renewable energy c) biogas d) wood and animal dung
5. CFL bulbs - CO2 9. Green house effect refers to
6. Wind - non-renewable energy a) cooling of earth
7. Solid waste - lead and heavy metals b) trapping of UV rays

www.tntextbooks.in
c) cultivation of plants 3. What are the sources of solid wastes?

d) warming of earth How are solid wastes managed?
10. A cheap, conventional, commercial and 4. Enumerate the importance of forest.
inexhaustible source of energy is 5. What are the consequences of soil erosion?
a) hydropower b) solar energy
6. Why is the management of forest
c) wind energy. d) thermal energy and wildlife resource considered as a
11. Global warming will cause challenging task?
a) raise in level of oceans
VIII. Assertion and Reasoning
b) melting of glaciers
In each of the following question a statement
c) sinking of islands
of assertion(A) is given and a corresponding
d) all of these
statement of reason (R). Of the four statements
12. Which of the following statement is wrong given below mark the correct answer.
with respect to wind energy
a. Both assertion and reason are true and
a) wind energy is a renewable energy reason is correct explanation of assertion.
b) the blades of wind mill are operated with
b. Both assertion and reason are true but
the help of electric motor
reason is not the correct explanation of
c) production of wind energy is pollution free
assertion.
d) usage of wind energy can reduce the
consumption of fossil fuels c. Assertion is true but reason is false.
d. Both assertion and reason are false.
V. Answer in a sentence
1. What will happen if trees are cut down? 1. Assertion: Rainwater harvesting is to
collect and store rain water.
2. What would happen if the habitat of wild
animals is disturbed? eason: Rainwater can be directed to
R
3. What are the agents of soil erosion? recharge the underground water source.
4. Why fossil fuels are to be conserved? 2. Assertion: Energy efficient bulbs like CFL
5. Solar energy is a renewable energy. How? must be used to save electric energy.
6. How are e-wastes generated? eason: CFL bulbs are costlier than ordinary
R
bulbs, hence using ordinary bulbs can save
our money.
1. What is the importance of rainwater
harvesting? IX. Higher Order Thinking Skills (HOTS)
2. What are the advantages of using biogas? 1. Although coal and petroleum are produced
3. What are the environmental effect caused by degradation of biomass, yet we need to
by sewage? conserve them. Why?
4. What are the consequences of deforestation? 2. What are the objectives for replacing
non-conventional energy resources from
conventional energy resources?
1. How does rainwater harvesting structures 3. Why is the Government imposing ban on
recharge ground water? the use of polythene bags and plastics?
2. How will you prevent soil erosion? Suggest alternatives. How is this ban likely
to improve the environment?

www.tntextbooks.in
X. Value based questions REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Why is it not possible to use solar cells to
1. Ghatwal G.T. and Harish Sharma, 2005.
meet our energy needs? State three reason
A Text Book of Environmental Studies’,
to support to your answer.
Himalaya Publishing House.
2. How would you dispose the following wastes?
2. P. D. Sharma, 2013. Ecology and Environment,
a. Domestic wastes like vegetable peels Rastogi Publications, Meerut.
b. Industrial wastes like metallic cans
Can the disposal protect the environment? I NT ER NET R ES O U RCES
How?
1. http://envfor.nic.in
3. List any three activities based on 4R approach
2. https://w w w.ovo energ y.com/guides/
to conserve natural resources.
energy-guides/120-ways-to-save-energy.
html
Concept Map
Environmental management
Conservation of Natural Resources
•Waste managment Energy Resources

•Forest • E-Waste
• Afforestation Electrical Energy • Solid Waste
• Forest Conservation Managment • Sewage
Act
•Wild Life Non Renewable Renewable
• Wildlife protection
Act Rain water harvesting
•Management of Soil •Use of Alternative
Erosion •Management of
Energy Resources
Fossil Fuels
• Bio-gas
(Coal and
• Solar Energy
Petroleum)
• Wind Energy
• Water Energy
• Tidal Energy

www.tntextbooks.in
VISUAL COMMUNICATION
23
Learning Objectives
� Differentiate a File from a Folder
� Know how to create a File and a Folder
� Use the software application to create Animation
INTRODUCTION them in folders which accommodate multiple

files or a single file. Let us understand the
In general, whenever we think of computers,
terminologies like file and folder before moving
the things that come to our mind is computer
further.
screen, keyboard , mouse and CPU. We learnt
about computer and parts of a computer as
introductory part in standard VI. Apart from
that, software and hardware also plays vital role
in the working of computer. Now, shall we learn
how to operate the computer?
23.1 FILE
The output we get from any application

The reason we prefer computer is its speed is commonly referred as ‘file’. Therefore
and the ability to store data. How can we save the application for the specific purposes
data and information in computer? We can save determines the nature of the file.
329
10th_Science Unit-23 .indd 329 11-01-2020 14:37:52

www.tntextbooks.in
23.1.1 FOLDER As per it’s name we can type notes in

‘Notepad’ and save the created files in a folder.
A folder is a storage
Likewise in the ‘Paint’ app we can draw and edit
space that contains multiple
pictures. With these pictures, let us see how
files. We can create files as
we can create image gallery, animations and
per the user’s need. For
graphics easily.
clear understanding, we can take the example
of a bookshelf in a library. The individual book
can be considered as a ‘file’ and the whole set
of books in a shelf can be considered as folders.
When we right click on the mouse, the popup
menu appears on the screen with multiple
options. Select ‘NEW’ option and a secondary
menu comes up with another set of options.
Select ‘Folder’ option in the menu. You can now
save your file(s) in the newly created folder. Pictures and audio-visuals gives us more
More people are using Windows and understanding than teaching and writing on the
LINUX operating systems in their computers. black board. Is it right?
We can do many activities like collect notes,
draw/paint, create animations /spreadsheets/
word docs/PPTs etc.
We use ‘Guide Board’ to go to the unknown
places like that when we ‘On’ the computer click
the ‘START’ button at the left corner of the
computer, it shows the list of all programs in the
computer. Now select the required program and
create the required files. Instead of saying a story like ‘once upon a
time there was a king’ we can understand the
concept easily by seeing the video and also it
registers firmly in the minds of the students.
The device which helps in explaining the
concepts easily through pictures is known as
‘Visual Communication Device’. For example
photos, audio -visuals, drawings, animations
all these can be created easily with the help of
computer. Cinema is a good example for ‘Visual
Communication Device’.
How can we create Files? 23.2 SCRATCH

For example if the computer is operating
Introduction
on the Windows OS, we can collect our notes
in ‘Notepad’ application and draw pictures in ‘Scratch’ is a software used to create
‘Paint’ application. animations, cartoons and games easily.
Scratch is a visual programming language. It

www.tntextbooks.in
was developed in the Massachusetts Institute editor is shown (outlined in red):

of Technology (MIT) Media Lab to make
programming easier and more fun to learn.
Scratch Environment Editor

The Scratch editor has three main parts:
They are Stage, Sprite and Script editor.
Stage: Stage is the background appearing when
we open the scratch window. The background
will most often be white. You can change the
background colour as you like. Movement and Loops
Sprite: The characters on the background of a Click File/New to create a new project and enter
Scratch window are known as Sprite. Usually a project name .
acat appears as a sprite when the Scratch window
Click the menu Script → Event, drag a
is opened. The software provides facilities to
when green flag clicked block to the scripts
make alternations in sprite.
area. Your scripts area should look like this:
Script editor / costume editor: Where you edit
your programs or your sprite’s pictures.
Click the menu Script → Motion menu,

drag a goto x: 0 y: 0 block to the scripts area and
snap it to the bottom of the when green flag
clicked block. Your script should look like this:
You should see a single window with at least

the following three panes: the Stage (top left),
the Sprite List (bottom left), and the Scripts tab
(right), which contains the Blocks tab and the
Scripts Area. The right pane also contains two Add a move 10 steps block to the bottom
additional tabs, Costumes and Sounds. of your script and change the 10 into 100.
The script editor has three main parts:
• Script area: Where you build scripts.

• Block menu: Where you choose the category
of blocks (programming statements) to use.
• Block palette: Where you choose the block Click the green flag at the top right corner
to use. of the stage to run your program.
When the Costumes tab is chosen, the costume
331 Visual Communication

www.tntextbooks.in
Adding Sound 3. Click Looks in script option. Drag “say” to

1. Click Sprite1 in the sprite list and click the script area.
Sounds tab.
2. Try the meow sound already there. If
you don’t like it, click the speaker icon to
choose a different sound from the sound
library.
3. Click the Scripts tab and find the play
sound block from the Sound menu. Add
this block to the when space key pressed
script. (Select the sound you want from the
4. Type “Hello “ word in say tab.
drop-down list.)
4. Run your program.
Example:
Program for print the word “Hello” with sound
5. Click sounds in script option. Drag play

sound to script area. Choose the hello
sound from the audio file.
1. Click events in script option
6. From File menu choose the Save option.

7. Click the green flag at the top right corner
2. Drag tab to script area of the stage window to run the program

www.tntextbooks.in
Output:
TEXTBOOK EVALUATION
I. Choose the best answer II. Match the Following

1. Which software is used to create animation ? 1. Script Area Type notes
a) Paint b) PDF 2. Folder Animation software
c) MS Word d) Scratch 3. Scratch Edit programs
2. All files are stored in the ______________ 4. Costume editor Store files
a) Folder b) box 5. Notepad Build Scripts
c) Pai d) scanner
3. Which is used to build scripts? III. Answer the following
a) Script area b) Block palette 1. What is Scratch?
c) stage d) sprite 2. Write a short note on editor and its main
4. Which is used to edit programs? parts?
a) Inkscape b) script editor 3. What is Stage?
c) stage d) sprite 4. What is Sprite?
5. Where you will create category of blocks?
a) Block palette b) Block menu
c) Script area d) sprite
333 Visual Communication

www.tntextbooks.in
PRACTICALS
S.No. NAME OF THE EXPERIMENT MONTH
Determination of weight of an object using the principle of

1 June
moments
PHYSICS
2 Determination of focal length of a convex lens July
3 Determination of resistivity September
Identification o the dissolution of the given salt whether it is

4 June
exothermic or endothermic
CHEMISTRY
5 Testing the solubility of the salt July
6 Testing the water of hydration of salt August
7 Test the given sample for the presence of acid or base October
Photosynthesis-Test tube and Funnel Experiment
8 June
(Demonstration)
BIO-BOTANY
9 Parts of a Flower August
10 Mendel's Monohybrid cross August
11 Observation of Transverse Section of Dicot stem and Dicot Root October

BIO-ZOOLOGY
12 Observation of Models-Human Heart and Human Brain July
13 Identification of Blood Cells August
14 Identification of Endocrine Glands October
40 minutes for each practical
X_Science_Practical.indd 334 11-01-2020 14:40:05

www.tntextbooks.in
PHYSICS
1. D E T E R M I N A T I O N O F W E I G H T O F A N O B J E C T U S I N G
THE PRINCIPLE OF MOMENTS
Aim:
To determine the weight of an object using the principle of moments
Apparatus required:
A metre scale, a knife edge, slotted weights, thread
Procedure:
i. A metre scale is supported at its centre of gravity by a knife edge or suspended by
using a thread tied to its centre so that the scale is in the horizontal position. Ensure that
the scale is in equilibrium position.
ii. A known weight W2 and an unknown weight W1 are suspended from to either side of the
the scale using the weight hangers.
iii. Fix the position of one weight hanger and adjust the position of the second weight hanger
such that the scale is in equilibrium.
iv. Measure the distance d1 and d2 of the two weight hangers from the centre of the scale
accurately.
v. The experiment is repeated for different positions of the unknown weight. Measure the
distances. The reading are tabulated as follows:
Observation:
S.No Weight in Distance Distance of W2 × d2 Unknown weight

the wieght of known unknown (kg m) W ×d
W1 = 2 2 (kg)
hanger(W2) wieght wieght d1
kg d1 (m) d2 (m)
1
2
3
Mean:
Calculations:
Moment of a force can be calculated using the formula
Moment of the force = Force x distance
Anticlock wise moment by unknown weight = W1 × d1 d1 d2
Clockwise moment by known weight = W2 × d2

W1 × d1= W2 × d2
W2 × d2
Unknown weight = W1=
d1 w1 w2
Result:
Using the principle of moments, the weight of the unknown body W1 = ……. Kg Wt.
335 Practicals

www.tntextbooks.in
2. D E T E R M I N A T I O N O F F O C A L L E N G T H O F A C O N V E X L E N S
Aim:
To determine the focal length of a convex lens by using
1. Distant object method
2. uv method
Apparatus required: A convex lens, stand, wire gauze object, screen and measuring scale.
Formula:
uv cm
f=
(u + v)
Here,
u is the distance between the object (light source) and the convex lens
v is the distance of the image (screen) from the convex lens
f is the focal length of the convex lens
1. Distant Object Method:

Fix the given convex lens vertically on the
stand and place it on the table near an open
window of the laboratory. Locate a distant object
(tree or building) through the open window.
Place the screen behind the convex lens. Adjust
the position of the convex lens and the screen so
as to get a sharp, inverted and diminished image. f
Measure the distance between the screen and the
convex lens with the help of the measuring scale. This
distance is equal to the approximate focal length of
the convex lens (f)
2. uv - Method:
Fix the given convex lens vertically on
the stand and place it on the table. Place
the wire gauze object on the left side of the
convex lens (say at a distance greater than
2f). Measure the distance between the object
and the lens (u). Place the screen on the right
side of the convex lens and adjust its position
to get a sharp, inverted and diminished
image. Measure the distance between the screen and the lens (v). Repeat the same procedure, by
changing the distance of the object (u) and tabulate your observations.

www.tntextbooks.in
Observation:
Focal length of the convex lens (By distance object method) is (f) = …………cm
2f = …….cm
S.No Size of the Position of the Distance between Distance between Focal length of
Image object the object and the the screen and convex lens
lens (u) cm the Lens (v) cm uv cm
f=
(u + v)
1 Diminished u > 2f
2
3 Same size u = 2f
4 Magnified u < 2f
5
Result:
The focal length of the given convex lens
1. By distance object method f = ………cm
2. By ‘uv’ method f = … .…..cm
3. D E T E R M I N A T I O N O F R E S I S T I V I T Y
Objective:
To determine the resistivity of the material of the given coil of wire.
Equipment required:
A coil of wire, screw gauge, a metre scale, battery, key, ammeter, voltmeter, rheostat and
connecting Wires.
Formula:
The resistivity of the material of the coil of wire is

Where A is the area of cross section of the wire (m2)
L is the length of the coil of wire (m)
` R is the resistance of the coil of wire (ohm)
Circuit Diagram:
Procedure:
• Connect the battery, ammeter, given wire, rheostat and key
in series, as shown in the circuit diagram.
• Connect the voltmeter in parallel to the unknown resistor.
337 Practicals

www.tntextbooks.in
• Close the key and hence the circuit is closed.

• Adjust the rheostat such that the ammeter reads a current of 0.5 ampere.
• Note down the potential difference across the resistor as shown by the voltmeter.
• Adjust the rheostat and change the current in steps of 0.5A (that is 0.5A, 1.0A, 1.5A, etc.).
• For each current, note down the corresponding potential difference as shown by the voltmeter.
• Tabulate the observations.
• Measure the diameter of the wire using a screw gauge.
• Measure the length of the coil using metre scale
Observations:
(i) To find the resistance:

S. No Ammeter reading-I Voltmeter reading-V (Volt) Resistance = V/I
(Ampere) (Ohm)
1
2
3
MEAN
(ii) To find the diameter of the wire using screw gauge:

S. No Pitch Scale Head scale Head scale Total reading =
reading-PSR coincidence-HSC reading- PSR + HSR (mm)
(mm) HSR=HSC×LC
(mm)
1
2
3
Mean Diameter
Calculations:
Radius of the wire, r = diameter/2 = _____________ m
Area of cross section of the wire, A = π r2 = ____________ m2
Length of the wire L = __________ m.
Resistivity of the material of the wire = = __________ Ω m
Result:
The resistivity of the material of the wire = __________ Ω m

www.tntextbooks.in
CHEMISTRY
4. I D E N T I F Y T H E D I S S O L U T I O N O F T H E G I V E N S A L T
W H E T H E R I T I S E X O T H E R M I C O R E N D O T H E R M I C.
Aim:
To test the dissolution of given salt is exothermic or endothermic
Principle:
If the reaction or process liberates the heat, then it is called exothermic.
If the reaction or process absorbs the heat, then it is called endothermic
Apparatus required:
Two beakers, Thermometer, stirrer ,weighed amount of two samples.
Procedure:
Take 50ml of water in two beakers and label them as A and B. Note the temperature of
the water from beaker A and B. Then, add 5g of sample A into the beaker A and stir well until
it dissolve completely. Record final temperature of the solution. Now, repeat the same for the
sample B. Record the observation.
Observation:
S. No Sample Temperature Temperature Inference (temperature
before addition after addition of increases or decreases)
of sample (oC) sample (oC)
1 A
2 B
Result:
From the inferences made
The dissolution of sample A is ____________________(Exothermic or endothermic)

The dissolution of sample B is ____________________(Exothermic or endothermic)
Note:
Sodium hydroxide, ammonium nitrate, glucose, calcium oxide etc. may be given as the
sample.
339 Practicals

www.tntextbooks.in
5. T E S T I N G T H E S O L U B I L I T Y O F T H E S A L T
Aim:
To test the solubility of the given salt based on the saturation and un saturation
of the solution at a given temperature.
Principle:
A solution in which no more solute can be dissolved in the solvent at a given temperature is
called saturated solution. If the solvent can dissolve more solute than what is present, the solution is
called unsaturated solution.
Materials Required:
A 250 ml beaker, a Stirrer, sufficient quantity of distilled water, 100 ml measuring jar, table salt
in three packets weighing as 25g, 11g, and 1g.
Procedure:
In a 250ml beaker ,pour 100 ml water using measuring jar. To this water add table salt (25 g)
from first packet. stir the content very well. Add the next packet containing 11 g salt followed by
constant stirring . Now add the third packet containing 1 g salt . Record your observations.
Observation:
S. No Amount of salt added Observation [Salt Inference [unsaturated/
dissolved/undissolved] saturated/super saturated]
1
2
3
Result: From the above observation, it is inferred that the amount of salt required for saturation is
_______ g
6. T E S T I N G T H E W A T E R O F H Y D R A T I O N O F S A L T
Aim:
To check whether the given sample of salt possesses 'Water of Hydration' or
not. To verify the presence of water molecules in the given hydrated salt .
Principle:
Water of crystallization or water of hydration is the phenomenon shown by certain salts in
which water molecules are present inside the crystals are responsible for their colour and geometry.
e.g. Crystalline copper sulphate CuSO4.5H2O
Materials Required: A pinch of crystalline copper sulphate in a test tube, tongs, spirit lamp.

www.tntextbooks.in
Procedure:
A pinch of crystalline copper sulphate taken in a test
tube and heated for sometime. Water droplets are seen on
the inner walls of the test tube. This shows that the given salt
contains water of crystallization. If the above observation is
not noticed for the given salt, the water of hydration is absent.
Result:
In the given sample of salt, Water of crystallization / hydration is
A) Present
B) Absent
7. T E S T T H E G I V E N S A M P L E F O R T H E P R E S E N C E O F
ACID OR BASE
Aim:
To identify the presence of an acid or a base in a given sample.
Materials Required:
Test tubes, test tube stand, glass rod, phenolphthalein, methyl orange, sodium
carbonate salt and the given sample.
Principle:
In acid medium, In Base medium,
(a) Phenolphthalein is colourless (a) Phenolphthalein is pink in colour
(b) Methyl orange is pink in colour (b) Methyl orange is yellow in colour
(c) Sodium carbonate gives brisk effervescence. (c) Sodium carbonate does not give brisk
effervescence.
Procedure:
Observation Inference
S. No Experiment
(Colour change) (Acid / Base)
1 Take 5ml of the test solution in a a) No change in colour. a) Presence of acid
test tube and add a few drops of b) S olution Turns pink in colour b) Presence of base
Phenolphthalein in it.
2 Take 5ml of the test solution in a test a) SolutionTurns pink in colour a) Presence of acid
tube and add a few drops of Methyl b) S olutionTurns yellow in colour b) Presence of base
orange in it.
3 Take 5ml of the test solution in a a) Brisk effervescence occurs. a) Presence of acid
test tube and add a pinch of sodium b) No brisk effervescence. b) Presence of base
carbonate salt.
Result: The given test solution contains _____________ (acid / base).
341 Practicals

www.tntextbooks.in
B I O-B O T A N Y
8. P H O T O S Y N T H E S I S-T E S T T U B E
A N D F U N N E L E X P E R I M E N T(D E M O N S T R A T I O N)
Aim:
To prove that oxygen is evolved during photosynthesis.
Materials required:
Test tube, funnel, beaker, pond water and Hydrilla plant.
Procedure:
1. Take a few twigs of Hydrilla plant in a beaker containing pond water.
2. Place an inverted funnel over the plant.
3. Invert a test tube filled with water over the stem of the funnel.
4. Keep the apparatus in the sunlight for few hours.
Test tube
Beaker
Funnel
Hydrilla
Plant
Observation:
After one hour, it is noted that water gets displaced down from the test tube.
Inference
During photosynthesis, oxygen is evolved as a by-product. Gas bubbles liberated from the
Hydrilla plant reach the top of the test tube and it displaces the water downwards. Take the test
tube and keep the burning stick near the mouth of the test tube. Increased flame will appear.
Hence, it is proved that oxygen is evolved during photosynthesis.

www.tntextbooks.in
9. P A R T S O F A F L O W E R
Aim:
To dissect and display the parts of the given flower and observe the Calyx, Corolla,
Androecium and Gynoecium. Draw labelled sketches.
Materials Required:
Flower, needle and paper
Procedure:
With the help of the needle dissect the different whorls of the flower
Floral Parts:
Calyx
Corolla } Accessory organ

Androecium
Gynoecium
-
-
Male part of the flower
Female part of the flower } Reproductive organ
Observation:
Draw and label the parts of the flower.
343 Practicals

www.tntextbooks.in
10. M E N D E L'S M O N O H Y B R I D C R O S S
Aim:
To study the monohybrid cross by using model / picture / photograph. To find out the
phenotypic ratio and genotypic ratio in pea plant using checker board
Note: Depict parental generation and the gametes using colour chalk pieces
Definition:
Cross involving one pair of contrasting characters is called monohybrid cross.
Procedure:
1. Pure breeding tall plant is crossed with pure breeding dwarf plant.
2. All the F1 hybrid plants were tall (Tt)
3. Selfing the F1 hybrid plants resulted in tall and dwarf plants in F2 generation.
(Pure tall) (Dwarf )
Parents: TT tt
Gametes: T t
F1 Monohybrid Tt (Heterozygous tall)

selfing
Tt × Tt
T t
F2 generation:
T TT Tt
tall tall
t Tt tt
tall dwarf
Result:
Phenotypic ratio = Tall - 3 : Dwarf - 1
Genotypic ratio = Pure Tall - 1 : Hybrid Tall - 2 : Pure Dwarf - 1

www.tntextbooks.in
11. O B S E R V A T I O N O F T R A N S V E R S E S E C T I O N
O F D I C O T S T E M A N D D I C O T R O O T
Aim:
To observe transverse section (T.S) of Dicot Stem / Dicot Root from permanent slides.
Observation:
A. The given slide is identified as T.S of Dicot Stem
Epidermal hair
Cuticle
Reasons
Epidermis
(i) Vascular bundles are arranged in a ring. Collenchyma
Chlorenchyma
Parenchyma
(ii) Conjoint, collateral, endarch and open
vascular bundle. Endodermis
(iii)
Ground tissued differentiated into Phloem
Cambium
cortex, endodermis, pericycle and pith.
Xylem
(iv)
3 to 6 layer of collenchymas tissues
present in hypodermis. Pith
Observation:
B. The given slide is identified as T.S of Dicot Root
Reasons Root hair
Piliferous layer
(i) Vascular bundle are radial
(ii) Xylem is exarch and Tetrarch Cortex
(iii)
Casparian strips and passage cells are
present in endodermis Passage cells
Endodermis
Phloem
(iv) Cortex is made up of parenchymatous cells
Pericycle
Xylem
Casparian strip
345 Practicals

www.tntextbooks.in
B I O-Z O O L O G Y
12. O B S E R V A T I O N O F M O D E L S-H U M A N
HEART AND HUMAN BRAIN
Identification of longitudinal section (L.S) of the human heart.
Aim:
To observe and draw a labelled sketch of L.S of human heart and describe the structure.
Materials Required:
Model showing the L.S of human heart
Observation:
The given model is identified as L.S. of human heart
1. Th
e human heart has four chambers. It is
Superior
made up of two auricles and two ventricles vena cava
Aorta
Pulmonary artery
2. Th
e auricles are separated by interauricular Pulmonary vein
septum and ventricles are separated by Right atrium

Left atrium
Mitral valve
interventricular septum. It prevents the Pulmonary Aortic valve
valve
mixing of oxygenated and deoxygenated Tricuspid valve
Left ventricle
blood. Right ventricle

3. T
ricuspid valve - It is located between the
right auricle and the right ventricle
4. Bicuspid valve - It is located between the left auricle and the left ventricle
5. The heart is covered by a protective double walled membrane called pericardium
6. The heart pumps blood to all parts of the body.
Identification of L.S of the human brain.
Aim:
To observe and draw a labelled sketch of L.S of human brain and comment on it
Materials Required
Model showing the L.S of human brain

www.tntextbooks.in
Identification:
The given model is identified as L.S. of human brain
1. The brain is enclosed in the cranial cavity Corpus callosum
Cerebrum
2. It is the controlling centre of all the body Ventricles
activities. Hypothalamus
3. It is covered by three connective tissue Pituitary gland Midbrain

membrane or meninges: Duramater Pons
Cerebellum
Arachnoid membrane and Piamater Medulla Brain ﬆem
4. The human brain is divided into three parts namely forebrain, midbrain and hindbrain
13. I D E N T I F I C A T I O N O F B L O O D C E L L S
Aim:
Identification of blood cells (Red blood cells and white blood cells). To draw a neat labelled
diagram and write a note on the blood cells identified.
Materials Required
Permanent prepared slides of blood cells.
Identification:
The given slide is identified as Red blood cells

1. They are biconcave and disc shaped.
2. They are also known as erythrocytes
3. Mature mammalian RBC’s do not have nucleus.
4. Haemoglobin is a respiratory pigment which gives red colour.
5. It transports oxygen from lungs to tissues and carbon- dioxide from tissues to lungs
The given slide is identified as White blood cells

1. WBC’s are colourless and they have nucleus.
2. T
hey are also known as
Leucocytes
3. T
hey show amoeboid
movements.
4. Th
ey fight against germs and other foreign bodies and thus protect the body from
microbial infections and diseases.
5. Th
ere are five different types of WBC namely Neutrophils, Eosinophils, Basophils,
Lymphocytes and Monocytes
347 Practicals

www.tntextbooks.in
14. I D E N T I F I C A T I O N O F E N D O C R I N E G L A N D S
Aim:
To identify the endocrine gland, its location, hormone secreted and functions - Thyroid gland
and Pancreas
Materials Required:
1. Endocrine glands – (a) Thyroid gland (b) Pancreas – Islets of Langerhans

2. Any one endocrine gland should be flag labelled.
For the purpose of flag labelling a model / a chart / photograph showing all endocrine glands
should be used. (Mark the endocrine glands mentioned for the practical)
Identification:
Identify the flagg labelled endocrine gland,
Hypothalamus
write its location, the hormones secreted and its
Pituitary gland
functions.
Pineal gland
Thyroid
gland
Thymus
Pancreas
Ovary Adrenal
(in female) glands
Testis
(in male)
(a) Thyroid gland
Identification: The flag labelled endocrine gland is identified as Thyroid gland
Location: Thyroid gland is a bilobed gland located in the neck region on either side of the
trachea.
Hormones secreted: Triiodothyronine (T3) and Thyroxine (T4)
Functions of Hormones:
1. Thyroid hormones increases the basal metabolic rate (BMR).
2. It increases the body temperature.
3. It regulates metabolism

www.tntextbooks.in
4. It is required for normal growth and development

5. It is also known as personality hormone.
6. D
eficiency of thyroxine results in simple goiter, myxoedema (in adults) and cretinism
(in children).
7. Excess secretion causes Grave’s diseases.
(b) Pancreas – Islets of Langerhans
Identification:
The flag labelled endocrine gland is identified as Islets of Langerhans in the Pancreas.
Location:

Islets of Langerhans are seen embedded in the pancreas which is located in the abdominal
region.
Hormones secreted:
1. α cells secrete glucagon
2. β cells secrete insulin
Functions of Hormones:
1. Insulin converts glucose into glycogen and stores it in liver and muscles.
2. Glucagon converts glycogen into glucose.
3. I nsulin and glucagon maintain the blood sugar level (80 – 120 mg/dl) by their antagonistic
function.
4. Decrease in insulin secretion causes diabetes mellitus.
349 Practicals

www.tntextbooks.in
GLOSSARY
Aqueous - நீர்க்கரைசல்
Average Atomic mass - சராசரி அணுநிறை
Artificial transmutation - செயற்கை மாற்றுத் தனிமமாக்கல் முறை
Anemia - இரத்தச�ோகை
Addiction - அடிமையாதல்
Apical dominance - நுனி ஆதிக்கம்
Abscission - உதிர்தல்
Analogous organs - செயல் ஒத்த உறுப்புகள்
Atom Bomb - அணுகுண்டு
Alternating current - மாறுதிசை மின்னோட்டம்
Audible sound - செவியுணர் ஒலி
Apparent change - த�ோற்ற மாறுதல்
Carcinogens - புற்று ந�ோயக் காரணி
Cerebrospinal fluid - மூளை தண்டு வட திரவம்
Crop - தீனிப்பை
Controlled chain reaction - கட்டுப்படுத்தப்பட்ட த�ொடர்வினை
Ductility - கம்பியாக நீட்டுதல்
Deliquescent substance - நீர் ஈர்த்து கரையும் ப�ொருள்
Dwarfism - குள்ளத் தன்மை
Dormancy - தூங்கு நிலை அல்லது ஓய்வு நிலை
Dihybrid cross - இரு பண்பு கலப்பு
Diastema - பல் இடைவெளி
Diaphragm - உதரவிதானம்
Dispersion - நிறப்பிரிகை
Ethnobotany - தாவர த�ொடர்பியல்
Earthing - புவியிணைப்பு
Electric potential - மின்னழுத்தம்
Equilibrant - எதிர் சமனி
Functional group - வினைச் செயல் த�ொகுதி
Froth floatation - நுரை மிதப்பு முறை
Fossils - புதை உயிர் படிமம்
Goitre - முன்கழுத்துக் கழலை
Gigantism - அசுரத்தன்மை
Green Revolution - பசுமை புரட்சி
Genetic Engineering - மரபுப் ப�ொறியியல்
Genotype - மரபு வகை
Geotropism - புவிஈர்ப்பு சார்பு
Hard soap - வன் ச�ோப்பு
Hygroscopic substance - நீர் ஈர்க்கும் ப�ொருள்
Homozygous - ஒத்த கருநிலை
Homologous organs - அமைப்பு ஒத்த உறுப்புகள்
Hermaphrodite - இருபால் உயிரி
Heterodont - மாறுபட்ட பல்லமைப்பு
Hydogen bomb - ஹைட்ரஜன் குண்டு
Hyper meteropia - தூரப்பார்வை
Impulsive - உந்து விசை
Infrasonic sound - குற்றொலி
Mass percentage - நிறை சதவீதம்
Medulla oblongata - முகுளம்
Mutation - சடுதி மாற்றம்
Molds - பூசணங்கள்
10th Std Science 350
10th_Glossary.indd 350 11-01-2020 14:41:46

www.tntextbooks.in
Menarche - பருவமடைதல்
Myopia - கிட்டப்பார்வை
Non- conventional energy resource - மரபு சாரா ஆற்றல் வளங்கள்
Non Aqueous - நீரிலி கரைசல் அல்லது நீரற்ற கரைசல்
Neurotransmitters - நரம்புணர்வு கடத்திகள்
Natural radioactivity - இயற்கை கதிரியக்கம்
Nuclear fusion - அணுக்கரு இணைவு
Nuclear fission - அணுக்கரு பிளவு
Nuclear reactor - அணுக்கரு உலை
Oncology - புற்றுந�ோயியல்
Pacemaker - இதய இயக்கம் சீராக்கி
Phagocytic - ந�ோயணுஉண்ணி / செல்விழுங்கி
Parthenocarpic fruits - கருவுறாக் கனிகள்
Plastids - கணிகங்கள்
Plant breeding - தாவர பயிர்ப் பெருக்கம்
Polyploidy - பன்மயம்
Parturition - குழந்தைப் பிறப்பு
Placenta - தாய் சேய் இணைப்புத் திசு
Redox reaction - ஆக்சிஜனேற்ற ஒடுக்க வினை
Relative molecular mass - ஒப்பு மூலக்கூறு நிறை
Renewable energy - புதுப்பிக்கத் தக்க வளம்
Rehabititation centre - மறுவாழ்வு மையம்
Response - துலங்கல்
Reflex action - அனிச்சைச் செயல்
Respiratory Quotient - சுவாச ஈவு
Radioactivity - கதிரியக்கம்
Refraction - ஒளி விலகல்
Resolving power - பிரிதிறன்
Resistivity - மின்தடை எண்
Rarefactions - நெகிழ்வுகள்
Soft soap - மென் ச�ோப்பு
Saturated solution - தெவிட்டிய கரைசல்
Super saturated solution - அதி தெவிட்டிய கரைசல்
Solubility - கரைதிறன்
Septum - தடுப்புச் சுவர்
Social forestry - சமுதாயக் காடுகள்
Stomata - இலைத்துளை
Stem cell - மூலச் செல்
Suckers - ஒட்டு உறிஞ்சிகள்
Segments - கண்டங்கள்
Sanguirorous - இரத்த உறிஞ்சிகள்
Softy measures - பாதுகாப்பு நடவடிக்கைகள்
Stellar energy - விண்வெளி ஆற்றல்
Spectrum - நிறமாலை
Scattering - ஒளிச்சிதறல்
Short circuit - குறுக்குத் தடச்சுற்று
Un saturated solution - தெவிட்டாத கரைசல்
Uncontrolled Chain Reaction - கட்டுப்பாடற்ற த�ொடர்வினை
Umbilical cord - த�ொப்புள் க�ொடி
Uterus - கருப்பை
Ultrasonic sound - மீய�ொலி
Vapour density - ஆவி அடர்த்தி
Vestigial organs - எச்ச உறுப்புகள்
Wobble - தள்ளாட்டம்
Zygote - கருவுற்ற முட்டை
351 Glossary
10th_Glossary.indd 351 11-01-2020 14:41:46

www.tntextbooks.in
Science – Class X
List of Authors and Reviewers
Domain Experts
Dr. T. V. Venkateswaran, Scientist, Content Readers
Department of Science and Technology, Vigyanprasar, Delhi. Dr.V. Ranganathan,
Dr. Sultan Ahamed Ismail, Scientist, District Education Officer (Retd.), Salem.
Eco Science Research Foundation, Chennai. Dr.S. Manohar,
Prof. Rita John, Professor and Head ADPC, Samagraha Siksha, Salem.
Dept. of Theroetical Physics, University of Madras, Chennai. Deepak M.Chauhan, P.G.Asst. (Retd),
Dr. Boopathy Rajendran, Deputy Director Holy Cross Mat.HSS, Salem.
Directorate of Elementary Education Chennai. B.Dhandapani, P.G.Asst.,
Dr. V. Sivamadhavi, AssociateProfessor, GHSS, Painganadu, Thiruvarur.
Department of Physics,Bharathi Women’s College, Chennai. S. Balasubramanian, P.G.Asst.,
Dr. T. S. Subha, Associate Professor and Head, GHSS, Murungapatti, Salem.
Dept.of Botany, Bharathi Women’s College, Chennai. V.Govindasamy, P.G.Asst.,
Dr. R. Saravanan, Assistant Professor, Neelambal Subramaniam HSS,Suramangalam, Salem.

PG & Research Department of Zoology,
Dr.Ambedkar Govt.Arts College, Vyasarpadi, Chennai.
Academic Incharge
Dr. Vanitha Daniel, Principal
Dr. G. Ramesh, Assistant Professor, DIET, Nagapattinam.
PG & Research Department of Chemistry,
Dr.Ambedkar Govt. Arts College, Vyasarpadi, Chennai. Academic Coordinators
P. Nirmala Devi, B.T.Assistant,
Authors GHS, Kalaiyur, Ramanathapuram.
Dr. R. Saravanan, Assistant Professor, Dr. K. Chinthaniyalan, B.T.Assistant,
PG & Research Department of Zoology, GHS, Periyar Nagar, Nandhambakkam, Kanchipuram.
Dr. Ambedkar Govt. Arts College, Vyasarpadi, Chennai.
Dr. P. Priya, Assistant Professor,
PG & Research Department of Zoology, Art and Design Team
Pachiyappa’s College, Chennai. Layout
S. Arasu, P. G. Assistant (Chemistry), Yogesh B
St.Patrick’s Anglo Indian HSS, Adyar, Chennai.
Adison Raj. A
F. Davin Lalitha Mary, P.G.Assistant (Botany),
Christ King Girls HSS, East Tambaram, Chennai. Gopinath. R
K. Narayanguru, P.G.Assistant (Physics), Selvakumar M
GHSS, Vadakadu, Pudukkottai. Adaikkala Stephen. S
B. Rajarathinam, P.G.Assistant (Physics), Santhiyavu Stephen
GHSS, Kodikkalpalayam, Thiruvarur.
Illustrator
V. Manikandan, P.G.Assistant (Physics),
GHSS, Thamaraipalayam, Erode. Gopu Rasuvel, Muthukumar R,
Sasi Kumar K, Prabhakar N, Vinoth Kumar
R. Sakthivel, P.G.Assistant,
GHSS, Aanai Kuppam, Thiruvarur. Wrapper Design
S. Amutha, P.G.Assistant, Kathir Arumugam
GHSS, Kalanivasal, Pudukottai.
In-House QC
T. Raja. P.G.Assistant,
GHSS, Varusanadu, Theni. Arun Kamaraj P, C. Jerald Wilson
R. Ramyadevi, B.T.Assistant , Rajesh Thangappan
GHSS, Medavakkam, Kanchipuram.
Co-ordination
M. Boominathan, B.T.Assistant,
S.K.T.Gandhi HS. Rayavaram, Pudukottai. Ramesh Munisamy
A. Sathish Kumar, B.T.Assistant,
GHSS, Rajendra Nagar, Theni. Typist
M. Sathya, Chennai
A. Chinnaraj, B.T.Assistant,
GHSS, Sillamarathupatti, Theni. ICT Coordinator
V. R. Palanikumar, B.T.Assistant, S. Indumathi, SGT,
Raja Sethupathy GBHSS, Paramakudi, Ramanathapuram. PUMS, Pudukottai Dist.
V. Jayachandran, B.T.Assistant,
GHSS, Kallavi, Krishnagiri. C. Prabakaran, SGT,
PUMS, Thiruvarur Dist.
S. Venkatraman, B.T.Assistant,
GHS, Sengalipuram, Thiruvarur. Q.R CODE.
R. Sakthivel, B.T.Assistant, A. Devi Jesintha, B.T,
GHS, Sellappanpettai, Thanjavur. G.H.S, N.M. Kovil, Vellore.
S. Mohan Babu, B.T.Assistant, M. Saravanan, B.T,
GHSS, Veerapandi, Salem. G.G.H.S.S, Puthupalayam, Vazhapadi, Salem.
S. C. Selvathangam, B.T.Assistant, M. Murugesan, B.T,
GHS, Mannivakkam, Kanchipuram. Pums. Pethavelankottagam, Muttupettai, Thiruvarur.
P. Nirmala Devi, B.T.Assistant,
GHS, Kalaiyur, Ramanathapuram.
Dr. K.Chinthaniyalan, B.T.Assistant,
GHS, Periyar Nagar, Nandhambakkam, Kanchipuram. This book has been printed on 80 G.S.M.
S. Surenderan, Computer Teacher, Elegant Maplitho paper.
GHS, Maathavalaayam, Kaniyakumari Dist. Printed by offset at:
Acknowledgement.indd 352 11-01-2020 15:44:54

Std10 Science EM WWW - Tntextbooks.in

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Std10 Science EM WWW - Tntextbooks.in

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Std10 Science EM WWW - Tntextbooks.in

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

www.tntextbooks.

A Publication under Free Textbook Programme of Government of Tamil Nadu

Department of School Education

Untouchability is Inhuman and a Crime

Front page.indd 1 10-01-2020 11:38:53

Government of Tamil Nadu

First Edition - 2019

(Published under New syllabus)

NOT FOR SALE

State Council of Educational

Printing & Publishing

Tamil NaduTextbook and

Front page.indd 2 10-01-2020 11:38:53

This book is developed in a holistic approach which inculcates

This book has 23 units.

How to get connected to QR Code?

Front page.indd 3 10-01-2020 11:38:53

Engineering Courses B.E. / B.Tech Medical Course Paramedical Diploma / UG

 Aeronautical Engineering  MBBS – Allopathy  Nursing

Front page.indd 4 10-01-2020 11:38:53

Road ahead after 12th ...

B.Sc., Courses Commerce Courses Law Courses

 B.Sc. Physics  CA – Chartered Accountant  LLB

JOB / Post Graduation

Front page.indd 5 10-01-2020 11:38:53

Unit Title Page No. Month

1 Laws of Motion 1 June

3 Thermal Physics 32 August

6 Nuclear Physics 74 November

7 Atoms and Molecules 91 June

8 Periodic Classification of Elements 106 July

9 Solutions 124 August

10 Types of Chemical Reactions 137 October

11 Carbon and its Compounds 155 November

12 Plant Anatomy and Plant Physiology 173 June

E - book Assessment DIGI links

Front page.indd 6 10-01-2020 11:38:53

Unit Title Page No. Month

13 Structural Organisation of Animals 187 June

16 Plant and Animal Hormones 229 August

17 Reproduction in Plants and Animals 243 August

18 Genetics 261 September

19 Origin and Evolution of Life 274 October

20 Breeding and Biotechnology 286 October

21 Health and Diseases 300 November

22 Environmental Management 315 November

23 Visual Communication 329 December

Front page.indd 7 10-01-2020 11:38:53

Front page.indd 8 10-01-2020 11:38:53

up or slows down or changes its direction.

10th_Science_Unit-1.indd 1 11-01-2020 11:52:09

Mechanics is the branch of physics that deals with

According to Aristotle a Greek Philosopher Activity 1

10th_Science_Unit-1.indd 2 11-01-2020 11:52:09

change its state of motion is called inertia

1.4.3 Types of forces

10th_Science_Unit-1.indd 3 11-01-2020 11:52:10

Table 1.1 Action of forces

Action of forces Diagram Resultant force (Fnet)

This book has 23 units.

Aeronautical Engineering MBBS – Allopathy Nursing

B.Sc. Physics CA – Chartered Accountant LLB

Examples: 1.8 PRINCIPLE OF

� Mechanics is divided into statics and Formula: The moment of a force M = F × d

2.6 I MAGES FORMED DUE TO 2.7 R EFRACTION THROUGH A

1. Concave lenses are used as eye lens of 2.13